installation manual EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)

Electronic Flight Instrument Systems

(Using DPU/MPU-85H or DPU/MPU-86H)

installation manual

Business and Regional Systems

Business and Regional Systems
400 Collins Road NE
Cedar Rapids, IA 52498
319.295.1000

!

"## $#

% %

&'(()&'*+','*-(-.+./(&'+0(11(-.++21).341'('15'41)'0(&'
'6-0(-+73+218

')20'./7'+'51/.53()&+7'(,.).123+(.0-+71').123+-+(&-0'*-(-.+47'+239'5+*
1.2()&+7'0&:'.))255'*.+95.*90-0+*5'+.(-+*-:-*211-*'+(-/-'*84')-/-)5':-0'*
5'0./('6(+*-1120(5(-.+05'-*'+(-/-'*991);950-+(&'357-+./(&'441-)91'47'8 11
)&+7'0&:'9''+-341'3'+('*-+3++'5(&(5'(-+0-+/.53(-.+5'<2-5'*(.0'5:-)''51-'5
'<2-43'+(3.*'108

=5(-)215)&+7'0(.+.('-+)12*'**-(-.+1-+/.53(-.+4'5(-+-+7(.)255'+(5'<2-5'3'+(0/.5(&'
*))..1-+7/+-+(&'! $3.2+(0+*-+/.53(-.+4'5(-+-+7(.>""0((20=!=!
0(545'<2-5'3'+(08!4*('*.2(1-+'+*3.2+(-+7*-75305'10.-+)12*'*8

&-0+','*-(-.+*.'0+.(-+)12*').4-'0./(&'0'5:-)'9211'(-+00+*0'5:-)'-+/.53(-.+1'(('50
0-002'*/.5(&-0'<2-43'+(8 1-0(-+7./110'5:-)'9211'(-+0+*0'5:-)'-+/.53(-.+1'(('50
-002'*(.*('-0.+(&'+','*-(-.+./(&'9211'(-+00')(-.+(-(1'47'8'3.:'+0+*0/5.3
.25.1*'*-(-.++***(&'3(.(&'9211'(-+00')(-.+./.25+','*-(-.+8-0)5*(&'5'3-+*'5./
(&'.1*'*-(-.+8

=! =

EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)
Electronic Flight Instrument Systems
(Using DPU/MPU-85H or DPU/MPU-86H)

installation manual

This publication includes:

General Information 523-0773948

Installation 523-0773949
Operation 523-0773950
Theory of Operation 523-0773951
Maintenance 523-0773952
Bulletins 523-0773953

Business and Regional Systems

Rockwell Collins, Inc.
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
Printed in the United States of America 523-0773947-00311A
© 1982-1999 Rockwell Collins, Inc.
3rd Edition, 12 May 1999

WARNING

INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS

This document may contain information subject to the International Traffic in Arms
Regulation (ITAR) or the Export Administration Regulation (EAR) of 1979 which may
not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the
United States without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the ITAR or EAR
may be subject to a penalty of up to 10 years imprisonment and a fine of up to
$1,000,000 under 22 U.S.C.2778 of the Arms Export Control Act of 1976 or section
2410 of the Export Administration Act of 1979. Include this notice with any reproduced
portion of this document.

CAUTION

The material in this publication is subject to change. Before attempting any

maintenance operation on the equipment covered in this publication, verify that
you have complete and up-to-date publications by referring to the applicable
Publications and Service Bulletin Indexes.

SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

© 1982 through 1999 Rockwell Collins, Inc.

All Software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.

We welcome your comments concerning this publication. Although every effort

has been made to keep it free of errors, some may occur. When reporting a
specific problem, please describe it briefly and include the publication part
number, the paragraph or figure number, and the page number.
Send your comments to: Publications Department MS 106-124
Business and Regional Systems
Rockwell Collins, Inc.
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498
or by Internet E-Mail to:
[email protected]
GENERAL ADVISORIES

Warning

Service personnel are to obey standard safety precautions, such as wearing safety glasses, to prevent
personal injury while installing or doing maintenance on this unit.

Warning

Use care when using sealants, solvents and other chemical compounds. Do not expose to excessive heat or
open flame. Use only with adequate ventilation. Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors and avoid prolonged
contact with skin. Observe all cautions and warnings given by the manufacturer.

Warning

Remove all power to the unit before disassembling it. Disassembling the unit with power connected is
dangerous to life and may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.

Warning

This unit may have components that contain materials (such as beryllium oxide, acids, lithium, radioactive
material, mercury, etc) that can be hazardous to your health. If the component enclosure is broken, handle
the component in accordance with OSHA requirements 29CFR 1910.1000 or superseding documents to
prevent personal contact with or inhalation of hazardous materials. Since it is virtually impossible to
determine which components do or do not contain such hazardous materials, do not open or disassemble
components for any reason.

Warning

This unit exhibits a high degree of functional reliability. Nevertheless, users must know that it is not
practical to monitor for all conceivable system failures and, however unlikely, it is possible that erroneous
operation could occur without a fault indication. The pilot has the responsibility to find such an occurrence
by means of cross-checks with redundant or correlated data available in the cockpit.

Caution

Turn off power before disconnecting any unit from wiring. Disconnecting the unit without turning power off
may cause voltage transients that can damage the unit.

Caution

This unit contains electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) components and ESDS assemblies that can be
damaged by static voltages. Although most ESDS components contain internal protection circuits, good
procedures dictate careful handling of all ESDS components and ESDS assemblies.

Obey the precautions given below when moving, touching, or repairing all ESDS components and units
containing ESDS components.

a. Deenergize or remove all power, signal sources, and loads used with the unit.
b. Place the unit on a work surface that can conduct electricity (is grounded).
c. Ground the repair operator through a conductive wrist strap or other device using a 470-kΩ or 1-MΩ
series resistor to prevent operator injury.

i
GENERAL ADVISORIES FOR ALL UNITS (CONT)

d. Ground any tools (and soldering equipment) that will contact the unit. Contact with the operator's hand
is a sufficient ground for hand tools that are electrically isolated.
e. All ESDS replacement components are shipped in conductive foam or tubes and must be stored in their
shipping containers until installed.
f. ESDS devices and assemblies that are removed from a unit must immediately be put on the conductive
work surface or in conductive containers.
g. Place repaired or disconnected circuit cards in aluminum foil or in plastic bags that have a layer of, or
are made with, conductive material.
h. Do not touch ESDS devices/assemblies or remove them from their containers until they are needed.

Failure to handle ESDS devices as described above can permanently damage them. This damage can cause
immediate or premature device failure.

ii
EFIS-85/86B(3-13) installation manual 523-0773947

RECORD OF ADDENDUMS

INSERTION
SECTION ED/REV DATE ADDENDUM DATE
DATE/BY
General Information 3/0 12 May 99 None
Installation 3/0 12 May 99 None
Operation 3/0 12 May 99 None
Theory of Operation 3/0 12 May 99 None
Maintenance 3/0 12 May 99 None
Bulletins 3/0 12 May 99 None

NOTE: Addendum sheets should not be removed from a manual unless otherwise specified.
Addendum information will be incorporated in the next edition of the manual.

iii/iv
523-0773948-003118
3rd Edition, 12 May 1999

EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)

Electronic Flight Instrument Systems

General Information
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page

1.1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.1 Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) ............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2.3 Display Select Panel (DSP) for EFIS-85B(3) and -86B(3) Systems............................................................................. 1-2
1.2.4 Display Control Panel (DCP) for EFIS-85B(13) and -86B(13) Systems ...................................................................... 1-2
1.2.5 Course Heading Panel (CHP) for EFIS-85B(13) and -86B(13) Systems ..................................................................... 1-2
1.2.6 Display Processor Unit (DPU)....................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.7 Weather Radar Panel (WXP)......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.8 Multifunction Display (MFD)........................................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.2.9 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) ............................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.4 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED............................................................................................. 1-34
1.4.1 Purpose of Equipment ................................................................................................................................................. 1-34
1.4.2 Related EFIS Equipment Specifications .................................................................................................................... 1-35

NOTICE: This section replaces first revision dated 29 September 1993.

List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue
* Title ......................................... 12 May 99
* List of Effective Pages............. 12 May 99
* 1-1 thru 1-37 ............................ 12 May 99
* 1-38 Blank ............................... 12 may 99

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 28 Jan 87 None

2nd Ed 14 Jun 89 None

1 29 Sep 93 None

3rd Ed 12 May 99 None

section I
general information

1.1 INTRODUCTION

This publication provides all the specifications, installation instructions, principles of operation, and system
maintenance for the Collins EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Electronic Flight Instrument Systems
(EFIS). Refer to Table 1-1 for a list of equipment covered. A typical EFIS system is shown in Figure 1-1.
Note

Throughout this publication the term EFIS is used when referring to the EFIS-85B(3/13) and
EFIS-86B(3/13) systems. Differences between the systems will be explained as necessary.

The information and instructions in this publication are Business and Regional Systems recommendations.
Information in this book does not necessarily correspond with any STC or actual aircraft installation and
wiring. This publication can not be used instead of an STC.

1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPME NT

An EFIS system consists of two or more electronic display units and their associated drive and control units.
The display units use high resolution, black matrix, shadow mask, color cathode ray tubes (crt’s) as the dis-
play medium. The separate equipments may be configured into a variety of system configurations. Typical
configurations consist of three or five crt’s.

The crt’s display the information now found on the mechanical ADI and HSI. Additional information, such as
weather radar, navaid/waypoint locations, airspeed, moving map display, FCS mode annunciation, autopi-
lot/yaw damper engage status, attitude comparator warnings, decision height, checklists, and diagnostic
messages may also be displayed.

1.2.1 Electronic Attitude Dire ctor Indicator (EADI)

The typical EADI presents a multicolor crt display of airplane attitude and flight control system steering
commands, VOR, localizer, TACAN, MAZ, or LNAV deviation, and glideslope, MGP, or preselected altitude
deviation. Flight control system mode annunciation, autopilot engage annunciation, attitude sensor annun-
ciation, marker beacon annunciation, radio altitude, decision height set and annunciation, fast-slow devia-
tion or angle-of-attack deviation, indicated airspeed, airspeed trend vector, altitude alert, and excessive ILS
deviation (when Category II configured) are also displayed. The EFD also provides a high-temperature
warning output that can drive an external installer supplied annunciator. This annunciator will illuminate
if the internal temperature of the EFD reaches +95 °C (+203 °F) in still air.

1.2.2 Electronic Horizontal Si tuation Indicator (EHSI)

The typical EHSI presents a multicolor crt display of the airplane horizontal navigation situation. Informa-
tion displayed includes compass heading, selected heading, selected VOR, localizer, MAZ, or LNAV course
and deviation (including annunciation of deviation type), navigation sensor annunciation, digital selected
course/desired track readout, excessive ILS deviation (when Category II configured), heading sensor annun-
ciation, ILS and heading comparator warnings (ILS only if Category II configured), to/from information,

Revised 12 May 1999 1-1

general information 523-0773948

back localizer annunciation, distance to station/waypoint, glideslope, MGP, or VNAV deviation (VNAV not
available when certain statuses of the DSP are used), ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time or wind, course
information and source annunciation from a second navigation sensor, weather radar target alert, waypoint
alert when LNAV or RNAV is the navigation sensor, and a bearing pointer that can be driven by VOR,
LNAV or ADF sensors as selected on the display select panel. The EHSI can also be operated in an approach
format or an enroute format with or without weather radar information included on the display. The EFD
also provides a high-temperature warning output that can drive an external installer supplied annunciator.
This annunciator will illuminate if the internal temperature of the EFD reaches +95 °C (+203 °F) in still air.

1.2.3 Display Select Panel (DS P) for EFIS-85B(3) and -86B(3) Systems

The display select panel provides navigation sensor selection, bearing pointer selection, format selection,
navigation data selection (ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, and wind direction/speed), and the selec-
tion of VNAV (if the airplane has a VNAV system), weather, or second navigation sensor on the EHSI. A DH
SET knob that allows decision height to be set on the EADI is also provided. Additionally, course, course di-
rect to, heading, and heading sync are selected from the DSP. (Display dimming and the start/stop function
for the elapsed timer are controlled by external airframe supplied controls.)

1.2.4 Display Control Panel (D CP) for EFIS-85B(13) and -86B(13) Systems

The display control panel provides navigation sensor selection, EHSI format selection, bearing pointer selec-
tion, and the selection of weather, preset course from a second navigation sensor, or course transfer function
on the EHSI. A DH SET knob that allows decision height to be set on the EADI, and a button for initiating
radio altimeter test is also provided. Dual concentric knobs are provided for EADI and EHSI display dim-
ming. In the 5-tube EFIS system, two DCP’s are required.

1.2.5 Course Heading Panel (C HP) for EFIS-85B(13) and -86B(13) Systems

The course heading panel provides control of the course and heading select functions for the system. The
CHP also provides for selection of the course direct to and heading sync functions. Additionally, ground
speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, and wind direction/speed are selected from the CHP. An ET button for initi-
ating and completing timing functions is also provided. In the 5-tube EFIS system, one CHP-85D or two
CHP-86B’s are required.

1.2.6 Display Processor Unit ( DPU)

The display processor unit provides sensor input processing and switching, the necessary deflection and
video signals, and power for the electronic flight displays. The DPU is capable of driving two electronic flight
displays with different deflection and video signals. For example, an EADI on one display and an EHSI on
the other. The DPU also provides a high temperature warning output that can drive an external installer
supplied annunciator. This annunciator will illuminate if the internal temperature of the DPU reaches
+70 °C (+158 °F) in still air.

1.2.7 Weather Radar Panel (W XP)

The weather radar panel provides MODE control (OFF, STBY, TEST, NORM, WX, and MAP), RANGE se-
lection (10, 25, 50, 100, 200, and 300 nmi), and system operating controls for the display of weather radar in-
formation on the MFD and the EHSI’s when RDR is selected on the MFD and/or the display select panel.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-2

general information 523-0773948

Figure 1-1. EFIS-85B(3/13) Electronic Flight Instrument System.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-3

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

UNITS REQUIRED
COLLINS
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
3-TUBE 5-TUBE

EFIS-85B(3)
DPU-85H Display processor unit 622-7449-00X8 1 2
DSP-85A Display select panel 622-7728-00X6 1 2
EFD-85 Electronic flight display 622-6020-01X5 2 4
MFD-85A Multifunction display 622-7236-0XX4 1 1
MPU-85H Multifunction processor unit 622-7455-00X8 1 1
1 2WXP-85C Weather radar panel 622-7338-00X3 1 1
EFIS-86B(3)
DPU-86H Display processor unit 622-7711-00X8 1 2
DSP-85A Display select panel 622-7728-00X6 1 2
EFD-86 or Electronic flight display 622-6342-01X5 2 4
EFD-86A Electronic flight display 622-6535-0XX5 2 4
MFD-85A Multifunction display 622-7236-0XX4 1 1
MPU-86H Multifunction processor unit 622-7716-00X8 1 1
1 2WXP-85C Weather radar panel 622-7338-00X3 1 1
EFIS-85B(13) and EFIS-86B(13)
Same as EFIS-85B(3) and EFIS-86B(3) except the DSP-85A is replaced with the following:
1CHP-86B Course heading panel 622-6899-00X3 1 72
1CHP-85D Course heading panel 622-6898-00X3 1
1DCP-85E Display control panel 622-6794-00X3 1 2

Note
1All panel lighting is 5 V or 28 V. Connector jumpers are used to select the voltage.
2Panel mounted; optional Dzus mount unit is WXP-85D (622-7580-00X).
3-00X = -001 for black or -002 for gray
4-0XX = -001 and -011 (with thermal switch) for black or -002 and -012 (with thermal switch) for gray. Panel lighting for MFD is 5 V
or 28 V as determined by the interconnect.
5The available EFD’s are:
EFD-85/86A PANEL COLOR MOUNTING TYPE TEMP SW *INCLINOMETER TYPE
-011 Black With ears No Unlighted
-012 Gray With ears No Unlighted
-021 Black With ears Yes Lighted
-022 Gray With ears Yes Lighted
EFD-86 PANEL COLOR MOUNTING TYPE TEMP SW *INCLINOMETER TYPE
-011 Black No ears No Unlighted
-012 Gray No ears No Unlighted
-013 Black With ears No Unlighted
-014 Gray With ears No Unlighted
-021 Black No ears Yes Lighted
-022 Gray No ears Yes Lighted
-023 Black With ears Yes Lighted
-024 Gray With ears Yes Lighted
(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-4

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.

UNITS REQUIRED
COLLINS
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
3-TUBE 5-TUBE

Note

*An inclinometer is a separate element which is mounted on the proper EFD. The available inclinometers are:
INCLINOMETER PART NUMBER EFD COLOR LIGHTING VOLTAGE (AC OR DC)
634-2056-001 -011, -013 Black Unlighted
634-2056-002 -012, -014 Gray Unlighted
634-4320-001 -021, -023 Black 5 V (requires 0.23 A nominal)
634-4320-002 -022, -024 Gray 5 V (requires 0.23 A nominal)
634-4320-003 -021, -023 Black 28 V (requires 0.05 A nominal)
634-4320-004 -022, -024 Gray 28 V (requires 0.05 A nominal)
6DSP-85A: -001, -003, and -103 for black; -002 and -004 for gray; -001 and -002 have VNAV; -003 and -004 are without VNAV; -103
is without WX (weather radar). All lighting is 28 V.
7Can use two CHP-86B units or one CHP-85D.
8DPU-85H/86H and MPU-85H/86H: Service bulletin 33 converts -002 to -003 status.
Mounts are required for each DPU, MPU, and MFD. The available mounts are listed below. The UMT-14/15 does not have a
built-in cooling fan. The UMT-14A/15A has a built-in ac cooling fan; The UMT-14B/15B has a built-in dc cooling fan. The initial dc
in-rush current for the dc fan in the UMT-14B/15B can be as high as 5.0 amperes (A).
TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH
UMT-14 622-6171-001 DPU-85( )/86( )
UMT-14A 622-6901-001 DPU-85( )/86( )
UMT-14B 622-7265-001 DPU-85( )/86( )
UMT-15 622-6172-001 MPU-85( )/86( )
UMT-15A 622-6902-001 MPU-85( )/86( )
UMT-15B 622-7266-001 MPU-85( )/86( )
IMT-300 622-4333-001 MFD-85A
IMT-85 622-6878-001 MFD-85A and WXP-85C
The optional FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module checks the rpm’s of the blower motor used for forced-air cooling. A signal is sent to con-
trol an external annunciator should the rpm’s drop below a certain level. Refer to EFIS-85/86 SIL 1-83 for additional instructions
about system forced-air cooling.
TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH
FMM-85 622-7154-001 Rotron dc blower motor,
(CPN 009-1965-030)
FMM-85 622-7154-002 UMT-14B/15B dc blower motor
(CPN 009-0271-060) Maximum
dc in-rush current can be as
high as 5 A.
The optional ADA-85 Air Data Adapter converts Manchester digital bus air data with discrete valid to CSDB digital bus air data.
One ADA-85 is required for each ADC-80( ) connected to EFIS.
TYPE COLLINS PART NUMBER USED WITH
ADA-85 634-2695-001 ADC-80( )

Revised 12 May 1999 1-5

general information 523-0773948

1.2.8 Multifunction Display (M FD)

The multifunction display is a multicolor crt display unit that mounts in the instrument panel in the space
normally provided for the weather radar indicator. Standard functions displayed by the unit include weather
radar, pictorial navigation map, and page data.

Additional functions are available when the multifunction display is used with a compatible flight manage-
ment system such as the Collins FMS-90. Additional functions available include waypoint definition, display
of multiple waypoints, and remote data.

1.2.9 Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU)

The multifunction processor unit provides sensor input processing and switching and the necessary deflec-
tion and video signals for the multifunction display. The MPU can provide the deflection and video signals to
the EADI and EHSI displays in the event of failures to either or both display processor units. The MPU is
similar to the DPU except the MPU has expanded input/output capabilities for a second set of airplane sen-
sors. The MPU also provides a high temperature warning output that can drive an external installer sup-
plied annunciator. This annunciator will illuminate if the internal temperature of the MPU reaches +70 °C
(+158 °F) in still air.

1.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATI ONS

Refer to Table 1-2 for system specifications that include environmental, physical size, weight, mounting,
cooling, and input power requirements. Table 1-3 provides input specifications and Table 1-4 provides output
specifications for the EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13).

A summary of EFIS system interfaces is listed below by equipment and by signal format.

a. Equipment

EQUIPMENT PRIMARY DATA FORMAT

ALT-50/55, AL-101 Dc analog
ADS-82/85 CSDB
VIR-32 CSDB
DME-42 CSDB
ADF-60A/60B/62 Dc sin/cos or 3-wire synchro
332D-11( ) 3-wire synchro
MC-103/MCS-65 3-wire synchro
FCS-65 Ac/dc analog, discretes, CSDB
FCS-80 Ac/dc analog, discrete
FCS-85 CSDB, discretes
FCS-65 CSDB, ac/dc analog, discretes
LRN-85, FMS-90, VLF, INS/LNS Analog, ARINC 561 digital, discretes, CSDB or ARINC 561
digital plus CSDB
VNI-80B/D CSDB
AOA Dc analog
AHS-85 CSDB
MSI-80F Serial digital
PRE-80 Dc discrete
WXP-85C/D Serial digital

Revised 12 May 1999 1-6

general information 523-0773948

b. Input Signals and Format (Table 1-3)

AC ANALOG DC ANALOG
Roll angle ADF bearing
Pitch angle Radio altitude
AC ANALOG DC ANALOG
Heading Roll steering
Desired track/drift angle Pitch steering Crosstrack deviation
WPT bearing FCS data
ADF bearing AOA or F/S deviation
Attitude
SERIAL DIGITAL DC DISCRETES
ADC data To/from (analog LNAV)
DME distance and ident Sensor flags Sensor modes
VLF/INS/RNV/LNV data EFIS and I/O straps FCS modes
VNAV data CAT II request
DCP/DSP data Localizer mode
Cross-side data DG mode
WXP data ALT alert
FCS modes and data Master warn reset Comparator reset
Attitude/heading/ acceleration
VOR bearing

c. Output Signals and Formats (Table 1-4)

AC ANALOG DC ANALOG
Heading error Lateral deviation
Course datum error
SERIAL DATA DC DISCRETES
DCP/DSP control To/from
FMS-90 WPT load Back course
FCS data Modes/status/flags
Cross-side data Master warn
Comparator warns
CAT II outputs
Overtemperature sensor
DH out
RA test

Revised 12 May 1999 1-7

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-2. EFIS System Specifications.

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

Certification EFIS units are certified to FAA TSO categories as listed below:
TSO DSP-85( ) -C6c,-52a
DCP-85( ) -C6c
CHP-85( )/86( ) -C52a
MFD-85A -C6c, C63b
DPU-85H/86H -C3b, -C4c, C6c, -C34c, -C36c, -C40b, and -C52a
MPU-85H/86H -C3b, -C4c, C6c, -C34c, -C36c, -C40b, and -C52a
EFD-85/86/86A -C3b, -C4c, C6c, -C34c, -C36c, -C40b, and -C52a
Environmental EFIS units are tested to the DO-160A categories as listed below:
D1/A/KS/XXXXXXAZAAA EFD-85/86/86A
MFD-85A DCP-85E/85F/85G/85H CHP-85( )/86( )
D1/A/KS/XXXXXXAAAAA DCP-85A/85B
D1/B/KS/XXXXXXAZAAA DSP-85( )
F2/A/MNO/XXXXXXAZAAA DPU-85H/86H
MPU-85H/86H
Maintenance Requirement On Condition
Temperature and altitude Category D1. Temperature –20 to +55 °C (–4 to +131 °F).
(operating) Altitude –305 to +15 240 m (–1000 to 50 000 ft)
Category F2. Temperature –55 to +70 °C (–67 to +158 °F).
Altitude –305 to +16 764 m (–1000 to 55 000 ft)
Vibration FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE (G LEVEL)
Category KS
5 to 55 Hz 0.02 in double amplitude
55 to 500 Hz 0.5 g peak
500 to 2000 Hz 0.25 g peak
Category MNO
5 to 17 Hz 0.01 in double amplitude
17 to 500 Hz 1.5 g peak
500 to 2000 Hz 1.0 g peak
Explosion Category X. Not required
Waterproofness Category X. Not required
Hydraulic fluid Category X. Not required
Sand and dust Category X. Not required
Fungus Category X. Not required
Salt spray Category X. Not required
Magnetic effect Category A. 1 degree allowable deflection at a distance between 0.3 and 1.0 m
Power input Category Z. High variation +32.2 V dc, low variation +22.0 V dc, emergency low +18Vdc
80V spike
Voltage spikes Category A. 50 spikes/minute at +600 volts peak and –600 volts peak
Audio susceptibility Category A. Sine wave applied to ungrounded power lines. 0.01 to 150 kHz, 2 V peak
Electromagnetic interference Category A
Induced signal susceptibility Paragraph 19.0
Rf susceptibility Paragraph 20.0
Spurious emissions Paragraph 21.0

Revised 12 May 1999 1-8

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-2. EFIS System Specifications.

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

Weight (nominal)
CHP-85D 0.59 kg (1.3 lb)
CHP-86B 0.50 kg (1.1 lb)
DCP-85E 0.91 kg (2.0 lb) (1.14 kg (2.5 lb) for -301/-302)
DPU-85H 6.2 kg (13.6 lb) max. The UMT-14 weighs 0.5 kg (1.2 lb) or UMT-14A/14B weighs 0.95kg
(2.1lb).
DPU-86H 6.3 kg (13.9 lb) max. The UMT-14 weighs 0.5 kg (1.2 lb) or UMT-14A/14B weighs 0.95kg
(2.1lb).
DSP-85A 1.31 kg (2.9 lb)
EFD-85 3.2 kg (7.0 lb)
EFD-86/86A 3.5 kg (7.7 lb)
MFD-85A 4.35 kg (9.6 lb). The mounting tray (IMT-300) weighs 0.18kg (0.4 lb).
MPU-85H 7.4 kg (16.3 lb) max. The UMT-15 weighs 0.68kg (1.5 lb) or UMT-15A/15B weighs 1.18kg
(2.6 lb).
MPU-86H 7.5 kg (16.6 lb) max. The UMT-15 weighs 0.68kg (1.5 lb) or UMT-15A/15B weighs 1.18kg
(2.6 lb).
WXP-85C/85D 0.8 kg (1.8 lb) max
Size (reference)
CHP-85D/86B 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide × 38.1 mm (1.50 in) high × 165.1 mm (6.50 in) deep (measured from
rear of front panel to rear of case)
DCP-85E 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide × 47.62 mm (1.875 in) high × 165.1 mm (6.50 in) deep (measured
from rear of front panel to rear of case)
DPU-85H/86H 1/2-ATR short, full height; 128.9 mm (5.08 in) wide × 194.8 mm (7.67 in) high × 316.7 mm
(12.47 in) deep
DSP-85A 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide × 47.62 mm (1.875 in) high × 203.2 mm (8.00 in) deep (measured
from rear of front panel to rear of case)
EFD-85 131.6 mm (5.18 in) wide × 121.9 mm (4.80 in) high × 248.9 mm (9.80 in) deep (measured
from rear of bezel to rear of case)
EFD-86/86A 157.0 mm (6.18 in) wide × 131.6 mm (5.18 in) high × 259.1 mm (10.20 in) deep (measured
from rear of bezel to rear of case)
MFD-85A 159.5 mm (6.28 in) wide × 120.14 mm (4.730 in) high × 314.4 mm (12.38 in) deep (measured
from rear of bezel to rear of case)
MPU-85H/86H 3/4-ATR short, full height; 195.60 mm (7.70 in) wide × 194.8 mm (7.67 in) high × 316.7 mm
(12.47 in) deep
WXP-85C 158.8 mm (6.25 in) wide × 37.6 mm (1.48 in) high × 176.1 mm (6.93 in) deep (measured from
rear of bezel to rear of case)
WXP-85D 146.1 mm (5.75 in) wide × 47.62 mm (1.875 in) high × 165.1 mm (6.50 in) deep (measured
from rear of front panel to rear of case)
Mounting
CHP-85D/86B Mount equipment on standard 9.52-mm (0.375-in) increment rail spaces on 136.27-mm
(5.365-in) centers per MS25212. Secure unit using two Dzus fasteners.
DCP-85E Mount equipment on standard 9.52-mm (0.375-in) increment rail spaces on 136.27-mm
(5.365-in) centers per MS25212. Secure unit using two Dzus fasteners.
DPU-85H/86H Rack mounted using UMT-14 (CPN 622-6171-001), UMT-14A (CPN622-6901-001), or UMT-
14B (CPN 622-7265-001)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-9

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-2. EFIS System Specifications.

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATION

DSP-85A Mount equipment on standard 9.52-mm (0.375-in) increment rail spaces on 136.27-mm
(5.365-in) centers per MS25212. Secure unit using two Dzus fasteners.
EFD-85 Front or rear mounted using mooring plate (CPN 634-2804-001) or tap panel for 0.164-32
UNC-2A (#8-32) mounting screws per ARINC Specification No 408A.
EFD-86/86A Front mounted using mooring plate (CPN 634-2803-001) or tap panel for 0.190-32 (#10-32)
UNF-2A mounting screws per ARINC Specification No 408A. For rear mounting use moor-
ing plate (CPN 634-2803-001). For EFD-86 (CPN 622-6342-001/002/011/012/021/022),
mount the unit from the front with an instrument clamp (PN 123-5060N-F) obtained from
Dexter-Wilson Corp., Seattle, Washington 98103.
MFD-85A Panel mounted using an IMT-300 Mounting Tray (CPN 622-4333-001). The IMT-300 is
equipped with self-locking nuts and requires four #6-32 UNC-2B flathead screws.
MPU-85H/86H Rack mounted using UMT-15 (CPN 622-6172-001), UMT-15A (CPN622-6902-001), or UMT-
15B (CPN 622-7266-001)
WXP-85C Panel mounted using turnlock fasteners
WXP-85D Mount equipment on standard 9.52-mm (0.375-in) increment rail spaces on 136.27-mm
(5.365-in) centers per MS25212. Secure unit using two Dzus fasteners.
Power input. All units are designed to INPUT CURRENT INPUT CURRENT
use +27.5 V dc (+4.7 V dc, –9.5 V dc). (TYPICAL) (MAX)
Steady-state current requirements UNIT AMPERES AMPERES
are listed to the right.
DCP-85E/CHP-86B 0.2 0.25
DCP-85E/CHP-85D (Refer to the note below.)
DPU-85H/86H 2.4 3.7
DSP-85A 0.2 0.25
EFD (EADI) 2.0 3.6
EFD (EHSI) 1.5 2.7
MPU-85H/86H 3.1 4.6
MFD-85A 1.5 2.3
UMT-14B/15B Mounts 1.5 5.0

Note

The DCP supplies power to the CHP.

Two DCP-85E’s and one CHP-85D require the same current as two DCP-85E’s and two
CHP-86B’s.
Controls with lighting require +5 or 5-V DC LIGHTING 28-V DC LIGHTING
+28 V dc supplied from a dimmer- CURRENT (MAX) CURRENT (MAX)
controlled lighting bus. UNIT AMPERES AMPERES
CHP-85D 0.80 N/A
CHP-86B 0.36 0.12
DCP-85E 1.1 0.3
DSP-85( ) 1.1 0.2
MFD-85A 0.92 0.22
WXP-85C/85D 1.68 0.35
EFD inclinometer 0.23 0.05
Cooling The EFD-85/86( ), MFD-85A, DPU-85H/86H, and MPU-85H/86H require forced-air cooling.
These units are capable of operation for a short time at the elevated operating tempera-
tures specified in the environmental section of this specification without cooling air. How-
ever, operation at these levels is not considered normal. Refer to the installation section for
cooling requirements and blower recommendations.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-10

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

1.0 RADIO ALTITUDE

Radio Altitude, ProLine DPU(P2-6,5) Pro Line Radio Format: 2-wire, dc, single polarity
H, L MPU(P1-6,5)1 Altimeter Analog: –20 to +500 ft, V = 0.02 h + 0.4
MPU(P3-6,5)2 (ALT-50/55) Analog: +500 ft and greater, V = 0.003 (h – 500) + 10.4
Input impedance: 100 kΩ (nom) balanced to gnd
Max common mode voltage: ±40 V dc
Max differential voltage: ±80 V dc
Radio Altitude, ARINC DPU(P2-6,5) Radio Altimeter Format: 2-wire, dc, single polarity
H,L MPU(P1-6,5)1 (AL-101) Analog: –20 to +480 ft, V = 0.02 h + 0.4
MPU(P3-6,5)2 Analog: +480 to +2500 ft, V = 10 ln (h + 20) – 52.1461
Max input voltage: +28 V dc
Input impedance: 100 kΩ (nom) balanced to gnd
Max common mode voltage: ±40 V dc
Max differential voltage: ±80 V dc

Radio Alt Valid DPU(P2-124) Radio Altimeter Format: 1 wire discrete

MPU(P1-124)1 Radio alt valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-124)2 Radio alt invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Input impedance (to gnd): NLT 10 kΩ

Radio Altimeter Type, Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping info.

I/O Straps 7 and 8
2.0 AIR DATA SYSTEM INPUTS
Air Data Information DPU(P2-93,97) Air Data Computer Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
A, B MPU(P1-93,97)1 (ADC-82/85) or Data transfer rate: 12.5 kb/s
MPU(P3-93,97)2 (ADC-80( ) + Input load: NLT 12 kΩ
ADA-85) Words: See below.
WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC
PRESSURE ALT/VALID; BARO ALT/VALID; STRUT SWITCH TEST A0 20
VERTICAL SPEED/VALID; IAS/VALID; ADS VALID; TEST A1 20
TAS/VALID; STRUT SWITCH; TEST A2 20
MACH (displayed)/VALID; MACH (true)/VALID; MACH DISPLAY; TEST A3 10
VERT SPEED BUG/VALID; IAS BUG/VALID; TEST A4 10
SAT/VALID; VMO/MMO/VALID; OVERSPEED WARN/TEST; TEST A6 10
TAT/VALID; PRESELECT ALT/VALID; TEST A7 10
ADC DIAGNOSTICS F3 10

Fast/Slow Deviation DPU(P2-109,144) MSI-80C/80D/80E or Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing

+Slow/Incr, +Fast/Decr MPU(P2-146,143)1 ASI-80D/80F Analog: 1.1 volt/dot
MPU(P2-157,147)2 Zero: at 0 volt
Max common mode voltage: ±17 V dc
Max diff current: ±34 milliamps
Input resistance: NLT 1 kΩ
Note

DPU
P2-109 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-144 = FAST
P2-144 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-109 = SLOW
MPU
P2-146 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-143 = FAST
P2-143 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-144 = SLOW
P2-157 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-147 = FAST
P2-147 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-157 = SLOW

Revised 12 May 1999 1-11

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 AIR DATA SYSTEM INPUTS (Cont)

Fast/Slow Valid DPU(P2-114) MSI-80C/80D/80E or Format: 1 wire discrete
MPU(P1-114)1 ASI-80D/F Fast/slow valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-114)2 Fast/slow invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Input impedance: NLT 10 kΩ

Speed Devn, I/O Straps Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping info.
13 and 23

Airspeed/Trend Vector Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping info.

Enable Strap 27

3.0 ANGLE OF ATTACK

AOA Data +Decr, +Incr DPU(P2-109,144) Aircraft Wiring Format: 2-wire dc polarity reversing
MPU(P2-146,143)1 Analog: 1.1 volt/dot
MPU(P2-157,147)2 Zero: at zero angle
Input impedance: NLT 1 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±17 V
Max diff current: ±34 milliamps

Note

DPU
P2-109 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-144 = DECREASE
P2-144 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-109 = INCREASE
MPU
P2-146 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-143 = DECREASE
P2-143 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-144 = INCREASE
P2-157 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-147 = DECREASE
P2-147 MORE POSITIVE VOLTAGE THAN P2-157 = INCREASE

AOA Valid DPU(P2-114) Aircraft Wiring Valid: +18 to +31 V dc

MPU(P1-114)1 Invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
MPU(P3-114)2 Input impedance: NLT 10 kΩ

4.0 NAVIGATION RECEIVER INPUTS (VOR MUST MEET THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS)
NAV Data DPU(P2-72,76) Navigation Receiver Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
A, B MPU(P1-72,76)1 (VIR-32) Input load: NLT 12 kΩ
MPU(P3-72,76)2 Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

VOR BEARING/VALID; VOR FREQ/VALID; 2/5 TUNE; MARKER BEA- 21 10
CON/SENSITIVITY; ROT MOD FILTER; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
GS DEVIATION/VALID; LOC DEVIATION/VALID; MARKER BEA- 22 10
CON/SENSITIVITY; GLS/NO; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
NAV DIAGNOSTICS F3 10

NAV I/O Straps 10 and Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping info.
24 (VOR port type) and
21 (linear deviation)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-12

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

5.0 DME INPUT

DME Distance Data DPU(P1-154,158) DME Receiver Format: 2-wire, commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
A, B MPU(P2-45,49)1 (DME-42) Data transfer rate: 12.5 kb/s
MPU(P2-48,52)2 Input resistance: NLT 12 kΩ

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

FREQUENCY/VALID; DISTANCE/VALID; SQUITTER/TRACK; DME 25 10
HOLD; TEST
CHANNEL IDENT 25 5
TIME-TO-STATION/VELOCITY/VALID; SQUITTER/TRACK; TEST; 26 5
CHANNEL IDENT
DME IDENT VALID; 27 5
1ST CHAR/VALID;
2ND CHAR/VALID;
3RD CHAR/VALID;
4TH CHAR/VALID;
ANALOG AND 568 DATA;
SQUITTER/TRACK; TEST;
CHANNEL IDENT
DME DIAGNOSTICS F3 5

6.0 ADF INPUT

ADF Bearing, DC DPU(P2-14,18,22) Automatic Direction Format: dc resolver 3-wire sin/cos

SIN,COS, COM MPU(P1-14,18,22)1 Finder Analog: +8 V dc max
MPU(P3-14,18,22)2 (ADF-60A/60B) Load: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V

ADF Bearing, AC DPU (P2-14, 18, 22) Automatic Direction Format: 3-wire reference to gnd
MPU (P1-14, 18, 22)1 Finder Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of bearing angle)
MPU (P3-14, 18, 22)2 (ADF-60A/60B) Zero: at bearing angle = 180 degrees
Load: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V dc
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phased locked to 400-Hz pwr
Phasing: X-to-Y voltage shall be out of phase with the
400-Hz pwr ccw bearing condition.

ADF Valid DPU(P1-90) Automatic Direction Format: 1-wire reference to gnd

MPU(P1-133)1 Finder ADF valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-133)2 (ADF-60A/60B) ADF invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ

ADF Reference H, C DPU (P2-41, 42) NAV Receiver Format: 2-wire ac

MPU (P1-41, 42)1 Sensor Voltage: 26 V ac
MPU (P3-41, 42)2 Freq: 400 Hz
Input resistance: NLT 20 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V max
Max diff voltage: ±200 max

ADF I/O Strap 15 Go to 12.0 in this table for strapping info.

(ADF type)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-13

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.0 FLIGHT DIRECTOR/AUTOPILOT

7.1 Analog Flight Director/Autopilot

FD Valid DPU(P2-143) Flight Control Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-143)1 System (FCS-80/65, FD valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-143)2 FCS-A/B) FD valid: open
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ

FD In View Bias DPU(P2-137) Flight Control Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-137)1 System (FCS-80, FD in view bias: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-137)2 FCS-A/B) FD out of view: open
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ

FD Off DPU(P2-138) External Switch or Format: 1-wire discrete

(Cmd Bars Off) MPU(P1-138)1 Wiring FD on: 0 to +3 V dc
MPU(P3-138)2 FD off: +18 to +31 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ

Pitch Command DPU(P2-1,2) Flight Control Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
+DN, +UP MPU(P1-1,2)1 System Signal Source Analog:
MPU(P3-1,2)2 FCS-80: 150 mV/deg
FCS-65: 150 mV/deg
FCS-A: 120 mV/deg
FCS-B: 50 mV/deg
Zero: at 0 volt
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Max diff voltage: ±20 V

Roll Command DPU(P2-37,38) Flight Control Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
+LT, +RT MPU(P1-37,38)1 System Signal Source Analog:
MPU(P3-37,38)2 FCS-80: 150 mV/deg
FCS-65: 150 mV/deg
FCS-A: 66 mV/deg
FCS-B: 50 mV/deg
Zero: at 0 volt
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Max diff voltage: ±20 V

FCS Reference DPU(P2-9,10) Flight Control Format: 2-wire, ac

H, C MPU(P1-9,10)1 System Voltage: 26 V ac, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-9,10)2 Input resistance: NLT 20 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V
Max diff voltage: ±200 V

Revised 12 May 1999 1-14

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.2 Annunciator Inputs (For Analog Flight Directors/Autopilots)

7.2.1 FCS-80/EFIS-85B/86B(3/13) Mode Annunciators Strap Definition

Annunciators See below FCS-80 Format: 1-wire with respect to gnd

(See below) Annunciator on: gnd
Annunciator off: open
STRAP NO FUNCTION LEGEND COLOR DCP PIN DSP PIN FCS-80 PIN
1 Heading select HDG Green J1-22 J1-10 FGC P3-45
2 Lateral arm Note 1 White J1-5 J1-22 FGC P3-37
3 Lateral capture Note 1 Green J1-21 J1-23 FGC P3-49
4 Approach --- --- J1-4 J1-11 FGC P3-25
5 Dead reckon DR White J1-18 J1-24 FGC P3-33
6 YD disconn gnd YD Note 4 J1-7 APP P1-39
Roll hold --- --- J1-12 APC P2-50
7 HDG hold ROL Green J1-2 J1-25 APC P2-42
8 Glideslope arm GS White J1-23 J1-13 FGC P2-41
9 Glideslope capture GS Green J1-36 J1-16 FGC P2-53
10 VNAV arm VNV White J1-38 J1-15 FGC P2-57
11 VNAV capture VNV Green J1-8 J1-14 FGC P2-45
12 Altitude select ALTS White J1-35 J1-17 FGC P1-60
13 Altitude hold ALT Green J1-42 J1-18 FGC P2-33
14 Mach hold MACH Green J1-24 J1-19 FGC P2-25
15 IAS hold IAS Green J1-3 J1-20 FGC P2-49
16 Vert spd hold VS Green J1-6 J1-21 FGC P2-17
17 Pitch hold PIT Green J1-37 J1-9 FGC P2-4
18 Go around GA (Note 2) Green J1-44 J1-8 FGC P2-13
19 AP transfer ** Note 5 J1-43 J1-7 APC P2-15
20 AP disconn (logic) ** Note 5 J1-20 J1-5 APP P2-10
21 AP disconn gnd ** Note 5 J1-39 J1-4 APP P1-18
22 Mistrim TRIM (Note 3) Yellow J1-40 APC P3-23/43
Altitude track --- --- J1-3 FGC P1-52
23 Altitude capture ALTS Green J1-19 J1-2 FGC P1-56
24 Test --- Note 6 J1-41 J1-1 External sw to gnd
(EFIS test)
Note 1. Lateral arm and capture annunciations reflect the active course selection on the EHSI and will be annunciated per input
strapping and DCP sensor selection.
Note 2. GA appears in the active vertical and lateral mode lines. If a new lateral mode is selected (ie, HDG) that mode replaces GA
in the lateral line. If a new vertical mode is selected, both the vertical and lateral lines are changed.
Note 3. The APC P3-23 is the elevator mistrim annunciator; P2-43 is the aileron mistrim annunciator. These may be wired together
in the interconnect to give same message.
Note 4. The yaw damper status is annunciated as follows:
YD DISCONNECT GROUND LEGEND COLOR
Open YD Green
Gnd YD Yellow flashing*
*The flashing occurs after a disconnect and will flash for five seconds then disappear.
(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-15

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.2.1 FCS-80/EFIS-85B/86B(3/13) Mode Annunciators Strap Definition (Cont)

Note 5. The three autopilot modes (straps 19, 20, 21 marked **) will be annunciated as follows:
DUAL FCS-80
AP DISCONN GND AP DISC (FLASH) AP TRANSFER LEGEND COLOR
Open Open Open AP/L Green
Open Open Gnd AP/R Green
Gnd Gnd Open AP/L Red flashing
Gnd Gnd Gnd AP/R Red flashing
Gnd Open Open AP/L White
Gnd Open Gnd AP/R White
SINGLE FCS-80
AP DISCONN GND AP DISC (FLASH) LEGEND COLOR
Open Open AP Green
Gnd Gnd AP Red flashing
Gnd Open
Note

The flashing occurs after a disconnect and until canceled by flight crew.
The AP DISC (logic) APP P2-10 must be strapped to inhibit the APP flashing. That is APP P2-11 strapped to APP P1-49.
Note 6. In a particular installation, any of these 24 unused inputs to the DCP/DSP should be grounded through the annunciator test
switch to allow the EFIS system to detect failed inputs. With these conditions met and with the test switch applying ground
to strap 24, the results are as follows:
If the test passes then the legend PASS appears in yellow. If the test fails then the legend FAIL appears in yellow.

7.2.2 FCS-65/EFIS-85B(3/13) Mode Annunciators Strap Definition

Annunciators See below FCS-65 Annunciator on: gnd
(See below) Annunciator off: open
Format: 1-wire discrete

STRAP NO FUNCTION LEGEND COLOR DCP PIN DSP PIN FCS-65 PIN
17 Sync SYNC Yellow J1-37 J1-9 Note 3
18 Dual AP Note 1 J1-44 J1-8 Note 3
19 AP transfer Note 1 J1-43 J1-7 Note 3
20 Mistrim TRIM Yellow J1-20 J1-5 FCP J1-29
21 YD disengage Note 2 J1-39 J1-4 FCP J1-47
22 YD engage Note 2 J1-40 J1-3 FCP J1-44
23 AP disengage Note 1 J1-19 J1-2 FCP J1-48
24 AP engage Note 1 J1-41 J1-1 FCP J1-28
Note 1. DUAL FCS-65
AP ENGAGE AP DISENG AP XFER LEGEND COLOR
Gnd Open Open AP/L Green
Gnd Open Gnd AP/R Green
Gnd Gnd Open AP/L Yellow
Gnd Gnd Gnd AP/R Yellow
Open Open Open AP/L White
Open Open Gnd AP/R White
The flashing between engage (green) and disengage (yellow) occurs at disconnect and will flash approximately 5 seconds then
become steady white.
SINGLE FCS-65
AP ENGAGE AP DISENG LEGEND COLOR
Gnd Open AP Green
Gnd Gnd AP Yellow
Open Open
The flashing between engage (green) and disengage (yellow) occurs at disconnect and will flash approximately 5 seconds then
disappear.
(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-16

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.2.2 FCS-65/EFIS-85B(3/13) Mode Annunciators Strap Definition (Cont)

Note 2. DUAL OR SINGLE FCS-65
AP ENGAGE AP DISENG LEGEND COLOR
Gnd Open YD Green
Gnd Gnd YD Yellow
Open Open
The flashing between engage (green) and disengage (yellow) occurs at disconnect and will flash approximately 5 seconds
then disappear.
Note 3. A ground is supplied from an external switch.

7.2.3 FCS-65 Bus Interface

Flight Control Data Primary bus FCS-65 Formats: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus
A,B DPU(P2-15,19) (CSDB)
MPU(P1-15,19)1 Input resistance: NLT 12 kΩ
MPU(P3-15,19)2 Words: See below.
Secondary bus
DPU(P2-3,4)
MPU(P1-3,4)1
MPU(P3-3,4)2

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

GLIDESLOPE EXT/CAP/ARM; NAV-1 CAP/ARM; SPD HOLD; ALT PRE- AA 10
SELECT HOLD/CAP/ARM; APP CAP/ARM; REPORT CODE BAD; ALT
HOLD; IAS HOLD; MACH HOLD; TST; VS; CLI; GO AROUND
PITCH/HOLD; PITCH; ROLL; VNAV CAP/ARM; BC; DR; HEADING SE-
LECTED/HOLD; TRB; XFR; DESCENT; HLF; NAV-2 CAP/ARM; RADIO
COUPLE; OUT-OF-TRIM RUD/AIL/ELE; DISCONNECT YD/AP; TRIM
BAD: NAC TST; V-BAR INVUE; STR VLD;
HDG BUS; R-STR INVUE; P-STR INVUE; AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AB 10
HVY/MED/LIT

Revised 12 May 1999 1-17

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.3 Digital Flight Director/Autopilot

Flight Control Data Primary bus FCS System Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus
A, B DPU(P2-15,19) (FCS-85/86) (CSDB)
MPU(P1-15,19)1 Input resistance: NLT 12 kΩ
MPU(P3-15,19)2 Words: See below.
Secondary bus
DPU(P2-3,4)
MPU(P1-3,4)
MPU(P3-3,4)

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

GLIDESLOPE EXT/CAP/ARM; NAV-1 CAP/ARM; SPD HOLD; ALT PRE- AA 10
SELECT HOLD/CAP/ARM; APP CAP/ARM; REPORT CODE BAD; ALT
HOLD; IAS HOLD; MACH HOLD; TST; VS; CLI; GO AROUND
PITCH/ROLL; PITCH; ROLL; VNAV CAP/ARM; BC; DR; HEADING SE-
LECTED/HOLD; TRB; XFR; DESCENT; HLF; NAV-2 CAP/ARM; RADIO
COUPLE; OUT-OF-TRIM RUD/AIL/ELE; DISCONNECT YD/AP; TRIM
BAD: NAC TST; V-BAR INVUE; STR VLD
HDG BUG; R-STR INVUE; P-STR INVUE; AIRCRAFT WEIGHT AB 10
HVY/MED/LT
ALTITUDE REF/VALID; PITCH STEERING/VALID; ROLL STEER- 2A 10
ING/VALID
CRT ASC II MESSAGES 70 10
VERT SPEED REF/VS REF DISPLAY CMD; IAS REF/IAS REF DISPLAY 72 10
CMD; MACH REF/MACH REF DISPLAY CMD; VS BUG/IAS BUG
FCS DIAGNOSTICS F3 10

EFIS/FCS-85/86 Annunciator Strap Definition

STRAP NO FUNCTION LEGEND* COLOR DCP PIN DSP PIN FCC PIN
22 Aileron mistrim A – – (boxed) Yellow J1-40 J1-3 P1 and P2-48
23 Elevator mistrim – E – (boxed) Yellow J1-19 J1-2 P1 and P2-52
24 Rudder mistrim – – R (boxed) Yellow J1-41 J1-1 P1 and P2-47
*A – (dash) in the LEGEND column indicates an empty space.

Flight Director System (Refer to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.)
I/O Straps 1, 2, and 3

Revised 12 May 1999 1-18

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

8.0 ATTITUDE/HEADING INPUT

8.1 Analog Attitude/Heading

Pitch Data DPU(P2-88,84,92) Vertical Gyro Format: 3-wire synchro

X, Y, Z MPU(P1-88,84,92)1 (332D-11) Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of pitch angle)
MPU(P3-88,84,92)2 Zero: at zero pitch angle
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when in a noseup condition.

Roll Data DPU(P2-89,85,81) Vertical Gyro Format: 3-wire synchro

X, Y, Z MPU(P1-89,85,81)1 (332D-11) Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of bank angle)
MPU(P3-89,85,81)2 Zero: at zero roll angle
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when in a right bank.

Attitude Reference DPU(P2-45,46) Aircraft Wiring Format: 2-wire, ac

H, C MPU(P1-45,46)1 Voltage: 26 V rms, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-45,46)2 Input load: NLT 10 kΩ

Attitude Valid DPU(P2-117) Vertical Gyro Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-117)1 (MC-103/MCS-65) Attitude valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-117)2 Attitude invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ

Heading Data DPU(P2-96,104,100) Magnetic Compass Format: 3-wire synchro

X, Y, Z MPU(P1-96,104,100)1 (MC-103/MCS-65) Analog: +11.8 V rms max, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-96,104,100)2 Zero: at zero heading angle
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when in a right heading.

Heading Reference DPU(P2-60,56) Aircraft Wiring Format: 2-wire, ac

H, C MPU(P1-60,56)1 Voltage: 26 V ac rms, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-60,56)2 Load: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V
Max diff voltage: ±200 V

Heading Valid DPU(P2-118) Magnetic Compass Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-118)1 (MC-103) Heading valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-118)2 Heading invalid: 0 to +3.5 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ

DG Mode DPU(P2-57) Magnetic Compass Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-123)1 (MC-103/MCS-65) DG mode: gnd
MPU(P3-123)2 Slaved: open

Revised 12 May 1999 1-19

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

8.2 Digital Attitude/Heading

Digital Attitude/ DPU(P2-7,11) Attitude/Heading Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus
Heading MPU(P1-7,11)1 System (AHS-85) (CSDB)
A, B MPU(P3-7,11)2 Data transfer rate: 50 kb/s
Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

PITCH RATE (body axis); ROLL RATE (body axis); YAW RATE (body 40 52
axis); DATA VALID; DG MODE; STRUT SWITCH; TEST; SOURCE
IDENT
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (body axis); LATERAL ACCELERA- 41 52
TION (body axis); NORMAL ACCELERATION (body axis); DATA VALID;
DG MODE; STRUT SWITCH; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
ALONG HDG ACCELERATIONS; CROSS HDG ACCELERATIONS; 42 5.2
VERTICAL ACCELERATIONS; DATA VALID: DG MODE; STRUT
SWITCH; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
PITCH ATTITUDE; ROLL ATTITUDE; ATTITUDE VALID; MAGNETIC 43 5.2
HEADING; HEADING VALID; REV MODE; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
MAGNETIC HEADING; ATTITUDE VALID; HEADING VALID; LATI- 47 5.2
TUDE; STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT; MODE 1; DEGREES DIFF
COMPASS CARD SLAVING; SOURCE IDENT
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS F3 5.2
Attitude/Heading I/O (Refer to 12.0 of this table for strapping information.)
Straps 14 and 17.

9.0 VERTICAL NAVIGATION

9.1 Digital Vertical Navigation

Vertical Dev DPU(P2-8,12) Vertical NAV Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus
A, B MPU(P1-8,12)1 Indicator (CSDB)
MPU(P3-8,12)2 (VNI-80B/D) Data transfer rate: 12.5 kb/s
Input resistance: NLT 12 kΩ
Words: See below.

WORDS LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

PITCH CMD/VALID; VERT DEVIATION/VALID; VERT CLR; VNAV B0 10
STATE; FCS VNAV CAP; CAP ALERT; LRU IDENT; DATA IDENT
DISTANCE TO ALT OR TRACK/VALIDS; DISTANCE TO OFF- B1 10
SET/VALID; FCS VNAV SELECT; VNAV STATE CAP; TEST; LRU
IDENT; DATA IDENT
SELECTED VERT ANGLE/VALID; COMPUTED VERT ANGLE/VALID; B2 10
ANGLE MODE ARM; TEST; LRU IDENT; DATA IDENT
ALT AIMPOINT/VALID; VERT SPEED SELECT/VALID; VNAV SCALE B3 10
ENABLE; ELEV CORR; VS SEL MODE ARM; TEST; LRU IDENT; DATA
IDENT
VNI DIAGNOSTICS F3 10

Vertical Navigation (Refer to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.)

I/O Strap 18.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-20

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

10.0 LONG RANGE NAVIGATION (LNV) INPUT

10.1 Analog LNV

LNV Desired DPU(P2-47,48,52) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 3-wire synchro

Course/Track MPU(P1-47,48,52)1 VLF/Omega or INS Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of heading angle)
or DA + TKE MPU(P3-47,48,52)2 Zero: at zero desired course/track or DA + TKE
X, Y, Z Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Max diff voltage: ±20 V Freq/phase: must be phase
locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when in a right heading deviation
condition.
LNV Bearing to DPU(P2-23,27,31) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 3-wire synchro
Waypoint MPU(P1-23,27,31)1 VLF/Omega or INS Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of bearing angle)
X, Y, Z MPU(P3-23,27,31)2 Zero: at zero bearing (heading related)
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±10 V
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when in a right heading deviation
condition.

LNV Crosstrack DPU(P2-150,154) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
Deviation MPU(P1-150,154)1 VLF/Omega or INS Analog: ±850 µA max, 75 µA/dot, 2 dots full scale
+RT, +LT MPU(P3-150,154)2 Zero: at zero deviation
Input resistance: NLT 1 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±200 V
Max diff current: ±10 mA
LNV To/From DPU(P2-149,153) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 2-wire, dc, polarity reversing
+TO, +FROM MPU(P1-149,153)1 VLF/Omega or INS Analog: To: +10 mV and greater
MPU(P3-149,153)2 From: –10 mV and less
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±150 V
Max diff voltage: ±300 V

Remote Data MFD(P1-17,25) FMS-90, VLF/Omega Format: 2-wire, RS-422A serial bus
(Optional) MFD(P1-32,40) or INS Data rate: 22,500 baud ±1%
(H, L) MFD(P1-18,11) Data: alphanumeric character set
MFD(P1-41,33) Input impedance: 120 Ω (nominal)

LNV Valid DPU(P2-157) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-157)1 VLF/Omega or INS HSI WARN valid: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-157)2 HSI WARN invalid: 0 to +3.5 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ

LNV Data LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 6-wire, ARINC 561

VLF/Omega or INS Words: See below.
Data H, L DPU(P2-24,28)
MPU(P1-24,28)1
MPU(P3-24,28)2
Clk H, L DPU(P2-32,36)
MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2
Sync H, L DPU(P2-40,44)
MPU(P1-40,44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2

(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-21

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

10.1 Analog LNV (Cont)

WORDS OCTAL LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC
DISTANCE 001 4
TIME TO GO 002 4
CROSSTRACK DISTANCE 003 4
GROUNDSPEED 012 4
WIND VELOCITY 015 1/(10 sec)
WIND DIRECTION 016 1/(10 sec)
MAGNETIC VARIATION 031 1/(10 sec)
STATUS WORD 110 4
BEARING TO WYAPOINT 115 4
DISTANCE TO NTH WAYPOINT 156 1/(10 sec)
DESIRED COURSE TO NTH WAYPOINT 157 *4
*4/SEC TO THE TO WAYPOINT, 1/(10 SEC) FOR THE REST.

LNV Reference DPU(P2-39,43) Aircraft wiring Format: 2-wire, ac

H, C MPU(P1-39,43)1 Voltage: 26 V ac, 400 Hz
MPU(P3-39,43)2 Load: NLT 20 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±100 V
Max diff voltage: ±200 V

10.2 Digital LNV

LNV Data LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 6-wire, ARINC 561

VLF/Omega or INS Words: See below.
Data H, L DPU(P2-24,28)
MPU(P1-24,28)1
MPU(P3-24,28)2
Clk H, L DPU(P2-32,36)
MPU(P1-32,36)1
MPU(P3-32,36)2
Sync H, L DPU(P2-40,44)
MPU(P1-40,44)1
MPU(P3-40,44)2

WORDS OCTAL LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

DISTANCE 001 4
TIME TO GO 002 4
CROSSTRACK DISTANCE 003 4
GROUNDSPEED 012 4
WIND VELOCITY 015 1/(10 sec)
WIND DIRECTION 016 1/(10 sec)
MAGNETIC VARIATION 031 1/(10 sec)
STATUS WORD 110 4
BEARING TO WAYPOINT 115 4
VERTICAL DEVIATION 117 4
BANK COMMAND 121 10
DISPLAY DEVIATION 155 1/(10 sec)
DISTANCE TO NTH WAYPOINT 156 1/(10 sec)
DESIRED COURSE TO NTH WAYPOINT 157 *4
*4/SEC TO THE TO WAYPOINT, 1/(10 SEC) FOR THE REST.

Remote Data MFD(P1-17,25) LRN-85, FMS-90, Format: 2-wire, RS-422A serial bus
(Optional) (H, L) MFD(P1-32,40) VLF/Omega or INS Data rate: 22,500 baud ±1%
MFD(P1-18,11) Data: alphanumeric character set
MFD(P1-41,33) Input impedance: 120 Ω (nominal)

LNV I/O Straps 4; 5, 6, (Refer to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.)
and 36; and 16.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-22

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

10.3 Inertial Reference and Laser Reference Systems

10.3.1 Analog Inertial Reference and Laser Reference Systems

Pitch Synchro INS, LRS Format: 3-wire synchro

X, Y, Z Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of pitch angle)
Zero: at zero pitch angle
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when in a nose-up condition.

Roll Synchro INS, LRS Format: 3-wire synchro

X, Y, Z Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of roll angle)
Zero: at zero roll angle
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when in a right bank.
Pitch/Roll Valid INS, LRS Format: 1-wire discrete
Pitch/roll valid: +18 to +31 V dc
Pitch/roll invalid: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Input load: NLT 10 kΩ

Mag/True Heading INS, LRS Format: 3-wire synchro

X, Y, Z Analog: X to Y = (11.8 V rms) × (sine of heading angle)
Zero: zero heading
Input resistance: NLT 10 kΩ
Max common mode voltage: ±30 V
Max diff voltage: ±60 V
Freq/phase: must be phase locked to 400-Hz power
Phasing: X to Y voltage shall be out of phase with
400-Hz power when a right heading deviation
is produced.
Mag/True Heading IRS, LRS Format: 1-wire discrete
Valid Mag/true heading valid: +18 to +31 V dc
Mag/true heading invalid: 0 to +3.5 V dc
Input resistance: NLT 20 kΩ

IRS/INS I/O Strap 14. (Refer to 12.0 in this table for strapping information.)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-23

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER I/O STRAP SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

NUMBER

11.0 DPU/MPU-85H/86H STRAPPING DEFINITIONS

Note

These inputs are typically hard-wired. Strap 18 is an input from the VNI-80( ) and strap 19 (also 12, 15, 19, and 22) is an input
from an external switch. All display processor units must be strapped to sources according to strap 11 location definitions.
Autopilot Type DPU(P2-61,115,121) 1 2 3
MPU(P2-1,5,9)1 0 0 0 FCS-80 dual FD Analog A/P
MPU(P2-4,8,12)2 1 0 0 FCS-A dual FD Analog A/P
0 1 0 FCS-B Analog A/P
1 1 0 APS-86 Digital A/P
0 0 1 APS-65 Analog A/P
1 0 1 FCS-80 single FD Analog A/P
0 1 1 FCS-A single FD Analog A/P
1 1 1 APS-85 Digital A/P

Nav Data Ref DPU(P2-123) 4

MPU(P2-13)1 0 Mag hdg ref for NAV data
MPU(P2-16)2 1 True hdg ref for NAV data

LNV Port Ann DPU(P2-128,132) 5 6

MPU(P2-53,57)1 0 0 INS annunciation select
MPU(P2-56,60)2 1 0 LNV annunciation select
0 1 LRN annunciation select
1 1 VLF annunciation select

Radio Alt Type DPU(P2-133,134) 7 8

MPU(P2-61,65)1 0 0 ALT-50 (0 to 2000 feet)
MPU(P2-64,68)2 1 0 ALT-55 (0 to 2500 feet)
0 1 AL-101 (0 to 2500 feet)
1 1 Undefined

X-Side DTA Flag DPU(P2-135) 9

Display MPU(P2-69)1 0 2-tube system (inhibits flag)
MPU(P2-72)2 1 3-, 4-, and 5-tube system (normal)

Note

0 = ground
1 = open
VOR Port DPU(P2-136,116) 10 24
MPU(P2-73,130)1 0 0 TCN/LOC (TCN enabled and annunciated)
MPU(P2-76,131)2 0 1 VOR/MLS (MLS enabled and annunciated)
1 0 RNV/LOC (RNV enabled and annunciated)
1 1 VOR/LOC (VOR enabled and annunciated)

DPU Side DPU(P2-140) 11 DPU use only

0 Left DPU (left side I/O annunciated)
1 Right DPU (right side I/O annunciated)

Comparator Reset DPU(P2-141) 12

MPU(P2-81)1 0 Cancel/inhibit (gnd to reset or inhibit compare func-
MPU(P2-82)2 tion; MPU: left only)
1 Enable

Speed Deviation Type DPU(P2-142,159) 13 23

Select MPU(P2-85,126)1 0 0 Inhibit scale
MPU(P2-88,127)2 0 1 Reserved
1 0 AOA enabled and annunciated
1 1 Analog fast/slow enabled and annunciated

Revised 12 May 1999 1-24

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER I/O STRAP SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

NUMBER

11.0 DPU/MPU-85H/86H STRAPPING DEFINITIONS (Cont)

Attitude/Heading DPU(P2-145) 14
MPU(P2-89)1 0 Gyro (3-wire synchro I/O)
MPU(P2-92)2 1 AHRS (digital bus) CSDB

ADF Type DPU(P2-146) 15

MPU(P2-93)1 0 Dc bearing (dc sin/cos)
MPU(P2-96)2 1 Ac bearing (synchro 3-wire)

LNV Synchro DPU(P2-147) 16

MPU(P2-97)1 0 Desired track (DTK)
MPU(P2-100)2 1 Track angle error + drift angle
Heading DPU(P2-148) 17
MPU(P2-102)1 0 True heading sensor
MPU(P2-103)2 1 Mag heading sensor

VNAV On/Off DPU(P2-151) 18

MPU(P2-106)1 0 Display VNAV (CSDB)
MPU(P2-107)2 1 Inhibit VNAV (off)

Note

0 = ground
1 = open

Reversionary Mode DPU(P2-152) 19

MPU(P2-110)1 0 No change in EADI format
MPU(P2-111)2 1 Composite format

Command Bars DPU(P2-155) 20

MPU(P2-114)1 0 Cross-pointer
MPU(P2-115)2 1 V bars

LIN DEVIATION DPU(P2-156) 21

MPU(P2-118)1 0 Inhibit VOR (angular dev for VOR)
MPU(P2-119)2 1 Enable VOR (linear dev if VOR and DME)

Note

This function is normally inhibited (ground strap 21).

Master Warn Reset DPU(P2-158) 22

Enable MPU(P2-122)1 0 Cancel/inhibit (gnd to reset or inhibit)
MPU(P2-142)2 1 Normal (open for normal comparator function)

Attitude Source DPU(P1-103) 25

MPU(P2-14)1 0 Use cross-side attitude
MPU(P3-83)2 1 Use onside attitude

Heading Source DPU(P1-107) 26

MPU(P2-3)1 0 Use cross-side heading
MPU(P3-82)2 1 Use onside heading

Air Data/Trend Vector DPU(P1-111) 27

Enable MPU(P2-7)1 0 Disable air data/trend vector
MPU(P3-77)2 1 Enable air data/trend vector
Display Control Panel DPU(P1-135) 28
Source MPU(P2-11)1 0 Use cross-side display control panel
MPU(P3-79)2 1 Use onside display control panel

Rising Runway DPU(P1-139) 29

MPU(P2-15)1 0 Enable rising runway
MPU(P3-78)2 1 Disable rising runway
(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-25

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER I/O STRAP SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

NUMBER

11.0 DPU/MPU-85H/86H STRAPPING DEFINITIONS (Cont)

Heading Select DPU(P1-99) 30

MPU(P1-134)1 0 Dual selected heading (CHP-86B)
MPU(P3-134)2 1 Single selected heading (CHP-85D)

Note

0 = ground
1 = open

LNV DATA TYPE DPU(P2-33) 31

SELECT MPU(P1-33)1 0 All ARINC 561 data
MPU(P3-33)2 1 ARINC 561 data+analog+discretes

Not used 32 Shall be left open

FCS BUS SELECT DPU(P2-13) 33

MPU(P1-13)1 0 Primary FCS bus
MPU(P3-13)2 1 Secondary FCS bus

Not used 34 Shall be left open

Not used 35 Shall be left open

Not used 36 Shall be left open

Not used 37 Shall be left open
Not used 38 Shall be left open

MPU/DPU SB 33 DPU(P1-95) 39
STRAP MPU(P1-135) 0 Additional functions
MPU(P3-135) 1 Normal operation

Note Caution

0 = ground A difference in strap 39 between left and right sides

1 = open (one open and one grounded) can cause the red MIS-
MATCH LRU STRAP annunciation to appear on the
EHSI. When -003 statuses of DPU/MPU are in-
stalled, it is important to ensure that strap 39 on the
left and right sides are either both open or grounded.
Strap 39 is meant to enable the extra features intro-
duced by SB-33 (which converts the DPU/MPU to a
-003 status); these features were meant to improve
EFIS operation in Cat II approaches. Mixing a -002
and -003 status DPU/MPU in the same installation
may also cause the mismatch annunciation.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-26

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

12.0 DPU/MPU-85H/86H PROCESSOR STRAP OR SWITCH DEFINITIONS

Processor strap no 1 DPU(P1-91) *Ext switch 0 = gnd strap, DPU/MPU test mode (used to examine
MPU(P2-2) MPRAM data and to calibrate)
1 = open, normal operation

Processor strap no 2 RESERVED

Processor strap no 3 MPU(P2-123) *Ext switch 0 = gnd strap, trend vector test (maintenance use only)
1 = open, normal operation

Drive Transfer DPU(P1-98) *Ext switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-109)1 Drive normal = NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P3-109)2 Drive transfer = NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
DCP(P2-42)
DSP(P2-42)

Composite/Off DPU(P2-125) *Ext switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-125)1 Normal operation = NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P3-125)2 EADI composite/EHSI off = NMT +3 V dc (gnd)

Off/Composite DPU(P2-129) *Ext switch Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-129)1 Normal operation = NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MPU(P3-129)2 EADI off/EHSI composite = NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
Format: 1-wire discrete

CAT II Request DCP(P2-43) *Ext switch, Format: 1-wire discrete

DSP(P2-9) Momentary contact CAT II request: gnd (NMT +3.0 V dc)
No request: open (NLT 100 kΩ)

Note

0 = ground
1 = open

*These inputs are switched externally on an individual drive unit basis or together on a same side basis.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-27

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

13.0 SENSOR STRAP OPTIONS

13.1 DSP-85A Sensor Straps

Sensor strapping on the DSP-85A is used to define navigation input configurations. For example, if properly strapped, all aircraft
navigation sensors can be displayed by either EHSI. Each DSP-85A is strapped independently. These inputs are usually hard-wired
to DSP-85A pins P2-39 and P2-40.
DSP STRAP
NO DSP PIN NO FUNCTION DEFINITION
1 P2-11 VOR COURSE
0 #1 VOR CRS Course knob selects side 1 or side 2 VOR
1 #2 VOR CRS
2 P2-12 WPT BEARING
0 #1 WPT BRG Bearing knob selects side 1 or side 2 LNV
1 #2 WPT BRG
3 P2-13 ADF BEARING
0 #1 ADF BRG Bearing knob selects side 1 or side 2 ADF
1 #2 ADF BRG
4 P2-7 LNV COURSE
0 #1 LNV CRS Course knob selects side 1 or side LNV
1 #2 LNV CRS
5 P2-8 2ND CRS SELECT
0 LNV2 excluded Determines inclusion of LNV2 in 2nd CRS selection
1 LNV2 included
6 P2-10 TEST MODE SELECT
0 Test mode DSP test mode
1 Normal operation

Revised 12 May 1999 1-28

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

13.2 DCP-85E Sensor Straps

Sensor strapping on the DCP-85E is used to define navigation input configurations. For example, if properly strapped, all aircraft
navigation sensors can be displayed by either EHSI. Each DCP-85E is strapped independently. These inputs are usually hard-wired
to DCP-85E pins P1-9, 12, 15, 25, 28, and 31.
DCP STRAP NO DCP PIN NO DEFINITION
1 P1-50 VOR 1 Course Select Enable
2 P1-49 VOR 2 Course Select Enable
3 P1-29 Reserved
4 P1-30 Reserved
5 P1-17 LRN1 Course Select Enable
6 P1-16 LRN 2 Course Select Enable
7 P1-32 VOR 1 Bearing Pointer Enable
8 P1-33 VOR 2 Bearing Pointer Enable
9 P1-10 ADF 1 Bearing Pointer Enable
10 P1-11 ADF 2 Bearing Pointer Enable
11 P1-13 LRN 1 Bearing Pointer Enable
12 P1-14 LRN 2 Bearing Pointer Enable
13 P1-26 Reserved
14 P1-27 Reserved
15 P1-46 Reserved
16 P1-45 Reserved

Revised 12 May 1999 1-29

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-3. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Input Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER SOURCE SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

13.3 DPU-MPU I/O Strap Pin Number

I/O STRAP NO DPU PIN NO MPU LEFT PIN NO MPU RIGHT PIN NO
1 P2-61 P2-1 P2-4
2 P2-115 P2-5 P2-8
3 P2-121 P2-9 P2-12
4 P2-123 P2-13 P2-16
5 P2-128 P2-53 P2-56
6 P2-132 P2-57 P2-60
7 P2-133 P2-61 P2-64
8 P2-134 P2-65 P2-68
9 P2-135 P2-69 P2-72
10 P2-136 P2-73 P2-76
11 P2-140 — —
12 P2-141 P2-81 P2-82
13 P2-142 P2-85 P2-88
14 P2-145 P2-89 P2-92
15 P2-146 P2-93 P2-96
16 P2-147 P2-97 P2-100
17 P2-148 P2-102 P2-103
18 P2-151 P2-106 P2-107
19 P2-152 P2-110 P2-111
20 P2-155 P2-114 P2-115
21 P2-156 P2-118 P2-119
22 P2-158 P2-122 P2-142
23 P2-159 P2-126 P2-127
24 P2-116 P2-130 P2-131
25 P1-103 P2-14 P3-83
26 P1-107 P2-3 P3-82
27 P1-111 P2-7 P3-77
28 P1-135 P2-11 P3-79
29 P1-139 P2-15 P3-78
30 P1-99 P1-134 P3-134
31 P2-33 P1-33 P3-33
32 P2-34 P1-34 P3-34 (Reserved)
33 P2-13 P1-13 P3-13
34 P2-17 P1-17 P3-17 (Reserved)
35 P2-21 P1-21 P3-21 (Reserved)
36 P2-80 P1-80 P3-80 (Reserved)
37 P2-108 P1-108 P3-108 (Reserved)
38 P2-112 P1-112 P3-112 (Reserved)
39 P1-95 P1-135 P3-135

Revised 12 May 1999 1-30

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-4 . EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Output Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

1.0 ANNUNCIATOR OUTPUTS

Cat II Amber DPU(P2-30) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete
MPU(P2-160)1 Amber on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-90)2 Amber off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Cat II Green DPU(P2-49) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-142)1 Green on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-142)2 Green off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Cat II Comparator DPU(P2-29) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-141)1 Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-141)2 Warn off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Master Warn DPU(P2-35) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-35) Master warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-35) Master warn off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Attitude Comparator DPU(P2-77) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-145)1 Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-145)2 Warn off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Heading Comparator DPU(P2-65) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

Warn MPU(P1-146)1 Warn on: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-146)2 Warn off: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Excessive Attitude DPU(P2-119) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-119)left Annunciated: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-119)right Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Excessive ILS DPU(P2-120) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

Deviation MPU(P1-120)left Annunciated: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-120)right Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Decision Height DPU(P2-139) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P2-158)1 Annunciated: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-86)2 Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Overtemperature DPU(P1-102) Ext annunciator Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-110) Overtemperature: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
EFD(P1-g) Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)
MFD(P1-35) Trip point: 100 °C (for DPU-85H/86H)
135 °C (for MPU-85H/86H)
95 °C (for EFD-85( )/86( ))
78 °C (for MFD-85A)
2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS

VOR/LOC 1 Mode DPU(P1-60) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-115)1 computer VOR/LOC 1 is the selected primary sensor. +28 V dc
MPU(P3-115)2 when VOR 1 or LOC 1 has been selected as the active
NAV sensor.
Open at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-31

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-4 . EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Output Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS (Cont)

VOR/LOC 2 Mode DPU(P1-78) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete
MPU(P1-121)1 computer VOR/LOC 2 is the selected primary sensor. +28 V dc
MPU(P3-121)2 when VOR 2 or LOC 2 has been selected as the active
NAV sensor.
Open at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Lateral Deviation DPU(P2-69,73) Flight guidance Format: 2-wire dc polarity reversing

+RT, +LT MPU(P1-69,73)1 computer “ANG” lat dev is a reversible dc analog signal which is
MPU(P3-69,73)2 proportional to the angular displacement of the aircraft
from selected VOR or localizer course. “LIN” lat dev is
proportional to the lateral displacement of the aircraft
from the selected VOR course, calculated using the above
angular displacement and distance to the station or way-
point. For long-range navigation systems, this signal is
crosstrack deviation and is proportional to the lateral
displacement of the aircraft from the desired track.

LNV 1 Mode DPU(P1-118) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-147)1 computer Long-range navigation sensor 1 is the active selected
MPU(P3-147)2 primary sensor. +28 V dc when LNV 1 has been selected
as the active
NAV source. Open at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

LNV 2 Mode DPU(P1-109) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-158)1 computer Long-range navigation sensor 2 is the active selected
MPU(P3-158)2 primary sensor. +28 V dc when LNV 2 has been selected
as the active NAV source. Open at all other times.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

FCS Clear DPU(P1-113) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-144)1 computer A +28-V pulse for 250 ±20 ms when active. This pulse is
MPU(P3-144)2 used to clear the FCS when: (A)(B)(C)(D) + (C)(B) +
(D)(B) where:
A = (hdg + NAV arm)
B = (mode chg + tru/mag chg)
C = APS-85/86
D = bus or annunciation valid

Lin Dev Discrete DPU(P1-20) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-29)1 computer Outputs for FCS use. Deviation is linear in LNV or VOR
MPU(P3-29)2 with DME present and I/O strap 21 is open (NLT 100
kΩ). +28 V dc when the signal is linear; open when it is
angular.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

Lateral NAV Flag DPU(P1-24) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-30)1 computer Outputs the NAV flag of the active sensor selected. +28 V
MPU(P3-30)2 dc when the flag being received from the active NAV
source is valid. Open at all other times including no
course present.
Max current out: 150 mA at 25 °C

TO/FROM DPU(P2-126,130) Flight guidance Format: 2-wire dc

+TO, +FROM MPU(P1-126,130)1 computer Outputs TO/FROM status of the active sensor selected.
MPU(P3-126,130)2 The output is +0.5 V dc for +TO and –0.5 V dc for
+FROM.

(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-32

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-4 . EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Output Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

2.0 OUTPUTS TO ANALOG FCS (Cont)

BACK COURSE DPU(P2-127) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete
MPU(P1-127)1 computer BACK COURSE: +18 to +31 V dc
MPU(P3-127)2 Not BACK COURSE: 0 to +3.0 V dc
Outputs a back course indication when the selected
course is sensed to be 105° greater than aircraft heading,
when there is a localizer frequency ground input, and
when active selected navigation sensor is VOR/LOC. +28
V dc during back localizer and open at all other times.

LOC Tune DPU(P2-131) Flight guidance Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-131)1 computer Outputs a LOC tuned indication based on a LOC frequency
MPU(P3-131)2 ground input and VOR/LOC being selected on the
DCP/DSP as the primary sensor output. A ground indi-
cates LOC is tuned and an open indicates no LOC is tuned.

Course Datum Error DPU(P2-25,26) Flight guidance A reversible-phase 400-Hz analog signal which is propor-
H, L MPU(P1-25,26)1 computer tional to the difference between the aircraft heading and
MPU(P3-25,26)2 the selected course.

Heading Error DPU(P2-68,64) Flight guidance A reversible-phase 400-Hz analog output representing
H, L MPU(P1-68,64)1 computer the difference between the selected heading and the air-
MPU(P3-68,64)2 craft heading.

3.0 OUTPUTS TO DIGITAL FCS

Digital FCS A, B DPU(P2-16,20) FCS-85/VNI-80B/D Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
MPU(P1-16,20)1 Data transfer rate: 12.5 kb/s
MPU(P3-16,20)2 Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

NAV DEV (VERT OR LAT) TYPE; EFIS STATUS; SOURCE IDENT; C0 10
TEST; NAV PULSE; GS DISPLAY ON; VNAV DISPLAY ON; V-BAR
OR XPTR; FD DISPLAY; MARKER BEACON
HEADING/(MAG/TRUE)/VALID; HEADING ERROR/VALID; TEST; C1 10
SOURCE IDENT
ACTIVE COURSE ERROR/VALID; PRE COURSE ERROR/VALID; C2 10
TEST; SOURCE IDENT
RADIO ALTITUDE/VALID; DECISION HEIGHT; TEST; SOURCE C3 10
IDENT
LAT DEVIATION/VALID; VERT DEVIATION/VALID; DEVIATION C4 10
TYPE; BACK COURSE; LOC FREQUENCY; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
PRE LAT DEVIATION/VALID; PRE VERT DEVIATION/VALID; DE- C5 10
VIATION TYPE; BACK COURSE; LOC FREQUENCY; TEST,
SOURCE IDENT
ROLL COMMANDS/VALID; PITCH COMMANDS/VALID; REM CAP; C6 10
TEST; SOURCE IDENT
LOC DEVIATION/VALID; GS DEVIATION/VALID; TEST; SOURCE C7 10
IDENT
FCS DISTANCE/VALID; PRE FCS DISTANCE/VALID C8 10
ELEVATOR CORRECTION; DME HOLD (ACTIVE & PRE); TEST; C9 10
SOURCE IDENT; WIND VELOCITY; WIND DIRECTION; WIND
VALID; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
SELECTED COURSE/VALID; PRESEL COURSE/VALID; TO/FROM CA 10
(ACTIVE); TO/FROM (PRE); TEST; SOURCE IDENT
PITCH COMMANDS (VNI)/VALID; VNI DEVIATION/VALID; VERTI- B0 10
CAL CLEAR; FCS VNAV CAP; TEST; SOURCE IDENT
(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 1-33

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-4 . EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Output Specifications.

SIGNAL NAME UNIT PIN NUMBER DESTINATION SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS

3.0 OUTPUTS TO DIGITAL FCS (Cont)

Joystick and MPU(P1-151,155)1 FMS-90, INS Format: 2-wire commercial standard digital bus (CSDB)
Pushbutton Data MPU(P3-151,155)2 Data transfer rate: 12.5 kb/s
A, B Words: See below.

WORDS HEX LABEL UPDATE RATE/SEC

JOYSTICK CURSOR POSITION CB *
MFD KEYSWITCH STATUS CC **
SELECTED HEADING POSITION CD 10
*Label CB is transmitted 20 times at each press of the ENTER key on the MFD.
**Sent at 10 times/second as long as any key is pressed.

Radio Altitude Test DPU(P2-122) Radio Altimeter Format: 1-wire discrete

MPU(P1-122)1 (ALT-50/55, AL-101) Test: NMT +3 V dc (gnd)
MPU(P3-122)2 Normal: NLT 100 kΩ (open)

1.4 EQUIPMENT REQUIRE D BUT NOT SUPPLIED

Refer to Table 1-5 for a list of the necessary equipment categories and representative equipment types that
interface with the DPU and MPU units. The letter “I” indicates that, in general, the representative equip-
ment shall provide data to EFIS. The letter “O” indicates that EFIS provides outputs to the external equip-
ment.

The EFIS system accepts weather radar data from a Collins WXT-250B Weather Radar R/T Unit. The
WXP-85C/D Weather Radar Panel provides the pilot interface and control signals to the R/T similar to the
controls provided by the weather radar indicator normally used by the WXT-250B.

1.4.1 Purpose of Equipment

1.4.1.1 Remote Data Programm er (RDP-300)

The RDP-300 is a handheld keyboard that plugs into a jack on the front face of the MFD-85A/B Multifunc-
tion Display where it receives power and is used to enter or change checklist page and emergency data in the
MFD. The RDP-300 is normally used before and during preflight; rarely during flight. The unit should be
stored (not mounted) in a location accessible to the flight crew.

1.4.1.2 Checklist Entry Unit (CE U-85/85A)

The handheld CEU-85/85A is used to enter up to 100 pages of combined checklist page and emergency page
data into the MFD instead of entering it manually using the RDP-300. The CEU-85/85A plugs into a jack on
the front face of the MFD-85A/B Multifunction Display where it receives power and is normally used before
preflight; rarely during flight. The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85 from an Apple* II Plus/IIe/IIe En-
hanced computer that contains a Collins Pro Line II Interface Card and checklist processing disk software.
The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85A from an IBM or compatible personal computer and master check-
list processing software.

*Apple is the registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-34

general information 523-0773948

1.4.1.3 Fan Monitor Module (FM M-85)

The FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module mounts directly onto any one of the four fan frame sides and is used to
monitor fan motor speed. If fan motor speed falls below a preset level, the FMM-85 will sense the change and
provide a ground to energize an installer-furnished, instrument panel-mounted, “LOW FAN SPEED” annun-
ciator.

1.4.1.4 Air Data Adapter (ADA-8 5)

The ADA-85 Air Data Adapter mounts in the aircraft radio equipment rack and converts Manchester format
serial air data from the ADC-80( ) Air Data Computer into Commercial Standard Digital Bus (CSDB) format
serial air data to interface with the EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) DPU and MPU units.

1.4.2 Related EFIS Equipmen t Specifications

Refer to Table 1-6 for a list of the related EFIS equipment specifications that include environmental, physi-
cal size, weight, mounting, cooling, and input power requirements.

Refer to Table 1-7 for a list of the related EFIS publications.

Table 1-5. Associated Equipment, Interface Provisions, and Formats.

EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES I/O DPU-85 PORTS MPU-85 PORTS PRIMARY DATA FORMAT
(REPRESENTATIVE TYPE)

Radio altimeter I 1 2 Dc analog

(ALT-50/55 AL-101)
Air data I 1 2 CSDB
(ADS-82/85) or
ADS-80 + ADA-85)
NAV receiver I 1 2 CSDB
(VIR-32)
DME I 1 2 CSDB
(DME-42)
ADF I 1 2 Dc sin/cos or 3-wire synchro
(ADF-60A/B)
Attitude II 1 2 3-wire synchro CSDB
(332D-11) 1 2
(AHS-85)
Heading II 1 2 3-wire synchro CSDB
(MC-103/MCS-65) 1 2
(AHS-85)
Flight control
(FCS-80) I/O 1 2 Ac/dc analog, discrete
(FCS-85) I/O 1 2 CSDB, discrete
(FCS-65) I/O 1 2 Ac/dc analog, discrete, CSDB
Lateral NAV I 1 2 Analog, discrete, ARINC 561 digital 6-wire,
(VLF/Omega or INS) CSDB or all 6-wire digital and CSDB
Vertical NAV I 1 2 CSDB
(VNI-80B/80D)
Angle of Attack I 1 2 Dc analog

Revised 12 May 1999 1-35

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-6. Related EFIS Equipment Specifications.

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATIONS

Environmental Listed below are the DO-160A categories to which the EFIS units are tested.
None CEU-85 (not used during aircraft flight)
RDP-300 (not used during aircraft fight)
A2E1/B/JY/EXXXXXZ/BZ/AZA ADA-85 (TSO: C52a)
D2/B/JY/XXXXXXZ/BZ/AZZ FMM-85 (not TSO’ed)
Temperature and altitude Category A2E1. Temperature –55 to +70 °C. Altitude –15000 to 70000 feet operating.
Category D2. Temperature –55 to +70 °C. Altitude 0 to 55000 feet operating.
Humidity Category B. 95% at +65 °C for 10 days.
Vibration Category JY. 0.2 in max excursion 5 to 14 Hz, 2.0 G max from 14 to 17 Hz. 3.0 G max
from 17 to 2000 Hz.
Explosion Category E. Para 9.0, procedure I.
Category X. Not required.
Waterproofness Category X. Not required.
Hydraulic fluid Category X. Not required.
Sand and dust Category X. Not required.
Fungus Category X. Not required.
Salt spray Category X. Not required.
Magnetic effect Category Z. 1 degree allowable deflection at a distance between 0.3 and 1.0 m.
Input power Category BZ. High variation +29.5 V dc. Low variation +22.0 V dc. Emergency low +18 V
dc.
Voltage spikes Category AZ. 50 spikes/minute at +600 volts peak and –600 volts peak.
Audio susceptibility Category Z. Sine wave applied to ungrounded power lines.
Electromagnetic interference Categories A and Z.
Induced signal susceptibility Para 19.0
Rf susceptibility Para 20.0
Spurious emissions Para 21.0
Weight (approx)
ADA-85 (without mount) 0.18 kg (0.4 lb)
CEU-85/85A 0.32 kg (0.70 lb)
FMM-85 0.08 kg (0.18 lb)
RDP-300 0.32 kg (0.70 lb)
Size (reference)
ADA-85 26.40 mm (1.040 in) wide × 81.58 mm (3.330 in) high × 141.7 mm (5.580 in) deep
CEU-85/85A 91.44 mm (3.60 i n) wide × 28.44 mm (1.12 in) high × 146.05 mm (5.75 in) deep
FMM-85 37.3 mm (1.47 in) wide × 31.08 mm (1.225 in) high × 114.30 mm (4.500 in) deep
RDP-300 78.11 mm (4.075 in) wide × 116.21 mm (4.575 in) high × 32.89 mm (1.295 in) deep

Revised 12 May 1999 1-36

general information 523-0773948

Table 1-6. Related EFIS Equipment Specifications.

CHARACTERISTIC SPECIFICATIONS

Mounting
ADA-85 Mounted in aircraft radio equipment rack by a special mount (CPN 653-9015-001).
CEU-85/85A Not aircraft mounted, plugs into MFD-85A DATA jack.
FMM-85 Mounts directly onto any one of the four fan-frame sides.
RDP-300 Not aircraft mounted, plugs into MFD-85A DATA jack.
Power Input
ADA-85 2.75 W nominal (0.1 A at +27.5 V dc).
CEU-85/85A +5 V dc, 350 mA. Provided by MFD-85A DATA jack.
FMM-85 +28 V dc, 0.5 A.
RDP-300 +5 V dc, 350 mA. Provided by MFD-85A DATA jack.

Table 1-7. Related Publications.

PUBLICATION COLLINS PART NUMBER

ADA-85 Air Data Adapter Instruction Book 523-0774682

CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit Instruction Book 523-0774328
CEU-85A Checklist Entry Unit Instruction Book 523-0776400
FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module Instruction Book 523-0773893
RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer Instruction Book 523-0770244
UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors, Instruction Book 523-0772277
WXR-350 Weather Radar Systems Instruction Book 523-0774518
TWR-850 Turbulence Weather Radar System Installation Manual 523-0774651
Collins Installation Practices Manual 523-0775254
Collins Pro Line II COMM/NAV/Pulse System Installation Manual 523-0772719
WXR-840 Advanced Weather Radar System Installation Manual 523-0775822

Revised 12 May 1999 1-37

general information 523-0773948

This page intentionally blank.

Revised 12 May 1999 1-38

523-0773949-003118
3rd Edition, 12 May 1999

EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)

Electronic Flight Instrument Systems

Installation
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page

2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2.2 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 PREINSTALLATION CHECK................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.4 CABLING ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.4.1 Precautions..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4.2 Interconnect Wiring Cables, Preparation..................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.3 Interconnect Wiring Diagrams...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.5 FORCED-AIR COOLING AND POWER SWITCHING ........................................................................................ 2-9
2.5.1 EFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements ........................................................................................................................ 2-9
2.5.2 MFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.3 DPU and MPU Forced-Air Cooling Requirements....................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.4 Power Switching Recommendations ........................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.6.1 EFD-85/86( ) Used as an Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI).................................................................. 2-10
2.6.2 EFD-85/86( ) Used as an Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) ............................................................ 2-11
2.6.3 CHP-85D/86B Course Heading Panel......................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.6.4 DCP-85E Display Control Panel ................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.6.5 MFD-85A Multifunction Display ................................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.6.6 WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel ................................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.6.7 Combined MFD-85A and WXP-85A Installation Using IMT-85 Mounting Tray ..................................................... 2-13
2.6.8 DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit (DPU) and UMT-14/14A/14B Mount .......................................................... 2-14
2.6.9 MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) and UMT-15/15A/15B Mount ............................................... 2-15
2.6.10 DSP-85A Display Select Panel .................................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.6.11 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6.12 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter ......................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6.13 Mating Connector Kit (CPN 634-1020-001), Assembly Instructions ...................................................................... 2-16
2.7 POSTINSTALLATION CHECK ........................................................................................................................... 2-91
2.7.1 Test Equipment............................................................................................................................................................ 2-91
2.7.2 Checkout of EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) ................................................................................................................................. 2-91
2.7.3 Checkout of EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) ............................................................................................................................. 2-92
2.7.4 MFD-85A Checkout ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-93
2.7.5 Self-Test Mode ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-93

NOTICE: This section replaces first revision dated 29 September 1993.

List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue
* Title ......................................... 12 May 99
* List of Effective Pages............. 12 May 99
* 2-1 thru 2-17 ............................ 12 May 99
* 2-18 Blank ............................... 12 May 99
* 2-19 thru 2-29 .......................... 12 May 99
* 2-30 Blank ............................... 12 May 99
* 2-31 thru 2-57 .......................... 12 May 99
* 2-58 Blank ............................... 12 May 99
* 2-59 thru 2-94 .......................... 12 May 99

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 15 Sep 86 None

2nd Ed 14 Jun 89 None

1 29 Sep 93 None

3rd Ed 12 May 99 None

section II
installation

2.1 GENERAL

Installation data in this section consists of preinstallation checks; special cabling procedures; requirements,
removal, and installation of the EFIS units; and system interconnect diagrams. Installation data for the re-
mainder of the associated systems can be found in the applicable manuals.

Note

The information and instructions in this publication are Business and Regional Systems recommen-
dations. Information in this book does not necessarily correspond with any STC or actual aircraft in-
stallation and wiring. This publication cannot be used instead of an STC.

2.2 UNPACKING AND INSP ECTING EQUIPMENT

Caution

Do not store or place the EFD-85/86( ) or MFD-85( ) on metal surfaces within the proximity of a
strong magnetic field because the CRT display can be altered.

Unpack the equipment carefully and make a careful visual inspection of each unit for possible shipping
damage. All claims for damage should be filed with the transportation company involved. If claims for dam-
age are to be filed, save the original packing carton and materials. If no defects can be detected, replace
packing materials in the shipping container and save for future uses, such as storage or reshipment.

2.3 PREINSTALLATION CH ECK

Before installing the equipment in the aircraft, check that applicable test procedures have been performed
for all units of the EFIS system. This ensures that the equipment meets performance specifications.

2.4 CABLING

2.4.1 Precautions

During preparation of the interconnect wiring cables, observe the following precautions:

Note

Keep cable length between EFIS units less than 15.24 m (50 feet). Keep all rear connector straps as
short as possible, preferably under 75.0 mm (3.0 in).

a. Bond and shield all parts of the aircraft electrical system, such as generators and ignition systems.
b. Keep cables away from heavy current-carrying circuits, pulse-transmitting equipment, and other inter-
ference sources.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-1

installation 523-0773949

c. Make all external connections to the equipment through designated connectors listed in outline and
mounting diagrams, Figure 2-2 through Figure 2-20.
d. Use FAA approved wiring only. Wiring sizes are listed on the interconnect diagrams.
e. Leave slack in the cable to allow free sway of the equipment and to keep the wire from breaking.
f. For balanced connections, use a twisted-pair, shielded wire for minimum pickup of electrostatic and mag-
netic fields. Avoid long runs of wire, and keep input and output circuits separated as much as possible.
g. Mark all interconnect wires in accordance with the Aircraft Electronics Association wire marking stan-
dard as shown in Figure 2-24. (This is a recommended method. Other methods may be already in use.)
Caution

Power must be present only on the connector pins specified on the interconnect wiring diagram. Ex-
tensive damage can result to the units if power is present on any other pins.

h. After installation of the cables in the aircraft and before installation of the equipment, check to ensure
that aircraft power is applied to only the specified pins.

2.4.2 Interconnect Wiring Cab les, Preparation

Refer to Collins UMT-( ) Mount and Thinline II Connectors Instruction Book, CPN 523-0772277, for detailed
procedures on connector and contact preparation. Refer to paragraph 2 for UMT-( ) mating connector kit
(CPN 634-1020-001) assembly information.

a. Strip proper amount of insulation from wire so conductor can be inserted as far as possible into slot of
connector pin. No bare wire should extend from rear of pin, and insulation should be crimped in pin in-
sulation barrel.
b. Crimp each interconnect wire in a contact with crimping tool. Refer to Table 2-1 for mating connector
contacts and special tools required. Refer to Table 2-2 and outline and mounting figures for connector kit
requirements.
Note

The connecting wire must be crimped in the contact so that the crimped portion of the contact can
enter the connector shell. The crimped portion must enter the shell to provide positive locking of con-
tact in the shell.

c. Insert the contacts into the appropriate connector shell hole until the contact clicks into position. Refer
to Figure 2-1 for mating connector pin assignments. Refer to Table 2-1 for required insertion tools. Pull
lightly on the wire to ensure that the pin is properly locked.
d. Extraction tools are listed in Table 2-1. To remove a contact, slide extraction tool into the mating side of
connector housing. Push plunger into connector cavity, and pull wire and contact out opposite side.

2.4.3 Interconnect Wiring Dia grams

A typical interconnect wiring diagram for the EFIS equipment is provided in Figure 2-2.

2.4.3.1 Interconnect Arrangeme nt

The interconnect is arranged to provide wiring data in as convenient form as possible to allow installation
information to be prepared. Signal flow arrows are shown on most interconnect wires to indicate which unit
is the signal source.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-2

installation 523-0773949

Table 2-1. Mating Connector Contacts and Special Tools.

PREFERRED ALTERNATE
DESCRIPTION
COLLINS VENDOR NAME AND COLLINS VENDOR NAME
PART NUMBER PART NUMBER PART NUMBER AND PART NUMBER

DCP-85( ), DSP-85( ), WXP-85( ),

FMM-85, ADA-85
Contact, crimp socket 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-080 QPL M22520/2-08
Insertion/extraction tool 371-8445-010 CNN CIET-20HD 370-8053-020 AMP 91066-4
CHP-85D/86B, UMT-14/14A/14B,
UMT-15/15A/15B
Contact, crimp socket 359-0032-020 QPL MS3193A20-20A
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-020 QPL M22520/2-02
Insertion tool 359-4078-010 QPL MS24256A20
Extraction tool 359-4078-020 QPL MS24256R20
EFD-85/86( )
Contact, crimp socket 359-0608-030 QPL M39029/57-357
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01 359-8101-010 QPL M22520/1-01
Locator 359-8102-100 QPL M22520/2-10 359-8101-040 QPL M22520/1-04
Insertion/extraction tool 359-8032-030 QPL M81969/14-02
MFD-85A
Contact, crimp socket 359-0608-110 QPL M39029/57-354
Crimp tool 359-8102-010 QPL M22520/2-01
Locator 359-8102-060 QPL M22520/2-06
Insertion/extraction tool 359-8032-010 QPL M81969/14-01
DPU-85H/86H, MPU-85H/86H
Contact, female tuning fork 1372-2514-110

Contact, female tuning fork 1372-2514-180

Kit, tool (contains all 359-0697-0X0 359-0697-080 DAN DMC593

part numbers listed below)
Crimp tool 2359-0697-010 DAN GMT221 3623-8579-000

4623-8580-000

Insertion tool 359-0697-050 DAN DAK188 359-8029-010 QPL MS3323-22

(tweezer type) (probe type)
Extraction tool 359-0697-060 DAN DRK188 372-8091-010
a. Replacement probes (qty 2) 359-0697-070 DAN DRK188-1
b. Replacement ejector 359-0697-030 DAN DRK188-3
1372-2514-110 female fork type contacts are used with wire insulation diameters up to 1.27 mm (0.050 in). Wire with insulation di-
ameters from 1.27 mm (0.050 in) to 2.03 mm (0.080 in) use contact 372-2514-180. Installer must order the quantity of each desired.
2This crimp tool has two jaw openings, one for each range of insulation diameter given.
3This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-110 only.
4This crimp tool is for use with contacts 372-2514-180 only.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec

Revised 12 May 1999 2-3

installation 523-0773949

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Systems Installation Hardware Listing.

EFD-85/86( ) INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector without grounding fingers (1), (2) 359-0635-420 QPL MS27473T20F-41S
(41 contacts supplied with connector)
Mating connector with grounding fingers (41 (1), (2) 359-0645-500 QPL MS27484T20F-41S
contacts supplied with connector)
1 Clamp, strain relief, straight (1) 359-0637-070 QPL MS27506F20-2
Clamp, strain relief, 90-degree (1) 359-0637-170 QPL MS27507F20
Cable tie, strain relief, 90-degree 359-0073-240

1 Mooring plate, EFD-85 (1) 634-2804-001

Mooring plate, EFD-86/86A (1) 634-2803-001
1 Inclinometer (Refer to Table 1-1 for a com- (5)
plete list.)

4 Machine screw (0.164-32 UNC-2A) EFD-85 (1) Customer

supplied
Machine screw (0.190-32 UNF-2A) EFD- (1) Customer
86/86A supplied

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired 3150 rpm (3), (4) 009-1965-030 ROT 032105
fan motor. +28 V dc power and 6.44 W max.
FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
(-001) 3150 rpm fan motor. (Optional)
(1) Choose one.
(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) One blower is required for each pair of EFD’s.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) Used for ADI position only.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

DCP-85E INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

2 Mating connector housing, 50-pin D sub- (1) 371-0213-050 CNN DDMA 50S-A183-FO
miniature
100 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067

2 Key, connector kit (2 keying plugs per kit) 629-8381-001

2 Screw lock assembly (2 screw locks per lock 371-0040-040 CNN D20420-98
assembly)
2 Hood/cable clamp 371-0148-000 CNN DD24661

(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

Revised 12 May 1999 2-4

installation 523-0773949

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Systems Installation Hardware Listing.

CHP-85D/86D INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector, P1, 26-pin, crimp style (26 (1) 359-0301-320 QPL MS3126F16-26S
contacts supplied with connector)
1 Mating connector, P2, 19-pin, crimp style (19 (1) 359-0301-230 QPL MS3126F14-19S
contacts supplied with connector)

(1) The CHP-85D requires both connectors and the CHP-86B requires only the P1 connector.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

MFD-85A INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector without grounding fingers (1), (2) 359-0635-180 QPL MS27473T16F-35SB
(55 contacts supplied with connector)
Mating connector with grounding fingers (55 (1), (2) 359-0645-170 QPL MS27484T16F-35SB
contacts supplied with connector)

1 Clamp, strain relief, straight (1) 359-0637-050 QPL MS2506F16-2

Clamp, strain relief, 90-degree (1) 359-0637-150 QPL MS27507F16
IMT-300 1 Mounting tray (1) 622-4333-001
IMT-85 1 Combined mount for MFD and WXP (1) 622-6878-001
1 Finger guard (used with IMT-85) 009-1766-050

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron 3150 (3) 009-1965-030 ROT 032105
rpm fan motor. +28 V dc power and 6.44 W
max.
FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron 622-7154-001
(-001) 3150 rpm fan motor. (optional)

(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Cooling air is required for MFD.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

DSP-85( ) INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector housing, P1, 25-pin D sub- (1) 371-0213-030 CNN DBMA25S-A183FO
miniature
1 Mating connector housing, P2, 50-pin D sub- (1) 371-0213-050 CNN DDMA50S-A183FO
miniature
75 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067

2 Key, connector 629-8339-001

2 Screw lock assembly for P1 (2 each per kit) 371-0040-010 CNN P20419-120
2 Screw lock assembly for P2 (2 each per kit) 371-0040-040 CNN D20420-98

1 Hood/cable clamp for P1 371-0146-000 CNN DB24659

1 Hood/cable clamp for P2 371-0148-000 CNN DD24661
(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

Revised 12 May 1999 2-5

installation 523-0773949

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Systems Installation Hardware Listing.

DPU-85H/86H INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

2 Mating connector kit, Collins Thinline, 160- 634-1020-001

pin, 4-row, full height
320 Contacts, female tuning fork (2), (4) 372-2514-110
(2), (4) 372-2514-180
UMT-14 1 Mount, 1/2-ATR short, full height (1) 622-6171-001
UMT-14A Mount, 1/2-ATR short, full height with built- (1), (3) 622-6901-001
in ac fan
UMT-14B Mount, 1/2-ATR short, full height with built- (1), (3) 622-7265-001
in dc fan (19 300 rpm fan, Rotron pn 524887
(CPN 009-0271-060)). Maximum dc in-rush
current of this fan is 5A.
1 UMT-14 grounding bracket 634-2626-001
1 Mating connector for UMT-14A/14B cooling 359-0301-790 QPL MS3126F8-3S
fan (contacts supplied with connector)

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron 3150 (3) 009-1965-030 ROT 032105
rpm fan motor. +28 V dc power and 6.44 W
max. Used with UMT-14 mount.
FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001
(-001) 3150 rpm fan motor. (optional)

FMM-85 1 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-002

(-002) dc blower with 19 300 rpm fan motor. Used (optional)
with UMT-14B mount.
(1) Choose one.
(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Cooling air is required for DPU.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) UMT-14 includes openings for cooling air.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

MPU-85H/86H INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

3 Mating connector kit, Collins Thinline, 160 634-1020-001

pin, 4-row, full height,
480 Contacts, female tuning fork (2), (4) 372-2514-110
(2), (4) 372-2514-180

UMT-15 1 Mount, 3/4-ATR short, full height (3), (1) 622-6172-001

UMT-15A Mount, 3/4-ATR short, full height with built- (3), (1) 622-6902-001
in ac fan
UMT-15B Mount, 3/4-ATR short, full height with built- (3), (1) 622-7266-001
in dc fan (19 300 rpm fan, Rotron pn 524887
(CPN 009-0271-060)). Maximum dc in-rush
current of this fan is 5A.
1 UMT-15 grounding bracket (3), (4) 634-2627-001
1 Mating connector for UMT-15A/15B cooling 359-0301-790 QPL MS3126F8-3S
(Cont) fan (contacts supplied with connector)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-6

installation 523-0773949

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Systems Installation Hardware Listing.

MPU-85H/86H INSTALLATION HARDWARE (Cont)

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 or 2 Cooling fan, includes hard-wired Rotron 3150 (3) 009-1965-030 ROT 032105
rpm fan motor. +28 V dc power and 6.44 W
max. Used with UMT-15 mount.

FMM-85 1 or 2 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-001

(-001) 3150 rpm fan motor. (Optional)

FMM-85 1 Fan monitor module, compatible with Rotron (4) 622-7154-002

(-002) dc blower with 19 300 rpm fan motor. Used (Optional)
with UMT-15B mount.

(1) Choose one.

(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Cooling air is required for MPU.
(4) Choose as required for total quantity per unit.
(5) UMT-15 includes openings for cooling air.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

WXP-85( ) INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector housing, P1, 25-pin D sub- (1) 371-0213-030 CNN DBMA25S-A183FO
miniature
1 Mating connector housing, P2, 37-pin D sub- (1) 371-0213-040
miniature
62 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067

1 Hood/cable clamp for P1 (25 pin) 371-0146-000 CNN DB24659

1 Hood/cable clamp for P2 (37 pin) 371-0147-000

4 Screw lock assembly (2 each per kit) 371-0040-010

1 Key, connector 629-8339-001
(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

FMM-85 INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector housing, P1, 9-pin D sub- (1) 371-0213-010 CNN DEMA9S-A183-FO
miniature
9 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067

1 Hood/cable clamp/latch 371-0399-240 PTR MD9-000-J-VL-464.1

1 Bracket, adapter (supplied with FMM-85 (3) 653-1303-001
(-002))
(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
(3) Adapter bracket is required for the FMM-85 (CPN 622-7154-002) only).
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

Revised 12 May 1999 2-7

installation 523-0773949

Table 2-2. EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) Systems Installation Hardware Listing.

ADA-85 INSTALLATION HARDWARE

VENDOR NAME AND

TYPE QTY/UNIT DESCRIPTION NOTES CPN
PART NUMBER

1 Mating connector housing, P1, 50-pin D sub- (1) 371-0213-050 CNN DDMA50S-A183FO
miniature
50 Contacts, crimp socket (2) 371-0213-110 CNN 031-1007-067

1 Hood/cable clamp/latch 371-0399-280

2 Key, connector 629-8339-001

1 Mount 653-9015-001

(1) Mating connector part number does not include snap-in crimp socket contacts.
(2) Refer to Table 2-1 for contact information.
Vendor codes: AMP = AMP, CNN = ITT Cannon, DAN = Daniels Mfg., QPL = Military Spec, ROT = ROTRON

2.4.3.2 Ground Connections

Correct grounding techniques must be used during installation. Improper grounding techniques may cause
an unwanted voltage potential and/or noise to exist on the signal common lines. This unwanted signal may
then be induced/injected into circuits that could cause erratic or inaccurate system operation. Refer to the
notes in the interconnect diagrams.

2.4.3.3 Wire Size

Standard wire size is #22 AWG unless specified otherwise. Larger wire is used for specific functions in the
interconnect. Refer to the notes in the interconnect diagrams for special wiring size.

2.4.3.4 Special Wire Requireme nts

Many of the signals used in the system require protection to prevent noise from appearing on the signal
wires. This protection is usually provided by twisting two or three wires together or by twisting and shield-
ing two or three wires. Refer to the notes in the interconnect diagrams for instructions about tying the
shields to ground and other shielding techniques.

2.4.3.5 Installation Hardware

Refer to Table 2-2 for installation hardware listing and to the outline and mounting diagrams in this instal-
lation section for mating connector information.

2.4.3.6 EFIS System Schematics

Figure 2-25 through Figure 2-32 are EFIS system schematics. These diagrams are prepared for all EFIS
boxes and are included to aid installation planning. All input and output pin numbers are shown along with
a schematic of the first and last stages.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-8

installation 523-0773949

2.5 FORCED-AIR COOLING AND POWER SWITCHING

The EFD-85/86( ), MFD-85A, DPU-85H/86H, and MPU-85H/86H require that forced-air cooling be provided.
These units are capable of operation at the short-time elevated operating temperatures as specified in the
environmental requirements without forced-air cooling. However, continuous operation at these levels is not
considered normal.

It is required that the forced-air cooling system be operating whenever the EFIS equipment is energized. In
addition, it is required that there be at least one blower for each DPU, MPU, and MFD, and for each pair of
EFD units in the EFIS system. If the UMT-14A/15A Mount (or other ac-powered fans) or UMT-14B/15B
Mount (or other dc-powered fans) are used on the system components, the installation should be designed to
ensure that the equipment is not energized unless the fans are energized also. Ground operation of the sys-
tem without the cooling air should not be allowed.

When any maintenance activity is performed on the EFIS system, the supporting cooling system should be
checked for proper operation.

2.5.1 EFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements

The EFD is enclosed in a housing which has cooling air holes on the top, bottom, both sides, and rear sur-
faces. The unit mounting flange is attached to the outer surface of the instrument panel. Vertical mounting
of the circuit cards results in a low-resistance internal path for cooling air entering the bottom and sides and
flowing over the components to exit through the top surface. High-dissipation components are mounted on a
finned heat sink located on the left side of the unit as viewed from the cockpit.

The preferred method for forced-air cooling of the EFD is to provide a stream of air directed at the bottom
surfaces of the lower unit as the units are mounted one above the other in the instrument panel. Alternately,
the air stream may impinge at the lower left or right sides of the units. The temperature of the forced air
should be maintained as low as possible and must never exceed the rated operating temperature of the
equipment. The air velocity should be between 100 and 200 feet per minute. The forced-air acts to augment
the natural convection cooling and results in substantially reduced operating temperatures.

2.5.2 MFD Forced-Air Cooling Requirements

Construction of the MFD and EFD is similar. A mounting tray attaches to the inner surface of the instru-
ment panel, and openings are provided in the tray for cooling air. High dissipation components are mounted
on a finned heat sink at the connector end of the unit.

Forced air cooling of the MFD is accomplished by providing a stream of air directed at the perforated lower
surface and finned heat sink. The temperature of the forced air should be maintained as low as possible and
must never exceed the rated operating temperature of the equipment. The air velocity should be between
100 and 200 feet per minute. The forced air augments the natural convection cooling and results in substan-
tially reduced operating temperatures.

2.5.3 DPU and MPU Forced-A ir Cooling Requirements

The DPU and MPU are designed to make effective use of forced-air cooling. Cooling air enters through a pat-
tern of openings at the bottom, flows over the components of the vertically mounted circuit cards, and exits
through air holes in the top and side surfaces of the dust cover.

It is required that forced air be introduced at the base of the units and allowed to exit through the top sur-
face. The inlet temperature of the forced air should be maintained as low as possible and must never exceed
the rated operating temperature of the equipment.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-9

installation 523-0773949

Uniformly distributed airflow of 2 pounds per minute (approximately 30 cubic feet per minute) is required
for each DPU and 2.6 pounds per minute (approximately 40 cubic feet per minute) is required for the MPU.

Note

Refer to EFIS-85/86 SIL 1-83 for additional and more detailed forced-air cooling installation re-
quirements. This service information letter (SIL) is available from Business and Regional Systems of
Rockwell Collins, Inc. The installer should note that if UMT-14B/15B mounts are being used, the ini-
tial dc in-rush current for the fan in theUMT-14B/15B can be a high as 5A.

2.5.4 Power Switching Recom mendations

Although the EFIS system components are extensively protected from voltage transients on the +28-V dc
power inputs (it meets TSO environmental requirements), it is recommended that provisions be included
that allow the systems to be powered down during engine starts and during any other major aircraft electri-
cal system activity. Improvements in reliability will be seen over systems that are not powered down during
transients.

2.6 INSTALLATION PROCE DURES

The following procedures detail how to install an EFIS system. These procedures must be performed as de-
scribed to ensure proper operation and performance. Any deviations from these instructions may result in
reduced performance and/or damage to the equipment.

Warning

In the interest of personal safety, it is recommended that the aircraft battery master switch be
turned off to disconnect power before installing or removing equipment from the aircraft.

2.6.1 EFD-85/86( ) Used as an E lectronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI)

Degauss the EADI and mount it directly above the electronic horizontal situation indicator, laterally cen-
tered on the pilot’s instrument panel. Position it so that the top of the instrument remains visible when the
pilot’s seat is in the highest and most forward position.

Note

Be sure that the inclinometer is installed on the front of the EADI. Inclinometer must be leveled by
installer.

The EADI is mounted from either the front or back of the aircraft flight instrument panel. It is secured by
four screws. Refer to Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8, or Figure 2-9 for the desired panel cutout and the outline and
mounting dimensions. If required, a mooring plate will be listed on the referenced figure. Note that the
EADI can be either front- or rear-mounted and the panel cutouts are different for the two methods of
mounting.

2.6.1.1 Installation

Connect the twist lock interconnect cable to the rear connector of the EADI. Then slide the unit into the in-
strument panel and secure with four screws inserting one in each corner. EFD-85 is secured by four 0.164-32
UNC-2A (#8-32) screws and EFD-86/86A is secured by four 0.190-32 UNF-2A (#10-32) screws. If a mooring
plate is used, it must be installed over the instrument case before the cable is connected.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-10

installation 523-0773949

2.6.1.2 Removal

Remove the four screws, one in each corner, that secure the EADI to the aircraft instrument panel. Slide the
EADI out of the aircraft instrument panel until the mating connector can be reached. Disconnect the twist
lock connector, and carefully remove the unit.

2.6.2 EFD-85/86( ) Used as an E lectronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI)

Degauss the EHSI and mount it in the flight instrument panel under the EADI where it is close to and
slightly below the pilot’s line of vision. It is secured by four screws. Refer to Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8, or
Figure 2-9 for the desired panel cutout and outline and mounting dimensions. If required, a mooring plate
will be listed on the referenced figure. Note that the EHSI can be either front- or rear-mounted and the
panel cutouts are different for the two methods of mounting.

2.6.2.1 Installation

Connect the twist lock interconnect cable to the rear connector of the EHSI. Then slide the unit into the in-
strument panel and secure with four screws, inserting one in each corner. EFD-85 is secured by four 0.164-
32 UNC-2A (#8-32) screws and EFD-86/86A is secured by four 0.190-32 UNF-2A (#10-32) screws. If a moor-
ing plate is used, it must be installed over the instrument case before the cable is connected.

2.6.2.2 Removal

Remove the four screws, one in each corner, that secure the EHSI to the aircraft instrument panel. Slide the
instrument out of the panel and remove the interconnect cable.

2.6.3 CHP-85D/86B Course He ading Panel

Mount the CHP-85D/86B in the aircraft center pedestal or any convenient location that allows both the pilot
and copilot easy access to the controls. Refer to Figure 2-3 for outline and mounting dimensions.

2.6.3.1 Installation

Connect the twist lock connector cables to the rear connectors of the CHP-85D/86B. (There is one connector
on the CHP-86B and two connectors on the CHP-85D.) Insert the course heading panel into the center ped-
estal and secure with two Dzus fasteners.

2.6.3.2 Removal

Unlock Dzus fasteners, remove course heading panel from center pedestal, and disconnect twist lock cables
from unit.

2.6.4 DCP-85E Display Contro l Panel

Mount the DCP-85E in the aircraft center pedestal or in any convenient location that allows pilot and copilot
easy access to the controls. Refer to Figure 2-4 for outline and mounting dimensions and connector keying in-
formation. Remember that one DCP-85E is required for each side in a 4- or 5-tube crt system.

2.6.4.1 Installation

Connect the screw lock cable assemblies to the DCP-85E rear connectors. Insert the display control panel
into the proper location and secure with the two Dzus fasteners.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-11

installation 523-0773949

2.6.4.2 Removal

Unlock Dzus fasteners, remove the display control panel from its mounting location, and disconnect the
screw lock cable assemblies.

2.6.5 MFD-85A Multifunction Display

The multifunction display is to be installed in the cockpit in a location on the instrument panel that allows
good visibility and control access by both the pilot and copilot. The MFD-85A uses the IMT-300 Mounting
Tray. Refer to Figure 2-10 for the data necessary to install the MFD-85A and IMT-300.

Note

Some installations require that the MFD-85A and the WXP-85A be stack mounted using a single
mounting tray. Refer to paragraph 2.6.7 for this procedure using the IMT-85 Mounting Tray.

2.6.5.1 Installation

To install the MFD-85A and IMT-300, observe the following procedures:

a. The size of the panel cutout is shown in Figure 2-10.

b. Drill the four holes as shown in Figure 2-10 to attach the IMT-300.
c. Clean the area of the screw holes on the back of the instrument panel where the tray will be attached.
This is to ensure a good electrical contact.
d. Install the IMT-300 into the instrument panel using four #6-32 UNC-2B flathead screws. The IMT-300 is
equipped with self-locking nuts.
e. Before installing the MFD-85A into the IMT-300, make sure the locking pawls on the bottom of the unit
are properly retracted so that unit will slide easily into the tray.
f. If the cable is long enough, bring the cable out through the panel opening and connect it to the unit con-
nector. Make sure that it is properly and securely engaged.
g. Slide the MFD-85A into the IMT-300 but do not force it. If it does not slide into position easily, check
alignment of the indicator with the index pins on the rear of the IMT-300. If the mating connector is al-
ready installed, make sure the cable assembly is not getting caught on the tray.
h. After full insertion, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten the two twist lock pawls to secure the unit
to the tray.
i. If not already connected and locked, connect mating connector to the MFD-85A.

2.6.5.2 Removal

To remove the MFD-85A and IMT-300, observe the following procedures:

a. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to loosen the two twist lock pawls that secure the MFD-85A to the IMT-
300 tray.
b. Slide the MFD-85A out of the tray far enough to allow access to the mating connector. Make sure the ca-
ble assembly does not get caught on the tray.
c. Disconnect the mating connector and cable assembly and remove the MFD-85A.
d. Remove the IMT-300 tray, if necessary, by first removing the four #6-32 UNC-2B flathead screws. The
IMT-300 is equipped with self-locking nuts.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-12

installation 523-0773949

2.6.6 WXP-85( ) Weather Rada r Panel

Mount the WXP-85( ) in the aircraft instrument panel in a convenient location that allows pilot and copilot
easy access to the controls. Refer to either Figure 2-18 (WXP-85A/85C) or Figure 2-19 (WXP-85B/85D) for
outline and mounting dimensions and connector keying information. The WXP-85A, -85C are panel
mounted; the WXP-85B, -85D are Dzus mounted.

2.6.6.1 Installation

Note

The WXP-85A contains a 5/28-V lighting select switch. The switch is accessible without removing the
unit’s cover. Position the switch to desired lighting voltage.

Connect the screw lock cable assemblies to the WXP-85A( ) rear connectors. Insert the unit into its proper lo-
cation. Secure the WXP-85A or -85C with four integral turnlock fasteners. Use a 0.093 hexkey drive to
tighten fasteners. Clearance is required on rear surfaces of panel for turnlock fasteners. Secure the WXP-
85B or -85D with the four Dzus fasteners.

2.6.6.2 Removal

To remove the WXP-85A or -85C, use a 0.093 hexkey drive and turn the four turnlock fasteners counter-
clockwise until stop is reached to ensure proper action of lugs. To remove the WXP-85B or -85D, loosen the
four Dzus fasteners. Slide the unit from the instrument panel far enough to allow access to the rear connec-
tors. Loosen the rear connector cable assemblies and remove the unit.

2.6.7 Combined MFD-85A and WXP-85A Installation Using IMT-85 Mounting Tray

2.6.7.1 Installation

To install the MFD-85A, WXP-85A, and IMT-85, perform the following procedures:

a. Read all the notes on the IMT-85 outline and mounting diagram, Figure 2-20, before continuing. Pay at-
tention to the caution in note 7.
b. Cut out the instrument panel for installation of the equipment. The size of the panel cutout is shown in
Figure 2-20.
c. Refer to Figure 2-20, read note 10, and select a mounting hole pattern for the IMT-85. Drill the specified
holes.
d. Clean the area of the screw holes where the tray will be attached. This is to ensure a good electrical con-
tact.
e. Refer to Figure 2-20, note 5. Install the blower fan (not supplied with the IMT-85). Mounting hole pat-
terns (note 6) for the fan are provided on the center line of the tray or 0.250 inch on either side of center
line if needed to avoid aircraft structure.
f. Dress and route WXP-85A wiring harness over the center of the fan in a manner that will minimize the
restriction of airflow from the blower.
Caution

Use a finger guard (CPN 009-1766-050 or equivalent) with the blower to protect the WXP-85A wiring
harness from the rotating fan blades.

g. Connect the screw lock cable assemblies to the WXP-85A rear connectors. Insert the unit in its proper lo-
cation and secure it with integral turnlock fasteners. Use a 0.093 hexkey drive to tighten the fasteners.
Clearance is required on rear surfaces of panel in two places for the turnlock fasteners.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-13

installation 523-0773949

h. Before installing the MFD-85A, make sure the locking pawls on the bottom of the unit are properly re-
tracted so that the unit will slide easily into the tray.
i. If the MFD-85A mating cable is long enough, bring the cable out through the panel opening and connect
it to the MFD-85A rear connector. Make sure that it is properly and securely engaged.
j. Slide the MFD-85A into the panel opening and onto the mounting tray but do not force it. If the mating
connector cable is attached pull or push it back through the rear opening of the tray. Make sure that the
cable is not getting caught on the tray.
k. After full insertion, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten the two twist lock pawls to secure the
unit.
l. If the mating connector is not already connected and locked, connect it to the MFD-85A.

2.6.7.2 Removal

Reverse the procedure used in paragraph 2.6.7.1.

2.6.8 DPU-85H/86H Display P rocessor Unit (DPU) and UMT-14/14A/14B Mount

Refer to Figure 2-6 for DPU outline and mounting dimensions. The UMT-14, UMT-14A, or UMT-14B is the
equipment mount for the DPU. Refer to Figure 2-12 (UMT-14), Figure 2-13 (UMT-14A), or Figure 2-14
(UMT-14B) outline and mounting dimensions. The UMT-14/14A/14B connector mounting accommodates 4-
row Collins Thinline type connectors. The mating connectors are not supplied with the mount. Two mating
connector kits are required (CPN 634-1020-001).

2.6.8.1 Installation

a. Assemble the two mating connector kits (CPN 634-1020-001). Refer to paragraph 2.6.13 for mating con-
nector kit assembly instructions.
b. Install the UMT-14( ) mount.
c. Verify the orientationof the mating connector keyway pins (part of the mating connector kits). Figure 2-6
shows how the DPU keyways should be oriented.
d. Position the DPU interconnecting cables, with mating connectors already installed, into the rear of the
mount. Secure the mating connectors to connector bracket at the rear of the mount.
e. Slide the DPU into the mount until the connectors are fully engaged.
f. Position the knurled knobs on the front of the mount to engage the DPU holddown hooks. Tighten the
knobs to secure the unit to the mount.
g. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists between the unit and mount.
h. Assemble the cooling fan mating connector kit. Make sure that UMT-14A 115-V ac, 1Φ, 400-Hz input
power is applied to pins P4-3 and P3-B. Make sure that UMT-14B +28-V dc input power is applied to
pin P3-B, power ground is P3-A, and optional fan sensor output is P3-C. The installer should note that if
a UMT-14B mount is being used, the initial dc in-rush current for the dc fan in the UMT-14B can be as
high as 5 A.
i. Secure cooling fan mating connector to connector J3 at rear of mount.

2.6.8.2 Removal

a. Loosen the knobs that secure the unit to the mount.

Caution

Do not lift the unit up or move it from side to side until the rear connectors are disengaged from the
mount.

b. Slide the DPU straight out to disconnect it from the mount connectors.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-14

installation 523-0773949

2.6.9 MPU-85H/86H Multifunc tion Processor Unit (MPU) and UMT-15/15A/15B Mount

Refer to Figure 2-11 for MPU outline and mounting dimensions. The UMT-15, or UMT-15A, and UMT-15 B
ar the equipment mounts for the MPU. Refer to Figure 2-15 (UMT-15), Figure 2-16 (UMT-15A), or Figure
2-17 (UMT-15B) outline and mounting dimensions. The UMT-15( ) connector mounting accommodates 4-row
Collins Thinline type connectors. The mating connectors are not supplied with the mount. Three mating
connector kits are required.

2.6.9.1 Installation

a. Assemble the three mating connector kits (CPN 634-1020-001). Refer to paragraph 2.6.13 for mating
connector kit assembly instructions.
b. Install the UMT-15( ) Mount.
c. Verify the orientation of the mating connector keyway pins (part of the mating connector kits). Figure
2-11 shows how the MPU keyways should be oriented.
d. Position the MPU interconnecting cables, with mating connectors already installed, into the rear of the
mount. Secure the mating connectors to the connector bracket at the rear of the mount.
e. Slide the MPU into the mount until the connectors are fully engaged.
f. Position the knurled knobs on the front of the mount to engage the MPU holddown hooks. Tighten the
knobs to secure the unit to the mount.
g. Ensure that a good electrical bond exists between the unit and the mount.
h. Assemble the cooling fan mating connector kit. Make sure that UMT-15A 115-V ac, 1Φ, 400-Hz input
power is applied to pins P4-A and P4-B. Make sure that UMT-15B +28-V dc input power is applied to
pin P4-B, power ground is P4-A, and optional fan sensor output is P4-C. The installer should note that if
a UMT-15B mount is being used, the initial dc in-rush current for the dc fan in the UMT-15B can be as
high as 5 A.
i. Secure cooling fan mating connector to connector J4 at rear of mount.

2.6.9.2 Removal

a. Loosen the knobs that secure the unit to the mount.

Caution

Do not lift the unit up or move it from side to side until the rear connectors are disengaged from the
mount.

b. Slide the MPU straight out to disconnect it from the mount connectors.

2.6.10 DSP-85A Display Select Panel

Mount the DSP-85A in the aircraft center pedestal or in any convenient location that allows pilot and copilot
easy access to the controls. Refer to Figure 2-5 for outline and mounting dimensions and connector keying in-
formation. Remember that one DSP-85A is required for each side in a 4- or 5-tube crt system.

2.6.10.1 Installation

Connect the screw lock cable assemblies to the DSP-85A rear connectors. Insert the display control panel
into the proper location and secure with the two Dzus fasteners.

2.6.10.2 Removal

Unlock Dzus fasteners, remove the display control panel from its mounting location, and disconnect the
screw lock cable assemblies.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-15

installation 523-0773949

2.6.11 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Mo dule

Refer to Figure 2-21 for outline and mounting dimensions and interconnect diagram. Use #22 AWG wire for
interconnect wiring.

2.6.11.1 FMM-85 (-001) Installati on

The FMM-85 (-001) may be located directly on any one of the fan’s four sides, depending on space require-
ments/limitations.

2.6.11.2 FMM-85 (-002) Installati on

The FMM-85 (-002) is attached to the UMT-14B/15B Universal Mounts blower plenum via an adapter
bracket (CPN 653-1303-001) that is supplied with the FMM-85 (-002). Use the bracket to mount in any con-
venient location.

a. Attach FMM-85 (-002) to adapter bracket with two 0.138 × 0.31 screws (CPN 343-0168-000) that are
supplied with the FMM-85.
b. Remove bottom blower plenum mounting screws from mount (four from the UMT-14B and three from
the UMT-15B).
c. Attach FMM-85 (-002) and adapter bracket to mount with three or four 0.112-40 × 0.31 screws (CPN
343-0134-000), supplied with the FMM-85 (-002). Install screws into screw holes vacated in step b.

2.6.11.3 Removal

For short time removal, cap and secure connectors to prevent wire and connector damage. No other special
removal instructions are required.

2.6.12 ADA-85 Air Data Adapte r

To minimize wire length, the ADA-85 should be mounted in the radio equipment rack adjacent to the ADC-
80( ) Air Data Computer. An ADA-85 mount (CPN 653-9015-001) is required for each unit. This single mount
allows the ADA-85 to be mounted either vertically or horizontally. Two units can be mounted end to end in
approximately the same length as an ADC-80( ). Refer to Figure 2-22 for the ADA-85 outline and mounting
diagram. Refer to Figure 2-23 for the ADA-85 interconnect diagram. Install the mount for the ADA-85 using
the dimensions shown in Figure 2-22. After the mount has been installed and the interconnect cable verified,
tighten the Phillips-head screw on the front of the mount, securing the ADA-85 in place. Ensure that polar-
izing key plugs (CPN 629-8339-001) have been installed in positions 39 and 46 on the mating connector. In-
stall the mating connector on the front of the ADA-85 and secure the latch.

2.6.13 Mating Connector Kit (C PN 634-1020-001), Assembly Instructions

Refer to the illustration below and the following steps to assemble DPU/MPU mating connector kit (CPN
634-1020-001). The assembled kit will be wired to an interconnect cable, then it will be installed on a mount
(such as the UMT-14/14A/14B or UMT-15/15A/15B).

Revised 12 May 1999 2-16

installation 523-0773949

a. Install capscrews (CPN 324-2609-000) into counterbore of connector (CPN 634-1388-001). The capscrews
require a 0.109 hex drive socket (not supplied).
Note

Modify hex drive wrench (not supplied) as shown below and use it on a long extension to aid connec-
tor installation into the mount.

b. Install and orient the keyway as shown on the outline and mounting diagram for the DPU (Figure 2-6)
or for the MPU (Figure 2-11). The beveled portion of the keyway faces the mating side of the connector
as shown. Secure each indexing keyway (CPN 768-3401-003) to the connector with a setscrew (CPN 328-
5030-000).

Revised 12 May 1999 2-17

installation 523-0773949

This page intentionally blank.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-18

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 1 of 10). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (CHP-86B (top) and CHP-85D (bottom))

Revised 12 May 1999 2-19

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 2). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DCP-85E)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-20

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 3). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DSP-85A)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-21

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 4). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DPU-85H/86H)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-22

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 5). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (DPU-85H/86H)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-23

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 6). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (EFD-85/86/86A)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-24

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 7). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MFD-85A)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-25

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 8). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MPU-85H/86H)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-26

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 9). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MPU-85H/86H)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-27

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-1 (Sheet 10). Mating Connector Pin Assignments (MPU-85H/86H)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-28

installation 523-0773949

INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM CHANGES

REVISION DESCRIPTION OF REVISION SERVICE EFFECTIVITY

IDENTIFICATION AND REASON FOR CHANGE BULLETIN

Figure 2-2, sheet 8 Reversed diode polarity for V-D/VLF SW N/A 9/21/93
POSITION connected to pin 51 of CRU-90
(P/O FMS-90) BP.
Figure 2-2, sheet 10 Combined Figure 2-2A as part of Figure 2-2 N/A 5/03/99
Figure 2-2, sheet 11 Combined Figure 2-2B as part of Figure 2-2 N/A 5/03/99

(This page will contain schematic revision in-

formation)

Figure 2-2 (Sheet A). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

Revised 12 May 1999 2-29

installation 523-0773949

This page intentionally blank.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-30

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 1 of 11). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-31

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 2). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-32

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 3). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-33

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 4). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-34

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 5). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-35

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 6). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-36

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 7). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-37

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 8). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-38

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 9). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-85, AHS-85, ADS-82, DME-42, VIR-32, and WXR-350 Interfaces)

Revised 12 May 1999 2-39

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 10). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With WXR-300 Interface )

Revised 12 May 1999 2-40

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-2 (Sheet 11). EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13) 5-Tube Interconnect

(With APS-65B Interface )

Revised 12 May 1999 2-41

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-3 . CHP-85D/86B Course Heading Panel, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-42

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-4. DCP-85E Display Select Panel, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-43

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-5. DSP-85A Display Select Panel, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-44

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-6. DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-45

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 1 of 2). EFD-85 Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-46

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-7 (Sheet 2). EFD-85 Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-47

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 1 of 2). EFD-86 (-011, -012, -021, -022) Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-48

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-8 (Sheet 2). EFD-86 (-011, -012, -021, -022) Electronic Flight Display, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-49

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-9. EFD-86 (-013, -014, -023, -024) and EFD-86A (-011, -012, -021, -022) Electronic Flight Displays,
Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-50

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-10. MFD-85A Multifunction Display and IMT-300 Mount, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-51

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-11. MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-52

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-12. UMT-14 Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-53

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-14A Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-54

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-13 (Sheet 2). UMT-14A Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-55

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-14B Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-56

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-14 (Sheet 2). UMT-14B Mount for DPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-57

installation 523-0773949

This page intentionally blank.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-58

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-15. UMT-15 Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-59

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-16 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-15A Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-60

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-16 (Sheet 2). UMT-15A Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-61

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-17 (Sheet 1 of 2). UMT-15B Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-62

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-17 (Sheet 2). UMT-15B Mount for MPU-85( )/86( ), Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-63

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-18. WXP-85A/85C Weather Radar Panel, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-64

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-19. WXP-85B/85D Weather Radar Panel, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-65

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-20 (Sheet 1 of 2). IMT-85 Mounting Tray, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-66

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-20 (Sheet 2). IMT-85 Mounting Tray, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-67

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-21 (Sheet 1 of 2). FMM-85 (-001) Fan Monitor Module, Interconnect and Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-68

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-21 (Sheet 2). FMM-85 (-002) Fan Monitor Module, Interconnect and Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-69

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-22. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter, Outline and Mounting Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-70

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-23. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter, Interconnect Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 2-71

installation 523-0773949

Revised 12 May 1999 Figure 2-24. Wire Marking Standard 2-72

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 1 of 6). DPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-73

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 2). DPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-74

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 3). DPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-75

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 4). DPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-76

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 5). DPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-77

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-25 (Sheet 6). DPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-78

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-26. EFD-85/86( ) System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-79

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-27. MFD-85( ) System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-80

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-28 (Sheet 1 of 6). MPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-81

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-28 (Sheet 2). MPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-82

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-28 (Sheet 3). MPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-83

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-28 (Sheet 4). MPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-84

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-28 (Sheet 5). MPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-85

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-28 (Sheet 6). MPU-85H/86H System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-86

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-29. CHP-85D System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-87

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-30. CHP-86B System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-88

installation 523-0773949

Revised 12 May 1999 Figure 2-31. DCP-85E System Schematic 2-89

installation 523-0773949

Figure 2-32. DSP-85A System Schematic

Revised 12 May 1999 2-90

installation 523-0773949

2.7 POSTINSTALLATION C HECK

Ensure that all equipment connectors and mating connectors are securely mated. After all cabling has been
installed and equipment mounted in the aircraft, perform the following test procedure to verify the operation
of the EFIS. The test must be performed using the aircraft power supplies. The following test procedures are
intended only to ensure that the system equipments are properly connected. For a complete system test pro-
cedure, refer to the maintenance section of this instruction book. If a FAIL indication appears on any crt at
any time, perform the test procedures that are located in the maintenance section.

2.7.1 Test Equipment

The following systems or equivalent simulators must be operational to complete these tests:

a. Attitude/heading system
b. VOR/LOC/GS/DME simulator
c. Radar altitude simulator
d. Flight control system
e. Air data system

A VOR/LOC ramp test set that simulates localizer and glideslope transmitters is required to perform the
postinstallation test. This test set must have provisions for testing the localizer signal to 0.155 DDM and the
glideslope signal to 0.175 DDM. These modulation levels produce 2-dot indications on localizer and
glideslope deviation displays.

2.7.2 Checkout of EFIS-85B(3) /86B(3)

Note

Unless otherwise specified, the following steps refer to the no 1 side units, but should be repeated for
the no 2 side, reading all references to no 1 as no 2.

a. Preset DSP FORMAT switch to ROSE.

b. Apply aircraft power. Turn on cooling air blowers and apply power to EFIS equipment.
c. Push PWR button on MFD-85A.
d. Turn on FCS, NAV, DME, attitude/heading, air data, radio altitude, weather radar, and any other sys-
tem that supplies a sensor input to EFIS. Provide valid input signals to these sensors as required to
eliminate all warning flags.
Note

EFIS displays in this system flag certain sensor failures by removing affected display elements. To
be able to test these elements, it is necessary to supply valid sensor inputs.

e. Verify that no circuit breaker trips.

f. Verify that pictures appear on the EADI and EHSI. The EADI attitude and EHSI heading displays will
be random but should be steady.
g. Turn external DIM controls and verify that EADI and EHSI brightness is controlled.
h. Turn DSP DH SET knob. Verify that it controls DH display (lower right corner) on EADI.
i. Push TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob) and verify that both radio altitude and DH set values are
displayed on EADI. Release TST pushbutton.
j. Set DSP FORMAT switch to APPR and ENR positions. Verify that EHSI picture changes to an expanded
compass sector. Return FORMAT switch to ROSE position.
k. Rotate DSP CRS knob to each position and note that different navigation sources are displayed.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-91

installation 523-0773949

Note

Only those navigation sources enabled by interconnect strapping will be shown as possible selec-
tions.

l. Rotate BRG knob and verify that magenta bearing pointers are displayed. Also note that as DSP BRG
knob is rotated, navigation annunciators are displayed on EHSI.
m. Push DSP 2ND CRS button and verify a dual dashed shift course arrow appears on EHSI. Continue
pushing 2ND CRS button and verify different navigation sensors are displayed and annunciated.
n. Rotate DSP HDG knob and verify that heading bug moves.
o. Push HDG PUSH SYNC on DSP and verify that the heading bug rotates to match the airplane heading
under lubber line on EHSI.
p. Rotate CRS knob on DSP and verify that corresponding course arrow on EHSI moves.
q. Push CRS PUSH DIRECT button and verify that active course arrow automatically rotates directly to-
ward station or waypoint until navigation source selected provides zero crosstrack deviation.
r. Push NAV DTA switch on DSP to select ET on EHSI. An external ET button is required to control timer.
The timer has three modes: reset, start, and stop. Push external ET button several times and verify that
these actions occur.
s. Push ET button until timer starts counting. Push NAV DTA button to select GSP, then press it again to
return to ET. Verify that the timer was not disturbed and that it continued counting.
t. Go to paragraph 2.7.4 to continue testing.

2.7.3 Checkout of EFIS-85B(13 )/86B(13)

Note

Unless otherwise specified, the following steps refer to the no 1 side units, but should be repeated for
the no 2 side, reading all references to no 1 as no 2.

a. Preset DCP mode switch to HSI.

b. Apply aircraft power. Turn on cooling air blowers and apply power to the EFIS equipment.
1. Verify that no circuit breaker trips.
2. Verify that pictures appear on EADI and EHSI.
3. Turn DIM controls on DCP and verify that EADI and EHSI brightness is controlled.
c. Turn on FCS, NAV, DME, attitude/heading, air data, radio altitude, weather radar, and any other sys-
tem that supplies a sensor input to EFIS. Provide valid input signals to these sensors as required to
eliminate all warning flags.
Note

EFIS displays in this system flag certain sensor failures by removing affected display elements. To
be able to test these elements, it is necessary to supply valid sensor inputs.

d. Push PWR button on the MFD-85A. Let unit warm up while proceeding with the rest of the checkout.
e. Verify that displays appear on each side of EADI and EHSI. EADI attitude and EHSI heading displays
will be random but should be steady.
f. Adjust DCP intensity control and verify that it controls brightness of EADI and EHSI.
g. Adjust DCP DH SET knob. Verify that it controls DH display (lower right corner) on EADI.
h. Set DCP mode switch to ARC and MAP positions. Verify that EHSI picture changes to an expanded
compass sector. Return mode switch to HSI position.
i. Push RA TEST pushbutton and verify that both radio altitude and DH set value are displayed on EADI.
j. Push CRS ACT button and verify that navigation source appears flashing in a box at the left (or right, as
strapped) of the compass card.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-92

installation 523-0773949

k. Rotate DCP SEL/RNG knob one position at a time and note that different navigation sources are dis-
played.
Note

Only those navigation sources enabled by interconnect strapping will be shown as possible selec-
tions.

l. Push CRS ACT button again and verify that displayed navigation source is connected to active (solid)
course arrow, and the flashing white box is replaced with appropriate nonflashing annunciator.
m. Push BRG pushbutton and verify that a magenta bearing pointer is displayed. Also note that as DCP
SEL/RNG knob is rotated, navigation annunciators are displayed on EHSI.
n. Push CRS PRE button and verify navigation sources appear flashing in a box at the left of compass card
below the active course annunciator.
o. Rotate SEL/RNG knob one position at a time and note that different navigation sources are displayed.
p. Push CRS PRE button again and verify appropriate annunciator and dual-shifted dashed cyan course
pointer appears.
q. Push CRS XFR button. Verify that active course arrow and its identifier are removed from EHSI display;
that the preselected course arrow becomes a single solid line; that color changes to green (for on-side
navigation source) or yellow (for cross-side source); and that the identifier is moved to the upper (active)
location.
r. Rotate CHP HDG knob and verify that heading bug moves.
s. Push HDG PUSH SYNC on CHP and verify that heading bug rotates to match airplane heading under
lubber line on the EHSI.
t. Rotate each CRS knob on CHP and verify that corresponding course arrows on EHSI move.
u. Push CRS PUSH DIRECT button and verify that the pilot’s or copilot’s active course arrow (depending
on which button is pressed) automatically rotates directly toward station or waypoint until navigation
source selected provides zero crosstrack deviation.
v. Push CRS CTL button and verify that an appropriately colored knob symbol (green for on-side, yellow for
cross-side source, or cyan) is displayed next to navigation source annunciation to indicate which course
arrow is currently being controlled by the CRS knob.
w. Push NAV DTA switch on CHP to select ET on EHSI. The ET button controls timer. The timer has three
modes: reset, start, and stop. Push ET button several times and verify that these actions occur.
x. Push ET button until timer starts counting. Push NAV DTA button to select GSP, then press it again to
return to ET. Verify that timer was not disturbed and that it continued counting.

2.7.4 MFD-85A Checkout

a. Verify there is a picture on MFD-85A.

b. Push RDR button on MFD-85A. Verify the MFD-85A displays mode selected on WXP-85( ) control panel
(TEST, NORM, or MAP).
c. Push RDR button again. Verify that radar display is removed.
d. Push NAV button. Verify that a NAV display is shown. Then press the line select button opposite the
boxed arrow, verify the NAV menu appears for additional selections if desired.
e. Push NAV button again. Verify the NAV display reappears.
f. Push RMT button. Verify the RMT menu appears for additional selections if desired.

2.7.5 Self-Test Mode

Note

Self-test is enabled when an external installer-supplied switch or switches (labeled EFIS TEST or
similar) are actuated and held for longer than 4 seconds.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-93

installation 523-0773949

a. Initiate self-test mode and verify that an increment of 10 degrees is added to current values of pitch and
roll, and 20 degrees is added to the heading. A positive value is added to the pilot’s side; a negative value
to the copilot’s side.
b. Verify that PIT, ROL, and HDG comparator warning messages are displayed.
c. Verify that attitude display is removed from view and all flags associated with EADI and EHSI displays
are brought into view.
d. Release self-test switch and verify that displays return to normal operation.
e. Reset PIT, ROL, and HDG comparators by pressing internal installer supplied comparator reset button
or switch. Resetting the button or switch once stops indications from flashing. Resetting a second time
eliminates comparator messages if conditions causing comparator warning messages have been elimi-
nated.

Revised 12 May 1999 2-94

523-0773950-003118
3rd Edition, 12 May 1999

EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)

Electronic Flight Instrument Systems

Operation
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

3.7.7 Decision Height Display ...........................................................................3-19
3.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.7.8 Decision Height Annunciator....................................................................3-19
3.2 DCP-85E DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL (DCP), DISPLAYS AND 3.7.9 Radio Altitude Test....................................................................................3-19
CONTROLS DESCRIPTION............................................................. 3-1 3.7.10 Indicated Airspeed...................................................................................3-19
3.7.11 Speed Deviation .......................................................................................3-20
3.2.1 HSI-ARC-MAP Format Switch ...................................................................3-2 3.7.12 Flight Control Mode Annunciation.........................................................3-20
3.2.2 Range (SEL/RNG) Knob..............................................................................3-2 3.7.13 Autopilot/Yaw Damper and Trim Annunciation....................................3-27
3.2.3 Select (SEL/RNG) Knob ..............................................................................3-2 3.7.14 Marker Beacon Display ...........................................................................3-28
3.2.4 Course Active (CRS ACT), Course Preset (CRS PRE), and 3.7.15 Inclinometer .............................................................................................3-28
Bearing (BRG) Buttons ..............................................................................3-3 3.7.16 Category II Outputs.................................................................................3-28
3.2.5 Course Transfer (CRS XFR) Button ...........................................................3-4
3.2.6 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob..........................................................3-4 3.8 EHSI DISPLAY FORMATS ................................................................. 3-29
3.2.7 Radio Altimeter Test (RA TST) Pushbutton ..............................................3-4 3.8.1 ROSE Format (DSP-85A)/HSI Format (DCP-85E)..................................3-29
3.2.8 Weather Radar (RDR) Pushbutton.............................................................3-4 3.8.2 Approach (or ARC) Format (Figure 3-14).................................................3-36
3.2.9 DIM Control.................................................................................................3-4 3.8.3 Enroute (or MAP) Format (Figure 3-15) ..................................................3-39
3.3 CHP-85D/86B COURSE HEADING PANEL (CHP), DISPLAYS 3.9 EFIS COMPARATORS AND MASTER WARN .................................. 3-42
AND CONTROLS DESCRIPTION.................................................... 3-5
3.9.1 Master Warn ..............................................................................................3-42
3.3.1 Heading Select (HDG) Knob .......................................................................3-5 3.9.2 Comparator Reset ......................................................................................3-42
3.3.2 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC) Button ...............................................3-6 3.9.3 EADI Comparator Warnings ....................................................................3-43
3.3.3 Course Select (CRS) Knob...........................................................................3-6 3.9.4 EHSI Comparator Warnings.....................................................................3-43
3.3.4 Course Direct To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) Button .......................................3-6 3.9.5 Heading Comparator .................................................................................3-43
3.3.5 Course Control (CRS CTL) Button .............................................................3-6 3.9.6 Roll Comparator.........................................................................................3-44
3.3.6 Navigation Data (NAV DTA) Pushbutton..................................................3-6 3.9.7 Pitch Comparator ......................................................................................3-44
3.3.7 Elapsed Timer (ET) Mode Control..............................................................3-6 3.9.8 Category II Comparators...........................................................................3-45
3.4 DSP-85A DISPLAY SELECT PANEL (DSP), DISPLAYS AND 3.9.9 Category II Excessive Deviation Warnings..............................................3-47
CONTROLS DESCRIPTION............................................................. 3-7 3.9.10 EFIS System Flags ..................................................................................3-48
3.4.1 FORMAT Switch .........................................................................................3-7 3.10 MFD-85A MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY — DISPLAY
3.4.2 Range (RNG) Knob ......................................................................................3-8 FORMATS ......................................................................................... 3-48
3.4.3 Course (CRS) Switch ...................................................................................3-8 3.10.1 Standard MFD-85A Functions................................................................3-48
3.4.4 Bearing (BRG) Switch .................................................................................3-8 3.10.2 Additional MFD-85A Functions..............................................................3-49
3.4.5 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob..........................................................3-8 3.10.3 MFD-85A Display Formats .....................................................................3-50
3.4.6 Radio Altimeter Test (TST) Pushbutton ....................................................3-9 3.10.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD) Operation ..............................3-54
3.4.7 Navigation Data (NAV DTA) Pushbutton..................................................3-9 3.10.5 Page (PGE) and Emergency (EMG) Procedures ....................................3-57
3.4.8 Second Course (2ND CRS) Pushbutton......................................................3-9 3.10.6 EFIS Self-Test..........................................................................................3-62
3.4.9 Weather (WX) Pushbutton (Optional, not available on -103 status)........3-9
3.4.10 Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Pushbutton (Optional, will not be 3.11 REVERSIONARY MODES OF OPERATION................................... 3-63
on all DSP-85A’s) ........................................................................................3-9 3.11.1 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display (EFD) Failure..........................3-63
3.4.11 Heading Select Knob ...............................................................................3-10 3.11.2 DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit (DPU) Failure..........................3-63
3.4.12 Heading Sync (PUSH HDG SYNC) Button ...........................................3-10 3.11.3 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP) Failure........................................3-64
3.4.13 Course Select Knob..................................................................................3-10 3.11.4 DCP-85E Display Control Panel (DCP) Failure ....................................3-64
3.4.14 Course Direct To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) Button ...................................3-10 3.11.5 MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) Failure ..............3-64
3.11.6 MFD-85A Multifunction Display Failure...............................................3-64
3.5 MFD-85A MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY, OPERATING
3.11.7 Attitude Switching...................................................................................3-64
CONTROLS ...................................................................................... 3-10
3.11.8 Compass Switching..................................................................................3-65
3.6 WXP-85( ) WEATHER RADAR PANEL .............................................. 3-12 3.12 SUMMARY OF EFIS-85B SYMBOLOGY .......................................... 3-66
3.6.1 MODE Control ...........................................................................................3-12
3.6.2 GAIN-MAX/MIN Control ..........................................................................3-14 3.13 SUMMARY OF MFD-85A ANNUNCIATORS AND FLAGS............. 3-76
3.6.3 TILT Control..............................................................................................3-14
3.14 PROGRAMMING MFD-85A PAGE (PGE) AND EMERGENCY
3.6.4 RANGE Control .........................................................................................3-14
(EMG) DATA USING THE RDP-300 REMOTE DATA
3.6.5 Target Alert (TGT) Pushbutton ................................................................3-14
PROGRAMMER ................................................................................ 3-77
3.6.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton ............................................................................3-15
3.6.7 Stabilization (STB) Enable Pushbutton...................................................3-15 3.15 RDP-300 REMOTE DATA PROGRAMMER ..................................... 3-80
3.7 EFD-85/86( ) ELECTRONIC FLIGHT DISPLAY (EFD) 3.15.1 Programming the MFD-85A Multifunction Display..............................3-80
FORMATS......................................................................................... 3-15 3.15.2 Programming a New MFD-85A Multifunction Display.........................3-82
3.7.1 Attitude Display ........................................................................................3-16 3.15.3 Changing an Already Programmed MFD-85A Multifunction Display .....3-84
3.7.2 Attitude Sensor Annunciator....................................................................3-16 3.16 CEU-85 CHECKLIST ENTRY UNIT ................................................. 3-85
3.7.3 Flight Director Command Bar Display ....................................................3-16
3.7.4 Vertical Deviation Display........................................................................3-18 3.17 ADA-85 AIR DATA ADAPTER .......................................................... 3-86
3.7.5 Lateral Deviation Display.........................................................................3-18
3.7.6 Radio Altitude Display ..............................................................................3-19 3.18 FMM-85 FAN MONITOR MODULE.................................................. 3-87

NOTICE: This section replaces second edition dated 14 June 1989.

List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue
* Title ......................................... 12 May 99
* List of Effective Pages............. 12 May 99
* 3-1 thru 3-88 ............................ 12 May 99

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 28 Jan 87 None

2nd Ed 14 Jun 89 None

3rd Ed 12 May 99 None

section III
operation

3.1 GENERAL

This section of the EFIS instruction book contains a description of the EFIS controls and indicators. Each
unit is discussed in the following paragraphs.

3.2 DCP-85E DISPLAY CON TROL PANEL (DCP), DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS DESCRIPTION

Following is a brief description of the DCP controls. Refer to Figure 3-1.

The DCP provides the pilot with the controls needed to select the various operating formats and functions
for the EHSI. The DCP also provides EADI and EHSI dimming controls. The only other DCP controls
associated with the EADI are the DH SET knob and the radio altimeter test (RA TST) pushbutton. In
addition to the front panel controls, the DCP receives and stores course and heading information from the
CHP in nonvolatile memory and transmits it to the DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit associated with
that DCP. This same information is also transmitted to the MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit
where it is processed for display on the MFD-85A Multifunction Display. Appropriate DCP mode status
information (ie: decision height, HSI mode, and status of the auxiliary data, bearing pointer, and course
arrow/deviation bar) will be stored in nonvolatile memory when power is removed from the system. This
information is used to initialize the EFIS-85B system in the same configuration that it was in prior to power
down.

Figure 3-1. DCP-85E Display Control Panel, Controls and Indicators

Revised 12 May 1999 3-1

operation 523-0773950

3.2.1 HSI-ARC-MAP Format S witch

The 3-position HSI-ARC-MAP format switch controls the EHSI display format. In the HSI position, the
EHSI full compass rose format is displayed in a manner very similar to the conventional electromechanical
HSI. Information displayed includes compass heading, selected heading, selected VOR, localizer, MAZ, or
LNAV course and deviation (including annunciation of deviation type), navigation sensor annunciation,
digital selected course/desired track readout, excessive ILS deviation (when Category II configured), heading
sensor annunciation, ILS and heading comparator warnings (ILS only if Category II configured), to/from
information, back course annunciation, distance to station/waypoint, glideslope, MGP, or VNV deviation (if a
VNAV is installed in the aircraft), ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time or wind, preset course information
and source annunciation from a second navigation sensor, weather radar target alert, waypoint alert when
LNAV or RNAV is the navigation source, and a bearing pointer that can be driven by VOR, LNAV or ADF
sensors as selected on the DCP.

The ARC position selects an expanded compass segment (approximately 80 degrees) across the top of the
display with the airplane symbol at the bottom. This format gives the pilot information similar to that
presented in the full compass rose mode, in an enlarged, easily readable format. The preset second course
navigation sensor (if selected by the CRS PRE button on the DCP) is shown by the VOR or waypoint symbol
and identifier placed in proper rho-theta position with respect to the aircraft symbol and selected range.
Weather radar information can also be displayed in this format.

The MAP position also uses the expanded compass segment but places VOR and/or waypoint symbols for
both active selected course and preset second course in proper rho-theta position with respect to the aircraft
symbol and selected range. A selected course line is drawn through the VOR symbol with its position
controlled by the CRS knob on the CHP. The station ident is displayed next to the VOR symbol on the side
nearest the center of the display. Waypoint strings (up to three waypoints) are shown with the waypoint
number next to the symbol and with the symbols connected by desired track lines. Weather radar
information can also be displayed in this format.

For both the ARC and MAP formats, range is selected from the DCP when weather radar mode is not
selected, or from the WXP when weather radar mode is selected.

Note

The following definition of on-side sensors and cross-side sensors are used throughout this operation
section: The on-side sensor is the navigation sensor normally associated with the side on which the
displays appear. For example, for the pilot, the on-side sensors are VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc. The
cross-side sensors for the pilot are VOR 2, LNV 2, DME 2, etc. Conversely, for the copilot, the on-side
sensors are VOR 2, LNV 2, DME 2 etc, and the cross-side sensors are VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc.

3.2.2 Range (SEL/RNG) Knob

Rotating the SEL/RNG knob selects range on the EHSI when in ARC or MAP format when weather radar
mode (RDR button) is not selected, and when the knob is not being used to select a navigation sensor. A
single cyan dashed range mark is in the center of the display and one half of the full-scale range is displayed
at the right end of the range arc. Available full scale ranges are 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 300, and 600 nm.

3.2.3 Select (SEL/RNG) Knob

Rotating the SEL/RNG knob allows the available EHSI navigation sensors to be scanned when the
appropriate menu mode is selected as described below.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-2

operation 523-0773950

3.2.4 Course Active (CRS ACT ), Course Preset (CRS PRE), and Bearing (BRG) Buttons

The three DCP buttons (CRS ACT, CRS PRE, and BRG) are used in conjunction with the SEL/RNG knob to
control the selection of navigation sensors to be connected to the EHSI active selected course arrow, the
preset second course arrow, and the bearing pointer. Strapping in the interconnect wiring allows only a
certain subset of the possible navigation sources to be scanned by the SEL/RNG knob and selected by the
CRS ACT, CRS PRE, or BRG pushbuttons. Once a selection has been made, that selection is retained until
changed by the user, even when power is removed from the system.

a. Course Active (CRS ACT) Button

The CRS ACT button is used in conjunction with the SEL knob to select the navigation source for the
active (solid) selected course arrow. Pressing the CRS ACT button once selects the menu mode and
causes the last selected navigation sensor to appear nonflashing in white in a flashing white box at the
left center of the display. Depending on interconnect wiring strapping, rotating the SEL/RNG knob will
scan the available navigation sensors and cause the available sensors to appear flashing in the white box
as follows:
VOR1 LOC1 RNV1 INS1 VLF1 LRN1 LNV1
VOR2 LOC2 RNV2 INS2 VLF2 LRN2 LNV2

Note

Only those navigation sensors enabled by strapping in the interconnect wiring will be shown as
possible selections.

When the desired sensor is displayed, pressing the CRS ACT button a second time connects that sensor
to the active (solid) selected course arrow, and the white box will be replaced with the appropriate
nonflashing annunciator. If the navigation sensor is on-side VOR/LOC the navigation sensor
annunciator is green. If the navigation sensor is an on-side LNAV the annunciator is white. The
annunciators are yellow for all cross-side navigation sensors. The information shown on the active
selected course arrow is being supplied to the on-side flight control system. Pressing the CRS ACT
button twice, without rotating the SEL/RNG knob, reenables the previous navigation sensor. When the
selection is incomplete, the box will flash.
b. Preset Second Course (CRS PRE) Button
The CRS PRE button is also used in conjunction with the SEL/RNG knob to select a second navigation
sensor for the cyan colored preset (dual dashed line) second course arrow. The selection procedure is
similar to that for the active selected course arrow except that if the CRS PRE button is pressed twice
without rotating the SEL/RNG knob, the preset course arrow will be removed from the EHSI display.
This feature allows presetting a course and then recalling it when desired. The preset second course is
used for reference only and the information shown is not available to the flight control system and VOR
deviation is always angular. The navigation sensor selected for the preset second course appears in a box
in cyan at the left of the display immediately below the navigation sensor annunciation for the active
selected course.
c. Bearing (BRG) Button
The BRG button operates the same as the CRS PRE button, except when first pressed, it calls up a
magenta bearing pointer and a navigation sensor annunciator for the bearing pointer. The sensor
annunciation is in the lower left with the letters BRG, in magenta, above the sensor type. If the sensor is
an on-side VOR or ADF, the sensor annunciation is green. If the sensor is an on-side LNAV, the sensor
annunciation is white. All cross-side sensors are annunciated in yellow. Depending on interconnect
wiring strapping, rotating the SEL/RNG knob will scan the available navigation sensors and cause the
available sensors to appear as follows:
ADF1 VOR1 RNV1 INS1 VLF1 LRN1 LNV1
ADF2 VOR2 RNV2 INS2 VLF2 LRN2 LNV2

Revised 12 May 1999 3-3

operation 523-0773950

Note

Only those navigation sensors enabled by strapping in the interconnect wiring will be shown as
possible selections.

Rotating the SEL/RNG knob will cause the sensor annunciation to change from one sensor to the next.
Pressing the BRG button again connects that source to the bearing pointer. Pressing the BRG button twice
without rotating the SEL/RNG knob will remove the bearing pointer from the EHSI display.

3.2.5 Course Transfer (CRS X FR) Button

The preset second course may be automatically selected as the active selected course by pressing the CRS
XFR button. When the CRS XFR button is pressed, the current active course arrow and its identifier are
removed from the EHSI display, the preset course arrow becomes a single solid line, the color changes to the
active color, and the navigation sensor annunciator is moved to the upper (active) location. The previous
active selected course sensor now becomes the preset second course and is removed from the display. It may
be recalled as the dual dashed cyan preset second course by pressing the CRS PRE button twice.

Note

Depending on the aircraft installation, if the FCS is not in HDG mode and the source for the active
course arrow is changed or if the CRS XFR function is selected on the DCP, the FCS will
automatically clear to heading hold mode and the NAV mode must be reengaged if desired.

3.2.6 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob

The DH knob is used to set the decision height displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the EADI.
Clockwise rotation of the knob increases decision height. The DH set value is held in nonvolatile memory
when power is removed from the unit.

3.2.7 Radio Altimeter Test (RA TST) Pushbutton

The RA TST pushbutton is a momentary action switch that enables the radio altimeter test function. When
pressed, the EADI displays the radio altitude that is output by the radio altimeter when it is in self-test. DH
annunciation is displayed if the DH set value is greater than the test altitude.

3.2.8 Weather Radar (RDR) P ushbutton

The RDR button adds weather radar information to the EHSI when ARC or MAP formats are being
displayed and WX or NORM mode has been selected on the WXP. At power on, radar data is not displayed.
The first press of the RDR button adds weather radar information to the display. The second press removes
the weather radar information.

When weather radar information is being displayed, range is controlled by the RANGE switch on the WXP-
85( ) Weather Radar Panel. The range will appear at the right end of a solid cyan range mark (center of the
EHSI) and the weather radar mode will appear at the left end of the range mark.

3.2.9 DIM Control

The DIM control consists of a pair of concentric knobs to control each crt’s intensity. One knob controls the
EADI; the other controls the EHSI. The knobs are sized so that they normally turn together, but may be
turned independently to balance the displays.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-4

operation 523-0773950

3.3 CHP-85D/86B COURSE HE ADING PANEL (CHP), DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS DESCRIPTION

Following is a brief description of the CHP controls. Refer to Figure 3-2.

The CHP provides control of the course and heading select functions for various configurations of the EFIS-
85B systems. The CHP provides outputs to the DCP’s where the data is stored in nonvolatile memory and
sent to the respective DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit associated with that DCP.

The CHP-85D provides two CRS select controls (one for each half of a 5-tube system) with a common HDG
select function. The CHP-86B provides a single CRS select control and a single HDG select control, and can
be used with any configuration of the EFIS-85B system. The panels also provide for selection of course direct
to and heading sync. Additionally, ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, and wind direction/speed are
selected from the CHP. An ET button for initiating and completing timing functions is also provided. The
CHP-85D provides dual independent ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time, and wind direction/speed
capabilities. In the 5-tube EFIS system, one CHP-85D or two CHP-86B’s are required.

3.3.1 Heading Select (HDG) K nob

A single HDG knob in the center of the CHP-85D is used to simultaneously position the heading cursors on
both of the EHSI’s. The HDG select knob on the CHP-86B controls the heading cursor on only one side of the
aircraft (two CHP-86B’s are required for a 5-tube EFIS-85B system). In an installation with two CHP-86B’s,
the HDG knob on the left side CHP also controls the heading cursor on the MFD unless control has been
transferred to the right side. Each heading knob is connected to an increment/decrement encoder that
controls circuitry in one of the DCP’s. The actual selected course values are stored in nonvolatile memory.

Figure 3-2. CHP-85D and CHP-86B Course Heading Panels, Controls and Indicators

Revised 12 May 1999 3-5

operation 523-0773950

3.3.2 Heading Sync (PUSH HD G SYNC) Button

The HDG knob includes a PUSH HDG SYNC button which, when pressed, causes the heading cursor to
rotate and match the airplane heading under the lubber line on the EHSI.

3.3.3 Course Select (CRS) Kno b

Two selected CRS knobs (CRS 1 and CRS 2) are located on the CHP-85D; one for the course arrow on the
pilot’s EHSI and one for the copilot’s EHSI. The single CRS select knob on the CHP-86B controls the course
arrow on only one side of the aircraft (two CHP-86B’s are required for a 5-tube EFIS-85B system). Each
course select knob is connected to an increment/decrement encoder that controls circuitry in one of the
DCP’s. The actual selected course values are stored in nonvolatile memory.

3.3.4 Course Direct To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) Button

The CRS knob includes a center PUSH CRS DIRECT button which provides a direct-to function. When the
PUSH CRS DIRECT button is pushed, the course arrow associated with the CRS CTL button is
automatically rotated directly toward the station until the VOR deviation is zero.

3.3.5 Course Control (CRS CT L) Button

The CRS CTL button determines whether the course knob is controlling the active selected course arrow or
the preset second course arrow. An appropriately colored knob shaped course control annunciator symbol
(green for VOR/LOC, white for LNAV, or yellow for active selected course depending on whether the
navigation sensor is on-side or cross-side, or cyan for preset second course) is displayed next to the
navigation sensor annunciation to indicate which course arrow is currently being controlled by the CRS
knob.

3.3.6 Navigation Data (NAV D TA) Pushbutton

The NAV DTA button provides sequential display of TTG (time to go), GSP (ground speed), ET (elapsed
time), or wind information (if available) in the upper right corner of the EHSI. Time-to-go and ground speed
are associated with the navigation sensor currently driving the active selected course arrow. Wind, time-to-
go, and ground speed displays are dashed if valid data is not being received.

3.3.7 Elapsed Timer (ET) Mod e Control

When ET mode has been selected by pressing the NAV DTA button, the output from an elapsed timer is
displayed on the EHSI. The timer is controlled by the ET button on the CHP. The timer has three modes:
reset, start, and stop. Each time the external switch is actuated, the timer advances to the next mode in the
sequence. In reset mode, the display will indicate 00:00. When start mode is initiated, the timer begins
counting. Minutes and seconds are displayed in XX:XX format from 00:00 to 59:59. Continuing from 59:59,
the format switches to HZ:XX, displaying hours and minutes from H1:00 to H9:59. Beyond H9:59, the
display indicates —:— (overrun). Going to stop mode stops the timer, and the present count on the display is
held until the timer sequence is advanced to reset mode again. After the timer is counting, TTG, GSP or
wind can be selected via the NAV DTA button without disturbing the ET count. NAV DTA selection is stored
in nonvolatile memory and the last selection will appear at the next power on. If ET is that selection, the
display will reset to 00:00 at power on.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-6

operation 523-0773950

3.4 DSP-85A DISPLAY SELEC T PANEL (DSP), DISPLAYS AND CONTROLS DESCRIPTION

Following is a brief description of the DSP controls. Refer to Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3. Display Select Panel, Controls and Indicators

The DSP provides for pilot input of selected heading and selected course for the EFIS system as well as
providing the user with the controls needed to select the various operating formats and functions for the
EHSI. The DSP controls associated with the EADI are the DH SET knob, the radio altimeter test (TST)
pushbutton, and the VNAV button (if the airplane is equipped with a VNAV system). In addition to the front
panel controls, the DSP stores course and heading information in nonvolatile memory and transmits it to the
DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit associated with that DSP. This same information is also transmitted
to the MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit where it is processed for display on the MFD-85A
Multifunction Display.

3.4.1 FORMAT Switch

The 3-position FORMAT switch controls the EHSI display format. In the ROSE position, the EHSI full
compass rose format is displayed in a manner very similar to the conventional electromechanical HSI.
Information displayed includes compass heading, selected heading, selected VOR, localizer, MAZ, or LNAV
course and deviation (including annunciation of deviation type), navigation source annunciation, digital
selected course/desired track readout, excessive ILS deviation (when Category II configured), heading source
annunciation, ILS and heading comparator warnings (ILS only if Category II configured), to/from
information, back localizer annunciation, distance to station/waypoint, glideslope, MGP, or VNAV deviation
(VNAV not available when certain statuses of the DSP are used), ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time or
wind, course information and source annunciation from a second navigation source, weather radar target
alert, waypoint alert when LNAV or RNAV is the navigation source, and a bearing pointer that can be
driven by VOR, LNAV or ADF sources as selected on the display select panel.

The APPR (approach) position selects an expanded compass segment (approximately 80 degrees) across the
top of the display with the airplane symbol at the bottom. This format gives the pilot information similar to
that presented in the full compass rose mode, in an enlarged, easily readable format. The second course
navigation sensor (if selected by the 2ND CRS button on the DSP) is shown by the VOR or waypoint symbol
and identifier placed in proper rho-theta position with respect to the airplane symbol and selected range.
Weather radar information can also be displayed in this format.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-7

operation 523-0773950

The ENR (enroute) position also uses the expanded compass segment but places VOR and/or waypoint
symbols for both primary and second course in proper rho-theta position with respect to the airplane symbol
and selected range. A selected course line is drawn through the VOR symbol with its position controlled by
the CRS knob on the DSP. The station ident is displayed next to the VOR symbol on the side nearest the
center of the display. Waypoint strings (up to three waypoints) are shown with the waypoint number next to
the symbol and with the symbols connected by desired track lines. Weather radar information can also be
displayed in this format.

For both the APPR and ENR formats, range is selected from the DSP when weather radar mode is not
selected, or from the WXP when weather radar mode is selected.

Note

The following definition of on-side sources and cross-side sources are used throughout this operation
section: The on-side source is the navigation source normally associated with the side on which the
displays appear. For example, for the pilot, the on-side sources are VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc. The
cross-side sources for the pilot are VOR 2, LNV 2, DME 2, etc. Conversely, for the copilot, the on-side
sources are VOR 2, LNV 2, DME 2 etc, and the cross-side sources are VOR 1, LNV 1, DME 1, etc.

3.4.2 Range (RNG) Knob

The RNG knob, concentric with the FORMAT switch, selects range on the EHSI when in APPR or ENR
format and when weather radar mode (WX button) is not selected. A single cyan dashed range mark is in the
center of the display and one half of the full-scale range is displayed at the right end of the range arc.
Available full scale ranges are 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, 300, and 600 nm.

3.4.3 Course (CRS) Switch

The rotary CRS switch selects the navigation sensor to be displayed on the primary course arrow (solid
single bar course arrow) on the EHSI. The three possible selections are OFF, VOR/LOC, and LNAV (lateral
navigation system). The applicable navigation sensor is annunciated at the left center of the display. In the
OFF position, no course arrow is displayed but a magenta heading line connects the airplane symbol and the
heading cursor if in APPR or ENR format. The sensors driving the primary course arrow in the VOR/LOC
and LNAV positions are strapped for sensor 1 or sensor 2 at the time of installation.

3.4.4 Bearing (BRG) Switch

The rotary BRG switch selects the navigation sensor to be displayed on the EHSI bearing pointer. The five
possible selections are OFF (no bearing pointer display), VOR 1, VOR 2, WPT, and ADF. The sensors driving
the bearing pointer in the WPT and ADF positions are strapped for sensor 1 or sensor 2 at the time of
installation.

3.4.5 Decision Height Set (DH SET) Knob

The DH SET knob is used to set the decision height displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the EADI.
Clockwise rotation of the knob increases decision height. The DH SET value is held in nonvolatile memory
when power is removed from the unit.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-8

operation 523-0773950

3.4.6 Radio Altimeter Test (TS T) Pushbutton

The TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob) is a momentary action switch that enables the radio altimeter
test function. When pressed, the EADI displays the radio altitude that is output by the radio altimeter when
it is in self-test (50 ft for ALT-50/55). DH annunciation is displayed if the DH SET value is greater than the
test altitude.

3.4.7 Navigation Data (NAV D TA) Pushbutton

The NAV DTA button provides sequential display of TTG (time-to-go), GSP (ground speed), ET (elapsed
time), or wind information (if available) in the upper right corner of the EHSI. Time-to-go and ground speed
are associated with the navigation sensor currently driving the primary course arrow. Wind, time-to-go, and
ground speed displays are dashed if valid data is not being received.

When ET mode has been selected by pressing the NAV DTA button, the output from an elapsed timer is
displayed on the EHSI. The timer is controlled by an external airframe supplied switch. The timer has three
modes: reset, start, and stop. Each time the external switch is actuated, the timer advances to the next mode
in the sequence. In reset mode, the display will indicate 00:00. When start mode is initiated, the timer
begins counting. Minutes and seconds are displayed in XX:XX format from 00:00 to 59:59. Continuing from
59:59, the format switches to HZ:XX, displaying hours and minutes from H1:00 to H9:59. Beyond H9:59, the
display indicates —:— (overrun). Going to stop mode stops the timer, and the present count on the display is
held until the timer sequence is advanced to reset mode again. After the timer is counting, TTG, GSP or
wind can be selected via the NAV DTA button without disturbing the ET count. NAV DTA selection is stored
in nonvolatile memory and the last selection will appear at the next power on. If ET is that selection, the
display will reset to 00:00 at power on.

3.4.8 Second Course (2ND CR S) Pushbutton

The 2ND CRS button allows information from a second navigation source to be displayed on the EHSI. The
second course arrow is displayed in cyan as a solid arrowhead with a dual dashed shaft. The applicable
navigation sensor is annunciated in cyan below the primary course arrow sensor annunciator. At power on,
no second course is displayed. The first press of the 2ND CRS button annunciates LNV1 and the selected
sensor is LNAV 1. The second press of the 2ND CRS button annunciates LNV2 and the selected sensor is
LNAV 2 (this selection may be inhibited as an installation option). The third press of the 2ND CRS button
annunciates VOR1, and the fourth press annunciates VOR2. The next press of the 2ND CRS button turns
the second course arrow off again.

3.4.9 Weather (WX) Pushbutto n (Optional, not available on -103 status)

The WX button adds weather radar information to the EHSI when APPR or ENR formats are being
displayed and WX or NORM mode has been selected on the WXP. At power on, radar data is not displayed.
The first press of the WX button adds weather radar information to the display. The second press removes
the weather radar information.

When weather radar information is being displayed, range is controlled by the RANGE switch on the WXP-
85( ) Weather Radar Panel. The range will appear at the right end of the cyan range mark (center of the
EHSI) and the weather radar mode will appear at the left end of the range mark.

3.4.10 Vertical Navigation (VN AV) Pushbutton (Optional, will not be on all DSP-85A’s)

The VNAV button enables the presentation of vertical navigation data on the EHSI. At power on, vertical
navigation data is not displayed. The first press of the VNAV button adds vertical navigation data to the
display. The second press removes the vertical navigation data.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-9

operation 523-0773950

When using a digital VNAV unit, it is possible to receive VNAV and glideslope data at the same time. In this
case, glideslope will be displayed on the EADI and VNAV on the EHSI. When glideslope capture occurs,
VNAV will automatically be replaced by GS on the EHSI. It should be noted that VNAV data will never
appear on the EADI.

3.4.11 Heading Select Knob

The heading knob is used to position the heading cursor on the on-side EHSI. The heading knob on the left
side DSP also controls the heading cursor on the MFD unless control has been transferred to the right side.
The heading knob is continuously variable and the selected heading value is stored in nonvolatile memory.
This value is retained if power is lost.

3.4.12 Heading Sync (PUSH HD G SYNC) Button

The heading knob includes a PUSH HDG SYNC button which, when pressed, causes the heading cursor to
rotate and match the airplane heading under the lubber line on the EHSI.

3.4.13 Course Select Knob

The course knob controls the position of the VOR course arrow for the on-side VOR. The course knob is
continuously variable and the selected course value is stored in nonvolatile memory. This value is retained if
OFF or LNAV is selected and/or power is lost.

3.4.14 Course Direct To (PUSH CRS DIRECT) Button

The course knob includes a center PUSH CRS DIRECT button which provides a direct to function. When the
PUSH CRS DIRECT button is pushed and if VOR is the navigation sensor being displayed on the primary
course arrow, the course arrow is automatically rotated directly toward the station until the VOR deviation
is zero.

3.5 MFD-85A MULTIFUNCT ION DISPLAY, OPERATING CONTROLS

Following is a brief description of the MFD and its controls. Refer to Figure 3-4.

The multifunction display is a multicolor crt display unit that mounts in the instrument panel in the space
normally occupied by the weather radar indicator. Standard display functions include weather radar,
pictorial navigation map, and page data. Additional functions are available when the multifunction display
is used with a flight management system such as the Collins FMS-90, and includes waypoint definition,
display of multiple waypoints, and remote data.

PWR (power) Used to turn the MFD on or off. The mode that was selected when power is turned off
will be automatically reselected when power is reapplied.

Caution

If the MFD PWR button is off or if the RDR button is off, the radar receiver/transmitter may still be
transmitting. This will occur if the MODE switch on the WXP is in WX, NORM, or MAP position,
and could possibly result in injury to ground personnel.

RDR (radar) Allows detectable weather to be displayed (can be used with NAV button).

NAV (navigation) Enables navigation data to be selected and displayed (can be used with RDR button).

Revised 12 May 1999 3-10

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-4. MFD-85A Multifunction Display, Operating Controls

RMT (remote) Enables up to four remote sources of page data to be selected and displayed one at a
time.

PGE (page) or Allows user selection, control, and entry of alphanumeric information. Up to 100
EMG (emergency) pages of information is selectable for combined page and emergency use.

DATA jack Allows for remote programming, indexing, and revision of page and emergency data.
The Collins RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer or the CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit
is plugged into the DATA jack.

INT (intensity) Provides an adjustable intensity control for MFD-85A display brightness.

Display select The four unlabeled pushbuttons on the right provide additional display control for
pushbuttons navigation, page, emergency, and remote modes of operation. Appropriate labels are
displayed to the left of these buttons when procedures dictate menu functions such as
index or sensor selection.

Joystick The “joystick” is a multiple position switch (lower right corner) which is used in NAV,
RMT, PGE, and EMG mode operations. In NAV mode, the joystick locates an MFD
enterable waypoint that can be transferred to the lateral navigation system, if
capable of receiving data. In RMT mode, the joystick can be used to slew through
pages or chapters of data if the remote system has the proper interface. In PGE or
EMG mode, the joystick is used to view different chapter titles and to move to new
chapters.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-11

operation 523-0773950

Line reverse Moves the cursor back (up the list) in the PGE or EMG modes and increases NAV
(delta, ∆) map range when RDR is not selected.

Line advance Moves the cursor ahead (down the list) in the PGE or EMG modes and decreases
(inverted delta, ∇) NAV map range when RDR is not selected.

Note

The line advance and reverse buttons change the navigation map range when the radar display is
not active. A 5- and 600-nmi range is also available with midrange mark annunciations of 2.5 and
300 nmi, respectively, when RDR is not selected. When RDR is selected and the WXP mode switch is
in TEST, WX, NORM, or MAP, the radar range control has priority over the navigation map range.

RCL (recall) Allows viewing of previously skipped lines when in the PGE or EMG mode. If in PGE
or EMG mode and NAV or RMT is selected, then pressing RCL immediately returns
the display to the line in the PGE or EMG chapter that was being displayed prior to
selecting NAV or RMT.

SKP (skip) Moves the cursor past a line in the PGE or EMG mode without changing its color.
This line is recallable at any time prior to chapter exit.

CLR (clear) Resets all lines of a selected chapter to yellow when in the PGE or EMG mode.

3.6 WXP-85( ) WEATHER RAD AR PANEL

The WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel provides the data processing, mode control, range selection, and system
operating controls for the display of weather radar information on the MFD-85A Multifunction Display and
the EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display. The WXP-85C and -85D are identical in appearance to earlier
WXP-85A and -85B versions, but are different in function. The WXP-85C and -85D both provide a 5-color
(black, green, yellow, red, magenta) display with PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correction). The purpose of
the PAC Alert feature is to alert the pilot when the radar encounters a target having rainfall rates heavy
enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets behind it may be hidden. With the PAC Alert feature, a
yellow band will occasionally appear at the outer perimeter of the range being displayed. Whenever this
band appears, that portion of the radar’s scan may be missing certain distant targets that are masked by
intervening areas of rainfall.

The following paragraphs describe the WXP-85C and -85D. If a WXP-85A or -85B is installed, there will be
no fifth color (magenta) or PAC Alert feature. Refer to Figure 3-5.

3.6.1 MODE Control

The MODE control is a rotary switch that is used to select the various operating modes of the weather radar
system. These modes are as follows:

OFF — Removes power from the weather radar receiver/transmitter. (The MFD has a separate PWR switch
that must be on in order for the MFD to operate.)

STBY — Power is applied to the radar system and a 60-second warmup period is initiated for the WXT-250B
receiver/transmitter. The weather display, radar transmitter, and radar antenna scan drive circuits are
inhibited during the 60-second warmup period and whenever STBY is selected. Approximately 20 seconds
after turning the MFD PWR switch on, one cyan range mark, a white airplane symbol, a white compass
sector, the yellow target alert (if target alert is enabled), and the word STBY should all appear on the MFD

Revised 12 May 1999 3-12

operation 523-0773950

(adjust INT control on the MFD as required). STBY will also appear at the left end of the range mark on the
EHSI if weather radar is selected.

Figure 3-5. WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel, Controls and Indicators

TEST — Initiates the radar self-test function. After system warmup time (approximately 60 seconds) has
elapsed, the radar self-test display should appear. For a normal-size test pattern, the 25-nmi RANGE should
be selected. Selecting other ranges will increase or decrease the test pattern size, resulting in an incomplete
test pattern. TEST will be displayed in the upper left of the MFD and at the left end of the range mark on
the EHSI if weather radar is selected.

WX — The radar antenna begins to scan and after the 60-second warmup period has elapsed, the radar
transmitter is energized. This position also selects the weather detection mode and enables the automatic
cyclic contour circuits. Contouring storm cells alternate between red and black at a one-cycle-per-second
rate. Detectable weather will appear as one of five colors: black, green, yellow, red, and magenta (least
reflective to most reflective). The radar’s STC (sensitivity time control) circuit allows distant targets to
appear with the same relative brightness or intensity as close-in targets.

When using a WXP-85C or -85D with WX mode selected, the PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correction)
feature is automatically enabled. The purpose of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the radar encounters a
target having rainfall rates heavy enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets behind it may not be
displayed. With the PAC Alert feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear at the outer perimeter of the
range being displayed. Whenever this band appears, that portion of the radar’s scan may be missing certain
distant targets that are masked by intervening areas of rainfall.

NORM — Same as WX mode except automatic cyclic contour circuits are disabled. The most reflective
targets will appear in magenta, and indicate rainfall rates of two inches per hour or more. The next most
reflective targets will appear in solid red (will not alternate between red and black). NORM is displayed in
the upper left of the MFD and at the left end of the range mark on the EHSI if weather radar is selected.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-13

operation 523-0773950

MAP — Selecting MAP mode also disables the automatic cyclic contour circuits. MAP and range
annunciators will be displayed in cyan. Ground targets will appear in cyan, yellow, and magenta (least
reflective to most reflective).

3.6.2 GAIN-MAX/MIN Control

The GAIN-MAX/MIN control is a 5-position switch that controls the gain of the radar receiver. The highest
gain occurs in MAX position, with each of the other four positions reducing receiver sensitivity by 6 dB for a
total reduction of 24 dB in the MIN position. The GAIN-MAX/MIN control can be used with the WX, NORM,
and MAP modes. The ability of a target to be displayed is dependent on the particular GAIN setting used.
All detectable targets will be shown in one of four distinct colors: green, yellow, red, magenta (least reflective
to most reflective) for WX and NORM; or cyan, yellow, magenta (least to most reflective) for MAP plus the
black indicator screen. If any GAIN position except MAX is selected, the mode annunciator (upper left corner
of MFD and left end of range mark on EHSI if weather radar is selected) will alternate between GAIN and
the selected mode at a 1-Hz rate (that is, GAIN-MAP-GAIN-MAP, etc). The alternating words serve to
remind the user that the system is operating in a reduced gain condition and some targets may not be
displayed.

3.6.3 TILT Control

The radar antenna is fully stabilized in both the pitch and roll axis. The TILT control manually adjusts the
pitch axis of the stabilized radar antenna from approximately +15 to –15 degrees to allow the best target
presentation. (When stabilization (STB) is on, the TILT control continues to function.)

3.6.4 RANGE Control

The RANGE control is a rotary switch that is used to select the maximum display range of the weather
radar system. All of the selected ranges provide one range mark in the center of the display with half-scale
range annunciation at the right hand end of the range mark. The selectable ranges and range mark
annunciations are as follows:

SELECTED RANGE, NMI (MAXIMUM) RANGE MARK ANNUNCIATION

10 5
25 12.5
50 25
100 50
200 100
300 150

3.6.5 Target Alert (TGT) Push button

The target alert feature notifies the user when a return signal of contour strength is detected within 60 to
160 nmi and ±15 degrees of dead ahead, regardless of RANGE selected. The TGT pushbutton is a latching
push-on/push-off switch. If RDR has been selected on the MFD with target alert enabled on the WXP and not
in OFF, STBY, or MAP mode, a yellow box with the yellow letter T inscribed will appear nonflashing to the
right of the lubber line on both the EHSI and the MFD. The T annunciation will flash when a target is
detected. The target alert function is automatically enabled on the MFD (but not the EHSI’s) for all other
MFD formats (NAV, RMT, PGE, and EMG) regardless of the position of the WXP TGT pushbutton. If the
TGT switch is on and MAP mode is selected, the target alert circuits are disabled (T will not be displayed)
but will again become functional when WX or NORM mode is reselected on the WXP.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-14

operation 523-0773950

3.6.6 Hold (HLD) Pushbutton

Pressing the nonlatching momentary action HLD button allows the weather display on the MFD and EHSI
(if weather radar is selected) to be frozen until the button is pressed again, or until power is removed from
the system. Target updating will not occur when operating in the HOLD mode. The weather radar mode
annunciator (upper left corner of MFD and left end of range mark on EHSI if weather radar is selected) will
alternate between HOLD and the selected mode at a 1-Hz rate (HOLD-WX-HOLD-WX, etc). The alternating
words serve to remind the pilot that the system is in the HOLD mode and the weather radar display is not
being updated.

Note

If the GAIN-MAX/MIN control is not at MAX gain and hold (HLD) is selected, the weather radar
mode annunciator in the upper left corner of the MFD and the left end of the EHSI range mark will
alternate between GAIN and HOLD at a 1-Hz rate with no operating mode displayed.

3.6.7 Stabilization (STB) Ena ble Pushbutton

The latching push on/push off STB switch enables or disables the radar antenna pitch and roll stabilization
circuits. The switch is normally pushed in to the on position. The switch is out to the off position in case of
gyro input signal failure to the radar antenna.

3.7 EFD-85/86( ) ELECTRON IC FLIGHT DISPLAY (EFD) FORMATS

The EFD is a high-resolution, multicolor crt display unit that contains the crt, deflection yoke, video and
deflection amplifiers, and a high-voltage power supply. Both stroke writing and raster scanning techniques
are used to provide large area color background and sharp alphanumerics and symbols with greater than
normal illumination. An EFD may be used as either an electronic attitude director indicator (EADI) or an
electronic horizontal situation indicator (EHSI). An inclinometer may be mounted to either EFD. With the
addition of the inclinometer, that EFD normally becomes the EADI. Refer to Figure 3-6 through Figure 3-15.

The EADI has one basic mode of operation which provides attitude, FCS mode annunciation, vertical
deviation, autopilot engage status, attitude comparator warnings, and decision height set. Several additional
parameters are available as a function of pilot selection or operational mode of the airplane, and include the
following:

a. Attitude source (ATT1 or ATT2)

b. Flight director commands
c. Vertical deviation (Glideslope displayed only when an LOC frequency is tuned and not in back course
condition)
d. Lateral deviation (VOR, LOC, RNV, INS, VLF, LRN, or LNV)
e. Radio altitude is displayed only when the radio altimeter system is within range or in test
f. CAT II excessive deviation and comparator warning
g. Speed deviation from angle-of-attack system or analog airspeed
h. Marker beacon annunciation
i. Air data information (indicated airspeed, airspeed trend)

In addition, interconnect wiring straps allow several EADI format changes to be made. These are:

j. V-bar commands or crosspointer commands (and airplane symbol style)

k. Inhibit speed command display
l. Rising runway symbol or no rising runway symbol
m. Composite format or no composite format in reversionary mode
n. Inhibit display of digital air data parameters

Revised 12 May 1999 3-15

operation 523-0773950

3.7.1 Attitude Display

Pitch and roll attitude are indicated by the position of the blue sky and brown ground area containing the
pitch scale with reference to the airplane symbol. The airplane symbol is either a yellow triangular-shaped
outline with a black interior (V-bar option) or a figure consisting of a square nose flanked by L-shaped wings
(crosspointer option). See Figure 3-6. Precise pitch attitude is indicated by the position of the pitch scale with
reference to the nose of the airplane symbol, and precise roll attitude is indicated by the position of the
moving roll pointer with reference to the bank scale.

In the extreme pitch attitudes, a portion of the blue (sky) or brown (ground) area is retained in view to aid in
interpretation of pitch attitude. The pitch markings will continue to move to provide accurate pitch
information. If the pitch attitude exceeds +30 or –20 degrees, or if the bank attitude exceeds ±65 degrees, all
information except attitude, attitude sensor annunciation, and the indicated airspeed display is removed
from the EADI. As pitch-up attitude increases, a red downward pointing wedge appears between the +50-
and +65-degree pitch markings. A larger red downward pointing wedge appears between the +65- and +90-
degree pitch markings. MPU-85H/86H and DPU-85H/86H service bulletin 33 changes the attitude pitch
tape. A red downward pointing wedge appears between the +40- and +60-degree pitch markings and a larger
red downward pointing wedge appears between the +60- and +90-degree pitch markings. These red
downward pointing wedges indicate pitch down is required to correct for the excessive pitch-up attitude. As
pitch-down attitude increases, a red upward pointing wedge appears between the –40- and –55-degree pitch
markings. Another red upward pointing wedge (slightly larger than the first one) appears between the –55-
and –70- degree pitch markings, and a larger red upward pointing wedge appears between the –70- and –90-
degree pitch markings. MPU-85H/86H and DPU-85H/86H service bulletin 33 changes the attitude pitch
tape. A red upward pointing wedge appears between the –30- and –45-degree pitch markings. Another red
upward pointing wedge (slightly larger than the first one) appears between the –45- and –60-degree pitch
markings, and larger red upward pointing wedge appears between the –60- and –90-degree pitch markings.
These red upward pointing wedges indicate pitch up is required to correct for the excessive pitch-down
attitude. If the airplane passes through the vertical, the display will switch 180 degrees in the roll axis and
continue to provide the correct ground-sky attitude reference during the inverted portion of the maneuver.

Should the attitude source fail, the attitude display and command bars (if in view) will disappear and a red
box with the letters ATT inscribed will appear above the airplane symbol. ATT will flash for 10 seconds, then
become steady. This flag will remain until an alternate source is supplied or until the fault is cleared.

3.7.2 Attitude Sensor Annunci ator

Attitude sensor annunciation is displayed at all times in the lower right portion (to the left of the bottom dot
on the vertical deviation scale) of the EADI. ATT1 is displayed for any attitude source, either gyro or AHS
(attitude/ heading system) associated with the left input ports of the system. ATT2 is displayed for any
attitude source, either gyro or AHS associated with the right input ports of the system. On-side attitude
sensor annunciation is displayed in white and cross-side annunciation is displayed in yellow.

3.7.3 Flight Director Comman d Bar Display

The magenta command bars will be in view when the flight director is being used and are removed when the
flight director is turned off or flagged, or if the attitude is extreme. With a zero command input, the
integrated command bars will flank the airplane symbol. The command bars will move up or down to
command ±15 degrees of pitch. If the pitch command exceeds ±15 degrees, the command bars will remain at
the ±15 degree position until the command decreases to that value. At that time, the command bars and the
pitch scale will move in unison. The integrated command bars will also rotate with respect to the airplane
symbol to command 15 degrees of right or left bank. If the bank command exceeds 15 degrees of right or left
bank, the command bars will remain at the respective 15-degree position until the command decreases to
that value. Alternate crosspointer command bars can be obtained as a strapping option

Revised 12 May 1999 3-16

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-6. EADI Display Formats With Integrated Commands (Top) or Crosspointer Commands (Bottom)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-17

operation 523-0773950

in the interconnect wiring. For crosspointers, the roll steering bar moves left or right to command left or
right bank and the pitch steering bar moves up or down to command pitch-up or pitch-down. The commands
are satisfied when the steering bars are centered over the airplane reference symbol. Should the flight
director system fail, the command bars will disappear and a red box with the letters FD inscribed will
appear to the left of the left tip of the airplane symbol and will flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
The FD flag will not appear if the flight director has been turned off unless the failure occurs when in FCS
approach mode.

3.7.4 Vertical Deviation Displ ay

A scale and pointer on the right side of the EADI indicates deviation from a selected vertical path. The scale
consists of two white dots above and below a yellow center index.

When the lateral deviation source is a LOC and LOC frequency is tuned and the system is not in a back LOC
condition, then GS deviation is displayed. If a LOC frequency is not tuned, the scale and pointer are removed
from view.

3.7.4.1 Glideslope Deviation

The glideslope deviation pointer is a dual green triangle for the on-side sensor and a dual yellow triangle for
the cross-side sensor. The glideslope pointer represents the center of the glideslope beam, and the center of
the glideslope scale represents airplane position relative to beam center. Each of the inner scale dots
represents a 1/4-degree displacement; each of the outer scale dots represents a 1/2-degree displacement. If a
CAT II approach is being conducted, the pointer changes to yellow and flashes when glideslope deviation
exceeds the CAT II limits. If a failure of the glideslope receiver is detected, a red box with the letters GS
inscribed will appear to the left of the scale above the center index and will flash for 10 seconds before
becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset. The glideslope scale is
removed from view when in back course mode and is replaced with B/C annunciation.

3.7.4.2 Altitude Deviation

Deviation from preselected altitude is displayed by a green bracket shaped pointer with an A inscribed. The
altitude pointer represents the preselected altitude, and the center of the scale represents airplane position
relative to that altitude. Each of the inner scale dots represents a 250-foot displacement; each of the outer
scale dots represents a 500-foot displacement. The scale and pointer are removed from view when the
altitude deviation is greater than 1000 feet above or below the preselected altitude. If a failure of the air
data system is detected, the altitude scale and pointer are removed from view and a red box with the letters
ALT inscribed will appear to the left of the scale above the center index and will flash for 10 seconds before
becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset. When an altitude alert
input is received from the air data system, the letters ALT, in yellow, will appear to the left of the scale
above the center index.

3.7.5 Lateral Deviation Displa y

A scale and pointer in the bottom center of the EADI indicates deviation from a selected lateral navigation
path. The scale consists of two white dots on either side of a white center index. If a sensor failure is detected
by loss of the valid or by an internal monitor, the appropriate red letters (LOC, VOR, LRN, LNV, VLF, or
INS) appear above the scale, flash for 10 seconds and then become steady. The flashing can be eliminated by
pressing the master warn reset. The VOR/TCN/RNV pointer is removed if the internal VOR/TCN/RNV
bearing synchro monitor detects a fault. The LNV/VLF/INS/LRN pointer is removed if the internal
LNV/VLF/INS/LRN bearing or track synchro monitors detect a fault. The pointers are not removed if the
valid signal from the sensor is lost.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-18

operation 523-0773950

3.7.5.1 VOR/TCN/RNV Deviation

When displaying VOR/TCN deviation, the pointer is a green octagonal shaped symbol with two vertical
center lines for the on-side sensor and a yellow symbol for the cross-side sensor. When displaying RNV
deviation, the pointer is a star-shaped symbol for the on-side sensor and a yellow symbol for the cross-side
sensor. The symbols move laterally left or right and have the same scale factor as the course deviation scale
on the EHSI.

3.7.5.2 LRN/VLF/INS/LNV Devia tion

The LRN/VLF/INS/LNV deviation pointer is a white star-shaped symbol for the on-side sensor and a yellow
symbol for the cross-side sensor. The symbol moves laterally left or right and has the same scale factor as
the course deviation scale on the EHSI.

3.7.6 Radio Altitude Display

Radio altitude is displayed in the upper right corner in green digits. The radio altitude display appears
automatically when the radio altitude system is within range (2500 feet with the ALT-55 Radio Altimeter
System or 2000 feet with the ALT-50 Radio Altimeter System) and will change in 50-foot increments above
1000 feet, and 10-foot increments below 1000 feet. If a failure of the radio altimeter system is detected, the
radio altitude display will disappear and a red box with the letters RA inscribed will appear flashing for 10
seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset. DH set
and the DH annunciator are also removed.

3.7.7 Decision Height Display

Decision height is displayed in the lower right corner of the display with the letters DH above the digits.
This indication is cyan in color if set from the on-side DSP (or DCP) or yellow if from the cross-side DSP (or
DCP). The decision height digits will flash when the airplane is between decision height +50 feet and
decision height. The decision height display is removed if the radio altimeter system fails.

3.7.8 Decision Height Annunc iator

When decision height is reached during descent, the letters DH will appear in the upper left center portion
of the display (adjacent to the pitch scale in the blue sky portion of the display) in yellow, will flash for 5
seconds, and then become steady. The DH annunciator will extinguish when radio altitude is 5 feet or less.
The decision height annunciator is removed if the radio altimeter system fails. The DH annunciator may be
removed by setting DH SET to 0.

3.7.9 Radio Altitude Test

When the TST button on the DSP (or RA TST on the DCP) is pressed, the system supplies a test initiate to
the radio altimeter. Radio altitude test causes the radio altimeter to output a fixed value. If the decision
height happens to be set higher than this value, the DH annunciator is also displayed during the test.

3.7.10 Indicated Airspeed

IAS as transmitted by a digital air data system is shown digitally at the left center of the EADI in green
digits surrounded by a green T-shaped box on a black background. Approximately 2/3 of the next higher and
lower unit’s digits are displayed and the unit’s digits appear to roll smoothly through the box. The tens and
hundreds digits also appear to roll smoothly through the box. At airspeeds below 30 knots, the readout is
replaced by three green dashes.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-19

operation 523-0773950

If at the present acceleration, Vmo would be exceeded in 10 seconds or less, the IAS readout changes to
yellow and the box changes to yellow and flashes. If Vmo +2 knots is exceeded, the IAS readout changes to
yellow and the box changes to red and flashes at twice the previous rate. A cross-side data failure inhibits
the warning prior to Vmo but the greater than Vmo +2 knots warning is still active.

If a failure of the digital air data system is detected, the IAS readout will disappear and a red box with the
red letters SPD inscribed will appear flashing for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be
eliminated by pressing the master warn reset.

3.7.11 Speed Deviation

Any of three sensors may be selected as the input for speed deviation. The selection is via interconnect
wiring options and is made at the time of installation. The three sensors are: digital air data system; angle of
attack; or analog air data system.

The speed deviation scale is located adjacent to and right of the IAS readout and consists of a yellow center
reference mark with white letters F and S located above and below the center reference, and two
intermediate dots located between the letters and the center reference. The speed deviation pointer is green
and consists of two concentric squares which move in relation to the scale so that if the pointer is next to the
upper dot, actual airspeed is 10 knots higher than desired.

With a digital air data system, the EFIS-85B compares actual IAS with the reference airspeed being
received from the air data system, and positions the pointer accordingly. With either the AOA or analog air
data input, the EFIS-85B positions the pointer with reference to the analog voltage received from the
respective system.

If the speed deviation is from a digital air data system, the reference airspeed is displayed in cyan digits
below the letter S on the speed scale. If the speed deviation is AOA based, the letters AOA in cyan appear
below the speed scale. If the speed deviation is analog air data based, the letters SPD in cyan appear below
the speed scale.

If the speed deviation is digital airspeed referenced and a failure of the digital air data system is detected,
the speed deviation scale, pointer, and the reference airspeed digits are removed from view and a red box
with the letters SPD inscribed will appear below the scale and flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady.
The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset.

If an AOA failure is detected when displaying AOA based speed deviation, the speed deviation pointer and
scale are removed from view and a red box with the letters AOA inscribed will appear below the scale and
flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset.

If the speed deviation is analog airspeed referenced and a failure of the analog air data system is detected,
the speed deviation pointer and scale will disappear and a red box with the letters SPD inscribed will appear
at the left center of the EADI flashing for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated
by pressing the master warn reset.

3.7.12 Flight Control Mode Ann unciation

The following paragraphs show the flight control mode annunciations for the Collins FCS-85/86, the Collins
FCS-80, and the Collins FCS-65 Flight Control Systems. The annunciation locations on the EADI are the
same for each flight control system, with the vertical modes located on the first two lines to the left of the
lubber line and the lateral modes located on the top line to the right of the lubber line. The active vertical
and lateral modes are shown in green and the armed modes and submodes in white. The vertical mode
commanded reference data are shown in green and the advisory reference data are shown in white when
available. Refer to Figure 3-7 through Figure 3-12.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-20

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-7. Vertical Mode Annunciation (FCS-85/86)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-21

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-8. Lateral Mode Annunciation (FCS-85/86)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-22

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-9. Vertical Mode Annunciation (FCS-80)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-23

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-10. Lateral Mode Annunciation (FCS-80)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-24

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-11. Vertical Mode Annunciation (FCS-65)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-25

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-12. Lateral Mode Annunciation (FCS-65)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-26

operation 523-0773950

The Collins FCS-85/86 is the only system which has the capability of three vertical arm modes of ALTS,
VNAV, and GS. The FCS-85/86 has dependent glideslope glide path capture (ie, the system must capture the
localizer azimuth before arming the glideslope glide path). Therefore, for the FCS-85/86, the GS arm mode
will be displayed in white (to the left) on line 2.

When a new active mode is displayed, either by being selected or automatic capture, it will flash for 5
seconds before becoming steady.

3.7.13 Autopilot/Yaw Damper a nd Trim Annunciation

3.7.13.1 Autopilot/Yaw Damper A nnunciation

The autopilot and yaw damper annunciation is displayed on lines 3 (autopilot) and 4 (yaw damper) in the
upper left corner of the EADI. The autopilot and yaw damper engaged annunciation is AP and YD for a
single flight control system, and AP/L or AP/R and YD for a dual flight control system. The engage
annunciators are green.

If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-85/86 (for both the autopilot and yaw damper), the engage messages
turn red and flash until acknowledged by the crew (acknowledge logic is in the FCS). When the acknowledge
occurs, the message disappears for a single flight control system or turns white and becomes steady for a
dual flight control system.

If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-80 (for both the autopilot and yaw damper), the autopilot engage
message turns red and flashes until acknowledged by the crew (acknowledge logic is in the FCS). The yaw
damper engage message turns yellow and flashes for 5 seconds then is removed from the display. When the
acknowledge occurs, the autopilot message disappears for a single flight control system or turns white and
becomes steady for a dual flight control system.

If a disengagement occurs for the FCS-65 (for both the autopilot and yaw damper), the engage messages
flash between green and yellow and disappear when the FCS-65 system times out.

The same operation occurs if the autopilot is independent of the yaw damper.

3.7.13.2 Trim Annunciation

Trim annunciation is displayed on line 3 in the upper right corner of the EADI.

For the FCS-85/86, the trim annunciation is a boxed message in yellow which indicates the axis that is
mistrimmed (A = aileron, E = elevator, and R = rudder). The annunciation will flash for 5 seconds each time
a mistrim occurs and is removed from view immediately when the input is removed. The following
annunciations can appear:

- E -
A - -
- - R
A E R (boxed)
A - R
A E -
- E R
SYNC
(blank)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-27

operation 523-0773950

For the FCS-80 system, TRIM is displayed in yellow which can indicate either an elevator or aileron
mistrimmed condition (determined during installation). As an option, both the elevator and aileron mistrim
annunciator outputs from the FCS-80 can be wired together to give the TRIM annunciation whenever the
elevator or the aileron is mistrimmed. Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for further
information. The annunciator will flash for 5 seconds each time it turns on and is removed immediately
when the input is removed.

For the FCS-65 system, TRIM is not displayed. SYNC is displayed when the pilot actuates the SYNC button.

3.7.14 Marker Beacon Display

Marker beacon passage is indicated by a cyan or yellow box with OM (cyan) or MM (yellow) inscribed
appearing on the inside of the roll scale on the right side (opposite the DH annunciator). Airway or inner
marker will appear as a white box with no inscriptions. These will flash as long as active.

3.7.15 Inclinometer

The inclinometer or slip indicator consists of a weighted ball in a liquid-filled curved tube. It is attached to
the lower front of the unit, lighted, and is used as an aid to coordinate turns.

3.7.16 Category II Outputs

The EFIS-85B provides two Category II outputs that are used to aid the pilot in determining if Category II
approach monitoring requirements are met. These outputs are referred to as the green output and the amber
output, with each output driving the appropriately colored external annunciator. A green Category II
annunciator indicates that all of the conditions listed below have been satisfied. (It is the pilot’s
responsibility to determine if the approach is to be made.) An amber Category II annunciator indicates that
one or more of the conditions listed below have not been satisfied, and the approach should not be continued
to Category II limits.

All of the following conditions must be satisfied before a green Category II annunciator output can be
obtained:
• Cross-side data valid for both sides
• Localizer tuned and valid for 15 seconds on both sides
• Glideslope valid for 15 seconds on both sides
• Back course not detected for either side
• Radio altimeter valid and on scale for both sides
• Attitude valid for both sides
• Heading valid for both sides
• Alternate attitude source not selected on either side
• Alternate heading source not selected on either side
• Analog VNAV not enabled on either side
• VOR/LOC selected as DSP (or DCP) primary course on both sides
• DSP (or DCP) valid and not alternate DSP (or DCP) selected for either side
• Enroute format not selected on either DSP (or DCP)
• Command bars in view on either EADI
• True heading not selected on either side
• Dual drive transfer not selected
• Go around not selected on either side

If the above conditions are satisfied and radio altitude is less than 600 feet, the green annunciator will
illuminate. If a problem occurs after the green annunciator is illuminated, the green annunciator turns off
and the amber annunciator illuminates. This should indicate to the pilot that the approach should not be

Revised 12 May 1999 3-28

operation 523-0773950

continued to Category II limits. If 400 feet radio altitude is reached and the green annunciator has not yet
illuminated, it will not do so at a lower altitude. This should also indicate that the approach should not be
continued to Category II limits.

3.8 EHSI DISPLAY FORMA TS

The EHSI can display three formats that are selected by the DSP-85A Display Select Panel or the DCP-85E
Display Control Panel. These are:

a. ROSE Format (DSP-85A)/HSI Format (DCP-85E)

This format selects a display very similar to the conventional electromechanical HSI presentation.
Information displayed includes compass heading and sensor type annunciation, selected heading,
selected VOR, localizer, or LNAV course and deviation (including annunciation of deviation type),
navigation source annunciation, to/from information, distance to station/waypoint, digital selected
course/desired track readout, glideslope or VNAV deviation (VNAV not available when certain statuses
of the DSP are used), ground speed, time-to-go, elapsed time or wind (if available), course information
and sensor annunciation from the second course source, weather radar target alert, waypoint alert, DR
and MSG (if available) when LNAV is the navigation source, excessive ILS deviation (when CAT II
configured), ILS and heading comparator warnings (ILS only if CAT II configured), back localizer
annunciation, DME hold annunciation, and a bearing pointer that can be driven by VOR, LNAV or ADF
sources as selected on the display select panel.
b. Approach (APPR) Format (DSP-85A)/ARC Format (DCP-85E)
In this format, an expanded compass segment (approximately 80 degrees) is located across the top of the
display with the airplane symbol located at the bottom center of the display. This format gives the pilot
information similar to that presented in the full compass rose mode, in an enlarged, easily readable
display. In addition, a preset second navigation sensor may be displayed if selected by the 2ND CRS
button on the DSP (by the CRS PRE button and SEL/RNG knob on the DCP). The second sensor is
shown by the VOR or waypoint symbol and identifier placed in rho-theta position with respect to the
airplane symbol and selected range. Range is selected from the DSP (or DCP) when weather radar is not
selected or from the WXP when weather radar mode is selected. The WX button on the DSP (or the RDR
button on the DCP) causes weather radar data to be superimposed on the APPR format (or ARC format)
if WX or NORM is selected on the WXP.
c. Enroute (ENR) Format (DSP-85A)/MAP Format (DCP-85E)
This format also uses the expanded compass segment but places VOR and/or waypoint symbols for both
primary and second course in proper rho-theta position with respect to the airplane symbol and selected
range. DME ident is shown next to the VOR symbols and selected course lines are drawn through the
symbols. Waypoint strings (up to three waypoints) are shown with the waypoint number next to the
symbol and with the symbols connected by desired track lines. Range is selected from the DSP (or DCP)
when weather radar is not selected or from the WXP when weather radar mode is selected. The WX
button on the DSP (or the RDR button on the DCP) causes weather radar data to be superimposed on
the APPR format if WX or NORM is selected on the WXP.

3.8.1 ROSE Format (DSP-85A )/HSI Format (DCP-85E)

The ROSE format is selected by positioning the DSP FORMAT switch to ROSE mode. The HSI format is
selected by positioning the DCP HSI-ARC-MAP switch to HSI. Refer to Figure 3-13.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-29

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-13. ROSE (or HSI) Format

3.8.1.1 Compass Display

The compass display is a full 360-degree rose with letters at the cardinal points and numbers at the 30-
degree marks. Airplane heading is read against the lubber line. Markings are also provided every 45 degrees
around the periphery of the card to aid in procedure turns. The compass card, reference marks, lubber line,
and reference airplane symbol are white. If true heading is being used, TRUE is annunciated in white above
the lubber line. The heading source is annunciated by displaying HDG1 in white for the on-side source or
HDG2 in yellow for the cross-side source. This annunciation will appear in the lower right corner of the
display. An external installer supplied switch may be used to place the compass system in directional gyro
mode which is annunciated by placing the letters DG over the lubber line. If a failure of the compass system
occurs, a red box with HDG inscribed will appear above the compass card, replacing the lubber line (and the
TRUE annunciator if present). The letters will flash for 10 seconds, then become steady. The flashing can be
eliminated by pressing the master warn reset. If the heading synchro monitor detects a failure, the HDG flag
appears and the compass card is frozen in position.

3.8.1.2 Active (Primary) Selecte d Course Display

EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3): The data shown by the primary (solid) selected course arrow is the information that is
being supplied to the flight control system. Primary selected course is shown by the relationship of the solid
single bar course arrow with respect to the compass card and is repeated digitally in the lower right of the
display with the letters CRS superscribed. The course is selected with the CRS knob on the DSP when in
VOR, LOC, RNV, TCN, or MLS mode, or is automatically set by an appropriate LNAV (lateral navigation
system) such as LNV, INS, VLF, or RNV.

EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): The data shown by the active (solid) selected course arrow is the information that is
being supplied to the flight control system. Active selected course is shown by the relationship of the solid
single bar course arrow with respect to the compass card and is repeated digitally in the lower right of the
display with the letters CRS superscribed. After selecting the active course navigation sensor using the CRS

Revised 12 May 1999 3-30

operation 523-0773950

ACT button and the SEL/RNG knob on the DCP, the actual course is selected by first pressing the CRS CTL
button on the CHP until the knob-shaped course control annunciator symbol is adjacent to the active
navigation sensor annunciator at the left center of the display. This indicates that the active selected course
arrow is being controlled by the CHP-85D’s on-side CRS knob or by the on-side CHP-86B’s CRS knob. The
course is then selected with the applicable CRS knob on the CHP when in VOR or LOC mode, or is
automatically set by an appropriate LNAV (lateral navigation system) such as LNV, INS, VLF, or RNV.

The selected navigation sensor is annunciated at the left center of the display. If the navigation sensor is
incompatible with the type of heading (true or magnetic), the sensor annunciation flashes until a compatible
selection is made. If a localizer frequency has been tuned, VOR/LOC has been selected, and the selected
course is more than 105 degrees from the lubber line, the LIN/ANG legend to the right of the lubber line
automatically changes to B/C (back course).

The center portion of the course arrow is the lateral deviation bar and moves laterally with respect to the
course arrow and the white deviation dots to indicate deviation from the selected course. If CAT II
configured and localizer deviation is excessive, the lateral deviation bar changes to yellow and flashes. The
lateral deviation bar is removed if a synchro input failure is detected.

When flying VOR with linear deviation, the letters LIN will appear to the right of the lubber line. EFIS
always linearizes deviation whenever DME is present and not in DME hold, unless an external switch is
actuated to defeat linearization and display angular deviation. Unlike previous systems, EFIS linearizes
deviation out to the usable reception range of the VOR. With linear deviation, a full-scale deflection of the
lateral deviation bar (2 dots) is equivalent to 10 miles offset from the selected course when in VOR mode, or
2 miles offset from the selected course when conducting a VOR approach in APPR mode.

Note

When flying linear deviation, the pilot should maintain a centered lateral deviation bar at all times.
This is especially true when close to station passage because deviation sensitivity is reduced as
compared to angular deviation. VOR approaches using linear deviation should only be flown if the
pilot understands linear deviation sensitivity.

Caution

When conducting a VOR approach, APPR mode should be selected only within normal approach
distances and not until after VOR capture occurs. During a VOR approach, the pilot is cautioned to
remember that the flight control system automatically goes to dead reckoning (DR) mode when a
VOR station is crossed, and DR is not a recommended approach mode. If the VOR approach being
flown is one that crosses the VOR on the way to the airport, then HDG mode should be selected at
station passage rather than continuing with NAV or APPR mode (ensure that the heading cursor on
the EHSI is under the lubber line before selecting HDG mode). The reason for this is if the distance
between the VOR and the airport is short, the system may not have time to come out of DR mode
after passing the station.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-31

operation 523-0773950

Note

If using LIN deviation during a VOR approach when the VOR/DME is located on the airport, there is
the possibility of the deviation being inhibited when close in to the station, and it is possible with a
crosswind, to miss the airport by as much as one mile. Therefore, when the VOR/DME is located on
the airport, the VOR approach must be made using ANG deviation rather that LIN deviation (note
that with EFIS, deviation is always linearized as long as DME is present and not in DME hold). In
most installations, there should be a separate installer supplied switch as described above that will
enable the pilot to select between LIN and ANG deviation.

Linear deviation is inhibited if a localizer frequency is tuned in either VOR or APPR mode. The primary
function of linear deviation is to optimize computation while tracking a VOR course, especially close in to the
station. Linear deviation also allows the pilot to fly an offset parallel to the selected course (up to 10 miles
either side when in VOR mode). Note that if the autopilot is engaged when flying parallel to the selected
course, HDG mode (preferred) or manual autopilot mode (no lateral mode selected) must be used. If the
autopilot is engaged with VOR mode selected, the autopilot will return the airplane to the actual VOR
course.

When VOR is selected as the active source and the deviation changes from LIN to ANG (such as would occur
if the DME is lost or DME hold is selected), the ANG annunciator will flash for 10 seconds before becoming
steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset.

The to-from indication is a triangle that appears on the head side of the lateral deviation bar pointing
toward the head of the course arrow to indicate to and toward the tail of the course arrow to indicate from.
This to-from display indicates that the selected VOR course is either to or from the selected VOR station.
The to-from display can also indicate the course to the next waypoint or the course from an overflown
waypoint when an LNAV such as an INS, LRN, VLF, or other navigation system is the navigation data
source. If a compatible LNAV is installed and LNAV is selected, the to arrow flashes to indicate waypoint
alert. The to-from display disappears when a localizer frequency is selected or if a failure is detected by the
VOR bearing, LNAV bearing, or LNAV track synchro monitors.

If the navigation sensor is an on-side VOR/LOC, the course arrow, deviation bar, to/from indicator (in VOR),
digital course readout, navigation sensor annunciator, distance display, data display, and LIN/ANG
annunciation are green. If the navigation sensor is an LNAV and is selected from the on-side DSP (or DCP),
these displays are white. If control has been transferred to the cross-side, these displays are yellow for all
navigation sensors.

If a selected navigation sensor valid is lost, the navigation sensor annunciation turns red, becomes boxed,
and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master
warn reset. If one of the LNAV’s is the failed sensor, the to-from display also disappears.

If a failure is detected by the VOR bearing, LNAV bearing, or LNAV track synchro or the bus parameter
monitors, the corresponding flag appears and the deviation bar and the to-from arrow are removed from the
display. The annunciator will flash the heading and nav sensor are incompatible.

3.8.1.3 Preset Second Course Di splay

When the preset second course arrow has been selected for display, it will appear in cyan as a double dashed
line course arrow with a solid arrowhead. The double dashed center portion of the course arrow is the lateral
deviation bar. The deviation displayed is always angular and is never linearized. Also, no deviation scale or
to/from indicator is provided for the preset second course arrow. The navigation sensor for the preset second
course is also annunciated in cyan and appears below the navigation sensor annunciation for the active
selected course arrow.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-32

operation 523-0773950

EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3): The navigation sensor for the second course arrow is selected by sequentially pressing
the 2ND CRS button on the DSP. At power on, no second course is displayed. The first press of the 2ND CRS
button annunciates LNV1 and the selected sensor is LNAV 1. The second press of the 2ND CRS button
annunciates LNV2 and the selected sensor is LNAV 2 (this selection may be inhibited as an installation
option). The third press of the 2ND CRS button annunciates VOR1, and the fourth press annunciates VOR2.
The next press of the 2ND CRS button turns the second course arrow off again. If the second course is the
on-side VOR or LOC, the on-side DSP’s selected CRS knob controls the course setting. If the second course is
the cross-side VOR or LOC, the cross-side DSP’s selected CRS knob controls the course setting. This also
applies even though the applicable DSP’s primary course selection is LNAV or OFF.

EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): The navigation sensor for the preset second course arrow is selected using the CRS
PRE button and the SEL/RNG knob on the DCP. After selecting the preset second course navigation sensor,
the actual course is selected by first pressing the CRS CTL button on the CHP until the knob-shaped course
control annunciator symbol is adjacent to the preset second course navigation sensor annunciator (located
below the active course navigation sensor annunciator). This indicates that the preset second course arrow is
being controlled by the CHP-85D’s or the CHP-86B’s CRS knob. The course is then selected with the
applicable CRS knob on the CHP when in VOR, LOC, or RNV mode, or is automatically set by an
appropriate LNAV such as LNV, INS, VLF, or RNV.

When the preset second course is a VOR and its associated DME is in hold, the navigation source
annunciator displays VOR1 H or VOR2 H with VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and the H in yellow with the H
located to the right of the numeral in the sensor annunciation. If a failure of the DME associated with the
displayed VOR occurs, the navigation sensor annunciator remains cyan followed by a D in red with the D
located to the right of the numeral in the sensor annunciation (ie, VOR1 D). If a localizer frequency has been
tuned, the sensor annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2.

If the second course navigation sensor is incompatible with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the
navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a compatible selection is made.

EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): The data being displayed on the preset second course arrow may be automatically
selected as the active selected course by pressing the CRS XFR button on the DCP. When the CRS XFR
button is pressed, the current active course arrow and its identifier are removed from the EHSI display, the
preset course arrow becomes a single solid line, the color changes to the active color, and the navigation
sensor annunciator is moved to the upper (active) location. The previous active selected course sensor now
becomes the preset second course and is removed from the display. It may be recalled as the dual dashed
cyan preset second course by pressing the CRS PRE button twice.

Note

EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): Depending on the airplane installation, if the FCS is not in HDG mode and
the source for the active course arrow is changed or if the CRS XFR function is selected on the DCP,
the FCS will automatically clear to heading hold mode and the NAV mode must be reengaged if
desired.

If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is selected for second course, the second course navigation
sensor annunciator becomes red and boxed and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The second
course arrow deviation bar is removed from view if the failure was from the internal VOR synchro monitor
or from the LNAV bus parameter monitor. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn
reset.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-33

operation 523-0773950

3.8.1.4 Selected Heading

Selected heading is shown by the location of two adjacent magenta rectangles with respect to the compass
card. The DSP (or DCP) HDG knob is used to set the heading cursor or it can be made to rotate to the lubber
line position by momentarily pressing the PUSH HDG SYNC button on the HDG knob. The heading sync
function can also be remotely actuated by various mode logic from some digital autopilots.

3.8.1.5 Bearing Pointer Display

When selected on the DSP (or with the BRG button and the SEL/RNG knob on the DCP), a magenta bearing
pointer is displayed on the EHSI along with the sensor annunciation. The sensor annunciation is in the
lower left with the letters BRG, in magenta, above the sensor type. If the sensor is an on-side VOR or ADF,
the sensor annunciation is green. If the sensor is an on-side LNAV, the sensor annunciation is white. All
cross-side sensors are annunciated in yellow. The head of the bearing pointer is also shape-coded, depending
on the sensor that is connected to the pointer. If the sensor is VOR, the pointer is octagon-shaped. If the
sensor is an area navigation system or a long-range navigation system, the pointer is star-shaped. When
ADF is the sensor, the pointer is cross-shaped. The bearing pointer tail is a line with a V superimposed
pointing to the station. The VOR bearing pointer is removed if a localizer frequency is tuned.

If ADF has been selected with true heading being displayed, the bearing annunciation will flash for 10
seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset. If VOR
or LNAV has been selected with an incompatible heading sensor, the bearing sensor annunciator flashes
until a compatible selection has been made.

In the event of a sensor failure, the bearing pointer will be removed from view and the sensor annunciation
will become red, boxed and flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by
pressing the master warn reset. If VOR has been selected and a localizer frequency is tuned, the bearing
pointer and the pointer annunciation is removed but the letters BRG remain in view.

If an ADF lock signal is not received, the ADF pointer is removed and the ADF flag will appear.

3.8.1.6 Vertical Deviation Displ ay

A scale and pointer on the right side of the EHSI indicates deviation from a selected vertical path. The scale
consists of two white dots above and below a center index.

If an on-side localizer frequency is tuned and VNAV is not selected and enabled (if a VNAV system is
installed in the airplane), then glideslope deviation is displayed. When VNAV is selected on the DSP and
enabled, deviation from a selected vertical navigation path is displayed. During an ILS or MLS approach,
the VNAV display automatically switches to display GS or MGP deviation at GS or MGP capture (capture
logic is from the flight control system). If in back course mode, B/C will be displayed to the right of the lubber
line. B/C will also be displayed in place of the glideslope scale if in back course and not displaying VNAV.
(Back course mode is automatically sensed within EFIS by comparing present airplane heading with the
localizer front course set by the primary course arrow on the EHSI. Back course mode occurs when a
localizer frequency is tuned, and the difference between airplane heading and the primary course arrow
exceeds approximately 105 degrees.)

a. Glideslope Deviation
The glideslope deviation pointer is a dual green triangle for the on-side sensor and a dual yellow triangle
for the cross-side sensor. The glideslope pointer represents the center of the glideslope beam, and the
center of the glideslope scale represents airplane position relative to beam center. Each of the inner scale
dots represents a 1/4-degree displacement; each of the outer scale dots represents a 1/2-degree
displacement. If a CAT II approach is being conducted, the pointer changes to yellow and flashes when

Revised 12 May 1999 3-34

operation 523-0773950

glideslope deviation exceeds the CAT II limits. If a failure of the glideslope receiver is detected, a red box
with the letters GS inscribed will appear in the center of the scale and will flash for 10 seconds before
becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset.
b. Vertical Navigation Deviation
Deviation from a selected vertical navigation path is displayed by a white star-shaped pointer for the on-
side sensor or a yellow star-shaped pointer for the cross-side sensor. The VNAV pointer represents the
center of the vertical navigation path, and the center of the scale represents airplane position relative to
the path. Each of the inner scale dots represents a 200-foot displacement; each of the outer scale dots
represents a 400-foot displacement. If a failure of the vertical navigation system is detected, the scale
and pointer are removed from view and a red box with the letters VNV inscribed is displayed. This flag
will flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master
warn reset.

3.8.1.7 Distance Display

The distance to the VOR or waypoint selected for display on the primary course arrow is shown digitally
below the letters DIST in the upper left of the EHSI. The distance display will be the same color as the
primary course display. Resolution is to 0.1 nmi below 100 nmi and 1 nmi above 100 nmi. When DME hold
has been selected, the letter H, in yellow, appears to the right of the digits. If a DME failure is detected
when VOR is selected or an LNAV sensor failure is detected when LNAV is selected, the digits are replaced
with red dashes which flash for 10 seconds and then become steady. The flashing can be eliminated by
pressing the master warn reset. No computed data is shown as dashes in the same color as the DIST legend.

3.8.1.8 Data Display

Elapsed time, ground speed, or time-to-go is displayed in the upper right below the letters ET, GSP, or TTG
as applicable. Wind speed and direction, if available as an input, can also be displayed. The data displayed is
selected by sequentially pressing the NAV DTA button on the DSP (or CHP). The last one selected is stored
in nonvolatile memory and will reappear on power up.

Ground speed and time-to-go are derived from the same sensor driving the primary course display and will
be the same color. If that source is VOR, the calculation occurs in the EFIS system. Otherwise, the data is
transmitted by the navigation system. If a DME failure is detected when VOR is selected or an LNAV sensor
failure is detected when LNAV is selected, the digits are replaced by red dashes which flash for 10 seconds
before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset. No computed
data is shown as dashes in the same color as the legend.

EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3): Elapsed time is shown in minutes and seconds up to 59:59 and then in hours and
minutes up to H9:59. Above H9:59, the display is dashed. The ET display is green for the on-side DSP and
yellow for the cross-side DSP. An external installer supplied switch is used to control the reset/start/stop
cycle of the timer.

EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): Elapsed time is shown in minutes and seconds up to 59:59 and then in hours and
minutes up to H9:59. Above H9:59, the display is dashed. The ET display is green for the on-side half of the
CHP and yellow for the cross-side CHP. The reset/start/stop cycle of the time is controlled by the ET button
on the CHP.

Wind speed, if available as an input, is displayed digitally in knots. Wind direction is shown by an arrow
depicting the direction of the wind relative to the airplane symbol. This display is white and is derived from
the on-side LNAV system, and is displayed regardless of the primary course selection. No computed data is
shown as white dashes.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-35

operation 523-0773950

3.8.1.9 Weather Annunciation

The target alert feature notifies the user when a return signal of contour strength is detected within 60 to
160 nmi and ±15 degrees of present heading. Target alert is selected with the push-on/push-off TGT switch
on the WXP. A yellow box with the yellow letter T inscribed will appear nonflashing to the right of the
lubber line if target alert is enabled on the WXP and the mode selector is not in the OFF, STBY, or MAP
position. The annunciation will flash when a target is detected.

3.8.1.10 Navigation Annunciatio n

If the primary course display is derived from an LNAV, XTK and DR annunciations appear to the right of
the lubber line, and MSG appears to the left of the lubber line as received from the LNAV system. XTK is
white if from the on-side LNAV or yellow if from the cross-side LNAV. DR and MSG are yellow and MSG
flashes continuously.

3.8.1.11 Compatibility Between N avigation/Bearing Display and Heading Source

Depending on selected navigation sensors and the selection of magnetic or true heading sources,
compatibility problems can occur. Table 3-1 defines the conditions which are incompatible and the
EHSI annunciations that are provided to alert the pilot of those conditions.

3.8.2 Approach (or ARC) Form at (Figure 3-14)

EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3): The approach format is selected by positioning the DSP FORMAT switch to APPR.

EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): The ARC format is selected by positioning the DCP HSI-ARC-MAP switch to ARC.

3.8.2.1 Compass Sector Display

The expanded compass sector displayed in the approach (or ARC) format is similar to the full compass card
displayed in the ROSE (or HSI) format except the EHSI displays a ±40-degree compass segment at the top of
the display and the airplane symbol is placed at the bottom center of the display. The compass sector, on-
side course arrow, heading cursor, and bearing pointer rotate with respect to the intersection of the wings
and fuselage of the airplane symbol.

All other functions of the compass display (colors, annunciation of true heading, directional gyro mode, on-
side or cross-side heading source, heading flag, and comparator warning) are the same as described for the
rose format.

3.8.2.2 Primary (Active) Selecte d Course Display

Primary selected course (or active selected course) is shown by a solid single bar course arrow related to the
compass segment with a deviation bar near the airplane symbol. A deviation scale which rotates with the
course arrow is also displayed. The deviation bar and scale rotate with the selected course throughout the
full 360-degree range. The deviation bar and scale will be wholly or partially out of view for some selected
courses.

To-from is indicated by the letters TO or FR appearing in the lower right of the display near the digital
course readout. If LNAV is the selected course and the LNAV outputs a waypoint alert, the TO annunciator
flashes.

All other functions and colors of the selected course display are the same as described for the rose format.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-36

operation 523-0773950

Table 3-1. Selected Course and Bearing Pointers Vs Heading Sensors.

COURSE BEARING
PILOT’S
BEARING OR HEADING SENSOR HEADING SENSOR
PRIMARY
COURSE #1 MAG MAG TRUE TRUE #1 MAG MAG TRUE TRUE
#2 MAG TRUE MAG TRUE #2 MAG TRUE MAG TRUE

VOR 1/2 OK OK A A OK OK A A
ADF 1/2 N/A N/A N/A N/A OK OK D D
LRN 1 MAG OK OK B B OK OK B B
LRN 1 TRUE B B OK OK B B OK OK
LRN 2 MAG OK C A B OK C A B
LRN 2 TRUE B A C OK B A C OK

A — flash until sensors compatible

B — flash only if MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is invalid
C — flash unless MAGVAR associated with LRN sensor is invalid
D — flash for 10 seconds, then steady

Figure 3-14. Approach (or ARC) Format

Revised 12 May 1999 3-37

operation 523-0773950

3.8.2.3 Second Course Display

A second course may be selected using the 2ND CRS button on the DSP as described for the ROSE format.
The selected second course is displayed in cyan and its sensor is annunciated in cyan below the primary
selected course sensor on the left side of the EHSI.

When the selected second course is a VOR, a cyan octagonal symbol is placed in proper rho-theta position
with respect to selected range and airplane heading. The station ident is displayed next to the VOR symbol
on the side nearest the vertical center line of the display.

When the second course is a VOR and its associated DME is in hold, the VOR symbol is removed from view
and the navigation sensor annunciator displays VOR1 H or VOR2 H with the VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and
the H in yellow. If a failure of the DME associated with a displayed VOR occurs, the VOR symbol is removed
from view and the sensor annunciator remains cyan followed by a D in red (ie, VORl D).

If the second course is a VOR and a localizer frequency is tuned, no symbol is displayed and the sensor
annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2.

When the second course is an LNAV, the to waypoint is displayed as a star-shaped cyan symbol shown in its
proper rho-theta position with respect to selected range and airplane heading. The waypoint is identified by
its waypoint number, also in cyan, with the number being next to the waypoint symbol on the side nearest
the vertical center line of the display. If the LNAV is compatible, the waypoint symbol flashes for waypoint
alert.

If the second course navigation sensor is incompatible with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the
navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a compatible selection is made.

If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is selected for second course, the navaid symbol (VOR or
waypoint) is removed from view and the second course navigation sensor annunciator becomes red and
boxed and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by pressing the
master warn reset.

3.8.2.4 Selected Heading

Selected heading is shown by the location of two adjacent magenta rectangles with respect to the compass
sector when on scale. When selected heading is off scale, a digital readout (magenta) will appear at the
appropriate end of the compass sector closest to the selected heading value and a magenta line will appear
from the center of the airplane symbol to the edge of the display at the selected heading angle. If no primary
course is being displayed, the heading line will be displayed. If the heading cursor is on scale, the heading
line connects the cursor and the airplane symbol.

3.8.2.5 Range

When approach (or ARC) format is being displayed without weather radar information, range is selected by
the RNG knob on the DSP (or SEL/RNG knob on the DCP). Range is displayed as a dashed cyan range mark
located half way between the compass sector and the airplane symbol. Half of the full-scale range is
displayed in cyan digits at the right hand end of the range mark. Selectable full scale ranges are 5, 10, 25,
50, 100, 200, 300, and 600 nm. Half scale annunciated ranges are 2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150, and 300 nm.

3.8.2.6 Weather Radar Display

Adding a weather radar display to the approach (or ARC) format is accomplished by having WX or NORM
mode selected on the WXP and then pressing the WX pushbutton on the DSP (or DCP). A second press of the

Revised 12 May 1999 3-38

operation 523-0773950

DSP WX button (or the DCP RDR button) will remove the weather radar display. When using a WXP-85C
or WXP-85D with WX or NORM mode selected, detectable weather will appear as one of five colors: black,
green, yellow, red, and magenta (least reflective to most reflective). When using a WXP-85C or -85D with
WX mode selected, the PAC Alert (Path Attenuation Correction) feature is automatically enabled. The
purpose of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the radar encounters a target having rainfall rates heavy
enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets behind it may not be displayed. With the PAC Alert
feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear at the outer perimeter of the range being displayed.
Whenever this band appears, that portion of the radar’s scan may be missing certain distant targets that are
masked by intervening areas of rainfall. When weather radar is selected, a solid cyan range mark will
appear at midrange on the display with the midrange distance (5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, and 150) shown in cyan
digits at the right hand end of the range mark. Full scale range extends to the periphery of the compass
segment. The range is selected using the RANGE control on the WXP-85( ) Weather Radar Panel.

The weather radar mode (STBY, TEST, WX, NORM, MAP, GAIN, HOLD, or FAULT) as selected on the
WXP is shown in cyan at the lower left end of the cyan range mark. If any GAIN position except MAX is
selected, the mode annunciator will alternate between GAIN and the selected mode at a 1-Hz rate (that is,
GAIN-WX-GAIN-WX, etc). The alternating words serve to remind the user that the system is operating in a
reduced gain condition and some targets may not be displayed. If weather radar hold is selected, the weather
radar mode annunciator will alternate between HOLD and the selected mode at a 1-Hz rate (HOLD-WX-
HOLD-WX, etc). The alternating words serve to remind the pilot that the system is in the HOLD mode and
the weather radar display is not being updated.

If the WXP is turned off or a loss of data from the WXP is detected when weather radar information is being
displayed, the range mark and weather displays are removed from view and the range will default to 300
nm.

3.8.2.7 Bearing Pointer Display

All functions and colors of the bearing pointer display are the same as described for the ROSE (or HSI)
format except that the pointer rotates around the relocated airplane symbol.

3.8.2.8 Vertical Deviation Displ ay

All functions and colors of the vertical deviation display are the same as described for the ROSE (or HSI)
format.

3.8.2.9 Peripheral Displays

All functions and colors of the distance display, data display, weather annunciation, navigation
annunciation, compatibility between navigation sensors and heading sources are the same as described for
the rose format except that the GS and LOC comparator warnings are relocated.

3.8.3 Enroute (or MAP) Forma t (Figure 3-15)

EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3): The enroute format is selected by positioning the DSP FORMAT switch to ENR.
EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): The MAP format is selected by positioning the DCP HSI-ARC-MAP switch to MAP.

3.8.3.1 Compass Sector Display

All functions and colors of the enroute format compass display are the same as described for the approach
format.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-39

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-15. Enroute (or MAP) Format

3.8.3.2 Primary (Active) Selecte d Course Display

When the primary selected course is a VOR, an octagonal VOR symbol is placed in proper rho-theta position
with respect to selected range and the airplane symbol. The station ident is displayed next to the VOR
symbol on the side nearest the vertical center line of the display. A selected course line is drawn through the
VOR symbol with its position controlled by the CRS knob on the DSP (or CHP). The course line is solid on
the to side of the symbol and dashed on the from side. If the VOR symbol is off scale with respect to selected
range and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with an arrow pointing toward the station, and the station
ident is displayed on the line. The navigation sensor is annunciated at the left center of the display. The
VOR symbol, course line, station identifier, and navigation sensor annunciation are green if from on-side or
yellow if from cross-side. If the primary selected course is RNV, the operation is the same as just described
but the symbol is star shaped.

If a localizer frequency is tuned, the VOR symbol, station identifier, and course line are removed from view.
The navigation sensor annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2 in the same color as the VOR annunciator.

When the primary selected course is VOR and its associated DME is in hold, the VOR symbol, station
identifier, and course line are removed from view. In this condition, the navigation sensor annunciator still
displays the selected VOR and DME hold is indicated by a yellow H next to the distance readout in the
upper left corner of the display.

When the primary selected course is an LNAV, star-shaped waypoint symbols (up to three) are located in
their proper rho-theta position with respect to the selected range and airplane symbol. The waypoints are
identified by waypoint numbers next to the waypoint symbol on the side nearest the vertical center line of
the display. Waypoint symbols are connected by track lines as output by the LNAV system. An arrow is
drawn on the track line pointing at the to waypoint. If the to waypoint is off scale, an arrow is drawn on the
track line pointing at the to waypoint, and WPT # is displayed on the line. The to waypoint symbol flashes to

Revised 12 May 1999 3-40

operation 523-0773950

indicate waypoint alert. The navigation sensor annunciation is displayed at the left center of the display.
The waypoint string and navigation sensor annunciator are white if from on-side or yellow if from cross-side.

If the navigation sensor is incompatible with the type of heading (true or magnetic), the navigation sensor
annunciator flashes until a compatible selection is made.

If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is selected for primary selected course, the navaid symbols
(VOR or waypoint) and connecting lines are removed from view and the navigation sensor annunciator
becomes red and boxed and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be eliminated by
pressing the master warn reset.

3.8.3.3 Second Course Display

A second course may be selected in the same manner as described for the ROSE (or HSI) format. The
selected second course is displayed in cyan and its sensor is annunciated in cyan below the primary selected
course sensor on the left side of the EHSI.

When the selected second course is a VOR, a cyan octagon symbol is placed in proper rho-theta position with
respect to selected range and station bearing. The station ident is displayed next to the VOR symbol on the
side nearest the vertical center line of the display. A selected course line is drawn through the VOR symbol
with its position controlled by the CRS knob on the associated DSP (or CHP). The course line is solid on the
to side of the symbol and dashed on the from side. If the VOR symbol is off scale with respect to selected
range and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with an arrow pointing toward the station, and the station
ident is displayed on the line. If the selected second course is an RNV, the operation is as just described but
the symbol is star shaped.

If DSP (or DCP) control is transferred and the cross-side VOR second course (relative to the in-use DSP or
DCP) is selected, the VOR symbol remains in view but no course line is drawn.

When the second course is a VOR and its associated DME is in hold, the VOR symbol and course line are
removed from view and a yellow H is placed to the right of the numeral in the VOR sensor annunciation. If a
failure of the DME associated with a displayed VOR occurs, the VOR symbol and course line are removed
from view and a red D is placed to the right of the numeral in the VOR sensor annunciation. If the second
course is a VOR and a localizer frequency is tuned, no symbol or course line is displayed and the sensor
annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2 in cyan.

When the selected second course is an LNAV, star-shaped waypoint symbols (up to three) are located in
their proper rho-theta position with respect to the selected range and airplane symbol. The waypoints are
identified by waypoint numbers next to the waypoint symbol on the side nearest the vertical center line of
the display. Waypoint symbols are connected by track lines as output by the LNAV system. An arrow is
drawn on the track line pointing at the to waypoint. If the to waypoint is off scale, the track line is still
drawn at the proper angle with WPT # displayed on the line. The to waypoint symbol flashes to indicate
waypoint alert. The navigation sensor annunciation is displayed at the left center of the display. The
waypoint string and navigation sensor annunciator are cyan for the selected second course.

If the second course navigation sensor is incompatible with the heading sensor (true or magnetic), the
navigation sensor annunciator flashes until a compatible selection is made.

If a navigation sensor failure is detected while it is selected for selected second course, the navaid symbols
(VOR or waypoint) and connecting lines are removed from view and the second course navigation sensor
annunciator becomes red and boxed and flashes for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The flashing can be
eliminated by pressing the master warn reset.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-41

operation 523-0773950

3.8.3.4 Selected Heading

All functions and colors of the selected heading display are the same as described for the approach (or ARC)
format.

3.8.3.5 Range

All functions and colors of the range display are the same as described for the approach (or ARC) format.

3.8.3.6 Bearing Display

All functions and colors of the bearing display are the same as described for the approach (or ARC) format.

3.8.3.7 Other Enroute (or MAP) Format Displays

All functions and colors of the vertical deviation display, distance display, data display, weather
annunciation, navigation annunciation, compatibility between navigation sensors and heading sources, and
comparator warnings are the same as described for the ROSE (or HSI) format.

3.9 EFIS COMPARATORS A ND MASTER WARN

Comparator monitoring is performed in each DPU and MPU in the EFIS system. On-side data is read,
converted to digital form, and stored by each DPU and MPU. Each DPU sends its information to the cross-
side DPU so that each of the processors has the information required to perform the comparison function.
When the MPU is being used to drive the EADI and EHSI, it provides the comparator function in place of
the failed DPU. The failed DPU could still be outputting comparator messages unless its breaker is pulled or
the DPU/MPU outputs are externally switched.

If the MPU is driving the MFD, its only comparator function is heading which is displayed on the MFD to
the left of the lubber line when in the NAV and RDR modes. The MPU does not output any other comparator
warnings in this mode.

3.9.1 Master Warn

A master warn output is provided from each DPU and from the MPU when in drive transfer. These outputs
are used to enable external installer supplied master warning annunciators.

Momentarily actuating an installer supplied master warn reset switch stops the flashing of the EADI and
EHSI comparators and of the external installer supplied attitude, heading, and Category II comparators,
and extinguishes the master warning annunciator.

3.9.2 Comparator Reset

In addition to the comparator warnings displayed on the EADI and EHSI, the EFIS provides external
comparator warning outputs for attitude, heading, and Category II (the Category II comparator annunciator
illuminates when Cat II is enabled and if the two localizer or glideslope deviations or the two radio altitudes
differ by a predetermined amount) from each DPU and from the MPU when in drive transfer. These external
comparator warning outputs are used to enable external installer supplied annunciators.

Momentarily actuating an installer supplied comparator reset switch extinguishes the EADI/EHSI
comparator warning displays and the external comparator warning annunciator(s). If the condition which
caused the compare error has been removed, the EADI/EHSI comparator warning display and the external
comparator warning annunciator(s) remain off when the comparator reset switch is released. If the warn

Revised 12 May 1999 3-42

operation 523-0773950

condition is still present when the comparator reset switch is released, the EADI/EHSI comparator warning
display and the external comparator warning annunciator(s) illuminate again, but the master warn
annunciator does not.

3.9.3 EADI Comparator Warn ings

If a pitch or roll comparator warning is detected, the letters PIT and/or ROL, boxed and in yellow, will
appear in the lower left portion of the display.

If a glideslope comparator warning is detected and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box with the letters GS
inscribed appears near the vertical deviation scale.

If a localizer comparator warning is detected and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box with the letters LOC
inscribed appears near the lateral deviation scale.

If a radio altitude comparator warning is detected and CAT II is enabled, a yellow box with the letters RA
inscribed appears next to the radio altitude readout.

These comparator messages will flash until the master warn has been reset at which time they become
steady. The messages will disappear when the external comparator reset switch is actuated, if the
comparator error is no longer present.

3.9.4 EHSI Comparator Warn ings

If a heading comparator warning message is received, the letters HDG, boxed and yellow, will appear to the
left of the lubber line.

If a glideslope comparator warning is detected and Category II is enabled, a yellow box with the letters GS
inscribed appears at the lower right of the vertical deviation scale.

If a localizer comparator warning is detected and Category II is enabled, a yellow box with the letters LOC
inscribed appears at the right of the airplane symbol.

These messages will flash until the master warn has been reset, at which time they become steady. The
messages will disappear when the condition is corrected and the comparator reset input is received.

3.9.5 Heading Comparator

a. Enable Logic
The heading comparator is enabled full time unless:
• Either side has a flag condition.
• One side is using true heading and the other side is using magnetic heading.
• A cross-side data failure is detected.
• Attitude is valid and the roll angle is greater than 20 degrees.
Note

DG (directional gyro) mode does not inhibit the heading compare function if both headings are
magnetic.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-43

operation 523-0773950

b. Comparator Limits
A comparator warning is annunciated when:
GS CAPTURED SENSOR CONFLICT HDG DIFFERENCE GREATER THAN

Yes Conflict Off

Yes OK 4° +
[1/2 Roll Angle]
No Conflict Off
No OK 6° +
[1/2 Roll Angle]

[ ] is the absolute value of the roll angle.

c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow box with HDG inscribed is displayed to the left of the
lubber line on the EHSI. The letters and the box flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The master
warn and heading compare discretes are energized.
d. Comparator Activation Delay
Activation of the heading comparator is delayed 0.75 second (5 seconds for source change).

3.9.6 Roll Comparator

a. Enable Logic
The roll comparator is enabled full time unless:
• Either side has a flag condition.
• A cross-side data failure is detected.

b. Comparator Limits
A comparator warning is annunciated when:
GS CAPTURED SENSOR CONFLICT ROLL DIFFERENCE GREATER THAN

Yes Conflict 5°
Yes OK 3°
No Conflict 6°
No OK 4°

c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow box with ROL inscribed is displayed in the lower left
portion of the EADI. The letters and the box flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The master
warn and pitch compare discretes are energized.
d. Comparator Activation Delay
Activation of the roll comparator is delayed 0.75 second.

3.9.7 Pitch Comparator

a. Enable Logic
The pitch comparator is enabled full time unless:
• Either side has a flag condition.
• A cross-side data failure is detected.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-44

operation 523-0773950

b. Comparator Limits
A comparator warning is annunciated when:
GS CAPTURED SENSOR CONFLICT PITCH DIFFERENCE GREATER THAN

Yes Conflict 5°
Yes OK 3°
No Conflict 6°
No OK 4°

c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow box with PIT inscribed is displayed in the lower left
portion of the EADI. The letters and the box flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The master
warn and pitch compare discretes are energized.
d. Comparator Activation Delay
Activation of the pitch comparator is delayed 0.75 second.

3.9.8 Category II Comparator s

The EFIS-85B system provides special visual clues to indicate excessive localizer and glideslope deviation on
the EADI and EHSI during a CAT II approach. The system also provides all of the logic circuits necessary to
provide additional annunciator outputs to inform the crew of the status/availability of the Category II
function. The pilot’s and copilot’s Category II select switches, switching relays, and annunciator lights
(usually a Category II green and amber light on both sides and a Category II comparator on both sides) are
installer supplied items and are not furnished as part of the EFIS-85B system.

The installer supplied external Category II comparator annunciator illuminates when CAT II is enabled,
and if the two localizer or glideslope deviations or the two radio altitudes differ by a predetermined amount.
The EADI annunciates localizer, glideslope, and radio altimeter comparators. The EHSI annunciates
localizer and glideslope comparators. An installer supplied master warn annunciator also illuminates when
any of the above comparators is tripped.

The Category II function, comparator warning, and annunciator logic is performed simultaneously and
independently by the two display processor units. These functions will also be performed by the
multifunction processor unit during reversionary modes when the MPU-85H/86H is driving either, but not
both, the pilot’s and copilot’s displays.

3.9.8.1 Localizer or MLS Azimu th Comparator

a. Enable Logic
A comparison of the two localizer deviation signals is performed when all of the following conditions are
met:
• On-side CAT II request discrete received.
• On-side DSP (or DCP) is valid and its active course is VOR/LOC or MLS.
• On-side RA is valid and less than 1000 feet.
• Cross-side data is valid.
• Both localizer signals tuned and valid or both MLS signals tuned and valid (data must be tuned and
valid on both VOR’s or both MLS’s).
• Cross-side DSP (or DCP) is not selected.
• Back course is not selected on either side.
• Go-around is not selected on either side.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-45

operation 523-0773950

b. Comparator Limits
A localizer comparator warning is annunciated when the enable logic is satisfied and the two localizer or
MLS azimuth deviations differ by more than 30 µA + 1/8 [LOC 1 + LOC 2]. ([ ] is the absolute value of
the localizer deviations.)
c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow box with LOC or MAZ inscribed appears flashing by
the vertical deviation pointer on the EADI and by the airplane symbol on the EHSI. The letters and the
box flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The master warn and CAT II compare discretes are
energized.
d. Comparator Activation Delay
Activation of the localizer comparator is delayed 0.75 second.

3.9.8.2 Glideslope or MLS Glide path Comparator

a. Enable Logic
A comparison of the two glideslope or MLS glidepath deviation signals is performed when all of the
following conditions are met:
• On-side CAT II request discrete received.
• On-side RA is valid and less than 1000 feet.
• Both DSP’s (or DCP’s) are valid and their active courses are VOR/LOC or MLS.
• Cross-side data is valid.
• Both glideslope signals are valid and both localizer signals tuned and valid or both MGP and MAZ
signals tuned and valid.
• Cross-side DSP (or DCP) is not selected on either side.
• Both sides are not in back course mode.
• Go-around is not selected on either side.

b. Comparator Limits
A comparator warning is annunciated when the enable logic is satisfied and the two glideslope or MLS
glidepath deviations differ by more than 40 µA + 1/8 [GS 1 + GS 2]. ([ ] is the absolute value of the
glideslope deviations.)
c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow box with GS or MGP inscribed, appears flashing by the
lower two dots of the GS scale on both the EADI and the EHSI. The letters and the box flash for 10
seconds before becoming steady. The master warn and CAT II compare discretes are energized.
d. Comparator Activation Delay
Activation of the glideslope comparator is delayed 0.75 second.

3.9.8.3 Radio Altitude Compara tor

a. Enable Logic
The radio altitude comparator is enabled when:
• On-side CAT II request discrete received.
• Cross-side data is valid.
• Both DSP’s (or DCP’s) are valid and their active courses are VOR/LOC or MLS.
• Both radio altimeters are valid.
• Cross-side DSP (or DCP) is not selected on either side.
• Go-around is not selected on either side.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-46

operation 523-0773950

b. Comparator Limits
A comparator warning is annunciated when the enable logic is satisfied, both radio altimeters are on
scale, or the on-side radio altimeter is less than 1000 feet and the difference between the two radio
altitudes is 30 feet plus a predetermined desense value. If the radio altimeter is off scale, its value is set
to the maximum for comparison purposes.
c. Annunciation
When a comparator warning is detected, a yellow box with RA inscribed appears flashing to the left of
the radio altitude display on the EADI. The letters and the box flash for 10 seconds before becoming
steady. The master warn discrete is energized.
d. Comparator Activation Delay
Activation of the radio altitude comparator is delayed 0.75 second.

3.9.9 Category II Excessive De viation Warnings

When the appropriate Category II logic enables are present, localizer, MLS azimuth, glideslope, or MLS
glidepath deviations are compared to prescribed limits, and appropriate warnings are displayed on the EADI
and EHSI when these limits are exceeded.

3.9.9.1 Excessive Localizer or M LS Azimuth Deviation

a. Enable Logic
The on-side localizer or MLS azimuth deviation is compared to the limit when all of the following
conditions are met:
• On-side Category II request discrete received.
• On-side VOR/LOC or MLS is the active course on both sides.
• On-side radio altitude is between 100 and 600 feet.
• On-side localizer is tuned and valid or MLS azimuth is valid.
• On-side back course is not detected.
• On-side DSP (or DCP) is valid and cross-side DSP (or DCP) is not selected.
• Go-around is not selected on either side.

b. Monitor Limits
An excessive deviation warning is annunciated when the enable logic is satisfied and the deviation
exceeds 20 µA. The on-side excessive deviation warning is also displayed when the cross-side system has
detected an excessive deviation condition, cross-side data is valid, and a localizer or MLS azimuth scale
is in view.
c. Annunciation
When an excessive localizer deviation is detected, the deviation pointer on the EADI and the deviation
bar on the EHSI change to yellow and flash. The flashing continues until the deviation signal is below
the limit and then it automatically reverts to a normal display.

3.9.9.2 Excessive Glideslope or ML S Glidepath Deviation

a. Enable Logic
The on-side glideslope or MLS glidepath deviation is compared to the limit when all of the following
conditions are met:
• On-side Category II request discrete received.
• On-side VOR/LOC or MLS is the active course on both sides.
• On-side ratio altitude is between 100 and 600 feet.
• On-side glideslope or MLS glidepath is valid.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-47

operation 523-0773950

• On-side localizer is tuned or MLS is selected.

• On-side back course is not detected.
• VNAV is not selected on-side.
• On-side DCP (or DSP) is valid and cross-side DCP (or DSP) is not selected.
• Go-around is not selected on either side.

b. Monitor Limits
An excessive deviation warning is annunciated when the enable logic is satisfied and the deviation
exceeds 65 µA. The on-side excessive deviation warning is also displayed when the cross-side system has
detected an excessive deviation condition, cross-side data is valid, and a glideslope or MLS glidepath
scale is in view.
c. Annunciation
When the enable logic conditions are satisfied and excessive glideslope deviation is detected, the vertical
deviation pointers on the EADI and EHSI change to yellow and flash. The flashing continues until the
deviation signal is below the limit and then it automatically reverts to a normal display.

3.9.10 EFIS System Flags

The EFIS system contains internal monitoring which can cause various flags to appear. If the display
processor unit (DPU) fails, the words DPU FAIL will appear in red above the airplane symbol on both the
EADI and EHSI. If the displays are being driven by the multifunction processor unit (MPU), the flag is MPU
FAIL. If either flag remains in view for more than 5 seconds, the display blanks except for the fail message.

EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3): If a display select panel (DSP) failure is detected, the letters DSP will appear in red,
and boxed, in place of the DH SET readout on the EADI (lower right corner) and in place of the digital
course readout on the EHSI (lower right corner).

EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13): If a display control panel (DCP) failure is detected, the letters DCP will appear in
red, and boxed, in place of the DH SET readout on the EADI (lower right corner) and in place of the digital
course readout on the EHSI (lower right corner).

If a failure of the cross-side data bus occurs, the letters XDTA will appear in red, and boxed, in the lower left
portion of the EADI and EHSI. Data from the cross-side sensors is no longer available, and any display
driven by cross-side data is flagged. The trend vector, reference airspeed, and digital F/S scale are removed.

The DSP and XDTA flags (or DCP and XDTA flags) flash for 10 seconds before becoming steady. The
flashing can be eliminated by pressing the master warn reset.

3.10 MFD-85A MULTIFUNCT ION DISPLAY — DISPLAY FORMATS

Standard functions displayed by the MFD include weather radar, pictorial navigation map, and page data.
Additional functions are available when the multifunction display is used with the Collins FMS-90 Flight
Management System or equivalent (hereafter referred to as LNAV). Additional functions available include
waypoint definition, display of multiple waypoints, and remote data.

3.10.1 Standard MFD-85A Fun ctions

3.10.1.1 Weather Radar

Weather information from the Collins WXT-250B Radar Receiver-Transmitter is processed by the WXP-85C
or -85D Weather Radar Panel and is available for display on the MFD. (As an option, the earlier WXT-250A
and the WXP-85A or -85B can be used instead of the WXT-250B and WXP-85C or -85D. The earlier units
only display four colors (black, green, yellow, or red) and do not provide the PAC Alert feature. The WXP-

Revised 12 May 1999 3-48

operation 523-0773950

85C and -85D will be discussed for the remainder of this operation section.) The WXP-85C and -85D are
identical in appearance to earlier WXP-85A and -85B versions, but are different in function. The WXP-85C
and -85D both provide a 5-color (black, green, yellow, red, magenta) weather radar display with PAC Alert
(Path Attenuation Correction). The purpose of PAC Alert is to alert the pilot when the radar encounters a
target having rainfall rates heavy enough to attenuate the beam so much that targets behind it may not be
displayed. With the PAC Alert feature, a yellow band will occasionally appear at the outer perimeter of the
range being displayed. Whenever this band appears, that portion of the radar’s scan may be missing certain
distant targets that are masked by intervening areas of rainfall.

If RDR has been selected on the MFD with target alert enabled on the WXP and not in OFF, STBY, or MAP
mode, a yellow box with the yellow letter T inscribed will appear nonflashing to the right of the lubber line.
The T annunciation will flash when a target is detected. The target alert function is automatically enabled
on the MFD (but not the EHSI’s) for all other MFD formats (NAV, RMT, PGE, and EMG) regardless of the
position of the WXP TGT pushbutton. If the TGT switch is on and MAP mode is selected, the target alert
circuits are disabled (T will not be displayed) but will again become functional when WX or NORM mode is
reselected on the WXP. The weather radar mode is displayed in cyan in the upper left corner in all MFD
formats.

3.10.1.2 Navigation Information

A pictorial navigation map showing the location of two VOR/DME stations and/or the active waypoint from
the LNAV may be selected. The map display may be selected with or without the overlay of weather radar
information. Map range is determined by the control settings on the WXP when radar is selected. In NAV
only modes, range may be selected by using the line advance (inverted delta, ∇) or line reverse (delta, ∆) keys
along the bottom edge of the MFD front panel. When entering the NAV only mode, the range will be the last
range selected in this mode.

3.10.1.3 Page Data

100 pages of user information may be stored in nonvolatile memory in the MFD. This data may be arranged
in chapters and can be designated as either normal page (PGE) or emergency (EMG) data. All 100 pages can
be input and modified by the user using either the hand-held RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer or the
CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit.

3.10.2 Additional MFD-85A Fun ctions

When used in conjunction with an LNAV, the MFD provides the following additional functions.

3.10.2.1 Waypoint Definition

When the NAV display mode has been selected, the joystick at the lower right corner of the MFD may be
used to move a cursor around the MAP display. The bearing and distance data associated with the cursor
waypoint can be digitally transferred to the LNAV.

3.10.2.2 Display of Multiple Wayp oints

The EFIS-85B EHSI’s and the MFD can display multiple (up to three) waypoints dependent on selected
range. Waypoints are interconnected and are identified on the displays by their designated waypoint
number. Waypoints are transmitted by the LNAV in either ascending or descending order dependent on the
route selected.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-49

operation 523-0773950

3.10.2.3 Remote Data

The LNAV transmits pages of navigation information which can be displayed on the MFD when the proper
remote port is selected. The different pages of data (and associated colors) are controlled by selecting
different modes on the LNAV’s CDU. With some LNAV’s, the joystick and select keys can be used to select
other pages of information. (With four remote ports available, alphanumeric data from two FMS-90 systems
plus two (or three if only one FMS-90 is installed) additional data sources can be displayed one at a time if
available in the system configurations.)

3.10.3 MFD-85A Display Forma ts

3.10.3.1 Radar (RDR) Format

The weather radar only format has a solid range mark with half of the selected range annunciated in cyan at
the right hand end of the arc. Refer to Figure 3-16.

The range mark is green in MAP mode and cyan in the other modes. The weather radar range is selected on
the WXP. The weather mode is in cyan and is located in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The radar
mode of the MFD is indicated by the letters RDR in green next to the RDR button. Pressing the RDR button
allows weather to be displayed on the MFD in the form selected on the WXP. A second press of the RDR
button deletes the weather display. The weather radar target alert is in the upper righthand corner and is
yellow. The white airplane symbol is in the bottom center and the white compass sector is across the top of
the display. A magenta heading cursor will also be displayed if the selected heading is within the range of
the displayed compass sector. Weather intensity is color coded with the black screen representing no
detectable moisture, minimum moisture levels displayed in green, the next level in yellow, the next in red,
and the heaviest levels of rainfall shown in magenta. The PAC Alert feature operates as previously
described. If MAP mode is selected on the WXP, the red is replaced by magenta, and green is replaced by
cyan. If RDR and NAV modes are selected, the range mark remains solid. If NAV mode is selected without
RDR, the range mark is dashed. If the WXP is turned off or a loss of signal from the WXP is detected, and
radar mode is selected, the range mark is removed and the range is set to 300 nm.

If a failure of the heading sensor is detected, a red box with the letters HDG inscribed appear to the right of
the lubber line. If the MPU-85H/86H detects a heading comparator warn, a yellow box with the letters HDG
inscribed appear to the left of the lubber line. If a fault is detected in the weather radar system, FAULT
replaces the radar mode annunciation.

3.10.3.2 Navigation (NAV) Forma t

Refer to Figure 3-17. NAV symbology is superimposed on a basic display consisting of a lubber line (white), a
±40-degree compass sector (white), an intermediate range arc (cyan), and an airplane symbol (white). Two
VOR’s, one LNAV, and a heading line may be displayed simultaneously. If the WXP is on and RDR mode is
selected, the range is selected on the WXP and the range mark is solid. If RDR mode is not selected, the
range is selected using the line advance (inverted delta, ∇) or line reverse (delta, Mkt∆) keys along the
bottom edge of the MFD front panel and the range mark is dashed.

VOR stations as selected by the MFD NAV menu are shown by octagon-shaped symbols placed in proper
rho-theta position with respect to airplane heading and selected range. A selected course line is drawn
through the station symbol with its position controlled by the CRS knob on the corresponding DSP (or CHP).
The selected course line may be rotated with the DSP’s (or CHP’s) selected CRS knob even if the primary
course is LNAV or OFF. If DSP (or DCP) control is transferred, the corresponding course line is removed.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-50

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-16. Radar (RDR) Format

Figure 3-17. Navigation (NAV) Format

Revised 12 May 1999 3-51

operation 523-0773950

The course line is solid on the to side of the VOR and dashed on the from side. If the VOR symbol is off scale
with respect to selected range and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with an arrow pointing toward the
station and an IDENT is displayed on the line. The digital course and station identifier are shown in the
lower left corner for VOR1 or lower right for VOR2. Left side (pilot’s) VOR’s are green and right side
(copilot’s) are yellow.

If a VOR is selected for display and a localizer frequency is tuned, no symbol is displayed and the sensor
annunciator displays LOC1 or LOC2. If the paired DME is placed in hold or fails, the VOR symbol and
station identifier are removed and the sensor annunciator displays bearing. The colors for these
annunciators are the same as the primary course annunciators.

A selected LNAV waypoint string (up to three waypoints) is displayed as star-shaped symbols with track
lines placed in the proper rho-theta position. The course to the next LNV1 waypoint and its waypoint
number are annunciated in the lower left corner below the VOR1 course annunciation. The sensor for the
next LNV2 waypoint and its waypoint number are annunciated in the lower right corner below the VOR2
course annunciation. LNV1 displays are white and LNV2 are cyan. If the next waypoint is off scale, the
course line is still displayed with an arrow pointing toward the to waypoint. If the distance between the first
and second or second and third waypoints is greater than 511 nm (the maximum value), a line is drawn as if
the waypoint was off scale. The to waypoint flashes to indicate waypoint alert from the LNAV.

With LNAV data being displayed, the joystick can be used to position a new waypoint in a compatible LNAV
system. As soon as the joystick is moved, the third line select key (from the top) is labeled ENTER and is
used to insert the new waypoint in the waypoint string of the selected LNAV as the to waypoint. If the
ENTER button is not pressed and the joystick is not moved for 30 seconds, the joystick data and ENTER are
removed from the display.

The heading cursor is shown by two adjacent magenta rectangles when selected heading is on scale. When
selected heading is off scale, a digital readout (magenta) will appear at the appropriate end of the compass
sector closest to the selected heading value and a magenta line will appear from the center of the airplane
symbol to the edge of the display at the selected heading angle. If desired, the lower line select key in NAV
menu mode (labeled HDG) can be pressed to display the selected heading line. Selected heading is controlled
by the HDG knob on the left side DSP (or CHP) unless control has been transferred to the right side.

The weather radar mode (cyan) is shown in the upper left corner. The target alert (yellow) is shown in the
upper right. The NAV mode of the MFD is annunciated by the green letters NAV in the upper left of the
display below the weather radar mode. With both RDR and NAV selected, weather radar information is
superimposed on the selected navigation display. Weather colors are as previously described.

If a failure of the heading sensor is detected, a red box with the letters HDG inscribed appears to the right of
the lubber line. If the failure was from an internal synchro monitor, the compass sector display is frozen. If
the MPU-85H/86H detects a heading comparator warn, a yellow box with the letters HDG inscribed appear
to the left of the lubber line.

If a failure of a selected navigation sensor is detected, the annunciation in the lower left (left side course) or
lower right (right side course) changes to VOR or LNV as applicable and turns red. The navaid symbols and
connecting lines are removed from the display. Compatibility between NAV sensors and HDG sources are
the same as described in paragraph 3.10.4.3 for MFD-85A NAV operation.

3.10.3.3 Remote (RMT) Format

Refer to Figure 3-18 and Figure 3-19. When RMT is selected, data from one of four remote inputs can be
displayed. Selection of the input is made from the line select keys. The data displayed depends on the
position(s) of the source system control(s). Weather Radar mode and target alert status remain on the
display in this format.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-52

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-18. Typical RMT Format, RMT Menu

Figure 3-19. Typical RMT Format, RMT Display

Revised 12 May 1999 3-53

operation 523-0773950

3.10.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD) Operation

The following paragraphs describe the operation of the MFD. The MFD is a flight planning unit which is
used to augment and add to the operational capabilities of the EFIS-85B system.

If none of the mode buttons on the left side of the MFD are pressed, the display consists of the airplane
symbol, compass sector with lubber line, heading cursor (if on scale) or if selected heading is off scale, a
digital readout (magenta) will appear at the appropriate end of the compass sector closest to the selected
heading value and a magenta line will appear from the center of the airplane symbol to the edge of the
display at the selected heading angle. The selected heading function is controlled by the HDG knob on the
left side DSP (or CHP) unless control has been transferred to the right side DSP (or CHP).

3.10.4.1 Radar (RDR)

Pressing the RDR button allows the weather radar mode selected on the WXP-85C or -85D Weather Radar
Panel to be displayed on the MFD. The display is weather only or can be selected in conjunction with the
NAV mode. If in weather only, selecting the NAV function adds the NAV modes previously selected to the
weather display. If weather (RDR) is pressed again, the display reverts to NAV only. If in NAV only,
selecting RDR will add weather to the NAV display. The display consists of an airplane symbol in the bottom
center of the display, a compass segment and lubber line at the top, a single cyan range mark displayed at
midrange with the midrange distance (5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, and 150) shown in cyan digits at the right-hand
end of the range mark (2.5- and 300-nmi midrange distances (5- and 600-nmi full scale ranges) are available
in NAV only mode), weather radar mode, heading cursor (if on scale), and heading line if selected along with
the weather radar display. If in RDR only or in a combined RDR-NAV mode, the range mark is solid and
weather range is selected on the WXP, as is the radar mode. If in NAV only, the range mark is dashed and
the range is selected using the ∆ or ∇ keys along the bottom edge of the MFD. Weather colors and PAC Alert
are as previously described. If MAP mode is selected on the WXP, red is replaced by magenta, and green is
replaced by cyan. The range mark also changes from cyan to green.

3.10.4.2 Navigation (NAV)

Refer to Figure 3-20 and Figure 3-21. When the NAV button is pressed, the navigation mode will appear
showing the NAVAIDS last selected along with the airplane symbol in the lower center, compass segment
and lubber line at the top, and the cyan range mark at midrange. In NAV only, the range mark is dashed
and the range displayed at the right end of the cyan range mark is selected by the ∆ or ∇ keys along the
bottom edge of the MFD. A second press of the NAV button removes the navigation display.

Note

If dual area navigation systems are installed and operating, the two key labels at the upper right of
Figure 3-20 would change from VOR 1 to RNV 1 and from VOR 2 to RNV 2 respectively.

The upper line select key (the key on the right hand side of the display with the green boxed arrow pointing
toward it) allows the pilot to change the source of the NAVAIDS. When this key is pressed, the MFD goes
into the NAV menu mode and the NAV display is replaced by key labels as follows (from top to bottom):
VOR 1, VOR 2, LNV1/LNV2, and HDG. The word ENTER also appears in green to the right of the NAV
button. To select sensors for the NAV display, the desired line select buttons opposite the sensor are pressed
with sensor selection indicated by a color change to green if selected and white if not selected. Pressing the
HDG button adds/deletes a selected heading line. For the LNV1/LNV2 key, successive pushes will alternate
between both off (LNV1/LNV2 both white), LNV1 selected (LNV1 is green), LNV2 selected (LNV2 is green),
and back to both off. (Only one LNAV may be selected for display at a given time. However, it may be
selected in conjunction with two VOR’s.) The sensor select keys are interlocked to give priority to data so
that only two sources are enabled at a time (HDG is independent). Following selection of the desired

Revised 12 May 1999 3-54

operation 523-0773950

sensor(s), pressing the NAV button (labeled ENTER) returns the display to the sector display with the
selected sensor(s) shown. Color coding for the selected NAV sources are as follows:

VOR1 Green, includes map symbol, course line (if selected), digital course and bearing,
station ident, and to/from.
VOR2 Yellow, same data as VOR1
LNV1 White, includes waypoint symbol(s) and connecting lines, digital course, and
waypoint numbers.
LNV2 Cyan, same data as LNV1
Heading line Magenta (heading cursor is also magenta)

Figure 3-20. Typical NAV Display, NAV Mode Select

Figure 3-21. Typical NAV Display, NAV Mode Display

Revised 12 May 1999 3-55

operation 523-0773950

When digital course is displayed, it will be shown to a whole number of degrees only. If VOR is the selected
sensor, then the position of the corresponding course line is controlled by the CRS knob on the applicable
DSP. The course line may be rotated with the DSP’s (or CHP’s) selected CRS knob even if the primary course
is LNAV or OFF. If HDG is the selected sensor, a magenta line will connect the heading cursor to the
airplane symbol. This line will rotate with the heading cursor. Heading select operates exactly as on the
EHSI with the DSP (or CHP) HDG knob controlling this function. When displaying the NAV format,
weather radar information may be added/deleted by pressing the RDR button.

3.10.4.3 Compatibility Between N avigation Display and Heading Source

Depending on selected navigation sources and the selection of magnetic or true heading sources,
compatibility problems can occur. Table 3-2 defines the conditions which are incompatible and the MFD
annunciations that are provided to alert the pilot of those conditions.

Table 3-2. MFD Map.

MAP SELECT HEADING SOURCE

MAG 1 TRUE 1

VOR 1 or RNV 1 OK *
VOR 2 or RNV 2 OK *
LNAV 1 TRUE * OK
LNAV 1 MAG OK *
LNAV 2 TRUE * OK
LNAV 2 MAG OK *
* = Incompatible navigation source vs heading source. For these cases, the navigation source annunciator at the bottom of the MFD
will flash until a compatible selection is made.

3.10.4.4 Joystick Operation

Refer to Figure 3-22. In NAV mode, the joystick can be used to locate an MFD defined waypoint for entry in
a compatible LNAV system if installed. As soon as the joystick is moved in any direction, the label

ENTER appears next to the third line select key (from the top). As the green waypoint symbol is being
positioned on the display, its position (course and distance) from the airplane symbol is shown in green digits
in the lower left center of the display. A green dashed line interconnects the waypoint symbol and the center
of the airplane symbol to aid in orientation. Once the waypoint has been positioned, it can be inserted in the
selected LNAV waypoint string by pressing the line select key labeled ENTER. Only one LNAV waypoint
string may be selected at one time (selecting one will deselect the other) and joystick information will be
transmitted to the selected LNAV only.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-56

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-22. Locating a Waypoint Using the Joystick

3.10.4.5 Remote Data (RMT)

Refer to Figure 3-23 and Figure 3-24. Pressing the RMT button will cause four labels (RMT 1, RMT 2, RMT
3, RMT 4) to appear next to the line select keys. Pressing the appropriate line select key will cause data from
the selected remote input to be displayed on the MFD. The displayed data depends upon the position of the
controls on the selected remote system. If no remote device is connected or if the selected system does not
output remote data for the line select key pressed, a message NO DATA FROM REMOTE DEVICE #X will
be displayed after approximately 5 seconds.

3.10.5 Page (PGE) and Emerge ncy (EMG) Procedures

Note

Procedures for programming data (PGE, EMG, chapter titles) into the MFD-85A using the RDP-300
Remote Data Programmer are located in paragraph 3.15.

Procedures for programming data (PGE, EMG, chapter titles) into the MFD-85( ) using the CEU-85
Checklist Entry Unit are located in paragraph 3.16.

100 pages of combined page and emergency procedures are available. Each page has a 13-line-per-page, 20-
character-per-line format. The top line on each page is reserved for weather radar mode and target alert
leaving 12 lines available for programming data. The data can be chapterized as required by the user to
organize the data. If the data is not chapterized, then the 100 pages can be accessed one page at a time
starting with page 1 whenever the PGE or EMG buttons are pressed. The following procedure for using the
PGE and EMG functions assumes the data has been chapterized. Refer to Figure 3-25 through Figure 3-28.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-57

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-23. Typical RMT Format, RMT Menu

Figure 3-24. Typical RMT Format, RMT Display

Revised 12 May 1999 3-58

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-25. Typical PGE Data Chapter Titles

Figure 3-26. PGE Checklist Example

Revised 12 May 1999 3-59

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-27. Typical EMG Chapter Titles

Figure 3-28. EMG Checklist Example

Revised 12 May 1999 3-60

operation 523-0773950

a. When page (PGE) is selected and the joystick is moved downward or upward, up to four chapter titles
will appear next to the line select keys on the right side of the MFD. Movement of the joystick upward
will cause the next set of up to four chapter titles to be displayed. Movement of the joystick downward
will cause the previous four chapter titles to be displayed.
b. If one of these four chapter titles is needed, pressing the appropriate line select key causes the first page
of the selected chapter to be displayed. If other chapter titles are required, movement of the joystick
downward will cause the next four chapter titles to be displayed. Movement of the joystick upward will
cause the previous four chapter titles to be displayed.
c. When the desired chapter title is found and the first page has been called up by pressing the appropriate
line select key, the keys along the bottom of the MFD are used to control the page data. These keys are
used as follows:
Note

When the first page of a chapter is called up, the first line will be cyan and the rest will be yellow.

1. Line advance (inverted delta, ∇) — Press this button to acknowledge a line of data and move down
one line (does not have to be pushed for any blank lines). The old line becomes green and the next
line below becomes cyan. If the last line is cyan and the ∇ button is pressed, the display advances to
the next page. If the line being considered is the result of pressing the RCL button (to reconsider
skipped lines), pressing the ∇ button acknowledges that line and automatically advances the cyan
line to the next line that was skipped, regardless of which page within the selected chapter that line
falls on. Should all data checks be acknowledged, pressing the ∇ button will cause all of the lines
within the selected chapter to be scanned and will return to page 1 of the selected chapter.
Note

Each page may contain as many as 12 lines of data with each line having up to 20 characters. Each
line may be individually considered, acknowledged, or skipped if that page is to be used as a
checklist. Lines already considered or acknowledged are green. Lines not yet considered are yellow.
The line currently being considered is cyan, a blue-green color. If the line being considered (cyan) is
to be acknowledged, then press the ∇ button. The line that was being considered becomes green and
the next line becomes cyan. If the line being considered is not yet to be acknowledged but is to be
reconsidered at a later time, then press the SKP button. The line that was being considered remains
the color it was prior to being considered, and the next line becomes cyan.

2. Line reverse (delta, ∆) — Press this button to back the cursor up one line of data without
acknowledgement. The cyan line becomes yellow and the next line above (excluding blanks) becomes
cyan. If the cursor is on the first line and the ∆ button is pressed, the display backs up to the bottom
line of the preceding page within the selected chapter.
3. Skip (SKP) — Press this button to select the next lower line of data without acknowledging the
current line of data. The cyan line (current line being considered) remains as it was before becoming
cyan (if yellow it remains yellow, if green it remains green) and the next line below becomes cyan.
When a line is skipped, it is identified in the MFD as an uncompleted line and is subject to later
recall as long as you do not change chapters. All skips will be lost if the chapter is changed prior to
completing the checklist (using the recall button). For this reason, some operators may prefer to put
the entire checklist in one chapter rather than breaking the checklist out into different chapters.
After skipping a line, follow normal procedures to complete the checklist.
If the line being considered is the result of pressing the RCL (recall) button, then pressing SKP will
skip over that line without acknowledging it and automatically go to the next skipped line or the top
line on the first page of the selected chapter, whichever occurs first.
4. Recall (RCL) — When in the PGE or EMG mode, press this button at any time to recall previously
skipped lines (lines not yet acknowledged) as long as you do not change chapters (see skip
paragraphs above). The recall function immediately displays the first page in the selected chapter

Revised 12 May 1999 3-61

operation 523-0773950

which has a skipped (yellow) line. That line becomes cyan. If the line is to be acknowledged, press
the ∇ button as before. The line is acknowledged and the system resumes searching for the next
skipped line. If a skipped line is not yet to be acknowledged, press the SKP button as before. The
system still identifies that line as uncompleted and resumes searching for the next skipped line. If
all of the skipped lines are acknowledged (∇), the display returns to the first page within the selected
chapter. Note that anytime the PGE or EMG mode is selected and the RCL button is pressed, the
system returns to the top line of the first page within the selected chapter and begins searching for
skipped lines. Going to another chapter cancels all skipped lines and checklist in the previous
chapter. If in PGE or EMG mode and NAV or RMT is selected, then pressing RCL immediately
returns the display to the line (either being considered, acknowledged, or skipped) in the PGE or
EMG chapter that was being displayed prior to selecting NAV or RMT.
5. Joystick up/dn — moves to next page (down) or prior page (up) within the selected chapter.
Automatically rolls over in either direction within chapter.
6. Joystick right/left — moves display to the first page of next chapter (right) or the first page of prior
chapter (left).
d. Emergency procedures (EMG) are handled exactly as with the PGE operation. The 100 pages can be
divided as needed between PGE and EMG. Emergency procedures can also be chapterized as discussed
in PGE operation.
e. Exiting from either PGE or EMG is accomplished by initiating any other selection. If in PGE or EMG
mode and NAV or RMT is selected, then pressing RCL immediately returns the display to the line
(either being considered, acknowledged, or skipped) in the PGE or EMG chapter that was being
displayed prior to selecting NAV or RMT. Going from PGE to EMG and vice versa is direct with key
selections.
f. Data entry is made using the handheld RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer as described in paragraph
3.15. Data entry may also be made using the CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit, as described in its
instruction book.

3.10.6 EFIS Self-Test

The self-test sequence is initiated by actuating an external installer supplied switch or switches (EFIS TEST
or similar). When self-test is first initiated, an increment of 10 degrees is added to the current values of pitch
and roll, and 20 degrees is added to heading. A positive increment is added to the pilot’s side and a negative
increment is added to the copilot’s side. The word TEST, in red, will appear on the EADI’s and the MFD
while the test is in process. The addition of the differential 10- and 20-degree increments causes the
comparator logic in the DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit to give flashing PIT (pitch), ROL (roll), and
HDG (heading) comparator warning messages. A copyright message also appears during test.

The Category II comparator and excessive deviation warnings may also be tested. If the Category II select
switch is actuated and the on-side localizer is tuned, the Category II warning annunciators are displayed.
These include GS compare, LOC compare, RA compare, glideslope excessive deviation, and localizer
excessive deviation.

If the self-test switch is held for longer than 4 seconds, the pitch, roll, and heading increments are removed
from view and all flags associated with the EADI and EHSI displays will be brought into view. When the
self-test switch is released, the displays will return to normal operation. An external installer supplied
comparator reset button or switch must be actuated to reset the PIT, ROL, and HDG comparator warning
messages. Actuating master reset once stops the PIT, ROL or HDG indications from flashing. Actuating
comparator reset will eliminate the comparator messages if the condition causing the comparator warning
has been eliminated.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-62

operation 523-0773950

3.11 REVERSIONARY MODE S OF OPERATION

The EFIS-85B Electronic Flight Instrument System provides system operational capability in the event of
the failure of a system element. The following paragraphs describe this capability with reference to any
operational differences which may be required. All external switches for reversionary switching are supplied
as part of the installation by the installer. Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement for additional
information, switch labels, etc.

3.11.1 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic F light Display (EFD) Failure

Refer to Figure 3-29. In the event of an EFD failure, an external switch can be actuated to cause either the
EADI display to transfer to the EHSI in composite format or the EHSI to transfer to the EADI to form the
same composite format and an EHSI format to transfer to the MFD. Another interconnect wiring option
allows the EADI to be transferred unchanged to the EHSI, and the EHSI to be transferred to the MFD.

3.11.2 DPU-85H/86H Display P rocessor Unit (DPU) Failure

Detected DPU failures are annunciated by the red words DPU FAIL centered laterally and immediately
above the vertical center of both the EADI and the EHSI. If a DPU failure occurs, an external switch can be
actuated that allows the MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) to provide the control to the
affected EADI and EHSI. Since the MPU has access to the DSP-85A Display Select Panel (or DCP-85E
Display Control Panel) controlling the failed DPU, no degradation in EADI or EHSI performance occurs.
When the MPU replaces a DPU, the MFD-85A displays either an EHSI or a composite format. Except for the
PWR pushbutton and the INT control, none of the controls on the MFD are operational in this mode.

Figure 3-29. Typical Composite Format

Revised 12 May 1999 3-63

operation 523-0773950

3.11.3 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP) Failure

For detected DSP failures, the letters DSP, red and boxed, replace the decision height readout on the EADI
and the digital course readout on the EHSI. Also, the FCS mode data received through the DSP are removed
from the EADI. If a DSP failure occurs, an external switch can be actuated that will cause the DPU on the
side with the failed DSP to be controlled by the opposite side DSP. This transfer condition is annunciated by
the letters XDSP, yellow and boxed, located in the lower right corner of the EADI next to the decision height
readout.

Under the transfer condition, all display parameters (except FCS mode annunciation) are controlled by the
opposite side DSP. Parameters controlled by the DSP are displayed in yellow on the side with the failed
DSP.

If the DSP is transferred and the on-side DSP does not have a detected failure, the on-side FCS modes are
displayed. If the on-side DSP has a detected failure, the FCS mode annunciation is removed.

3.11.4 DCP-85E Display Contro l Panel (DCP) Failure

For detected DCP failures, the letters DCP, red and boxed, replace the decision height readout on the EADI
and the digital course readout on the EHSI. Also, the FCS mode data received through the DCP are removed
from the EADI. If a DCP failure occurs, an external switch can be actuated that will cause the DPU on the
side with the failed DCP to be controlled by the opposite side DCP. This transfer condition is annunciated by
the letters XDCP, yellow and boxed, located in the lower right corner of the EADI next to the decision height
readout.

Under the transfer condition, all display parameters (except FCS mode annunciation) are controlled by the
opposite side DCP. Parameters controlled by the DCP are displayed in yellow on the side with the failed
DCP.

If the DCP is transferred and the on-side DCP does not have a detected failure, the on-side FCS modes are
displayed. If the on-side DCP has a detected failure, the FCS mode annunciation is removed.

3.11.5 MPU-85H/86H Multifunc tion Processor Unit (MPU) Failure

A detected MPU failure results in the words MPU FAIL being displayed in red on the MFD-85A and on the
EFD’s if they are being driven by the MPU. If the single MPU fails, external switching of the digital bus
lines is required to maintain cross-side data and comparator functions on either side EADI or EHSI. If the
fault causing the MPU FAIL is present for longer than 10 seconds, the displays being driven are blanked
except for the words MPU FAIL. Backup drive for the EFD’s is lost as well as the MFD display. The weather
radar modes are still available on the EHSI’s.

3.11.6 MFD-85A Multifunction Display Failure

In the event of an MFD-85A failure, there is no complete backup capability for this display. Navigation and
weather radar information is available for display on the EHSI’s. Checklist and remote data functions are
lost.

3.11.7 Attitude Switching

a. Pilot’s Side — Actuating an external switch replaces the pilot’s side data with the copilot’s side data on
the pilot’s EADI as the primary attitude. When this function is selected, the letters ATT2, in yellow,
appear to the left of the radio altitude display in the upper right center of the pilot’s EADI. The PIT and
ROL attitude comparator function remains active but are using the same data.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-64

operation 523-0773950

b. Copilot’s Side — Actuating an external switch replaces the copilot’s side data with the pilot’s side data
on the copilot’s EADI as the primary attitude. When this function is selected, the letters ATT1, in yellow,
appear to the left of the radio altitude display in the upper right center of the copilot’s EADI. The PIT
and ROL attitude comparator function remains active.

3.11.8 Compass Switching

a. Pilot’s Side — Actuating an external switch replaces the pilot’s side data with the copilot’s side data on
the pilot’s EHSI as the primary heading. When this function is selected, the letters HDG2, in yellow,
appear to the left of the digital CRS display in the lower right of the pilot’s EHSI. The HDG comparator
function remains active.
b. Copilot’s Side — Actuating an external switch replaces the copilot’s side data with the pilot’s side data
on the copilot’s EHSI as the primary heading. When this function is selected, the letters HDG1, in
yellow, appear to the left of the digital CRS display in the lower right of the copilot’s EHSI. The HDG
comparator function remains active.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-65

operation 523-0773950

3.12 SUMMARY OF EFIS-85B SYMBOLOGY

The following illustrations (Figure 3-30 through Figure 3-34) show the location and color of the EADI and
EHSI annunciators, special displays, and flags.

Figure 3-30. EADI Symbology, Annunciators and Special Displays

1 FCS ARMED VERTICAL MODE (paragraph 3.7.12) — For FCS-85/86, see Figure 3-7. For FCS-
80, see Figure 3-9. For FCS-65, see Figure 3-11.

2 FCS ACTIVE VERTICAL MODE (paragraph 3.7.12) — For FCS-85/86, see Figure 3-7. For FCS-
80, see Figure 3-9. For FCS-65, see Figure 3-11.

3 FCS MODE TEST — For FCS-80, PASS (yellow) means all modes available. FAIL (red) means
one or more modes unavailable. TEST is written for FCS-85/86 and FCS-65.

4 FCS ACTIVE LATERAL MODE (paragraph 3.7.12) — For FCS-85/86, see Figure 3-8. For FCS-
80, see Figure 3-10. For FCS-65, see Figure 3-12.

5 RADIO ALTITUDE COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-66

operation 523-0773950

6 FCS ARMED LATERAL MODE (paragraph 3.7.12) — For FCS-85/86, see Figure 3-8. For FCS-
80, see Figure 3-10. For FCS-65, see Figure 3-12.

7 RADIO ALTITUDE (GREEN) — 2500 feet is maximum.

8 TRIM ANNUNCIATOR (paragraph 3.7.13.2)

outer middle airport

9 MARKER BEACON — (cyan), (yellow), (white)

10 ALTITUDE ALERT (YELLOW)

11
VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE — Glideslope (green), if CAT II, flashing yellow while
deviation is excessive. Altitude (green).

12 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

13 ATTITUDE SOURCE ANNUNCIATOR — ATT1 or ATT2. White for on-side, yellow for cross-side.

14 DECISION HEIGHT SET (CYAN) — 999 feet is maximum. Flashes between DH +50 feet and
DH.

15 CONTROL TRANSFERRED TO CROSS-SIDE (YELLOW)

16 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

17 LATERAL DEVIATION SOURCE — Localizer (green), if CAT II, flashing yellow while
deviation is excessive. VOR (green). LNAV (white).

18 PITCH AND ROLL ATTITUDE COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW)

19 SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE (CYAN) — SPD (analog air- speed) or AOA (angle of attack)

20 INDICATED AIRSPEED DISPLAY — Green digits surrounded by a green T-shaped box on a

black background (paragraph 3.7.10).

21 DECISION HEIGHT ANNUNCIATOR (YELLOW)

22 EFIS SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR (RED)

23 YAW DAMPER ANNUNCIATOR (paragraph 3.7.13)

24 AUTOPILOT ENGAGE (paragraph 3.7.13)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-67

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-31. EHSI Symbology, Annunciators and Special Displays (ROSE Format Shown)

1 SHAPE-CODED BEARING POINTER (MAGENTA) — VOR, LNAV, ADF.

2 HEADING COMPARATOR WARNING (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

3 HEADING DATA (WHITE) — ∇ = magnetic source, TRUE = true heading source, DG = direc-
tional gyrott ∇ ∇

4 DEVIATION TYPE (SEE NOTE) — LIN, ANG, or XTK. If DME is lost or in hold when flying
linearized VOR, changes to ANG and flashes for 10 seconds. If in back localizer and VNAV is
enabled, B/L is displayed.

5 DEAD RECKONING (YELLOW)

6 WEATHER RADAR TARGET ALERT (YELLOW) — Flashes when target is detected.

7 NAV DATA (SEE NOTE) — TTG = time-to-go, ET = elapsed time, GSP = ground speed, and ###
= wind speed (digits) and direction from (arrow).

Revised 12 May 1999 3-68

operation 523-0773950

8 WAYPOINT ALERT (WHITE) — To/from indicator flashes.

9 VERTICAL DEVIATION SOURCE — Glideslope (green), if CAT II, flashing yellow while
deviation is excessive. MGP (green). VNAV (white).

If in back localizer and VNAV is not enabled, B/L is displayed in place of the glideslope scale.

10 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

11 HEADING SENSOR ANNUNCIATOR — HDG1 or HDG2. White for on-side, yellow for cross-
side.

12 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

13 LATERAL DEVIATION — If CAT II, flashing yellow while deviation is excessive.

14 BEARING POINTER SOURCE — Green for on-side VOR/ADF, white for on-side LNAV, and
cyan for all cross-side sources.

15 SECOND COURSE ARROW SOURCE (CYAN) — If VOR is selected with DME in hold, VOR1 H
or VOR2 H is displayed with VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and H in yellow. If VOR is selected and the
DME fails, VOR1 D or VOR2 D is displayed with VOR1 or VOR2 in cyan and D in red.

16 PRIMARY COURSE ARROW SOURCE — Green for on-side VOR/LOC, white for on-side LNAV,
and yellow for all cross-side sources.

17 DME HOLD (YELLOW)

18 LNAV MESSAGE (YELLOW) — Flashes until acknowledged.

Note

The following legends/readouts follow the same color coding as the primary course arrow source:
Distance, time-to-go, ground speed, digital course, primary course arrow, to/from, deviation source
annunciator, and B/L. ET (elapsed time) is green for on-side VOR, white for on-side LNAV, and
yellow for cross-side VOR and LNAV.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-69

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-32. EHSI Symbology, Annunciators (Approach Format Shown)

1 HEADING BUG (MAGENTA) — Shown on scale.

2 WEATHER RADAR OR NAV RANGE MARK — With weather radar enabled, range mark is solid
cyan for STBY, TEST, WX, and NORM modes. Range mark is solid green for MAP mode. With
navigation only (no weather radar), range mark is dashed cyan.

3 WEATHER RADAR OR NAV RANGE — 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, or 150 indicates 1/2 of range selected
on WXP when radar is selected on the DSP (or DCP). 2.5, 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150, or 300 indicates
1/2 of range selected with RNG knob on the DSP (or SEL/RNG on the DCP) when weather radar is
not enabled.

4 GLIDESLOPE COMPARATOR (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

5 TO/FROM ANNUNCIATOR (APPLIES TO APPR FORMAT ONLY) — The to/from pointer visible
on the ROSE format is replaced by the letters TO or FR when the EHSI is displaying the APPR
format. The letters are green for an on-side VOR source and yellow for a cross-side source, or white
for LNV. If an LNAV is the primary selected course, the TO annunciation flashes to indicate
waypoint alert. If an LNAV is the second selected course, the star-shaped to waypoint symbol
(cyan) flashes to indicate waypoint alert.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-70

operation 523-0773950

6 LOCALIZER COMPARATOR (YELLOW) — Flashes until reset.

7 WAYPOINT ALERT AND TO/FROM DISPLAY (APPLIES TO ENR FORMAT ONLY) — If an

LNAV is the primary selected course, the star-shaped to waypoint symbol flashes to indicate
waypoint alert. The waypoint symbols and track lines are white if selected from the on-side sensor
or yellow if selected from the cross-side sensor.

If an LNAV is the second selected course, an arrow is drawn on the track line pointing to the to
waypoint. The star-shaped to waypoint symbol flashes to indicate waypoint alert. The waypoint
symbols, track lines, and arrows are cyan for the second selected course.

Also unique to the enroute format (but not shown on the illustration) is the to/from display when a
VOR is the primary or second selected course. The VOR is shown by an octagon-shaped symbol
with the station identifier displayed next to the VOR symbol on the side nearest the vertical center
line of the display. A selected course line is drawn through the VOR symbol with its position
controlled by the CRS knob on the DSP (or CHP). The course line is solid on the to side of the
symbol and dashed on the from side. If the VOR symbol is off scale with respect to selected range
and/or bearing, the course line is drawn with an arrow pointing toward the station. For the
primary selected course, the VOR symbol, station identifier, course line and navigation source
annunciator are green for the on-side source or yellow for the cross-side source. For the second
selected course, the VOR symbol, station identifier, course line and navigation source annunciator
are cyan.

8 WEATHER RADAR MODE (CYAN) — OFF, STBY, TEST, NORM, WX, MAP, or FAULT.
(Indicates weather radar mode selected on WXP when radar is selected on the DSP or DCP.) The
following annunciations will alternate at a 1-Hz rate: NORM/GAIN, WX/GAIN, MAP/GAIN,
TEST/HOLD, NORM/HOLD, WX/HOLD, MAP/HOLD, and HOLD/GAIN.

Note

Only the differences from the ROSE (or HSI) format are shown/described.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-71

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-33. EADI Symbology, Flags

1 DISPLAY PROCESSOR UNIT FLAG (RED). Blanks rest of display after 5 seconds.
2 ATTITUDE FLAG (RED) — Removes raster, roll scale, roll pointer, pitch scale, and command
bars.
3 RADIO ALTITUDE FLAG (RED) — Removes radio altitude display, DH, and DH SET.
4 VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG (RED) — GS removes nothing. ALT removes pointer and scale.
5 DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL FLAG (RED) — Removes DH set display and FCS mode
annunciators.
6 LATERAL DEVIATION FLAG (RED) — LOC or MAZ removes nothing. VOR, TCN, and RNV
removes the pointer if the internal VOR/TCN/RNV bearing synchro monitor detects a fault. LNV,
VLF, INS, and LRN removes the pointer if the internal bearing or track synchro monitors detect
a fault.
7 CROSS-SIDE DATA BUS FLAG (RED) — Removes all cross-side data and flags it.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-72

operation 523-0773950

8 SPEED COMMAND FLAG (RED) — AOA or SPD removes pointer and scale.
9 FLIGHT DIRECTOR FLAG (RED) — Removes command bars.
10 AIR DATA FLAG (RED) — Removes IAS display, speed command pointer and scale, reference
airspeed readout, and altitude deviation.

Note

All flags except DPU FAIL flash for 10 seconds then become steady (DPU FAIL is on steady). May
stop flashing with MASTER RESET.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-73

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-34. EHSI Symbology, Flags, ROSE Format

1 HEADING FLAG (RED) — Compass card is frozen if heading data is lost.

2 DISPLAY PROCESSOR UNIT FLAG (RED) — Blanks rest of display after 5 seconds.

3 TIME-TO-GO, GROUND SPEED, OR WIND FLAG (RED) — Replaces data with dashes.

4 VERTICAL DEVIATION FLAG (RED) — GS or MGP removes nothing, VNV removes pointer
and scale.

5 DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL FLAG (RED) — Removes DH set display and FCS annunciators.

6 CROSS-SIDE DATA BUS FLAG (RED) — Removes all cross-side data and flags it.

7 BEARING POINTER SENSOR FLAG (RED) — Removes bearing pointer.

8 SECOND COURSE ARROW FLAG (RED) (SEE NOTE 1)

Revised 12 May 1999 3-74

operation 523-0773950

9 PRIMARY COURSE ARROW FLAG (RED) (SEE NOTE 1)

10 DISTANCE FLAG (RED) — Replaces data with dashes.

Note

1. Loss of LNV valid removes to/from. Loss of VOR valid removes nothing.
If a failure is detected by the VOR bearing, LNV bearing or LNV track synchro, or bus parameter
monitors, then the deviation bar and to/from are removed.
2. All flags except DPU FAIL flash for 10 seconds then become steady (DPU FAIL is on steady).
May stop flashing by MASTER RESET.
3. ROSE format is shown. Other formats are handled in the same manner.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-75

operation 523-0773950

3.13 SUMMARY OF MFD-85A ANNUNCIATORS AND FLAGS

Refer to Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 for a summary of MFD-85A annunciators and flags.

Table 3-3. MFD-85A Annunciators.

ANNUNCIATOR DISPLAY LOCATION OPERATION

Weather radar STBY, TEST, NORM, Upper left Indicates weather radar mode (except OFF) in all MFD
mode WX, MAP, GAIN, HOLD, formats.
FAULT (cyan)
Weather radar T (yellow) Upper right On steady when selected (not in OFF, STBY, or MAP) in all
target alert MFD formats. Flashes when target is detected.
Radar format RDR (green) Upper left Indicates radar format has been selected for display
although no weather may be indicated.
NAV format NAV (green) Upper left Indicates NAV format has been selected for display
although no sensors may have been selected.
NAV menu ident (green) Opposite top line Indicates line select key used to call up NAV menu.
select key
Test TEST (red) Centered Indicates MPU-85H/86H is in test mode.
Range 5, 12.5, 25, 50, 100, 150 Right end of cyan Indicates 1/2 of selected range. Selected from WXP-85( )
(cyan) range arc when in RDR or RDR/NAV formats or from MFD-85A ∆ or
∇ keys in NAV only mode. (2.5 and 300 nmi midrange
distances are also available in NAV only mode.)
BRG/DIST to 000/999 (white) Lower left Indicates bearing/distance to joystick defined insertable
insertable waypoint.
waypoint
Waypoint enter ENTER (white) Opposite third line Indicates line select key used to insert the MFD defined
key select key from top waypoint (joystick) into a compatible long-range navigation
system.

Table 3-4. MFD-85A Flags.

MALFUNCTION FLAG LOCATION OPERATION

VOR1 or LOC1 if tuned, VOR1 Lower left Replaces course (bearing) readout. Removes VOR or waypoint symbol and
or RNV1 or (red) course line.
RNV1

VOR2 or LOC2 if tuned, VOR2 Lower right Replaces course (bearing) readout. Removes VOR or way- point symbol
or RNV2 or (red) and course line.
RNV2

LNV1 LNV1 (red) Lower left Replaces course readout. Removes waypoint symbol and course line.

LNV2 LNV2 (red) Lower right Replaces course readout. Removes waypoint symbol and course line.

MPU-85H/86H FAIL (red) Centered Nothing removed.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-76

operation 523-0773950

3.14 PROGRAMMING MFD-8 5A PAGE (PGE) AND EMERGENCY (EMG) DATA USING THE
RDP-300 REMOTE DATA PROGRAMMER

Before beginning any programming operation, write down and lay out exactly what the chapter titles are to
be, and exactly what will be placed on each page within that chapter.

Note

Refer to Figure 3-41 for a sample programming grid that can be duplicated on any office copier and
used to write out each page of data. The grid will aid in keeping track of characters and lines
available/used per page.

Keep in mind that there are 100 available pages and each page has 12 lines of 20 characters each. Also
indicate which chapters, if any, will be emergency chapters. Chapter length depends on user requirements.
You may have 1 chapter of 100 pages or 100 chapters of 1 page or any combination in between. It is
recommended that pages be numbered consecutively within a chapter. It is also suggested that one or two
blank pages be left between chapters to accommodate additional information in the future. Note also that
with multiple chapters, all skips will be lost if another chapter is selected prior to completing the checklist
(using the recall button) in the existing chapter. For this reason, some operators may prefer to put the entire
checklist in one chapter rather than breaking the checklist out into different chapters. The information
programmed into the MFD-85A will not be erased by power removal. Anything programmed during an
earlier procedure will remain until reprogrammed.

Caution

To prevent the loss of data, it is essential that the programming procedure is followed carefully and
in the order given. Make certain that the RDP-300 is connected to or disconnected from the
MFD-85A only while continuous power is applied to the system.

Before any data can be programmed into the MFD-85A, the unit must be put into the edit mode. There are
two ways to enter into the edit mode depending on the data currently in the MFD-85A. If the MFD-85A is
new (never programmed before), pushing the PGE button causes the display to read:

NO PAGE
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.

or pushing the EMG button will cause the display to read:

NO EMERGENCY
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.

In either case, simply plug in the RDP-300 to enter into the edit mode. If the above messages don’t appear
after pushing the respective PGE or EMG button, then the MFD-85A has been programmed (or at least a
chapter has been defined) during an earlier procedure and the following should be used to get into edit mode.
If there are chapter titles shown next to the line select keys on the MFD-85A and a change to one of these
chapters is desired, then push the line select key next to the desired chapter title, plug in the RDP-300 and
make the changes. If the desired chapter title is not displayed, then move the joystick up or down until the
chapter title is found for the chapter that needs to be changed. Then push the line select key next to the
desired chapter title, plug in the RDP-300 and make the changes. If you do not know the chapter title of
what you want to change and the NO PAGE CHAPTERS FOUND or the NO EMERGENCY CHAPTERS

Revised 12 May 1999 3-77

operation 523-0773950

FOUND message does not appear, then push the top line select key, plug in the RDP-300 and find the
page(s) you want to change (you are now in edit mode).

Warning

The MFD-85A EMG function displays only what has been programmed into memory as emergency
data. The user must realize that this data may or may not be applicable to an actual emergency. The
airplane flight manual emergency checklist must be referred to for proper corrective actions to be
taken in various emergency situations.

Whether you are in PGE edit mode (pushed the PGE button to enter) or in EMG edit mode (pushed the EMG
button to enter), all 100 pages of the checklist memory can be changed. The only time you need to know
which edit mode you are in is when you want to make a title page. If you want to make a PGE chapter title
page, then the PGE edit mode must be entered. If you want to make an EMG chapter title page, then the
EMG edit mode must be entered. Deleting chapter title pages from PGE or EMG can be done in either PGE
or EMG edit modes.

A title page can be created at any time. To make a PGE title page, enter the PGE edit mode, find the page
you wish to make into a title page, then position the cursor over the first character on the first of the 12 lines
on the page (upper left most character on the page). With this done, press the top line select key at the upper
right of the MFD. The cursor will move one character position to the right. This signifies that a PGE title
page has been created. To make an EMG title page, enter the EMG edit mode and repeat the above
procedure.

A title page can also be removed at any time. To delete any title page, enter either PGE or EMG edit mode
(either one will work for deleting a PGE or EMG title page). Find the title page by moving the joystick to the
left or right, position the cursor over the first character of the first line of the displayed page, and retype the
character that is under the cursor using the RDP-300. The cursor will move one character to the right and
the page will no longer be a title page.

The joystick can be used in edit mode to help find pages or chapter titles more easily. If chapters have
already been entered into the MFD-85A, then pushing the PGE or EMG buttons may give up to four titles,
one next to each of the line select keys. Note that only PGE chapters will appear when the PGE button is
pressed and only EMG chapters will appear when the EMG button is pressed. If the next set of four titles is
desired, then pushing the joystick down will display the next set of up to four titles. Continue pushing the
joystick down as needed to view successive sets of titles. If the previous set of four titles was desired, then
push the joystick up to display the previous set of up to four titles. Continue pushing the joystick up as
needed to view previous sets of titles.

Once in edit mode (a line select key is pressed and the RDP-300 is plugged in), the joystick can be used
again. Moving the joystick down will cause the next page to be displayed even if the next page is a title page
for the next PGE or EMG chapter. The cursor will be in the upper left of the display. Pushing the joystick up
will cause the previous page to be displayed. The cursor will be in the lower right of the display. Pushing the
joystick to the right will cause the next title page to appear regardless of whether it is a PGE title page or an
EMG title page. The cursor will be in the upper left of the display. Pushing the joystick to the left will cause
the previous title page to appear regardless of whether it is a PGE title page or an EMG title page. The
cursor will be in the upper left of the display.

Because there are only 100 available pages in the MFD-85A, a title page should be part of the checklist page
(ie, the entire page should be used for part of the checklist). How to create a title page has already been
described. It should be noted that the very top line of the title page is what will show next to the line select
keys when either the PGE or EMG buttons are pressed. The line will appear exactly like what is entered (via
the RDP-300) into the particular checklist (only PGE titles will appear for PGE, and EMG titles for EMG

Revised 12 May 1999 3-78

operation 523-0773950

mode). Therefore, the top line of the page should contain enough information to describe the chapter
checklist contents. It is suggested that the top line be right justified so as to appear next to the appropriate
line select key or else fill in with periods (.) to the right of the line. This will help you select the correct title
page.

Figure 3-35 shows how a typical written layout of chapters and pages might appear.

Note

The page numbers for all pages (1 through 100) have been visually and internally numbered at the
factory for convenience. The visual page numbers will appear at the upper right of each page. These
page numbers can be relocated on the page, eliminated, or changed (not recommended) to a different
number as desired.

Note

Those who choose to use the MFD-85A for checklist purposes must consider it as an aid only and
realize that it contains only the data that someone has programmed into it. The Airplane Flight
Manual contains the approved checklists.

Figure 3-35. Typical Chapter and Page Layout

Revised 12 May 1999 3-79

operation 523-0773950

3.15 RDP-300 REMOTE DATA PROGRAMMER

The RDP-300 (Figure 3-36) is a portable, handheld unit, similar to a calculator, that is used to input data
into the memory of the MFD-85A. The RDP-300 should be stored in a location that is accessible to the flight
crew if on-airplane programming is desired. The various RDP-300 keys and their functions are described in
Figure 3-37.

Note

There are eight keys on the RDP-300 that can be held down causing the function assigned to that
key to be continuously repeated. The eight keys are PF, PR, LF, LR, — (dash, located above 1), BLK
(blank), SP (space), and . (dot). The SH key does not have to be held down when holding one of the
upper case function keys down.

Note

If the SH key is pressed and then it is decided not to use the upper case function, press the SH key a
second time to cancel the shift.

3.15.1 Programming the MFD-8 5A Multifunction Display

The MFD-85A provides various keys to aid the user when in the edit mode. The following paragraphs
describe the functions of these keys.

Line advance (inverted delta, ∇ — Similar to the SH and then LF keys on the RDP-300. Pushing the ∇ key
will advance the cursor 1 line down the display.

Figure 3-36. RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer

Revised 12 May 1999 3-80

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-37. RDP-300 Key Descriptions

Line reverse (delta, ∆) — Similar to the SH and then LR keys on the RDP-300. Pushing the ∆ key will cause
the cursor to move 1 line up the display.

Joystick up — Similar to the SH and the PR keys on the RDP-300. Causes the MFD-85A to go back to the
previous page. The cursor will be at the lower right-hand corner.

Joystick down — Similar to the SH and the PF keys on the RDP-300. Causes the MFD-85A to go forward to
the next page. The cursor will be at the upper left-hand corner.

Joystick right — Causes the MFD-85A to search forward and display the next chapter title page (be it a PGE
chapter title page or an EMG chapter title page). The cursor will be in the upper left-hand corner of the
display.

Joystick left — Causes the MFD-85A to search backwards and display the previous chapter title page. The
cursor will be in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

Top line select key — If the cursor is positioned at the upper left corner of the display, pushing this key
makes the page shown a chapter title page. If in PGE edit mode, it will be a PGE chapter title page. If in
EMG edit mode, it will be an EMG chapter title page.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-81

operation 523-0773950

3.15.2 Programming a New MF D-85A Multifunction Display

Note

The following procedures assume that the MFD-85A is new and this is the first time it has been
programmed. Procedures for changing an already programmed MFD-85A follow this section.

a. Turn on airplane power. Ensure that the MFD-85A circuit breakers are in. Press the PWR button at the
upper left of the MFD-85A. Position the WXP-85( ) MODE switch to OFF (the WXP-85( ) is not required
during programming of the MFD-85A). Allow 15 seconds for the MFD-85A to warm up. Adjust the INT
control at the upper right of the MFD-85A as desired.
b. Press the PGE button on the MFD-85A. The display will show:
NO PAGE
CHAPTERS FOUND. PLUG
IN RDP-300 TO EDIT.
c. Plug the RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer into the MFD-85A DATA jack. Note that the first line of
page 1 is displayed adjacent to the top line select key. The characters on this first line should be: a red
cursor in the upper left, followed by yellow dots with PAGE 1 in the upper right.
d. If steps a through c were followed, the top line on the MFD-85A should look like the following
illustration:

The cursor (red at (@) symbol) should be in the upper left corner. If not, push the SH (shift) key then the
PR (page reverse) key on the RDP-300 until the cursor is displayed in the lower right corner of the
display. Note the current page number and press SH then PF (page forward) until the cursor is at the
upper left corner of page 1. After pressing the SH key, the PF or PR key can be held down for repeated
function.
e. Assume the first PGE chapter title is to be called PREFLIGHT. (You MUST have a chapter title at the
top of the first page to be used even if the title is PAGE 1 as shown after performing following steps 1
and 2.) To enter PREFLIGHT as a chapter title, perform the following:
Note

Whatever is on the top line of the title page (in this example it will be PREFLIGHT) is what gets
shown beside the line select keys when chapter titles are called up.

1. Press the RDP-300 BLK (blank) key once, then press the BS (back space) key once. The cursor will
be back in the upper left corner but the dot (period) that was in the upper left has now been erased.
2. Press the top line select key at the right side of the MFD-85A. Note that the cursor moves one
character position to the right and that the space to the left of the cursor is blank. This page is now
designated as a PGE chapter title page. The top line of the display should now look like the following
illustration.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-82

operation 523-0773950

3. The following illustration is a repeat of the illustration in step 2 except the example chapter title
(PREFLIGHT) is now shown justified to the far right-hand side of the display.

The purpose of the above illustration is to show what now must be done in order to enter
PREFLIGHT as a chapter title. Note that PREFLIGHT has nine letters and will fully occupy the
area now taken up by PAGE 1 and the associated spaces. The only thing that must be done is to
erase the yellow dots in spaces 2 (there is a dot beneath the cursor) through 11 of the first line and
move the cursor to position 12. This is done by pressing the RDP-300 BLK key ten times and then
pressing the SP (space) key once. The top line should now look like the following illustration.

4. Complete the chapter title entry procedure by using the RDP-300 keyboard to key in the word
PREFLIGHT. The letters will write over the data (PAGE 1) currently occupying spaces 13 through
20 and the cursor will automatically advance to the first space in line 2. The display should now look
like the following illustration.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-83

operation 523-0773950

5. Continue using the RDP-300 to type in the desired PREFLIGHT checklist beginning on line 2 of the
chapter title page (the chapter title page should be used as part of the checklist). Use as many pages
as is needed to complete the PREFLIGHT checklist. It should be noted that all 12 lines can be used
for checklist data on nontitle pages.
Note

A blank (BLK) is considered a character. The space (SP) key is not considered a character and should
be used instead of blanks to separate words, symbols, numbers, etc. A BLK should only be used to
erase a character as was done in step 1.

f. It is suggested that a couple of unprogrammed pages be left at the end of each chapter. This allows for
expansion at a later date. To do this, push the joystick down twice or use the SH and PF keys on the
RDP-300.
g. Repeat steps e and f to create a new PGE chapter title. Continue repeating steps e and f until all PGE
chapters have been programmed.
h. To program EMG chapters, press the EMG button on the MFD-85A. The display should show the
PREFLIGHT checklist title page that was previously programmed into MFD-85A as a PGE chapter title
page. Use the joystick down or the RDP-300 SH and PF keys to find a page where you want to put the
first EMG title page. Remember to skip all of the pages previously programmed during the PGE
checklist programming procedure. Then repeat steps e through g above for the EMG chapter checklists.
i. This completes the programming of new checklists procedure. Disconnect the RDP-300 from the MFD-
85A. Verify that data just programmed is accessible and correct by first pressing the PGE or EMG
button on the MFD, then press the appropriate line select key to display the first page of the selected
chapter. Use the joystick as described in paragraph 3.15.1 to view the various pages and/or select new
chapter title pages.

Note

The information programmed into the MFD-85A will not be erased by power removal.

3.15.3 Changing an Already Pr ogrammed MFD-85A Multifunction Display

Note

The following procedures assume that the MFD-85A has already been programmed and it is desired
to change some of the text.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-84

operation 523-0773950

a. Turn on airplane power. Ensure that the MFD-85A circuit breakers are in. Press the PWR button at the
upper left of the MFD-85A. Position the WXP-85( ) MODE switch to OFF (the WXP-85( ) is not required
during programming of the MFD-85A). Allow 15 seconds for the MFD-85A to warm up. Adjust the INT
control at the upper right of the MFD-85A as desired.
b. Press the PGE or EMG button (depending on what is to be changed) on the MFD-85A.
c. When PGE or EMG is selected, up to four chapter titles will appear next to the line select keys on the
right side of the MFD-85A. If data in one of these four chapters is to be changed, pressing the
appropriate line select key causes the first page of the selected chapter to be displayed. If other chapter
titles are required, movement of the joystick upward will cause the next set of up to four chapter titles to
be displayed. Movement of the joystick downward will cause the previous four chapter titles to be
displayed.
d. When the desired chapter is found and the first page has been called up, plug the RDP-300 Remote Data
Programmer into the MFD-85A DATA jack and make the necessary changes. If you don’t know the title
name and/or nothing is displayed on the MFD-85A, push the top line select key, plug in the RDP-300,
and make the necessary changes. If all of the 100 available pages have not been used, new PGE or EMG
chapters can be created by searching for a group of unprogrammed pages and then making a title page
and entering checklist data as required.
e. When the desired data has been entered, disconnect the RDP-300 from the MFD-85A. Verify that data
just programmed is accessible and correct by first pressing the PGE or EMG button on the MFD, then
press the appropriate line select key to display the first page of the selected chapter. Use the joystick as
described in paragraph 3.15.1 to view the various pages and/or select new chapter title pages.

Note

The information programmed into the MFD-85A will not be erased by power removal. Anything
programmed during an earlier procedure will remain until reprogrammed.

3.16 CEU-85 CHECKLIST EN TRY UNIT

The handheld CEU-85 is used to enter 100 pages of combined checklist page and emergency page data into
the MFD instead of entering it manually using the RDP-300. The CEU-85 is shown below in Figure 3-38.

Figure 3-38. CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit

Revised 12 May 1999 3-85

operation 523-0773950

The CEU-85 normally is used before preflight, rarely during flight. The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85
from an Apple* II Plus/IIe/IIe enhanced computer that contains a Collins Pro Line II Interface Card and
checklist processing disk software. Once loaded, the CEU-85 is carried to the aircraft and plugged into the
MFD-85( ) DATA jack.

Caution

To prevent loss of data, it is essential that the CEU-85 is connected to or disconnected from the
MFD-85( ) only while power is applied to the system.

The process of transferring a checklist into the MFD-85( ) is initiated by inserting the CEU-85 data plug into
the MFD-85( ) front panel DATA jack. This connection causes application of +5 V dc to the CEU-85 from the
MFD-85( ) which enables the CEU-85 microcomputer to transfer checklist data to the MFD-85( ).

Note

The MFD-85( ) top select, bottom select, and line reverse keys must be pressed simultaneously after
inserting the CEU-85 data plug into the MFD-85( ) DATA jack. If this is not done, the MFD-85( ) will
not be able to receive data from the CEU-85.

The checklist data transfer begins 15 seconds after the CEU-85 receives power from the MFD-85( ) and
operates without interaction. Normal checklist transfer time is approximately 11 minutes; then the radar
mode screen reappears after data transfer is completed.

Note

Those who choose to use the MFD-85( ) for checklist purposes must consider it an aid only and
realize that it contains only the data that someone has programmed into it. The airplane flight
manual contains the approved checklists.

3.17 ADA-85 AIR DATA ADAPT ER

The ADA-85 Air Data Adapter is used with an ADC-80( ) Air Data Computer to provide air data in
commercial standard digital bus (CSDB) serial data format to the EFIS system and other equipments. The
data received from the ADC-80( ) is in Manchester-coded serial data format and is converted into CSDB
format air data. The ADA-85 is shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter

*Apple is a registered trademark.

Revised 12 May 1999 3-86

operation 523-0773950

3.18 FMM-85 FAN MONITOR MODULE

The FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module mounts directly onto any one of the four fan frame sides and is used to
monitor fan motor speed. If fan motor speed falls below a preset level, the FMM-85 will sense this change
and provide a ground to energize an installer furnished, instrument panel mounted, LOW FAN SPEED
annunciator. The FMM-85 is shown in Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-40. FMM-85 Fan Monitor Module

Revised 12 May 1999 3-87

operation 523-0773950

Figure 3-41. Programming Grids for PGE and EMG Data

Revised 12 May 1999 3-88

523-0773951-003118
3rd Edition, 12 May 1999

EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)

Electronic Flight Instrument Systems

Theory of Operation
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page

4.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.2 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit (DPU).............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display (EFD) ............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.3 MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) .................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD)....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.5 Control Panels................................................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.6 Inclinometer ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.7 Associated EFIS Equipment ......................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3 SELF-TEST AND MONITORING .......................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 On-Line Monitoring ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Self-Test Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4 DETAILED THEORY OF OPERATION................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.4.1 DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit (DPU).............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.4.2 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display (EFD) ........................................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.3 MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit (MPU) ................................................................................................ 4-19
4.4.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD)..................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.4.5 CHP-85D Course Heading Panel (CHP) ..................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.4.6 DCP-85E Display Control Panel (DCP) ...................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.4.7 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP) ......................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.4.8 WXP-85( ) Weather Control Panel (WXP) .................................................................................................................. 4-36
4.4.9 RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer........................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.4.10 CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit ................................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.4.11 ADA-85 Air Data Adapter ......................................................................................................................................... 4-42
4.4.12 FMM-85 Fan Motor Monitor (FMM)......................................................................................................................... 4-43

NOTICE: This section replaces first revision dated 29 September 1993.

List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue
* Title ......................................... 12 May 99
* List of Effective Pages............. 12 May 99
* 4-1 thru 4-46 ............................ 12 May 99

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 28 Jan 87 None

2nd Ed 14 Jun 89 None

1 29 Sep 93 None

3rd Ed 12 May 99 None

section IV
theory of operation

4.1 GENERAL

This section provides the information required to understand the operation of the EFIS units.

4.2 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION

Refer to Figure 4-1 through Figure 4-8.

4.2.1 DPU-85H/86H Display P rocessor Unit (DPU)

The DPU-85H is the drive box for the EFD-85; the DPU-86H for the EFD-86( ). Each DPU contains the I/O
section, memory, display processor, symbol generator, sky/ground raster generator, WX raster generator,
multiplexers, and power supply. The processor is a 12-bit TTL machine designed specifically for fast real-
time processing for crt applications. The DPU is capable of driving two EFD’s with different displays. Each
of these outputs has positive switching on the video to provide a data path for the backup drive signal in the
event of a failure. The DPU also provides an isolated backup drive output which allows each DPU to drive
four crt’s with identical EADI and EHSI displays.

The DPU’s I/O section can interface with a designated set of sensors including VOR, glideslope, localizer,
long-range navigation, heading, attitude, air data, ADF, and flight director/autopilot without external
switching. Some external switching may be required by other functions in the aircraft for these sensors.
These interfaces are described in more detail in paragraph 4.4. Each DPU also provides comparator/warning
outputs and display capability for attitude, heading, localizer, glideslope, and radio altitude. For this func-
tion, I/O data from an MPU or another DPU is required.

4.2.2 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic F light Display (EFD)

Each EFD contains a crt, deflection yoke, video and deflection amplifiers and high-voltage power supply. The
crt is a Collins specified custom high-resolution color tube. The tube has an in-line gun with shadow mask,
using a black matrix surrounding pigmented phosphor dot trios, providing high resolution and contrast ra-
tio. A custom design multibandpass optical filter is used to provide enhanced contrast. Both stroke and
raster scanning techniques are multiplexed to provide large area color background and sharp alphanumerics
and symbols with greater than normal illumination. Two units stacked use the same panel space as the FIS-
85 electromechanical units. Air behind the cockpit panel must be circulated to ensure optimal performance.
Recommendations regarding this installation are detailed in the installation section of this instruction book.
All EFD’s are identical internally and may be used for either the EADI or EHSI function. An inclinometer
may be mounted to either EFD to provide that function.

4.2.3 MPU-85H/86H Multifunc tion Processor Unit (MPU)

The MPU contains all the functions of a DPU (refer to previous DPU-85H/86H description) plus isolated in-
puts for a second set of sensors. The MPU not only provides the drive for the MFD but can provide the drive
to an EADI and EHSI in the event either DPU fails. This allows the MPU to completely replace one DPU
without any loss in I/O capability but with some reduction in EHSI display function. This unit can also provide

Revised 12 May 1999 4-1

theory of operation 523-0773951

the drive for all four EFD’s in a 5-crt configuration in the unlikely event that both DPU’s fail. For 3- and
5-crt configurations it also provides the data to the DPU to allow the selection and display of cross-side data.

4.2.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD)

The MFD contains the crt, the deflection yoke, the video and deflection amplifiers and the high-voltage
power supply. The crt is a Collins specified custom high-resolution color tube. The crt has an in-line gun with
shadow mask using a black matrix surrounding pigmented phosphor dot trios providing high contrast along
with high resolution. A custom design multibandpass optical filter is used to provide enhanced contrast.
Both stroke and raster scanning techniques are used to provide large area color background for weather and
distinct alphanumerics and symbols with high brightness. Mode select and display control functions are lo-
cated on the display bezel. The memory and associated logic for up to 100 pages of checklist data are also
contained in the MFD.

4.2.5 Control Panels

There are several control panels which may be associated with an EFIS system. They are the DCP-85E,
CHP-85D, CHP-86B, DSP-85A, and WXP-85A/85B/85C/85D.

4.2.5.1 CHP-85D and CHP-86B C ourse Heading Panels

The CHP-85D and CHP-86B provide course and heading select functions for various configurations of EFIS-
85B(13) and EFIS-86B(13) systems. The CHP-86B panel can be used with any configuration (two required
for 4- and 5-crt systems). The CHP-85D provides separate course selection capability for each half of a 4- or
5-crt configuration with a common heading select function. The panels also provide a NAV DTA button for
selection of time-to-go (TTG), ground speed (SPD), wind, and elapsed time (ET) as well as an ET button for
initiating and completing time functions. CHP-85D provides dual independent TTG-SPD-ET-WIND capabil-
ity. The CHP-85D and CHP-86B interface with the DCP-85E only.

4.2.5.2 DCP-85E Display Contro l Panel

The DCP-85E provides EHSI display sensor selection control, EHSI display format control, EADI and EHSI
display dimming, and EADI radio altitude decision height set capability. Inclusion of this panel in the sys-
tem provides the basics for display modes switching capability built into the EFIS system. One DCP-85E is
required for 2- and 3-crt systems; two DCP-85E’s are required for 4- and 5-crt systems.

4.2.5.3 DSP-85A Display Select Panel

The DSP-85A provides navigation sensor selection, bearing pointer selection, format selection, navigation
data selection, and the selection of VNAV, weather or cross-side course on the EHSI. DH set and selection of
VNAV display on the EADI are provided. Additional course, heading, direct to, and heading sync are se-
lected from the DSP-85A. One DSP-85A is required for 2-and 3-crt systems; two DSP-85A’s are required for
4- and 5-crt systems. The ET control function must be provided from an external switch.

4.2.5.4 WXP-85( ) Weather Rada r Panel

The weather control panel provides the weather data outputs required to display weather on either the
EHSI or MFD. This panel provides all the necessary control functions as well as outputs to trigger the
weather radar rt and antenna. The WXP-85( ) interfaces with and is a part of elements of Collins weather
radar systems only. This control is available in standard panel (WXP-85A/85C) or Dzus mount
(WXP-85B/85D) compatible configurations.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-2

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-1. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) 2-Tube System, Block Diagram Figure 4-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) 2-Tube System,
Block Diagram

Figure 4-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) 3-Tube System, Block Diagram Figure 4-4. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) 3-Tube System,
Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-3

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-5. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) 4-Tube System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-6. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) 4-Tube System, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-4

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-7. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) 5-Tube System, Block Diagram

Figure 4-8. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) 5-Tube System, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-5

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.2.6 Inclinometer

The inclinometer is a separate element which is mounted to the proper EFD. Refer to the General Informa-
tion section, Table 1-1, for a list of available inclinometers.

4.2.7 Associated EFIS Equipm ent

4.2.7.1 RDP-300 Remote Data P rogrammer

The RDP-300 is a handheld keyboard that plugs into a port on the front face of the MFD-85( ) Multifunction
Display where it receives power and is used to enter or change checklist page and emergency data in the
MFD. The RDP-300 is normally used before and during preflight, rarely during flight. The unit should be
stored (not mounted) in a location accessible to the flight crew.

4.2.7.2 CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit

The handheld CEU-85 is used to enter 100 pages of combined checklist page and emergency page data into
the MFD instead of entering it manually using the RDP-300. The CEU-85 plugs into a port on the front face
of the MFD-85( ) Multifunction Display where it receives power and is normally used before preflight, rarely
during flight. The checklist is loaded into the CEU-85 from an Apple* II Plus/IIe/IIe enhanced computer that
contains a Collins Pro Line II interface card and checklist processing disk software.

4.2.7.3 FMM-85 Fan Monitor Mo dule

The fan monitor module mounts directly onto any one of the four fan frame sides and is used to monitor fan
motor speed. If fan motor speed falls below a preset level, the FMM-85 will sense this change and provide a
ground to energize an installer-furnished, instrument panel mount, LOW FAN SPEED annunciator.

4.2.7.4 ADA-85 Air Data Adapte r

The air data adapter is used with an ADC-80( ) Air Data Computer to provide air data in Commercial Stan-
dard Digital Bus (CSDB) serial data format to other user equipments. The data received from the ADC-80( )
is in Manchester coded serial data format and is converted into CSDB format air data.

4.3 SELF-TEST AND MONIT ORING

4.3.1 On-Line Monitoring

On-line monitoring of the EFIS system is accomplished in the following ways:

a. Keep-Alive Monitor — Circuits are included with each of the system processors to monitor a periodic
signal generated by the processor. If the signal is not generated, the circuit will cause a flag condition
and attempt to restart the processor.
b. Test Words — A series of test words is transmitted between EFIS subsystem components to verify integ-
rity of the data paths. Detection of a bad data transmission will cause a flag condition.
c. Activity Monitors — The digital buses being received by the I/O sections are monitored for activity. If no
activity is detected for the appropriate period for that bus, a no data condition or a flag is set depending
on the bus.

* Apple is the registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-6

theory of operation 523-0773951

d. Synchro Monitor — All synchros are monitored for valid voltage levels. If an invalid condition is de-
tected, the appropriate flag is set.
e. Checksum Monitor — The I/O and display processors periodically verify their program checksums. If an
incorrect checksum is calculated, the test words as described above are not generated resulting in a
DPU/MPU fail condition.
f. Ram Monitor — During each power-up sequence, the I/O and display processors test their private RAM
storage and generate test words. If the test words are not generated, a DPU/MPU fail condition results.
g. Multiport RAM Test — During each power-up sequence, the digital I/O #1 processor tests the multiport
RAM. Different sequences of data are written to the RAM and read to verify its integrity. A failure of any
bit will cause the processor to reset and perform the test again. At the conclusion of a successful test, the
RAM is cleared to all zeroes.

4.3.2 Self-Test Mode

In addition to the on-line monitors, it is possible to place the EFIS system in a self-test mode by the use of an
airframe-supplied test switch or test switches. When the test mode has been activated, the button and knobs
on the DCP select various submodes. Test functions available include:

a. Confidence Test
When the DPU test is grounded, an increment of +10 degrees is added to pitch and roll on the left side
and –10 degrees is added to pitch and roll on the right side. A +20 degree increment is added to heading
on the left side and a –20 degree increment is added to the heading on the right side. The word TEST in
red characters is written across the EADI above the aircraft symbol while the test is in process. The ad-
dition of the 10- and 20-degree increments is done in the DPU I/O section and will cause the comparator
logic in the display processor to give roll, pitch, and heading miscompare messages.
If the DPU test line is held at ground for longer than 4 seconds, the 10-degree increments are removed
and all EADI and EHSI flags will be brought into view. This flag condition will remain until either the
ground is removed from the test line, or the RA TST button on the DCP is pressed to enter a sequence of
diagnostic/maintenance routines (DMRS).
If the RA TST button is not depressed and the ground is removed from the test line, the test sequence is
aborted and normal operation is resumed.
b. Diagnostics/Maintenance Routines (DMRS)
To enter the diagnostic/maintenance routines for each DPU, push and hold the installer-supplied EFIS
TEST button and then push the DSP TST/DCP RA TST button on the onside control. Once the first di-
agnostic page shows on the display, the EFIS TEST button may be released. Each successive push of the
TST/RA TST button, on the onside control, changes the display to the next available diagnostic page.
Push the onside TST/RA TST button on the last page of the diagnostic pages to exit the diagnostic mode
and change the display back to a normal EADI/EHSI display. To exit the diagnostic pages from any
page, at any time, push and hold the TST/RA TST button for approximately 2 seconds. The display
changes directly to a normal EADI/EHSI.
To enter the diagnostic/maintenance routines for the MPU in a 5-tube system, push and hold the EFIS
TEST button on the pilot’s side and then push the DSP TST/DCP RA TST button on the control for the
copilot’s side. Each successive push of the TST/RA TST button on the copilot’s control changes the dis-
play to the next available diagnostic page. Push the copilot’s TST/RA TST button on the last page of the
diagnostic pages to exit the diagnostic mode and change the display back to a normal MFD display. To
exit the diagnostic pages from any page, at any time, push and hold the copilot’s TST/RA TST button for
approximately 2 seconds. The display changes directly to a normal MFD.
The diagnostic display pages give the following information:
1. Multiport RAM — presents the data being received from and transmitted to aircraft systems. Data is
in digital form and will aid in new installation checkouts as well as LRU fault isolation.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-7

theory of operation 523-0773951

2. RAM — displays the contents of the display processor RAM.

3. MFD — displays the contents of the RAM that holds the MFD page data, joystick data and status.
This mode is not entered by a DPU.
4. Alignment Tests — displays fixed data patterns in fixed colors to provide verification of symbol gen-
erator functions and to allow for adjustment of display size, position, and color. Program revision
status is also displayed.
5. FCS Diagnostics — displays APS-85/86 diagnostics text if available.
6. ADC Diagnostics — displays ADC diagnostics text if available.
7. AHRS Diagnostics — displays AHRS diagnostics if available.
8. VIR Diagnostics — displays VIR diagnostics if available.
9. DME Diagnostics — dislays DME diagnostics if available.

4.4 DETAILED THEORY OF OPERATION

4.4.1 DPU-85H/86H Display P rocessor Unit (DPU)

The DPU generates the necessary deflection and video signals to draw the desired display on the electronic
flight displays (EFDs). The DPU contains an I/O interface to an aircraft system, a display processor, a sym-
bol generator to provide stroke-writing, an ADI/sky raster generator and multiplexer circuit, and power sup-
plies. Refer to Figure 4-9.

4.4.1.1 Input/Output (I/O) Inter face

Analog I/O card A7 and digital I/O card A8 comprise the I/O interface section of the DPU. These cards re-
ceive analog and digital data from aircraft systems and other EFIS units, format the data, and provide that
data to the display processor. In addition to collecting data for display, the I/O section also calculates new
data based upon previously received data and outputs this information in an appropriate form to other
equipments. There are also a number of digital EFIS communication channels which are supervised by the
DPU I/O system.

a. Inputs
The I/O section is capable of receiving data from several different aircraft sources. In addition, there are
several intra-EFIS data sources which must be accommodated. Altogether, four general data formats are
received, digitized, filtered, and formatted by the I/O section as follows:
1. AC Analog Inputs
• Desired track or track angle error + drift angle
• Roll angle
• Pitch angle
• Heading
• ADF bearing
• WPT bearing
2. DC Analog Inputs
• Radio altitude
• Crosstrack deviation
• Roll steering command
• Pitch steering command
• ADF bearing
• Fast/slow deviation
• FCS information
• AOA deviation
3. DC Discrete Inputs
• To/from
• Instrument flags

Revised 12 May 1999 4-8

theory of operation 523-0773951

• Instrument modes
• EFIS and I/O straps
• FCS modes
• Comparator reset
• Master warn reset
• Cat II request
• Marker beacons
• Flight Director Command Bars
4. Serial Digital Inputs
• DME distance
• VLF/INS/LNV/LRN information
• DPU cross-side data
• DCP/DSP data
• Air data computer information
• Vertical navigation information
• FCS modes
• Altitude/Heading
• WXP data
b. Outputs
Along with receiving data, the DPU also provides several outputs to other EFIS units and to other air-
craft systems. The I/O section provides these outputs in various formats. These formats and data are
listed as follows:
1. AC Analog
• Heading error
• Course datum
2. DC Analog
• Lateral deviation
3. DC Discrete
• Comparator warns
• Cat II output
• Master warn
• To/From
• Back course
• Modes/status/flags
• Over temp
• Decision height
• Radio altimeter test
4. Serial Digital
• DCP/DSP control
• FMS-90 WPT load
• Cross-side DPU data
• FCS data
c. Functional Blocks
The I/O section is divided into four functional blocks. These consist of a 2048-×-16-bit multiport RAM
(MPRAM), a digital high-speed serial digital transmitter/receiver to transmit DPU cross-side data and to
receive DPU/MPU cross-side data, an array of microprocessor based I/O processors (IOP’s) and high-
speed input and output ports . These combine with the MPRAM to provide high-speed multiaccessing
features.
1. Multiport RAM (MPRAM)
At the center of the DPU I/O section is a 2048−×−16-bit high-speed RAM and multiaccess controller.
This RAM and controller are referred to as the multiport RAM or MPRAM.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-9

theory of operation 523-0773951

The 2048-×-16-bit RAM is comprised of two 2048 × 8-bit RAM’s. When data is transferred from the
port to the RAM, the ISR signal is low. The controller reads an 11-bit address and 16-bit data from
the input port and performs a write sequence to the RAM. When data is transferred to the port from
the RAM, the OSR is low. In this case, the controller reads the 11-bit address from the port, reads
data from the RAM, and latches the 16-bit data in the output port. In either case, after the operation
is complete, the polling pulse is removed from the port, which in turn resets the service request sig-
nal and the polling sequence continues. All transfers between the MPRAM and the ports take place
on a 27-bit bus with 11 address bits and 16 data bits.
The MPRAM controller can support up to eleven ports. If fewer than eleven are actually used, the
controller can be strapped to ignore the unused port positions and there will be no loss of polling effi-
ciency due to empty port slots.
2. MPRAM I/O Ports
Interfacing the MPRAM to the other blocks of the I/O section is accomplished through a set of I/O
ports. There are two input/output ports and one input port. From this point on, all references to
MPRAM I/O ports will be made with respect to the MPRAM. That is, an input port is used to trans-
fer data to the MPRAM while an output port is used to transfer data from the MPRAM.
Coordination of the data transfers to and from the MPRAM is controlled by a simple polling se-
quence. This polling sequence views each I/O port at two ports, one for input and one for output;
thus, where two I/O ports and one input port are shown, the controller actually treats these as five
separate ports.
There are two types of I/O ports. The I/O port connected to the display processor and the multiplexed
I/O port is connected to the I/O processors. From the point of view of the MPRAM, these two I/O
ports are identical; in actual operation they differ, since each interfaces to different processor bus
schemes.
The 12-bit display processor interfaces to the 11-bit address and 16-bit data bus used by the I/O port
and the MPRAM. To read data from RAM, the display processor performs a read from external
memory sequence. Decoding of the processor control signals provides a signal to the MPRAM output
port that causes the processor to hang up and signals the MPRAM of a pending output request.
When the port is polled, the 12-bit address present at the processor’s address bus passes through the
port’s buffers and accesses data in the MPRAM. This data is then latched at the output port and the
display processor is released. The read cycle is now completed by the processor.
To write data to the MPRAM, the display processor performs a write to external memory sequence.
Processor control line decoding provides a signal to the MPRAM, this time to the input port. The
processor is signaled to hang up and the MPRAM is notified of the pending input transfer. When the
port is polled, the processor’s 11-bit address is passed to the MPRAM along with 12 bits of data. The
MPRAM controller performs the required RAM write sequence and then releases the processor, com-
pleting the transfer. Due to a decoding ambiguity at the display processor, a superfluous output re-
quest is also generated but the data is ignored by the display processor.
In the cross-side data receiver and its input port, serial data is received by a series of shift registers
in a form directly compatible with the input port. When a valid word is received, a data strobe is
generated which transfers the address and data fields to the input port latches. The same signal no-
tifies the MPRAM port of a pending input data transfer. When the MPRAM polls the port, the RAM
“unite” sequence is performed, which transfers the data from the port to the RAM.
There is also an I/O port which interfaces the I/O processors to the MPRAM. Again, this input/output
port pair appears to be two separate ports, one for input and one for output, as viewed by the
MPRAM. This I/O port provides for bidirectional data flow between the MPRAM and the I/O proces-
sors. This multiplexed I/O port is actually a polling controller very similar in operation to the
MPRAM controller described previously.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-10

theory of operation 523-0773951

The polling logic issues an active low MUX SERVICE QUERY (MSQ) polling pulse to each IOP in
turn. If a data transfer is to take place, the IOP will place a low level on the active low MUX SERV-
ICE REQUEST (MSR) line. During the time that the MSQ line to that IOP is low, the multiplexed
I/O port polling logic recognizes the IOP’s request, and control of the multiplexed I/O port latches
and 11-bit data bus is given to the IOP. By using these control signals in the proper sequence, the
IOP can quickly perform data transfers to and from the MPRAM.
When the appropriate data transfer is complete, the IOP removes the multiplexed service request
signal and the service query polling sequence continues.
3. I/O Processors
The I/O processors, or IOP’s, are the main data collectors for the I/O section. They provide primarily
for the acquisition of data in a variety of forms from the A/C systems and other EFD units. This data
is digitized, filtered, formatted and written into the MPRAM to be used by the display processor. In
addition to inputting data, new information must be calculated based upon previously input data.
These mathematical calculations are also performed by the IOP’s. Along with inputting information
and performing calculations, some data must be generated and then output to other A/C units such
as the autopilot system. The output data may be required in a number of forms ranging from serial
digital to ac analog. Supervision of this function is part of the IOP’s responsibility.
Since many I/O operations are to be performed every second with data being handled in many forms,
the data is partitioned by data type and assigned an individual microprocessor to handle each data
partition. The result is a series of IOP’s all working in parallel to provide data to the MPRAM. Two
things should be noted. First, since there is a series of slower parallel IOP’s rather than a signal
high-speed IOP, the data gathering process is less susceptible to a single processor failure. For ex-
ample, if a single IOP were to fail, only the data partition associated with that IOP would be lost and
at least partial data flow to and from the MPRAM would continue. Second, since all the IOP’s and
the display processor can communicate with the same MPRAM, there exists a channel of bidirec-
tional communication between each of the IOP’s and any other IOP, as well as with the display proc-
essor.
The following three data format partitions are used by the I/O section with a single IOP for each par-
tition:
(a) AC Analog/DC Analog/DC Discrete
• Synchro/Digital
• Resolver/Digital
• Digital/Synchro
• Analog/Digital
• Digital/Analog
• Modes
• Flags
• Straps
(b) Serial Digital
• UART Based
• Low-Speed Pro-Line II
• ARINC 6-Wire
(c) Cross-Side Data Receiver
Another source of input data to the MPRAM is provided by a high-speed, synchronous, serial
digital receiver. The information received here originates in the other DPU or the MPU and is
transmitted to the DPU on a single 6-wire serial bus. The information on this bus consists of
cross-side data which is received in its natural form by the MPU IOP’s and is then passed to the
DPU in serial digital form. This data is referred to as cross-side data because it originates at the
A/C sensors on the opposite side of the A/C from the side of the DPU which receives the serial
data.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-11

theory of operation 523-0773951

The serial digital data is received as a string of 24-bit words, each separated by a 24-bit time
gap. Each 24-bit word is made up of 1 start bit, and 16 data bits.
This data is provided to the DPU primarily for use in data comparison and monitoring, and to
provide display data to the DPU when the DCP-85( ) is in CONTROL TRANSFER mode.
This high-speed receiver and its MPRAM interface run totally without intervention on the part
of the display processor or any of the I/O processors.

4.4.1.2 Display Processor

Display processor card A4 receives input data from the aircraft system from the I/O cards through the
MPRAM. It controls the operation of the symbol generator and ADI/MUX cards in the DPU. The processor is
a discrete 12-bit TTL machine. It is designed to be a fast real-time processor for crt display applications.

Instructions are first loaded from a program ROM into the instruction register which addresses a control
ROM. The control ROM in turn generates the necessary control signals to sequence the processor through
the execution of the instruction. Logical and arithmetic operations are performed on A and B registers by an
ALU. Shift and rotates are done by a shift register. The multiplexers perform two functions. They can select
either the program counter output (PC bus) or the shift register output (S bus) to be loaded into an A or B
register, or they can output data on the I/O bus (A bus) for use by peripheral devices.

The PC bus can directly access 20K of program ROM. The S bus is used to address a sine lookup table and
scratch-pad RAM.

Output of data to peripherals is accomplished by putting the data on the A bus and strobing the desired out-
put line from the I/O decoder. This enables the peripherals onto the A bus and the data is loaded into an A or
B register. Status flags can also be read directly into the processor from the status multiplexer. In the case of
input, output, and status lines, all device decoding is done within the processor.

A reset control circuit provides a power-on reset as well as an automatic processor reset, which resets the
processor if improper operation is detected.

4.4.1.3 Symbol Generator

Symbol generator card A5 creates the signals required to draw characters and lines on the EFD’s. The sym-
bol generator contains a character generator to draw letters and symbols, a vector generator to draw lines, a
coordinate converter to rotate characters and lines and a video circuit to turn the crt beam on and off.

a. Character Generator
The character generator provides X and Y deflection and video outputs to draw alphanumeric characters
and other symbols on the EFD displays. The character generator draws characters a stroke at a time,
much like one would draw on paper (as opposed to a raster format). The character generator can draw
variable sized and italic alphanumeric characters, and can string letters together for printing words and
labels.
The display processor card controls the character generator by loading data from its F bus into the char-
acter generator stroke counter. This sets the starting address of the data in the character ROM. Each lo-
cation in the ROM provides 1 video bit, 4 bits indicating the direction of each stroke, and 3 bits defining
the length of the stroke. The X-Y counter controller provides the necessary clock pulses to increment or
decrement the X and Y position counters to form the characters. Each time a new piece of data is output
from the character ROM (corresponding to a new character stroke) the stroke length is loaded into the
stroke length counter. As the stroke is drawn, the stroke length counter increments until the end-of-
stroke decoder detects that the present stroke is done. It then outputs an end-of-stroke signal (EOS)
which increments the stroke counter to address the next location in ROM, and the new stroke data is

Revised 12 May 1999 4-12

theory of operation 523-0773951

loaded into the stroke length counter. The end of the character is detected by a dummy stroke of length
zero. This stops the operation of the character generator. Depending on which character load input was
used to draw the character, the position counter will either reset to the starting position or hold the pre-
sent state to allow stringing several characters together.
X and Y outputs are formed by d/a converters that produce analog voltages corresponding to the outputs
of the X and Y position counters. The character generator also outputs a character generator busy signal
(CGB) which tells the display processor when the character generator is active. Character sizes are var-
ied by changing the voltage reference to the d/a converter.
b. Vector Generator
The vector generator serves two purposes; first, it positions the deflection so that characters can be
drawn anywhere on the screen; second, it controls the video so that it can draw solid or dashed lines as it
moves along. When a new X or Y position is loaded into the vector generator from the display processor,
the comparator compares the new position with the present position. Depending on whether the new po-
sition is greater or less than the old position, the position counter counts up or down at a fixed rate until
the present position equals the new position. At this point, the vector is complete and the vector genera-
tor stops. The digital output from the X and Y position counters are converted to an analog voltage at the
output. The vector generator sends a busy signal to the processor to indicate when it is vectoring. Solid
or dashed lines can also be selected by software.
c. Coordinate Converter
To be able to draw characters and symbols on the crt, the output of the character and vector generators
could be added together and sent directly to the displays. In the EFIS, however, there is also a need for
rotating lines and symbols about an origin, such as in the case of the tick marks on the compass rose.
The coordinate converter performs this function.
Given an initial coordinate (X,Y) the position of this point after rotation through an angle θ is:
X’=Xcosθ – Ysinθ + X org
Y’=Ycosθ + Xsinθ + Y org

4.4.1.4 Sky/Ground Raster Gene rator and Multiplexer

a. Sky/Ground Raster Generator

The sky/ground raster generator, part of ADI/MUX card A6, produces the deflection and video blanking
signals needed for the sky/ground portion of the EADI display. The raster generator receives control sig-
nals and angular data from display processor card A4. From this digital data, analog deflection and digi-
tal blanking signals are generated to produce a full-screen cyan-colored sky and brown ground presenta-
tion. The vertical position of the horizon line is determined by the aircraft pitch angle. In addition, the
entire sky/ground raster is rotated by an amount equal to the aircraft roll angle.
The raster is produced by deflecting the crt beam along parallel lines perpendicular to the horizon line. A
total of 288 raster lines composed of two sets of 144 lines are interleaved on every other refresh cycle. An
analog integrator deflects the beam along a raster line from left to right. A blanking pulse is generated
to return the beam to the left with video off.
To produce the angular rotation of the sky/ground horizon line, the X and Y raster voltages are passed
through a coordinate converter which controls the video signals to generate a horizon line with the
proper angle. The display processor controls the amount of rotation based on the aircraft roll angle.
The display processor provides control and data for the sky/raster generator. Data is output to the raster
generator in two parts: roll angle and pitch angle. The pitch angle is output last since the strobe signal
used to load the raster latches also signals the raster logic to produce one raster cycle. A raster busy sig-
nal is output to the display processor card for the duration of the raster cycle. A single raster cycle takes
8 milliseconds to complete.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-13

theory of operation 523-0773951

b. Multiplexer
The multiplexer, part of ADI/MUX card A6, allows the DPU to drive two EFD’s with different deflection
and video signals. The DPU can put an ADI on one display while drawing an HSI on another. This is
done by switching the symbol generator, sky raster, and WXR raster signals to the proper display at the
proper time with the multiplexer circuit.
An ADI deflection multiplexer switches between symbol generator and sky raster signals. The HSI mul-
tiplexer switches between symbol generator, WXR, and sky raster (sky raster is needed to produce a
composite display on the EFD unit normally having an HSI). The video multiplexer performs a similar
function with the digital video signals.
A multiplexer controller selects the proper multiplexer inputs depending on the selected display modes,
the state of the symbol generator, and whether or not the weather and sky rasters are busy. Deflection
and video signal drivers are used on the multiplexer outputs to provide a low-impedance source for
driving the EFD’s.

4.4.1.5 Power Supplies

There are three power supplies in the DPU: one on power supply card A3 and two on power supply card A9.
Power supply card A9 supplies power to the EFD displays.

a. Power Supply Card A3

Aircraft +28 V dc is input to power supply card A3. Power supply card A3 provides +5, +15, and –15 to
circuits within the DPU. The circuit consists of a +28 to +15 V dc series switching regulator that supplies
constant voltage to a push-pull inverter. The push-pull inverter then outputs regulated and filtered +5,
+15 and –15 V dc to cards A4 through A8 in the DPU. Another version of the A3 card consists of +28 to
+5 V dc series switching regulator, a +28 to +15 V dc series switching regulator, and a +15 to –15 V dc
push-pull inverter.
b. EFD Power Supply Card A9
Aircraft +28 V dc is input to power supply card A9. Power supply card A9 contains two independent and
identical power supplies on one card. It provides +30, ±25, and ±11 V dc to the EHSI and EADI. The cir-
cuit consists of a +28 to +15 V dc series switching regulator that supplies constant voltage to a push-pull
inverter. The push-pull inverter uses a transformer with multiple windings on its secondary to output
regulated and filtered +30, ±25, ±11 V dc. The EFIS system will provide normal operation down to +18 V
dc. When the voltage drops below +18 V dc, the crt’s will blank. Normal operation is resumed automati-
cally when the voltage rises above +18 V dc. When there are short power interruptions (a few seconds),
there is no warmup time; the crt’s show a blank state and turn on as soon as power is restored.

4.4.1.6 DPU Monitor Operation

a. Comparator and Master Warn

Comparator monitoring may be done in the DPU as well as MPU. Data compared includes pitch, roll,
and heading. On-side data is read, converted to digital form, and may be sent to each DPU. In 5-tube
configurations, the MPU may send cross-side data to the DPU’s. Test words are transmitted to ensure
data path accuracy. Each of the processors compares the data, and a comparator warn message will be
displayed on the EFD’s. Additional outputs are supplied for use by external annunciators. A master
warn discrete is also provided, as an output from each side of the DPU, which serves as an overall com-
pare function annunciation. The master warn discrete can be reset independent of the individual com-
parator outputs by momentarily grounding strap 22. The comparator outputs are resettable using a
separate input pin (strap 12). The comparator warn outputs are latching and have built-in hysteresis to
avoid troublesome intermittent warnings. The comparator function may be inhibited by grounding strap
22 and 12 on the DPU.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-14

theory of operation 523-0773951

b. On-Line Monitoring
On-line monitoring of the EFIS system is accomplished in the following ways:
1. Keep-Alive Monitor — Circuits are included with each of the system processors to monitor a periodic
signal generated by the processor. If the signal is not generated, the circuit will cause a flag condi-
tion and attempt to restart the processor.
2. Test Words — A series of test words is transmitted between EFIS subsystem components to verify
integrity of the data paths. Detection of a bad data transmission will cause a flag condition.
3. Activity Monitors — The digital buses being received by the I/O sections are monitored for activity. If
no activity is detected for the appropriate period for that bus, a no data condition or a flag is set de-
pending on the bus.
4. Synchro Monitor — All synchros are monitored for valid voltage levels. If an invalid condition is de-
tected, the appropriate flag is set.
5. Checksum Monitor — The I/O and display processors periodically verify their program checksums. If
an incorrect checksum is calculated, the test words as described above are not generated, resulting in
a DPU/MPU fail condition.
6. Ram Monitor — During each power-up sequence, the I/O and display processors test their private
RAM storage and generate test words. If the test words are not generated, a DPU/MPU fail condition
results.
7. Multiport RAM Test — During each power-up sequence, the digital I/O #1 processor tests the mul-
tiport RAM. Different sequences of data are written to the RAM and read to verify its integrity. A
failure of any bit will cause the processor to reset and perform the test again. At the conclusion of a
successful test, the RAM is cleared to all zeroes.
c. Self-Test Mode
In addition to the on-line monitors, it is possible to place the EFIS system in a self-test mode by the use
of an airframe supplied test switch or test switches. When the test mode has been activated, the button
and knobs on the DCP select various submodes. Test functions available include:
1. Confidence Test
When the DPU test is grounded, an increment of +10 degrees is added to pitch and roll on the left
side and –10 degrees is added to pitch and roll on the right side. A +20 degree increment is added to
heading on the left side and a –20 degree increment is added to the heading on the right side. The
word TEST in red characters is written across the EADI above the aircraft sysmbol while the test is
in process. The addition of the 10- and 20-degree increments is done in the DPU I/O section and will
cause the comparator logic in the display processor to give roll, pitch, and heading comparator mes-
sages.
If the DPU test line is held at ground for longer than 4 seconds, the 10-degree increments are re-
moved and all EADI and EHSI flags will be brought into view. This flag condition will remain until
either the ground is removed from the test line, or the RA TST button on the DCP is pressed to enter
a sequence of diagnostic/maintenance routines (DMRS). If the RA TST button is not depressed and
the ground is removed from the test line, the test sequence is aborted and normal operation is re-
sumed.
2. Diagnostics/Maintenance Routines (DMRS)
To enter the diagnostic/maintenance routines for each DPU, push and hold the installer-supplied
EFIS TEST button and then push the DSP TST/DCP RA TST button on the onside control. Once the
first diagnostic page shows on the display, the EFIS TEST button may be released. Each successive
push of the TST/RA TST button, on the onside control, changes the display to the next available di-
agnostic page. Push the onside TST/RA TST button on the last page of the diagnostic pages to exit
the diagnostic mode and change the display back to a normal EADI/EHSI display. To exit the diag-
nostic pages from any page, at any time, push and hold the TST/RA TST button for approximately 2
seconds. The display changes directly to a normal EADI/EHSI.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-15

theory of operation 523-0773951

The diagnostic display pages give the following information:

(a) Multiport RAM — presents the data being received from and transmitted to aircraft systems.
Data is in digital form and will aid in new installation checkouts as well as LRU fault isolation.
(b) RAM — displays the contents of the display processor RAM.
(c) MFD — displays the contents of the RAM that holds the MFD page data, joystick data and
status. This mode is not entered by a DPU.
(d) Alignment Tests — displays fixed data patterns in fixed colors to provide verification of symbol
generator functions and to allow for adjustment of display size, position, and color. Program revi-
sion status is also displayed.
(e) FCS Diagnostics — displays APS-85/86 diagnostics text if available.
(f) ADC Diagnostics — displays ADC diagnostics text if available.
(g) AHRS Diagnostics — displays AHRS diagnostics if available.
(h) VIR Diagnostics — displays VIR diagnostics if available.
(i) DME Diagnostics — displays DME diagnostics if available.

4.4.2 EFD-85/86( ) Electronic F light Display (EFD)

The EFD is used as an EADI or an EHSI. Refer to Figure 4-10.

4.4.2.1 CRT Assembly

The integrated crt assembly consists of the following components:

• High-resolution multicolor tube

• Self-converging deflection yoke
• Static convergence and purity magnets
• Multibandpass optical filter
• Potted anode and base connectors

The crt is an in-line gun, shadow mask type which uses a black matrix surrounding pigmented phosphors to
achieve maximum contrast ratio.

The multibandpass optical filter, which is not bonded to the crt face, is matched to the phosphors in the tube
to achieve a high control ratio and improve sunlight readability.

Horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers provide the drive currents to the deflection yoke windings to
magnetically position the electron beam on the active phosphor area. The deflection yoke is designed to be
self-converging so that no additional deflection signal processing is required to correct for misconvergence.
Beam positioning on the screen is done in either of two techniques: stroke (or random positioning) and raster
scanning. Raster scanning is used for illuminating large portions of the screen such as that required for
weather radar and sky background. Stroke writing is used to produce sharp straight lines, alphanumerics
and symbols.

No in-house adjustments of the crt assembly are necessary because the unit arrives fully converged and ad-
justed for maximum purity.

4.4.2.2 Deflection Amplifiers

The horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers are identical circuits designed entirely with discrete com-
ponents.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-16

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-9. DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-17

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-10. EFD-85/86( ) Electronic Flight Display, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-18

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.4.2.3 Video Amplifiers

There are three separate video amplifiers in each EFD. These amplifiers are used to turn the electron beams
on and off at speeds up to 2 MHz by outputting either of two discrete voltage levels. The voltage levels that
turn the video guns on and off are dependent on the voltage applied to grid 2. In our particular case, grid 2 is
biased at 400 V dc giving us video on (Von) R 60 V dc and video off (Voff) S 150 V dc. The intensities of each
beam can be adjusted separately by lowering Von.

4.4.2.4 Phosphor Protection Mo nitor

It is necessary to protect the crt phosphor from being damaged due to either deflection or video amplifier
failure. This is done by continuously monitoring the deflection yoke return lines and video power supply line.
If a failure is detected in these lines, the phosphor protection monitor will signal the high-voltage supply to
shut down.

4.4.2.5 High-Voltage Power Sup ply (HVPS)

The HVPS provides three output voltages: 15 kV for the anode, +2.5 to +4.5 kV dc for focus, and +400 V dc
for grid 2. The anode and focus voltage regulators are independent of each other in order to ensure output
regulation. The oscillator section of the HVPS is contained in the anode section. This oscillator is also used to
drive the focus transformer primary. Having the anode and focus oscillations synchronized reduces emi.

4.4.3 MPU-85H/86H Multifunc tion Processor Unit (MPU)

The MPU generates the necessary deflection and video signals to draw the desired display on the multifunc-
tion display unit (MFD). The MPU contains an aircraft system I/O interface for two sets of sensors, a display
processor, a symbol generator to provide stroke-writing, an ADI/sky raster generator and multiplexer circuit,
and power supplies. Refer to Figure 4-11.

4.4.3.1 Input/Output (I/O) Inter face

Analog I/O cards A7 and A9 and digital I/O cards A8 and A10 comprise the I/O interface section of the MPU.
These cards receive analog and digital data from aircraft systems and other EFIS units, format the data,
and provide that data to the display processor. In addition to collecting data for display, the I/O section also
calculates new data based upon previously received data and outputs this information in an appropriate
form to other equipments. There are also a number of digital EFIS communication channels which are su-
pervised by the MPU I/O system.

a. Inputs
The I/O section is capable of receiving data from several different aircraft sources. In addition, there are
several intra-EFIS data sources which must be accommodated. Altogether, four general data formats are
received, digitized, filtered, and formatted by the I/O section as follows:
b. Outputs
1. AC Analog Inputs
• Desired track or track angle error + drift angle
• Roll angle
• Pitch angle
• Heading
• ADF bearing
• WPT bearing
2. DC Analog Inputs
• Radio altitude
• Crosstrack deviation

Revised 12 May 1999 4-19

theory of operation 523-0773951

• Roll steering command

• Pitch steering command
• ADF bearing
• Fast/slow deviation
• FCS information
• AOA deviation
3. DC Discrete Inputs
• To/from
• Instrument flags
• Instrument modes
• EFIS and I/O straps
• FCS modes
• Comparator reset
• Master warn reset
• Cat II request
• Marker beacons
• Flight Director Command Bars
4. Serial Digital Inputs
• DME distance
• VLF/INS/LNV/LRN information
• DPU cross-side data
• DCP/DSP data
• Air data computer information
• Vertical navigation information
• FCS modes
• Altitude/Heading
• WXP data
c. Outputs
Along with receiving data, the MPU also provides several outputs to other EFIS units and to other air-
craft systems. The I/O section provides these outputs in various formats. These formats and data are
listed as follows:
1. AC Analog
• Heading error
• Course datum
2. DC Analog
• Lateral deviation
3. DC Discrete
• Comparator warns
• Cat II output
• Master warn
• To/From
• Back course
• Modes/status/flags
• Overtemp
• Decision height
• Radio altimeter test
4. Serial Digital
• DCP/DSP control
• FMS-90 WPT load
• Cross-side data
• FCS data

Revised 12 May 1999 4-20

theory of operation 523-0773951

d. Functional Blocks
The I/O section is divided into four functional blocks. These consist of a 2048-×-16-bit multiport RAM
(MPRAM), a digital high-speed serial digital transmitter/receiver to transmit MPU cross-side data and
to receive DPU/MPU cross-side data, an array of microprocessor based I/O processors (IOP’s) and high-
speed input and output ports . These combine with the MPRAM to provide high-speed multiaccessing
features.
1. Multiport RAM (MPRAM)
At the center of the MPU I/O section is a 2048−×−16-bit high-speed RAM and multiaccess controller.
This RAM and controller are referred to as the multiport RAM or MPRAM.
The 2048−×−16-bit RAM is comprised of two 2048 × 8-bit RAM’s. When data is transferred from the
port to the RAM, the ISR signal is low. The controller reads an 11-bit address and 16-bit data from
the input port and performs a write sequence to the RAM. When data is transferred to the port from
the RAM, the OSR is low. In this case, the controller reads the 11-bit address from the port, reads
data from the RAM, and latches the 16-bit data in the output port. In either case, after the operation
is complete, the polling pulse is removed from the port, which in turn resets the service request sig-
nal and the polling sequence continues. All transfers between the MPRAM and the ports take place
on a 27-bit bus with 11 address bits and 16 data bits.
The MPRAM controller can support up to eleven ports. If fewer than eleven are actually used, the
controller can be strapped to ignore the unused port positions and there will be no loss of polling effi-
ciency due to empty port slots.
2. MPRAM I/O Ports
Interfacing the MPRAM to the other blocks of the I/O section is accomplished through a set of I/O
ports. There are two input/output ports and one input port. From this point on, all references to
MPRAM I/O ports will be made with respect to the MPRAM. That is, an input port is used to trans-
fer data to the MPRAM while an output port is used to transfer data from the MPRAM.
Coordination of the data transfers to and from the MPRAM is controlled by a simple polling se-
quence. This polling sequence views each I/O port at two ports, one for input and one for output;
thus, where two I/O ports and one input port are shown, the controller actually treats these as five
separate ports.
There are two types of I/O ports. The I/O port is connected to the display processor and the multi-
plexed I/O port is connected to the I/O processors. From the point of view of the MPRAM, these two
I/O ports are identical; in actual operation they differ, since each interfaces to different processor bus
schemes.
The 12-bit display processor interfaces to the 11-bit address and 16-bit data bus used by the I/O port
and the MPRAM. To read data from RAM, the display processor performs a read from external
memory sequence. Decoding of the processor control signals provides a signal to the MPRAM output
port that causes the processor to hang up and signals the MPRAM of a pending output request.
When the port is polled, the 12-bit address present at the processor’s address bus passes through the
port’s buffers and accesses data in the MPRAM. This data is then latched at the output port and the
display processor is released. The read cycle is now completed by the processor.
To write data to the MPRAM, the display processor performs a write to external memory sequence.
Processor control line decoding provides a signal to the MPRAM, this time to the input port. The
processor is signaled to hang up and the MPRAM is notified of the pending input transfer. When the
port is polled, the processor’s 11-bit address is passed to the MPRAM along with 12 bits of data. The
MPRAM controller performs the required RAM write sequence and then releases the processor, com-
pleting the transfer. Due to a decoding ambiguity at the display processor, a superfluous output re-
quest is also generated but the data is ignored by the display processor.
In the cross-side data receiver and its input port, serial data is received by a series of shift registers
in a form directly compatible with the input port. When a valid word is received, a data strobe is

Revised 12 May 1999 4-21

theory of operation 523-0773951

generated which transfers the address and data fields to the input port latches. The same signal no-
tifies the MPRAM port of a pending input data transfer. When the MPRAM polls the port, the RAM
unite sequence is performed, which transfers the data from the port to the RAM.
There is also an I/O port which interfaces the I/O processors to the MPRAM. Again, this input/output
port pair appears to be two separate ports, one for input and one for output, as viewed by the
MPRAM. This I/O port provides for bidirectional data flow between the MPRAM and the I/O proces-
sors. This multiplexed I/O port is actually a polling controller very similar in operation to the
MPRAM controller described previously.
The polling logic issues an active low MUX SERVICE QUERY (MSQ) polling pulse to each IOP in
turn. If a data transfer is to take place, the IOP will place a low level on the active low MUX SERV-
ICE REQUEST (MSR) line. During the time that the MSQ line to that IOP is low, the multiplexed
I/O port polling logic recognizes the IOP’s request, and control of the multiplexed I/O port latches
and 11-bit data bus is given to the IOP. By using these control signals in the proper sequence, the
IOP can quickly perform data transfers to and from the MPRAM.
When the appropriate data transfer is complete, the IOP removes the multiplexed service request
signal and the service query polling sequence continues.
3. I/O Processors
The I/O processors, or IOP’s, are the main data collectors for the I/O section. They provide primarily
for the acquisition of data in a variety of forms from the A/C systems and other EFD units. This data
is digitized, filtered, formatted and written into the MPRAM to be used by the display processor. In
addition to inputting data, new information must be calculated based upon previously input data.
These mathematical calculations are also performed by the IOP’s. Along with inputting information
and performing calculations, some data must be generated and then output to other A/C units such
as the autopilot system. The output data may be required in a number of forms ranging from serial
digital to ac analog. Supervision of this function is part of the IOP’s responsibility.
Since many I/O operations are to be performed every second with data being handled in many forms,
the data is partitioned by data type and assigned an individual microprocessor to handle each data
partition. The result is a series of IOP’s all working in parallel to provide data to the MPRAM. Two
things should be noted. First, since there is a series of slower parallel IOP’s rather than a signal
high-speed IOP, the data gathering process is less susceptible to a single processor failure. For ex-
ample, if a single IOP were to fail, only the data partition associated with that IOP would be lost and
at least partial data flow to and from the MPRAM would continue. Second, since all the IOP’s and
the display processor can communicate with the same MPRAM, there exists a channel of bidirec-
tional communication between each of the IOP’s and any other IOP, as well as with the display proc-
essor.
The following three data format partitions are used by the I/O section with a single IOP for each par-
tition:
(a) AC Analog/DC Analog/DC Discrete
• Synchro/Digital
• Resolver/Digital
• Digital/Synchro
• Analog/Digital
• Digital/Analog
• Modes
• Flags
• Straps
(b) Serial Digital
• UART Based
• Low-Speed Pro-Line II
• ARINC 6-Wire

Revised 12 May 1999 4-22

theory of operation 523-0773951

(c) Cross-Side Data Receiver

Another source of input data to the MPRAM is provided by a high-speed, synchronous, serial
digital receiver. The information received here originates in the MPU and is transmitted to the
DPU on a single 6-wire serial bus. The information on this bus consists of cross-side data which
is received in its natural form by the MPU IOP’s and is then passed to the DPU in serial digital
form. This data is referred to as cross-side data because it originates at the A/C sensors on the
opposite side of the A/C from the side of the DPU which receives the serial data.
The serial digital data is received as a string of 24 bit words, each separated by a 24-bit-time
gap. Each 24-bit word is made up of 1 start bit, and 16 data bits.
This data is provided to the DPU primarily for use in data comparison and monitoring, and to
provide display data to the DPU when the DCP-85( ) is in CONTROL TRANSFER mode.
This high-speed receiver and its MPRAM interface run totally without intervention on the part
of the display processor or any of the I/O processors.

4.4.3.2 Display Processor

Display processor card A4 receives input data from the aircraft system from the I/O cards through the
MPRAM. It controls the operation of the symbol generator and ADI/MUX cards in the MPU. The processor is
a discrete 12-bit TTL machine. It is designed to be a fast real-time processor for crt display applications.

Instructions are first loaded from a program ROM into the instruction register which addresses a control
ROM. The control ROM in turn generates the necessary control signals to sequence the processor through
the execution of the instruction. Logical and arithmetic operations are performed on A and B registers by an
ALU. Shift and rotates are done by a shift register. The multiplexers perform two functions. They can select
either the program counter output (PC bus) or the shift register output (S bus) to be loaded into an A or B
register, or they can output data on the I/O bus (A bus) for use by peripheral devices.

The PC bus can directly access 20K of program ROM. The S bus is used to address a sine lookup table and
scratch-pad RAM.

Output of data to peripherals is accomplished by putting the data on the A bus and strobing the desired out-
put line from the I/O decoder. This enables the peripherals onto the A bus and the data is loaded into an A or
B register. Status flags can also be read directly into the processor from the status multiplexer. In the case of
input, output, and status lines, all device decoding is done within the processor.

A reset control circuit provides a power-on reset as well as an automatic processor reset, which resets the
processor if improper operation is detected.

4.4.3.3 Symbol Generator

Symbol generator card A5 creates the signals required to draw characters and lines on the EFD’s. The sym-
bol generator contains a character generator to draw letters and symbols, a vector generator to draw lines, a
coordinate converter to rotate characters and lines and a video circuit to turn the crt beam on and off.

a. Character Generator
The character generator provides X and Y deflection and video outputs to draw alphanumeric characters
and other symbols on the EFD displays. The character generator draws characters a stroke at a time,
much like one would draw on paper (as opposed to a raster format). The character generator can draw
variable sized and italic alphanumeric characters, and can string letters together for printing words and
labels.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-23

theory of operation 523-0773951

The display processor card controls the character generator by loading data from its F bus into the char-
acter generator stroke counter. This sets the starting address of the data in the character ROM. Each lo-
cation in the ROM provides 1 video bit, 4 bits indicating the direction of each stroke, and 3 bits defining
the length of the stroke. The X-Y counter controller provides the necessary clock pulses to increment or
decrement the X and Y position counters to form the characters. Each time a new piece of data is output
from the character ROM (corresponding to a new character stroke) the stroke length is loaded into the
stroke length counter. As the stroke is drawn, the stroke length counter increments until the end-of-
stroke decoder detects that the present stroke is done. It then outputs an end-of-stroke signal (EOS)
which increments the stroke counter to address the next location in ROM, and the new stroke data is
loaded into the stroke length counter. The end of the character is detected by a dummy stroke of length
zero. This stops the operation of the character generator. Depending on which character load input was
used to draw the character, the position counter will either reset to the starting position or hold the pre-
sent state to allow stringing several characters together.
X and Y outputs are formed by d/a converters that produce analog voltages corresponding to the outputs
of the X and Y position counters. The character generator also outputs a character generator busy signal
(CGB) which tells the display processor when the character generator is active.
Character sizes are varied by changing the voltage reference to the d/a converter.
b. Vector Generator
The vector generator serves two purposes; first, it positions the deflection so that characters can be
drawn anywhere on the screen; second, it controls the video so that it can draw solid or dashed lines as it
moves along.
When a new X or Y position is loaded into the vector generator from the display processor, the compara-
tor compares the new position with the present position. Depending on whether the new position is
greater or less than the old position, the position counter counts up or down at a fixed rate until the pre-
sent position equals the new position. At this point, the vector is complete and the vector generator
stops. The digital output from the X and Y position counters are converted to an analog voltage at the
output. The vector generator sends a busy signal to the processor to indicate when it is vectoring. Solid
or dashed lines can also be selected by software.
c. Coordinate Converter
To be able to draw characters and symbols on the crt, the output of the character and vector generators
could be added together and sent directly to the displays. In the EFIS, however, there is also a need for
rotating lines and symbols about an origin, such as in the case of the tick marks on the compass rose.
The coordinate converter performs this function. Given an initial coordinate (X,Y) the position of this
point after rotation through an angle θ is:
X’=Xcosθ – Ysinθ + X org
Y’=Ycosθ + Xsinθ + Y org

4.4.3.4 Sky/Ground Raster Gene rator and Multiplexer

a. Sky/Ground Raster Generator

The sky/ground raster generator, part of ADI/MUX card A6, produces the deflection and video blanking
signals needed for the sky/ground portion of the EADI display. The raster generator receives control sig-
nals and angular data from display processor card A4. From this digital data, analog deflection and digi-
tal blanking signals are generated to produce a full-screen cyan-colored sky and brown ground presenta-
tion. The vertical position of the horizon line is determined by the aircraft pitch angle. In addition, the
entire sky/ground raster is rotated by an amount equal to the aircraft roll angle.
The raster is produced by deflecting the crt beam along parallel lines perpendicular to the horizon line. A
total of 288 raster lines composed of two sets of 144 lines are interleaved on every other refresh cycle. An

Revised 12 May 1999 4-24

theory of operation 523-0773951

analog integrator deflects the beam along a raster line from left to right. A blanking pulse is generated
to return the beam to the left with video off.
To produce the angular rotation of the sky/ground horizon line, the X and Y raster voltages are passed
through a coordinate converter which controls the video signals to generate a horizon line with the
proper angle. The display processor controls the amount of rotation based on the aircraft roll angle.
The display processor provides control and data for the sky/raster generator. Data is output to the raster
generator in two parts: roll angle and pitch angle. The pitch angle is output last since the strobe signal
used to load the raster latches also signals the raster logic to produce one raster cycle. A raster busy sig-
nal is output to the display processor card for the duration of the raster cycle. A single raster cycle takes
8 milliseconds to complete.
b. Multiplexer
The multiplexer, part of ADI/MUX card A6, allows the MPU to drive two EFD’s and an MFD with differ-
ent deflection and video signals. The MPU can put an ADI on one EFD, draw an HSI on another EFD,
and at the same time drive the MFD. This is done by switching the symbol generator, sky raster, and
WXR raster signals to the proper display at the proper time with the multiplexer circuit.
An ADI deflection multiplexer switches between symbol generator and sky raster signals. The HSI mul-
tiplexer switches between symbol generator, WXR, and sky raster (sky raster is needed to produce a
composite display on the EFD unit normally having an HSI). The video multiplexer performs a similar
function with the digital video signals.
A multiplexer controller selects the proper multiplexer inputs depending on the selected display modes,
the state of the symbol generator, and whether or not the weather and sky rasters are busy. Deflection
and video signal drivers are used on the multiplexer outputs to provide a low-impedance source for
driving the display units.

4.4.3.5 Power Supply Card A3

Aircraft +28 V dc is input to power supply card A3. Card A3 provides +5, +15, and –15 V dc to circuits within
the MPU. The circuit consists of a +28-to +15-V dc series switching regulator that supplies constant voltage
to a push-pull inverter. The push-pull inverter then outputs regulated and filtered +5, +15, and –15 V dc to
cards A4 through A10 in the MPU. Another version of the A3 card consists of a +28 to +15-V dc series
switching regulator, a +28- to +5-V dc series switching regulator and a +15- to –15-push-pull inverter.

The EFIS system will provide normal operation down to +18 V dc. When the voltage drops below +18 V dc,
the crt’s will blank. Normal operation is resumed automatically when the voltage rises above +18 V dc.

When there are short power interruptions (a few seconds), there is no warmup time; the crt’s show a blank
state and turn on as soon as power is restored.

4.4.3.6 MPU Monitor Operation

a. Comparator and Master Warn

Comparator monitoring may be done in the MPU as well as DPU. Data compared includes pitch, roll,
and heading. On-side data is read, converted to digital form, and may be sent to each DPU. In 5-tube
configurations, the MPU may send cross-side data to the DPU’s. Test words are transmitted to ensure
data path accuracy. Each of the processors compares the data, and a comparator warn message will be
displayed on the EFD’s. Additional outputs are supplied for use by external annunciators. A master
warn discrete is also provided, as an output from each side of the MPU, which serves as an overall com-
pare function annunciation. The master warn discrete can be reset independent of the individual com-
parator outputs by momentarily grounding strap 22. The comparator outputs are resettable using a
separate input pin (strap 12). The comparator warn outputs are latching and have built-in hysteresis to

Revised 12 May 1999 4-25

theory of operation 523-0773951

avoid troublesome intermittent warnings. The comparator function may be inhibited by grounding strap
22 and 12 on the MPU.
b. On-Line Monitoring
On-line monitoring of the EFIS system is accomplished in the following ways:
1. Keep-Alive Monitor — Circuits are included with each of the system processors to monitor a periodic
signal generated by the processor. If the signal is not generated, the circuit will cause a flag condi-
tion and attempt to restart the processor.
2. Test Words — A series of test words is transmitted between EFIS subsystem components to verify
integrity of the data paths. Detection of a bad data transmission will cause a flag condition.
3. Activity Monitors — The digital buses being received by the I/O sections are monitored for activity. If
no activity is detected for the appropriate period for that bus, a no data condition or a flag is set de-
pending on the bus.
4. Synchro Monitor — All synchros are monitored for valid voltage levels. If an invalid condition is de-
tected, the appropriate flag is set.
5. Checksum Monitor — The I/O and display processors periodically verify their program checksums. If
an incorrect checksum is calculated, the test words as described above are not generated, resulting in
a DPU/MPU fail condition.
6. Ram Monitor — During each power-up sequence, the I/O and display processors test their private
RAM storage and generate test words. If the test words are not generated, a DPU/MPU fail condition
results.
7. Multiport RAM Test — During each power-up sequence, the digital I/O #1 processor tests the mul-
tiport RAM. Different sequences of data are written to the RAM and read to verify its integrity. A
failure of any bit will cause the processor to reset and perform the test again. At the conclusion of a
successful test, the RAM is cleared to all zeroes.
c. Self-Test Mode
In addition to the on-line monitors, it is possible to place the EFIS system in a self-test mode by the use
of an airframe supplied test switch or test switches. When the test mode has been activated, the button
and knobs on the DCP select various submodes. Test functions available include:
1. Confidence Test
When the MPU test is grounded, an increment of +10 degrees is added to pitch and roll on the left
side and –10 degrees is added to pitch and roll on the right side. A +20 degree increment is added to
heading on the left side and a –20 degree increment is added to the heading on the right side. The
word TEST in red characters is written across the EADI above the aircraft symbol while the test is
in process. The addition of the 10- and 20-degree increments is done in the MPU I/O section and will
cause the comparator logic in the display processor to give roll, pitch, and heading comparator mes-
sages.
If the MPU test line is held at ground for longer than 4 seconds, the 10-degree increments are re-
moved and all EADI and EHSI flags will be brought into view. This flag condition will remain until
either the ground is removed from the test line, or the RA TST button on the DCP is pressed to enter
a sequence of diagnostic/maintenance routines (DMRS).
If the RA TST button is not depressed and the ground is removed from the test line, the test se-
quence is aborted and normal operation is resumed.
2. Diagnostics/Maintenance Routines (DMRS)
To enter the diagnostic/maintenance routines for the MPU in a 5-tube system, push and hold the
EFIS TEST button on the pilot’s side and then push the DSP TST/DCP RA TST button on the control
for the copilot’s side. Each successive push of the TST/RA TST button on the copilot’s control changes
the display to the next available diagnostic page. Push the copilot’s TST/RA TST button on the last
page of the diagnostic pages to exit the diagnostic mode and change the display back to a normal
MFD display. To exit the diagnostic pages from any page, at any time, push and hold the copilot’s
TST/RA TST button for approximately 2 seconds. The display changes directly to a normal MFD.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-26

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-11. MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Processor Unit, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-27

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-12. MFD-85A Multifunction Display, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-28

theory of operation 523-0773951

The diagnostic display pages give the following information:

(a) Multiport RAM — presents the data being received from and transmitted to aircraft systems.
Data is in digital form and will aid in new installation checkouts as well as LRU fault isolation.
(b) RAM — displays the contents of the display processor RAM.
(c) MFD — displays the contents of the RAM that holds the MFD page data, joystick data and
status. This mode is not entered by a DPU.
(d) Alignment Tests — displays fixed data patterns in fixed colors to provide verification of symbol
generator functions and to allow for adjustment of display size, position, and color. Program revi-
sion status is also displayed.
(e) FCS Diagnostics — displays APS-85/86 diagnostics text if available.
(f) ADC Diagnostics — displays ADC diagnostics text if available.
(g) AHRS Diagnostics — displays AHRS diagnostics if available.
(h) VIR Diagnostics — displays VIR diagnostics if available.
(i) DME Diagnostics — displays DME diagnostics if available.

4.4.4 MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD)

Refer to Figure 4-12. The multifunction processing unit (MPU) receives serial data from the MFD and then
transmits the necessary deflection and video signals to define a picture on the MFD. The serial data received
by the MPU is a single page of data to be displayed on the screen and the control mode switch information.
The control mode switch information will be used by the MPU to determine the mode and thus transmit the
necessary signals.

The MFD has control mode switches (pushbuttons) on the left-hand side of the screen. The pushbuttons are
interlocking, and only one button may be pushed at a time. The exceptions to this are the RDR and NAV
mode buttons. These may be pushed for any combination of the two buttons.

Remote data is stored in RAM if the selected mode is RMT. The RAM temporarily stores a page of data. If
power is turned off the page information is lost. The data received from the external source has a starting
address followed by a stream of data. The processor decodes the address and loads the data into the RAM.

Page data is stored in the EEPROM if the selected mode is PGE or EMG. The EEPROM retains the data
even if the power is turned off. One byte of serial data is received each time a key is depressed on the RDP-
300. The processor stores the byte of data at the appropriate address in the EEPROM. The EEPROM re-
quires extensive control signals to input data. Logic is used external to the processor to control the EEP-
ROM.

Independent of the two storage methods mentioned above, if the selected mode is RMT, PGE, or EMG, one
page of data must be transmitted to the MPU. The data is transmitted serially, one byte at a time. The
switch information will be transmitted in the same manner.

The MPU receives the data on the rising edge of each clock. The address is used to define a location within a
RAM. Each byte of data must have an 8-bit address associated with it to define a spot within the RAM. One
page worth of data requires 240 bytes to fill the memory. The remaining 16 bytes of RAM are used for MFD
switch storage.
The crt assembly and deflection amplifiers are the same as the EFD.

4.4.4.1 Video Amplifiers

There are three separate video amplifiers in each MFD. These amplifiers are used to turn the electron
beams on and off at speeds up to 2 MHz by outputting either of two discrete voltage levels. The voltage levels

Revised 12 May 1999 4-29

theory of operation 523-0773951

that turn the video guns on and off are dependent on the voltage applied to grid 2. Grid 2 is biased at +400 V
dc, giving us video on (Von) R 60 V dc and video off (Voff) S 150 V dc.

4.4.4.2 Phosphor Protection Mo nitor

Refer to the description of this circuit in the EFD section.

4.4.4.3 High-Voltage Power Sup ply (HVPS) A12

The HVPS provides two output voltages, 15 kV for the anode and +2.5 to +4.5 kV dc for focus. The anode and
focus voltage regulators are independent of each other in order to ensure output regulation. The oscillator
section of the HVPS is contained in the anode section. This oscillator is also used to drive the focus trans-
former primary. Having the anode and focus oscillations synchronized reduces emi.

4.4.4.4 Low-Voltage Power Supp ly Card A4

Aircraft +28 V dc is input to the low-voltage power supply card A4. Circuit card A4 provides +5, ±11, ±25,
and +26.5 V dc to circuits within the MFD.

4.4.5 CHP-85D Course Headin g Panel (CHP)

In the following discussion, refer to Figure 4-13 for a block diagram of the CHP.

4.4.5.1 Direction/Movement Det ector Encoders

The encoders are controlled by the knobs on the face of unit. The CRS 1 knob controls the positioning of the
pilot’s course arrows, the CRS 2 knob controls the positioning of the copilot’s course arrows, and the HDG
knob controls the positioning of the pilot’s and copilot’s heading reference marker simultaneously. Each CRS
knob controls a single encoder and the HDG knob controls two encoders. When a CRS knob is turned a code
disk rotates. The code disk is notched, so when rotated, light to a phototransistor is passed or blocked. The
phototransistor acts as an encoder to sense direction and speed of knob rotation and apply pulses to an asso-
ciated direction/movement detector. Rotating a CRS knob clockwise sets the direction/movement detector
course output to +5 V dc and rotating the CRS knob counterclockwise sets the direction/movement detector
course direction output to 0 V dc. The direction/movement detector also outputs a complementary serial
pulse train that the DCP-85E samples to determine how fast the course arrows are to rotate.

4.4.5.2 Switches

The CRS DIRECT, HDG SYNC, CRS CTL, ET, and NAV DTA pushbutton switches are normally open and
when used apply a ground to the DCP-85E to activate the appropriate function. Each position of the TTG-
SP-ET toggle switch applies a ground to the DCP-85E to activate the appropriate function. The ET pushbut-
ton is used in conjunction with the ET position of the toggle switch and the ET function of the NAV DTA
pushbutton to control the elapsed time function. When an elapsed time function is displayed on the EHSI,
each time the ET pushbutton is activated, the elapsed time counter cycles to the next state in the following
sequence:

a. Reset to 00:00.
b. Start elapsed time count.
c. Hold present reading.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-30

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-13. CHP-85D Course Heading Panel, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-31

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.4.6 DCP-85E Display Contro l Panel (DCP)

4.4.6.1 General Description

The primary function of the DCP is to provide pilot control of the EFIS system. The DCP processor scans the
DCP and CHP front panel switches for pilot inputs. The switches provide pilot selection of NAV sensors, dis-
play modes, decision height, course, and heading values. Processing of inputs is done by determining valid
changes in switch status, and then executing a routine to process the new data. Along with the switch in-
puts, the DCP processor also monitors autopilot annunciators. After processing by the DCP, input data is
then transferred to the DPU/MPU display computers via a serial data link. Refer to Figure 4-14.

4.4.6.2 Card Descriptions

Inputs to processor card A1 consist of parallel switch position data, serial rear connector strapping data from
the A2 card, and serial autopilot annunciator data from the A6 card. The parallel switch data is serialized,
combined with the serial strapping data, and monitored by the microprocessor. When a switch changes
status the microprocessor executes a routine to process the new data before sending it to the DPU. The
course sensor, bearing sensor, selected course, selected heading, and decision height data are stored in non-
volatile memory (EAROM) for power interruption protection. The microprocessor also monitors the autopilot
annunciator data but transfers it to the DPU without preprocessing.

Power supply card A2 converts an input of +28 V dc into –28 V dc, +15 V dc, +5 V dc, a power-up signal, and
a power-down signal. The power-up signal resets the microprocessor on the A1 card upon system initializa-
tion. The power-down signal notifies the A1 card of possible loss of power. This card also reads the strapping
of the rear connector and sends this data, in serial form, to the A1 card.

Interconnect card A3 contains rear connectors J1 and J2. The card provides interface between these rear
connectors and between the other cards in the DCP.

Rotary switch card A4 contains the rotary switches: DH SET, mode (HSI-ARC-MAP), and SEL/RNG. Con-
nections with card A5 pass through A4.

Pushbutton switch card A5 contains the pushbutton switches: RA TST, RDR, CRS XFR, CRS ACT, CRS
PRE, and BRG. Circuit card A5 also contains the lighting for the pushbuttons.

Autopilot annunciator data (24 inputs) from the flight control computer are input to auxiliary card A6. The
parallel inputs are buffered and converted into serial data for transmission to the DPU/MPU. Card A6 also
has a LIGHTING switch labeled 5V or 28V. This switch selects panel lighting from one of two input sources:
external +5 V dc or the internal +5 V dc generated from the +28-V dc input.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-32

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-14. DCP-85E Display Control Panel, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-33

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.4.7 DSP-85A Display Select Panel (DSP)

4.4.7.1 General Description

The primary function of the DSP-85A is to provide pilot control of the EFIS system. To accomplish this task,
the DSP-85A processor scans DSP front panel switches for pilot inputs and monitors autopilot annunciator
signals. After processing by the DSP, input data is then transferred to the DPU/MPU display computers via
a serial data link. Refer to Figure 4-15.

4.4.7.2 Card Descriptions

Processor card A1 inputs consist of: parallel rear connector strapping data, course and heading data, serial
switch position data from auxiliary card A5, and serial autopilot annunciator data from auxiliary card A5.
Shift registers on card A1 convert the parallel rear connector strapping data into serial information supplied
to the computer. The computer monitors the serial switch position data along with the course and heading
data. When a switch changes status the computer executes a routine to process the new data before trans-
mitting it. The computer also monitors the autopilot annunciator data but sends it out without preprocess-
ing.

Power supply card A2 converts an input of 28 V dc into –28 V dc, +15 V dc, +5 V dc, a power-up signal, and a
power-down signal. The power-up signal notifies the computer when the power supply is in its normal oper-
ating range. The power-down signal warns the computer of possible loss of power.

Shift registers on the A2 card are not used.

Interconnect card A3 contains rear connectors J1 and J2. Card A3 also provides interface between the other
cards and the rear connectors.

Pushbutton switch card A4 contains the front panel pushbutton switches along with pushbutton lighting.

Auxiliary card A5 inputs consist of: parallel switch position data from the DSP-85 front panel, data from the
course and heading optical encoders, parallel autopilot annunciator data, and a mux select line from the
computer. The optical decoder converts the digital pulses from the optical encoder into two signals: one indi-
cates the direction of rotation while the other shows the amount of rotation. The auxiliary card also contains
shift registers that convert the parallel autopilot annunciator data and front switch position information into
serial data for the computer. The parallel autopilot annunciator data uses 12-V logic and the shift registers
and multiplexer are powered by +12 V dc. The serial switch data uses 5-V logic and therefore is converted to
12-V logic before being applied to the multiplexer. The mux select line from the computer is also converted
into 12-V logic before being applied to the multiplexer. The mux select line from the computer selects to read
either the autopilot annunciator data or switch position data. The selected data is converted from 12-V levels
to 5-V logic before being applied to the computer.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-34

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-15. DSP-85A Display Select Panel, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-35

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.4.8 WXP-85( ) Weather Contr ol Panel (WXP)

The panel supplies all those functions necessary for the operation and control of the weather radar system.
This includes the following manual functions:

• RANGE selection
• MODE selection
• TILT control
• GAIN control
• Antenna stabilization (STB) disable selection
• Display hold (HLD) selection
• Target alert (TGT) function selection

In response to these manual control functions, the panel generates the various clocking, timing, and control
signals used throughout the radar system.

Figure 4-16 is a block diagram of the weather radar system using the WXP panel. It shows the major func-
tions in the panel. The antenna drive function generates the θA and θB antenna scan drive signals as well as
the three rt control signals; L/S’ (long/not-short transmit pulse), MT (modulator timing pulse), and PRF
(PRF clock pulse). In response to these signals, the rt generates the high energy pulse that is radiated by the
antenna. The received signal is collected by the antenna and directed to the receiver where it is processed
into three levels of video, representing three levels of return signal strength. The signal processing and stor-
age circuits process these signals into a binary word and store it in memory. The memory is organized so
that each memory cell corresponds to a certain segment of target area. Therefore, as the data is processed, it
is deposited into a memory location which, by virtue of its address, identifies that data with respect to range
and azimuth. The processing of data into the memory locations is done at a relatively slow rate because it
must be synchronous with the antenna scan.

The process of displaying the data, that is, reading it out of memory and writing it on the crt, is done at a
much higher rate. This high rate of data refresh makes possible a bright and continuous display. The video
output encoding circuits decode the stored binary word and encode it for proper color; level 1 is green, level 2
is yellow, and level 3 is red (except in MAP mode where level 1 and level 3 change to blue and magenta, re-
spectively). This data is sent, via a digital serial word bit stream, to the DPU or MPU for display on the
MFD or EFD’s.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-36

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-16. WXP-85( ) and Weather Radar System Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-37

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.4.9 RDP-300 Remote Data P rogrammer

Refer to Figure 4-17. Integrated circuit U1, an 8748 computer, scans the keyboard switch matrix to find a
pressed key. When a pressed key is found, the computer determines the code to be sent and places it on the
data bus. The computer also determines if the select key is one of the keys with automatic repeat.

This allows certain keys (PR, PF, LR, LF, BS, SP, BLK, period and dash) to repeat by holding the key down
instead of repeated pressings.

Integrated circuit U2 is a universal asynchronous receiver-transmitter of UART. Information on the data

bus is transferred to the UART when the computer switches the data strobe line low. The data is then con-
verted from parallel to serial and sent out through the serial out line. The serial output is buffered by two
cascaded inverts of U3. The transmission rate is controlled by the transmitter clock (TCP) line. This line op-
erates at 16 times the serial data rate. The transmitter clock line operates at 360 kHZ causing serial data to
be sent at 22.5 kHZ.

The transmitter clock for the UART comes from a monostable multivibrator, triggered by the 8748 computer
address latch enable (ALE) line. The monostable multivibrator is used to generate the necessary square-
wave output to operate the UART properly.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-38

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-17. RDP-300 Remote Data Programmer, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-39

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.4.10 CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit

Refer to Figure 4-18 for a detailed block diagram of the CEU-85. CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit operation is
controlled by an 8748 microcomputer U2. U2 contains the central processing unit and 1K × 8 words of ROM
program memory and 64 words of RAM data memory required to have a functional microcomputer. The
CEU-85 mode of operation is determined by the logic status of U2 T1 input. Application of power to the
CEU-85 from the MFD-85( ) (via the data jack) enables U1A to apply a logic 0 reset signal to U2 internal
master reset (MR) input. The reset signal causes the U2 internal operation program to examine the logic
status of the T1 input. Connecting a Pro Line II interface card connector J2 to CEU-85 J1 generates a logic 0
(ground) at the T1 input. With T1 grounded, U2’s internal operating software enables it to receive serial
data at the T0 input and transmit serial data from the P27 port output. The serial data is received and
transmitted at a 12.5-kilobaud rate. Connecting CEU-85 remote data plug to the MFD-85( ) leaves CEU-85
J1 open. Thus, the U2 T1 input is pulled to +5 V dc. With T1 at +5 V dc, the U2’s internal software enables a
22.5-kilobaud data rate. Also, transistor Q1 is forward biased by the logic 0 reset signal. The resulting cur-
rent flow through Q1 applies a logic 1 to the EEPROM’s WR inputs, preventing erroneous data write signals
that could accidentally change the EEPROM data. Microcomputer U2 stores checklist data in three 8K × 8
EEPROMs: U4, U5, and U6. The checklist address location data received from the computer is 16 bits long.
Bits 1 through 13 provide the physical memory address locations of each EEPROM. Bits 14 and 15 are used
as logic control signals by 3-line to 8-line decoder U3. The signals are decoded by U3 to enable a specific
EEPROM during the data read or write cycle.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-40

theory of operation 523-0773951

Figure 4-18. CEU-85 Checklist Entry Unit, Detailed Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-41

theory of operation 523-0773951

4.4.11 ADA-85 Air Data Adapte r

The operation of the ADA-85 can be viewed in terms of three major functions. These are shown in Figure
4-19. Most of the functions operate simultaneously on a time-shared basis; that is, the ADA-85 receives, de-
codes, stores, computes, etc, approximately every 3.4 ms for each Manchester serial data word received.

4.4.11.1 Input Circuit

The input circuit consists of a data receiver, data/clock recovery circuit, three 8-bit shift registers, the end-of-
word detector, and the receiver status register.

The function of the input circuit is to receive serial Manchester coded data and convert the data into parallel
data for the microprocessor. Manchester coded data is self-clocking, that is, 1 data bit contains both clock
and data information. The data received from the ADC-80( ) consists of 16 different 24-bit data words. Each
data word is updated approximately 17 times a second and each 24-bit data word is followed by a 12-bit si-
lence. The Manchester bus uses a shielded, twisted pair of wires, one wire high and the other a signal re-
turn. The driving source applies a signal to the high side wire while the signal return wire remains at
ground. The data receiver thus measures differently between them to convert the 2-wire Manchester data
into a single-ended signal that is sensed by the data/clock recovery circuit. The data/clock recovery circuit
separates the data to clock itself into the shift registers. The end-of-word detector monitors the separated
clock signal and triggers the receiver status register to interrupt the microprocessor after the last data bit is
received. The interrupt (air data received) signals the microprocessor that a new data word is in the shift
registers. The air data interrupt signal is maintained until the microprocessor reads the data in the shift
registers. The receiver status register monitors the data read process and when the last shift register is
read, the receiver status register is reset, removing the air data received interrupt signal.

4.4.11.2 Control Circuits

The control circuits consist of the microprocessor, address latch and ROM, heartbeat monitor, and power-on-
clear circuits. The microprocessor, address latch, and RAM provide the function of converting the air data
from the shift registers into commercial standard digital bus (CSDB) format air data. The heartbeat monitor
and power-on-clear circuits initiate and monitor microprocessor operation.

After initialization, the microprocessor is under control of the background (executive) software routine. This
routine monitors the external interrupt line from the receiver status register, monitors the internal software
timer interrupt that controls processing of received data and transmitting of CSDB data, and toggles the
heartbeat monitor input.

As stated in paragraph 4.4.12, the receiver status register interrupts the microcomputer after an air data
word is received. Upon receiving an air data received interrupt, the microprocessor reads the data in the
shift registers and temporarily stores the data in its internal registers. Next, the microprocessor tests the
data pad and label bits to determine what type of air data was received. If the data passes the test, it is
transferred into microprocessor RAM to await processing into CSDB data.

Figure 4-19. ADA-85 Air Data Adapter, Block Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-42

theory of operation 523-0773951

The processing of received data into CSDB data is controlled by the internal timer interrupt. This interrupt
occurs 20 times a second and calls a routine that processes received data into CSDB data and initiates
transmission of CSDB data. Refer to paragraph 4.4.12 for a description of CSDB data. In order to determine
what CSDB word to prepare for transmission, the timer interrupt routine keeps track of which CSDB data
words have been transmitted. To output CSDB data, the microprocessor transfers converted data to the
UART one byte at a time; by monitoring the UART, the microprocessor determines when to transfer another
data byte to the UART. After transferring a CSDB data word, the microprocessor returns to the background
routine.

As stated in paragraph 4.4.12, the power-on-clear circuit resets the microprocessor after initial application of
power or after a power interruption. The power-on-clear circuit also applies a reset signal if the microcom-
puter gets stuck in a continuous software loop. Periodically during program operation, the microprocessor
outputs a pulse to the heartbeat monitor. However, if the microprocessor gets stuck in an endless loop, the
pulse will not be sent. The heartbeat monitor senses the absence of the pulses and triggers the power-on-
clear circuit to reset the microprocessor.

4.4.11.3 Data Output Circuit

The data output circuit consists of the UART and differential line driver. The data output circuit provides
the function of converting parallel CSDB data from the microprocessor into CSDB serial data.

After power on, the UART is programmed by the microprocessor during initialization to transmit data re-
ceived in parallel format from the start bit, parity bit, and stop bit to each data byte and to transmit serial
data at a 12.5-kilobaud rate. The ADA-85 converts the received data words into seven different CSDB data
words.

To output CSDB data, the microprocessor transfers converted data to the UART 1 byte at a time; by moni-
toring the UART, the microprocessor determines when to transfer another data byte to the UART. CSDB
data is transmitted by the ADA-85 in a 6-byte-per-data-frame format. The data frames are transmitted in
byte sequence order with byte 0 being the address byte (data identification label), byte 1 being the status
byte, and bytes 2 through 5 being the data bytes. Each different data frame has a specific address label. It is
this label that all units connected to the CSDB bus sample to determine if the next data frame is to be proc-
essed or ignored. Prior to transmitting a data frame, the microprocessor transmits a sync frame. With the
data bits of each byte set to hex A5, the sync frame informs the other units on the CSDB that data is to be
transmitted. This allows the CSDB receiver in the receiving unit to synchronize to the forthcoming data
frame.

4.4.12 FMM-85 Fan Motor Moni tor (FMM)

The purpose of the FMM is to control an external annunciator which indicates if the fan cooling the EFIS
equipment is operating properly. The FMM mounts to the side of the cooling fan. Refer to Figure 4-20 for the
FMM-85 (-001) and to Figure 4-21 for the FMM-85 (-002) schematic diagrams.

Note

The FMM-85 (-001) is compatible with the following tube-axial fan: Rotron model number MD28D1
(CPN 009-1965-030). The fan (-002) sensor signal is compatible with the following tube-axial fan: Ro-
tron model number 011126 (CPN 009-0271-010).

The fan motor provides a fan sensor signal to FMM-85 J1-3. The fan sensor signal is a positive going signal
with frequency and amplitude being directly proportional to the fan motor RPM. The FMM-85 (-001) is de-
signed to operate with Rotron MD28D1 tube-axial fan that has a nominal speed of 3150 RPMs which trans-
lates to a fan sensor output of approximately 55 Hz. The FMM-85 (-002) is designed to operate with a Rotron

Revised 12 May 1999 4-43

theory of operation 523-0773951

011126 tube-axial fan that has a nominal speed of 18,000 RPM, which translates to a fan sensor output of
approximately 780 Hz.

The FMM-85 (-001) is designed to indicate a fan underspeed condition when the fan motor RPM drops under
approximately 1818 RPM, which is a fan sensor output of 30 Hz. The 30-Hz signal is sensed at J1-3 and ap-
plied to a retriggerable monostable multivibrator. The trip level is set by the RC circuit of R4 and C5 tied to
the trigger input of monostable multivibrator U2. The RC time constant of this monostable multivibrator is
not retriggered before its timeout period and its Q output switches to logic 0. Thus NAND gate U1B is not
able to retrigger multivibrator U2B.The timeout period of U2B is approximately 5 seconds. This wait period
ensures that fan motor speed is staying below 1818 RPM and that an aircraft power surge did not cause fan
motor speed to be reduced. After the 5-second wait, relay K1 is deenergized and applies a ground to light a
fan failure annunciator. FMM-85 (-002) operation is identical to FMM-85 (-001) operation except U2A is set
to detect fan motor RPM of less than 3075 RPM which is a fan sensor signal of approximately 134 Hz. U2A
timeout wait is set to 3.74 ms, one-half of 134 Hz period.

A self-test signal (ground) is applied to J1-4 to simulate the loss of a fan motor. This ground energizes relay
K2 which opens the fan sensor circuit. In approximately five seconds the RC circuit of R5 and C6 times out
and turns off Q2. This causes relay K1 to deenergize which lights an external annunciator to indicate a fan
motor failure.

Revised 12 May 1999 4-44

theory of operation 523-0773951

652-8117-001-A (1)

Figure 4-20. FMM-85 (-001) Fan Monitor Module, Simplified Schematic Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-45

theory of operation 523-0773951

652-8117-002-B (2)

Figure 4-21. FMM-85 (-002) Fan Monitor Module, Simplified Schematic Diagram

Revised 12 May 1999 4-46

523-0773952-003118
3rd Edition, 12 May 1999

EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)

Electronic Flight Instrument Systems

Maintenance
Table of Contents

Paragraph Page

5.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2.1 EFIS Brightness Test .................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Routine Control and Display Cleaning ......................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.1 Test Equipment.............................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.2 Power Requirements...................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.4 TESTING/TROUBLESHOOTING.......................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.5 BITS MODE SELF-TEST GUIDE ........................................................................................................................ 5-18
5.5.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.5.2 BITS Mode.................................................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.6 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAMS............................................................................................................................ 5-126

NOTICE: This section replaces first revision dated 29 September 1993.

List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.

Page No Issue
* Title ......................................... 12 May 99
* List of Effective Pages............. 12 May 99
* 5-1 thru 5-128 .......................... 12 May 99

RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF

Record of Revisions REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER REV REVISION INSERTION SB NUMBER

NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED NO DATE DATE/BY INCLUDED

1st Ed 28 Jan 87 None

2nd Ed 14 Jun 89 None

1 29 Sep 93 None

3rd Ed 12 May 99 None

section V
maintenance

5.1 GENERAL

This section provides procedures for testing and troubleshooting the EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)
Electronic Flight Instrument Systems. The test procedures provide fault isolation down to a unit while the
system is installed in the aircraft. Faulty units can then be tested and repaired by using the bench proce-
dures given in the associated unit instruction books.

5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHED ULE

Collins EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) maintenance requirements are ON CONDITION. Do not remove EFIS

units from the aircraft unless repair is required. The following paragraphs describe procedures for a display
brightness test and general cleaning instructions for Collins Avionics cockpit equipment.

5.2.1 EFIS Brightness Test

Perform a brightness test on each EFD-85/86 (EADI and EHSI) and the MFD-85( ) at approximately 5000
hours of aircraft operation since the last brightness test, or any time the display brightness seems question-
able. All exchanged and repaired units have a brightness test routinely done at the service center.

Measure the brightness of each EFIS display using the Minolta LS-100 Luminance Meter 1° equipped with
the Minolta 1804-741 close-up lens, or the Minolta Luminance Meter 1A° equipped with the Minolta 6031-
530 close-up lens. The (new) Minolta LS-100 Luminance Meter 1° is available for purchase at Minolta cam-
era dealers.

Note

The aircraft cockpit must be in low ambient light, such as inside a hangar, to do the EFIS brightness
measurements. To do the measurement while the aircraft is on the ramp in sunlight, the cockpit
windows must be covered with an opaque cloth to lower the ambient light level.

a. Turn on power to the EFIS system. Wait 15 minutes for the EFIS displays to stabilize.
b. Select and set up the display to be checked.
EFD Display Setup
Push and hold the pilot’s or copilot’s EFIS TEST button and push the RA TST button on the DCP (or DH
SET TST button on the DSP) for the same side, to turn on the EFIS test mode for the EFDs. Release the
EFIS TEST button. Push the RA TST button (or DH SET TST) two more times to select the calibration
mode. The calibration mode shows page numbers in white in the upper right corner of the display. Turn
the DH SET knob on the DCP (or DSP) to select page 15. Page 15 shows an all-brown screen.
MFD Display Setup
Push and hold the pilot’s EFIS TEST button and push the copilot’s RA TST button on the DCP (or DH
SET TST button on the DSP), to turn on the EFIS test mode for the MFD. Release the EFIS TEST but-
ton. Push the RA TST button (or DH SET TST) three more times to select the calibration mode. The

Revised 12 May 1999 5-1

maintenance 523-0773952

calibration mode shows page numbers in white in the upper right corner of the display. Turn the DH
SET knob on the DCP (or DSP) to select page 15. Page 15 shows an all-brown screen.
c. Set the display brightness controls for maximum crt brightness.
Note

Do step d (below) if using the Minolta LS-100 Luminance meter. Otherwise, skip to step e.

d. Set up the Minolta LS-100 Luminance meter as follows:

1. With the LS-100 Luminance meter power turned off, set the following parameters:
PARAMETER VALUE
RESPONSE SLOW
CALIBRATION VARI
MEASURING MODE ABS
2. Turn on the meter power.
3. The meter display should show C.C.F. on the left side and fL on the right side. If cd/m shows on the
right side, remove the battery cover from the top of the meter and push the switch to fL (footlam-
bert). Replace the battery cover.
4. If PEAK shows on the display, turn it off as follows. Push and hold the F button and push the
PEAK/CONT button. CAL shows on the display while the meter is changing.
5. If LUMI shows on the display, turn it off as follows. Push the F button and the C.C.F./LUMI button
simultaneously. Repeat until (only) C.C.F. shows on the left side of the display.
6. Enter a color-correction factor into the luminance meter. If the display has an all-brown screen, the
factor is 1.246. If the display has an all-red screen, the factor is 1.052. Enter this factor as follows.
Push the C.C.F./LUMI button to show the stored color-correction factor. To change this value, push
the C.C.F./LUMI button until the arrow points at the digit to be changed. Push and hold the F but-
ton, then push the UP arrow to change this digit. Repeat until each digit is set to the correct value.
To save the color-correction factor in the meters’ memory, push and hold the F button and switch the
CALIBRATION button from VARI to PRESET and then back to VARI. The display then shows CAL
and then C.C.F. and fL.
e. At 1.5 to 2 feet from the face of the EFIS display to be tested, direct the luminance meter lens toward the
center of the display. Adjust the luminance meter focus or the measurement distance for a clear image of
the all-brown or all-red display. Push and hold trigger for luminance reading. The luminance reading
must be at least 9.0 footlambert. If the reading is below the minimum brightness value, replace the
EFD/MFD.
Note

Perform the brightness measurement with the meter perpendicular to the EFIS display surface
within ±15 degrees. If this angle is increased, the luminance measurements will not be accurate.

f. To exit the EFIS test mode, push and hold the RA TST button on the DCP (or DH SET TST knob on the
DSP) for approximately two seconds. The EFIS displays return to normal operation. Reset the display
brightness controls to normal crt brightness.
g. Record the results of the brightness test in the aircraft logbook or other permanent aircraft maintenance
record.

5.2.2 Routine Control and Dis play Cleaning

The following cleaning instructions apply to the exposed portions of Collins Avionics equipment located in
aircraft cockpits. This includes the following:

• Control panels

Revised 12 May 1999 5-2

maintenance 523-0773952

• Instrument bezels
• CRT display faces
• Plastic display faces

Caution

Do not spray or pour cleaners directly onto avionics equipment. Spraying or pouring the cleaner may
result in excessive fluid entering openings around buttons, switches, knobs, and display bezels.
Do not use soap and water mixtures for cleaning. Soap and water mixtures that flow into openings
around switches, knobs, buttons, and display bezels may leave a soap residue that may affect the op-
eration of the equipment.
Do not use brushes for cleaning. Brushes may leave scratches and/or remove painted markings.
Do not use solvents on avionics equipment. Solvents may remove paint and the special antireflective
coatings on the face of CRTs.

Clean Collins Avionics equipment with any ordinary glass cleaner and a soft lint free or low lint cloth or pho-
tographic lens cleaning tissue. For hard to remove fingerprints and residues use a mixture of 50% isopropyl
alcohol and 50% glass cleaner. Apply the cleaner to the cloth or tissue then wipe the surface to be cleaned.

5.2.2.1 Additional Cleaning Ins tructions for CRT and Plastic Display Faces

When cleaning displays, be careful not to damage the antireflective coating on crt faces and not to scratch
plastic display faces. Make sure that the cleaning tissue/cloth is flat (not creased) to reduce pressure points
that could cause streaking or scratching of coatings or plastics. If a cleaning cloth is used, make sure it is
soft and practically lint free. Some cloth materials can damage coatings and scratch plastics.

To clean dust and light fingerprints from the display face, wipe the display face with a photographic lens tis-
sue or a soft cloth.

To remove fingerprints or any residue from a display face, apply the glass cleaner to the lens tissue or soft
cloth and rub the wet tissue/cloth around the display face to remove the fingerprints or residue. After the
display face is clean, use a clean dry tissue to remove excess cleaning fluid and streaks.

5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS

5.3.1 Test Equipment

Table 5-1 lists the test equipment required to perform the EFIS test procedures. Equivalent test equipment
can be substituted for that listed.

Table 5-1. Test Equipment Required.

EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS DESIRED

Collins 972Q-4 VOR/ILS/MB ramp test Must have provisions for testing the localizer signal to 0.155 DDM and the glideslope
set (CPN 622-2211-002) or equivalent signal to 0.175 DDM. These modulation levels produce 2-dot indications on localizer and
glideslope deviation displays.
Collins CTS-9 Breakout Box Test Set The CTS-9 is compatible with Thinline full-height 160 pin connectors. Recommended for
(CPN 622-6720-001) any EFIS system troubleshooting that requires the use of a breakout box.
Multimeter Fluke 8010A, 3-1/2 digit accuracy. Measure AC and DC voltages.
Oscilloscope Tektronix 455, 2235, 2236, dc to 10 MHz. Measure serial logic levels.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-3

maintenance 523-0773952

5.3.2 Power Requirements

All power required to perform the system tests and troubleshooting is provided by the aircraft in which the
system is installed.

5.4 TESTING/TROUBLESHO OTING

Aircraft downtime may be reduced if an inoperative unit is quickly identified. An EFIS quick-check trouble-
shooting chart is provided in Figure 5-1. Use this chart before performing the test procedures in either Table
5-2 or Table 5-3. The test procedures in Table 5-2 are used to help isolate a defective unit in the EFIS-
85B(13)/86B(13) system. The test procedures in Table 5-3 are used to help isolate a defective unit in the
EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) system. The tests are written around a 5-tube system.

When more than one EADI and EHSI is connected to the system, they can be used to cross-check the outputs
of the DPU-85H Display Processor Unit (DPU). If both EADI’s or EHSI’s connected to the system give the
same erroneous indication, the DPU is probably at fault. However, if only one indicator gives an erroneous
indication, that particular indicator is probably defective. Each aircraft has reversionary switching wired
into the interconnect. Refer to the Flight Manual Supplement for the aircraft in question. Use the reversion-
ary and cross-switching information found there to help isolate a fault to either the display (EFD, MFD) or
to the driving source (DPU, MPU). Use the block diagrams (Figure 5-3 through Figure 5-8) found in para-
graph 5.6 aid in understanding system operation.

Figure 5-1. EFIS Quick-Check Troubleshooting Chart

Revised 12 May 1999 5-4

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

1.0 POWER UP
Connect the aircraft battery and apply power to the flight
control system, radio altimeter system, navigation receivers,
DME receiver, glideslope receiver, AHRS, and EFIS system.

1.1 Verify that EADI AND EHSI pictures appear on each side.

Note

The EADI attitude and EHSI heading displays will be

random but should be steady.
2.0 DCP-85/CHP-85 OPERATION

Note

Unless otherwise specified, the steps in this section refer

to one side only but should be completed on each side.
2.1 Intensity
Adjust DCP-85 DIM intensity control. Verify that it con-
trols the brightness of the EADI and EHSI.
2.2 Decision Height

2.2.1 Adjust DCP-85 DH SET knob.

2.2.2 Verify that it controls the DH display in lower right corner Each click of knob should change displayed DH by one foot
of EADI. First turn knob slowly and observe displayed DH, when turned slow and by larger steps when turned fast.
then turn knob fast.
2.2.3 Verify DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 feet.

2.3 HSI Mode

2.3.1 Set DCP-85 mode switch to HSI position and verify. A conventional compass rose appears on EHSI.
2.3.2 Set DCP-85 mode switch to ARC position and verify on An expanded compass display appears.
EHSI.

2.3.3 Select RDR on MFD-85A. Set DCP mode switch to MAP Expanded compass display remains. Verify radar test pat-
position. Set WXP-85( ) to TEST and verify on EHSI. tern. Message in lower left on EHSI reads same as radar
mode selected.
2.3.4 Return DCP-85 mode switch to HSI position.
2.4 Active Course Selection

2.4.1 Initial Setup

a. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button twice to remove any
preset course annunciator displayed on EHSI.
b. Push DCP-85 BRG button twice to remove any bearing
source annunciator displayed on EHSI.

2.4.2 Active Course Menu

a. Verify that an active green course annunciator is dis-
played at left of center on EHSI.
b. Push DCP-85 CRS ACT button and verify on EHSI. The active course annunciator changes to white inside a
white box.
c. Rotate the DCP-85 SEL knob. Verify three possible VOR 1, VOR 2, and LRN 1 appear in white boxes (if system
choices (VOR 1, VOR 2, and LRN 1) appear annunci- is strapped for all sources).
ated on EHSI.
d. Select VOR 1 in the box.
e. Push DCP-85 CRS ACT button. Verify annunciation VOR 1 box is deleted and VOR 1 annunciator changes to
on EHSI. green.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-5

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4.3 Preset Course Menu

a. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button. Verify on EHSI dis- A white preset course annunciator inside a white box ap-
play. pears at lower right side of EHSI.
b. Rotate DCP-85 SEL knot. Verify that up to three pos- VOR 1, VOR 2, and LRN 1 appear in a white box.
sible choices (VOR 1, VOR2, and LRN 1) appear an-
nunciated on EHSI.
c. Select VOR 2 in the box.
d. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button. Verify annunciation on The VOR 2 box is deleted and VOR 2 annunciator appears
EHSI. in cyan.
e. Verify new course arrow that appears on EHSI. A dashed cyan course arrow appears on EHSI.
f. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button twice. The cyan course arrow and its annunciator are blanked.
g. Push the CRS PRE button twice. The course arrow returns.

2.4.4 Course Selection (Pilot and Copilot)

a. Push CHP-85 CRS CTL button repeatedly. Verify that the octagon symbol alternately points to the ac-
tive course annunciator and to the preset course annuncia-
tor.
b. Place the cursor on the active course annunciator. Ro- Verify that the green course arrow on the EHSI rotates and
tate CHP-85 CRS knob. that the EHSI digital course counter tracks the arrow.
c. Push CHP-85 CRS CTL button to position the cursor
to the preset annunciator.
d. Rotate the CHP-85 CRS knob. Verify that the dashed cyan preset course arrow rotates.
e. Push CRS DIR button. Verify course arrow syncs to north or direct to VOR station
if present and is valid.

2.4.5 Course Transfer

a. Set the course arrows so they are not superimposed
and note their location and annunciations.
b. Push DCP-85 CRS XFR button. Verify that: 1. Preset course arrow and annunciator are deleted.
2. Active course arrow rotates to the position previously
held by the preset arrow.
3. Active course annunciator is changed to the source that
had been in preset.
c. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button twice. Verify that pre-
set course arrow appears in location previously held by
the active arrow and the preset annunciator is set to
the previously active source.
d. Push DCP-85 CRS PRE button twice to delete the pre-
set course arrow.

2.4.6 Bearing Pointer Select (if enabled)

a. Push the DCP-85 BRG button. Verify that a white bearing annunciator appears inside a
white box in lower left corner of EHSI below BRG label.
b. Rotate DCP-85 SEL knob. Verify that up to six possible bearing sources appear in the
box. (Straps for airplane)
c. Select VOR 1. Push DCP-85 BRG button. Verify that the white box is deleted and that the VOR 1
bearing annunciator and bearing pointer appear in ma-
genta.
d. Push BRG button twice. Verify that the magenta bearing pointer and annunciator
are deleted.

2.4.7 Heading Select (Pilot)

a. Rotate CHP-85 HDG knob. Verify that the magenta heading bug rotates on pilot’s
EHSI.
b. Push HDG SYNC button. Verify heading bug syncs under lubber line.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-6

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4.8 Data Select (Copilot)

a. Push CHP-85 NAV switch. Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI, and label changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
---> (for wind direction).
b. Push the ET button reaptedly. Verify that sequential pushes of the ET button starts, stops,
and clears the elapsed timer.

2.4.9 Heading Select (Copilot)

Rotate CHP-85 HDG knob. Verify that the magenta heading bug rotates on pilot’s
EHSI.

2.4.10 Data Select (Copilot)

a. Push CHP-85 NAV switch. Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI, and label changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
---> (for wind direction).
b. Push the ET button reaptedly. Verify that sequential pushes of the ET button starts, stops,
and clears the elapsed timer.
2.4.11 Radio Altimeter
Push DCP-85 RA TST. Verify that altimeter display goes to 50 feet and DH ap-
pears.

3.0 REVERSIONARY MODES OF OPERATION (IF APPLICABLE)

3.1 EADI/EHSI Composite Display

Note

The following reversionary modes are selected at the pilot/copilot switch panel. Verify that all switches are in normal
(NORM) position before the following steps are taken. These switches may be labeled differently for various airplanes.
3.1.1 Pilot’s Switch Panel
a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a composite display is pre-
sented on the EADI.
b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the EHSI shows a composite
display.
c. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.

3.1.2 Copilot’s Switch Panel

a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a composite display is pre-
sented on the EADI.
b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the EHSI shows a composite
display.
c. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.

3.2 DCP XFER (Pedestal)

a. DCP XFER switch to no. 1. Open DCP 2 circuit Pilot and copilot displays are controlled by no. 1 DCP. Dis-
breaker. play brightness for copilot’s side remains under control of
no. 2 DCP. FCS mode annunciation is lost for no. 2 side.
XDCP will annunciate on EADI.
b. Reset DCP 2 circuit breaker. Select DCP XFER switch Normal presentations return. XDCP annunciation disap-
to NORM. pears.
c. DCP XFER switch to no. 2. Open DCP 1 circuit Pilot and copilot displays are controlled by no. 2 DCP. Dis-
breaker. play brightness for pilot’s side remains under control of no.
1 DCP. FCS mode annunciation is lost for no. 1 side. XDCP
will annunciate on EADI.
d. Reset DCP 1 circuit breaker. Select DCP XFER switch Normal presentations return. XDCP annunciation disap-
to NORM. pears.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-7

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

3.3 MPU Drive Transfer (Pedestal)

a. Open DPU 1 circuit breaker. Pilot’s EADI and EHSI go blank.
b. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 1. Pilot’s EADI and EHSI displays are restored and controlled
by no. 1 DCP. The MFD has EHSI display.
c. Reset CPU 1 circuit breaker. Select MPU DRV switch Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
to NORM.
d. Open DPU 2 circuit breaker. Copilot’s EADI and EHSI go blank.
e. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 2. Copilot’s EADI and EHSI displays are restored and con-
trolled by no. 2 DCP. The MFD has EHSI display.
f. Reset DPU 2 circuit breaker. Return MPU DRV switch Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
to NORM.

4.0 DATA TRANSFER SWITCHING

4.1 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources

as selected on the pilot’s switch panel:
a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Pilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 1 AHRS.
b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE. Pilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 2 AHRS. HDG 2 is
annunciated in yellow on pilot’s EHSI.
c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Pilot’s display attitude is supplied by no. 1 AHRS.
d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE. Pilot’s displayed attitude is supplied by no. 2 AHRS. ATT2
is annunciated in yellow on pilot’s EADI.
e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated green on pilot’s EFIS display. VOR de-
viation is displayed as angular. This switch is functional
only if VOR is the navigational data source selected by the
pilot.
f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation data source, deviation will
be linear if a valid DME is present and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the pilot’s EHSI display. If the DME
is lost or DME HOLD is selected, the LIN annunciation on
the EFIS display is replaced by ANG which will flash for
approximately 10 seconds, then it remains steady.

4.2 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources

as selected on the copilot’s switch panel:
a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Copilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 2 AHRS.
b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE. Copilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 1 AHRS. HDG 1
is annunciated in yellow on copilot’s EHSI.
c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Copilot’s display attitude is supplied by no. 2 AHRS.
d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE. Copilot’s displayed attitude is supplied by no. 1 AHRS.
ATT1 is annunciated in yellow on copilot’s EADI.
e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated green on copilot’s EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular. This switch is functional
only if VOR is the navigational data source selected by the
copilot.
f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation data source, deviation will
be linear if a valid DME is present and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the copilot’s EHSI display. If the
DME is lost or DME HOLD is selected, the LIN annuncia-
tion on the EFIS display is replaced by ANG which will
flash for approximately 10 seconds, then it remains steady.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-8

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

5.0 EFIS TEST SWITCH

5.1 Pilot’s TEST Switch

Note

Pilot’s EFIS TEST switch is inhibited in flight.

a. Push pilot’s EFIS TEST switch. The pilot’s EFIS TEST switch normally places the pilot’s
displays and the MFD in test mode. In test the EADI pitch
and roll attitudes are altered by 10 degrees nose up and 10
degrees roll right, and 20 degrees are added to displayed
heading. A red TEST will appear in center of EADI and
EHSI.
Yellow comparator flags PIT, ROL, and HDG will appear on
both the pilot’s and copilot’s EADI and EHSI.
If the EFIS TEST switch is held for four seconds or longer,
all flags associated with the displays will be displayed.
b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard operation.
c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN) Comparator indications should reset.
which is located on pilot’s annunciator panel.

5.2 Copilot’s TEST Switch

Note

Copilot’s EFIS TEST switch is inhibited in flight.

a. Push copilot’s EFIS TEST switch. The copilot’s EADI pitch and roll attitudes are altered by 10
degrees nose down and 10 degrees roll left, and 20 degrees
are subtracted from displayed heading.
Yellow comparator flags PIT, ROL, and HDG will appear on
the copilot’s EADI and EHSI display.
If the EFIS TEST switch is held for four seconds or longer,
all flags associated with the displays will be displayed.
b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard operation.
c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN). Comparator indications should reset.

6.0 INTERFACE TESTS

6.1 VOR
a. Apply ac and dc power to the VOR radio.
b. Turn on VOR signal generator and select 0°.
c. Select VOR 1 as the active course and bearing pointer Verify that the NAV flag is removed from the display and
on the EHSI. that the bearing pointer points to 0°.
d. Rotate the course arrow. Verify that the deviation bar centers at 180° with a FROM
indication and at 0° with a TO indication.
e. Select additional radials using the signal generator. Verify that the bearing pointer points to the radial selected
and that the deviation bar centers with a TO indication at
the radial selected.

6.2 Localizer
a. Apply power to VOR/LOC receiver.
b. Select localizer mode on the VOR/LOC signal genera-
tor.
c. Select an appropriate LOC frequency.

(Cont)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-9

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

6.2 d. Select VOR 1 as the active course on the EHSI. Verify that NAV flag is removed from the display. Verify
(Cont) that the runway symbol and deviation scale appear at the
bottom of the EADI and that the VOR changes to LOC.
e. Select zero deviation on the LOC signal generator. Verify that the runway symbol on the EADI and course de-
viation bar on the EHSI are centered.
f. Select left deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and deviation bar deflect to the left.
g. Select right deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and deviation bar deflect to the
right.

6.3 Glideslope
a. Apply power to glideslope receiver.
b. Select the glideslope mode on the signal generator.
c. Select the glideslope deviations available on the signal Verify that the glideslope pointer on the EADI and EHSI
generator. track the selected deviation.

6.4 Radio Altitude

a. Apply power to radio altimeter.
b. Select a localizer frequency. Verify that the runway symbol appears at the bottom of the
EADI.
c. Set the DH counter at the lower right corner of EADI Verify that the DH annunciator in the center of the EADI is
(with DH knob on DCP-85) to 200 feet. on when radio altitude is below 200 feet and is off above 200
feet.
Verify that runway symbol begins to expand when the radio
altitude goes below 200 feet, and that it touches the bottom
of the airplane symbol when the radio altitude is 0 feet.

6.5 DME
a. Apply power to DME radio.
b. Turn on DME signal generator.
c. Select an appropriate frequency.
d. Select various distances on the signal generator. Verify that the DME distance readout appears in upper left
corner of the EHSI.

6.6 ADF
a. Select ADF 1 as the bearing pointer on the EHSI.
b. Select various radio stations. Verify that the ADF pointer on the EHSI points to the
proper bearings.

7.0 MFD OPERATION

Warning

The area within the scan arc and within 5 metres (15 feet) of an operating WXR-300 Weather Radar System constitutes
a hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the antenna
might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA Advisory Circular
20-68B provides additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground operation of airborne
weather radar.

7.1 Radar Mode

a. Push RDR button on MFD-85A. MFD-85A will display the mode selected on the WXP-85( )
panel (see below).
OFF — system deenergized
STBY — system energized, but no transmitter output
TEST — test pattern, but no transmitter output
b. Push RDR button again. Radar display will be deleted.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-10

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

7.2 NAV Mode

a. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. NAV data menu will appear.
b. Push MFD-85A line select key.
c. Push line select key next to sources desired to be dis- Source color will change to green.
played.
d. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. Display will change to sector display with NAV info selected
on display. If VOR is selected on pilot’s or copilot’s EHSI,
course lines may be moved with CRS controls on CHP-86. If
VOR info valid, CRS and station ident for no. 1 will appear
on bottom left and no. 2 on bottom right.
LRN waypoint will appear in proper position. CRS to way-
point will appear below VOR 1 CRS for LRN 1 and below
VOR 2 CRS for LRN 2. (Only two NAV’s can be displayed at
a time.)

7.3 Remote Data

a. Push RMT button on MFD-85A. Source menu will appear.
b. Push line select key of source desired. Data will appear if available. If no data is available, after
five seconds NO DATA AVAILABLE will appear.

7.4 MFD/HSI Mode

a. Select HSI switch to ON MFD on pilot’s switch panel. Pilot’s HSI presentation will duplicate on the MFD-85A.
b. Select HSI switch to NORM on pilot’s switch panel. Normal MFD-85A display returns.

8.0 EFIS FAN MONITORS

8.1 EFIS Fan Fail
a. Push and hold annunciator test switch in master After 8 seconds, pilot EFD and DPU FAN, copilot EFD and
warning panel. DPU FAN, and pedestal MFD and MPU FAN annunciators
illuminate amber.
b. Release annunciator test switch. Annunciators extinguish.

9.0 LRN APPR MODE INHIBIT CHECK

9.1 Setup Procedure

a. Set LRN-85 into SIMULATE FLIGHT mode. Set up a
waypoint 50 to 100 miles directly in front of the air-
plane.
b. Select LRN for display on pilot and copilot EFIS.
c. Select NAV mode on both mode select panels.
d. Engage the autopilot.

9.2 On LRN CDU set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi left of DTRK. Course deviation bar should move left 2 dots. V-bars com-
mand a 20-degree left bank. Autopilot moves control wheel
for a left bank.

9.3 On LRN CDU set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi right of Course deviation bar should deflect right 2 dots. V-bars
DTRK. command a 20-degree right bank. Autopilot moves control
wheel for a right bank.
9.4 Deselect LRN from copilot’s EFIS.
9.5 Select APPR mode on pilot’s mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns control wheel to neutral.

9.6 Deselect APPR mode on pilot’s mode select panel. Deselect

LRN from pilot’s EFIS.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-11

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-2. EFIS-85B(13)/86B(13) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

9.7 Select LRN on copilot’s EFIS and press AP XFER on Copilot’s course deviation bar should be 2 dots to the right.
autopilot panel. V-bars are commanding 20-degree right bank. Autopilot
moves control wheel for a right bank.

9.8 Select APPR mode on copilot’s mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns control wheel to neutral.

9.9 Deselect APPR mode. Deselect LRN from EFIS. Press AP

XFER on autopilot panel. Disengage autopilot.

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

1.0 POWER UP
Connect the aircraft battery and apply power to the flight
control system, radio altimeter system, navigation receivers,
DME receiver, glideslope receiver, AHRS, and EFIS system.

1.1 Verify that EADI and EHSI pictures appear on each side.

Note

The EADI attitude and EHSI heading displays will be random but should be steady.

2.0 DSP-85A OPERATION

Note

Unless otherwise specified, the steps in this section refer to one side only but should be completed on each side.

2.1 Intensity
Turn external EADI DIM and EHSI DIM controls. Verify
that EADI and EHSI brightness is controlled.

2.2 Decision Height

2.2.1 Adjust DSP-85A DH SET knob.

2.2.2 Verify that it controls the DH display in lower right corner Knob rotation should change displayed DH by one foot
of EADI. First turn knob slowly and observe displayed DH, when turned slow and by larger steps when turned fast.
then turn knob fast.

2.2.3 Verify DH SET range is 0 to 999 feet. DH flashes at 0 feet.

2.2.4 Push TST pushbutton (part of DH SET knob) and verify

that both radio altitude and DH SET values are displayed
on EADI. Release TST pushbutton.

2.3 Rose Mode

2.3.1 Set DSP-85A FORMAT switch to ROSE position and verify A conventional compass rose appears on EHSI.
on EHSI.

2.3.2 Set DSP-85A FORMAT switch to APPR and ENR positions An expanded compass display appears.
and verify on EHSI.
2.3.3 Return DSP-85A FORMAT switch to ROSE position.

2.4 Active Course Selection

2.4.1 Initial Setup

a. Push DSP-85A 2ND CRS button to remove any preset
course annunciator displayed on EHSI.
b. Rotate DSP-85A BRG knob to OFF position to remove
any bearing source annunciator displayed on EHSI.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-12

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

2.4.2 Active Course Menu

a. Verify that an active green course annunciator is dis-
played at left of center on EHSI.
b. Rotate DSP-85A CRS knob to each position. Verify dif- Only those navigation sources enabled by interconnect
ferent navigation sources are displayed on the EHSI. strapping will be shown as possible selections.

2.4.3 Preset Course Menu

a. Push DSP 2ND CRS button. Verify on EHSI display. A dual dashed shift course arrow appears and a navigation
sensor is annunciated at the left center of the display.
b. Continue pushing DSP 2ND CRS button and verify dif-
ferent navigation sensors are displayed and annunci-
ated.

2.4.4 Bearing Pointer and Heading Select (Pilot)

a. Rotate DSP BRG switch to all positions. Verify that magenta bearing pointer is displayed and that
navigation annunciators appear in the lower left of the
EHSI below BRG label.
b. Rotate DSP HDG knob. Verify that the magenta heading bug rotates on pilot’s
EHSI.
c. Push DSP HDG SYNC button. Verify heading bug syncs under lubber line.
d. Set DSP BRG switch to OFF. Verify that the bearing pointer and annunciator are deleted.

2.4.5 Data Select (Pilot)

a. Push DSP NAV DTA pushbutton. Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI, and label changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
---> (for wind direction).
b. Verify that sequential pushes of the external ET but-
ton starts, stops, and clears the elapsed timer.

2.4.6 Heading Select (Copilot)

Rotate DSP HDG knot. Verify that the magenta heading bug rotates on EHSI.

2.4.7 Data Select (Copilot)

a. Push DSP NAV DTA switch. Verify that dashes appear or 00.00 appears in upper right
corner of EHSI, and label changes from ET, TTG, GSP, and
---> (for wind direction).
b. Verify that sequential pushes of the ET button starts,
stops, and clears the elapsed timer.

2.4.8 Radio Altimeter

Push DSP RA TST. Verify that altimeter display goes to 50 feet (for ALT-50/55)
and DH appears if DH SET value exceeds the test altitude.

3.0 REVERSIONARY MODES OF OPERATION (IF APPLICABLE)

3.1 EADI/EHSI Composite Display

Note

The following reversionary modes are selected at the pilot/copilot switch panel. Verify that all switches are in normal
(NORM) position before the following steps are taken. These switches may be labeled differently for various airplanes.

3.1.1 Pilot’s Switch Panel

a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a composite display is pre-
sented on the EADI.
b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the EHSI shows a composite
display.
c. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-13

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1.2 Copilot’s Switch Panel

a. Select CMPST switch to ADI. EHSI display is blanked and a composite display is pre-
sented on the EADI.
b. Select CMPST switch to HSI. EADI will now blank while the EHSI shows a composite
display.
c. Select CMPST switch to center position. Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.

3.2 DSP XFER (Pedestal)

a. DSP XFER switch to no. 1. Open DSP 2 circuit Pilot and copilot displays are controlled by no. 1 DSP. Dis-
breaker. play brightness for copilot’s side remains under control of
no. 2 DSP. FCS mode annunciation is lost for no. 2 side.
XDSP will annunciate on EADI.
b. Reset DSP 2 circuit breaker. Select DSP XFER switch Normal presentations return. XDSP annunciation disap-
to NORM. pears.
c. DSP XFER switch to no. 2. Open DSP 1 circuit Pilot and copilot displays are controlled by no. 2 DSP. Dis-
breaker. play brightness for pilot’s side remains under control of no.
1 DSP. FCS mode annunciation is lost for no. 1 side. XDSP
will annunciate on EADI.
d. Reset DSP 1 circuit breaker. Select DSP XFER switch Normal presentations return. XDSP annunciation disap-
to NORM. pears.

3.3 MPU Drive Transfer (Pedestal)

a. Open DPU 1 circuit breaker. Pilot’s EADI and EHSI go blank.
b. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 1. Pilot’s EADI and EHSI displays are restored and controlled
by no. 1 DSP. The MFD has ND (EHSI) display.
c. Reset DPU 1 circuit breaker. Select MPU DRV switch Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
to NORM.
d. Open DPU 2 circuit breaker. Copilot’s EADI and EHSI go blank.
e. Set MPU DRV switch to no. 2. Copilot’s EADI and EHSI displays are restored and con-
trolled by no. 2. DSP. The MFD has ND (EHSI) display.
f. Reset DPU 2 circuit breaker. Return MPU DRV switch Normal EADI and EHSI presentations return.
to NORM.

4.0 DATA TRANSFER SWITCHING

4.1 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources

as selected on the pilot’s switch panel:
a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Pilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 1 AHRS.
b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE. Pilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 2 AHRS. HDG 2 is
annunciated in yellow on pilot’s EHSI.
c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Pilot’s display attitude is supplied by no. 1 AHRS.
d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE. Pilot’s displayed attitude is supplied by no. 2 AHRS. ATT2
is annunciated in yellow on pilot’s EADI.
e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated green on pilot’s EFIS display. VOR de-
viation is displayed as angular. This switch is functional
only if VOR is the navigational data source selected by the
pilot.
f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation data source, deviation will
be linear if a valid DME is present and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the pilot’s EHSI display. If the DME
is lost or DME HOLD is selected, the LIN annunciation on
the EFIS display is replaced by ANG which will flash for
approximately 10 seconds, then it remains steady.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-14

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

4.2 Verify correct switching and annunciation of data sources

as selected on the copilot’s switch panel:
a. Select HDG switch to NORM. Copilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 2 AHRS.
b. Select HDG switch to XSIDE. Copilot’s display heading is supplied by no. 1 AHRS. HDG1
is annunciated in yellow on copilot’s EHSI.
c. Select ATT switch to NORM. Copilot’s display attitude is supplied by no. 2 AHRS.
d. Select ATT switch to XSIDE. Copilot’s displayed attitude is supplied by no. 1 AHRS.
ATT1 is annunciated in yellow on copilot’s EADI.
e. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to ANG DEV ANG is annunciated green on copilot’s EFIS display. VOR
deviation is displayed as angular. This switch is functional
only if VOR is the navigational data source selected by the
copilot.
f. ANG DEV/LIN DEV to LIN DEV With VOR selected as navigation data source, deviation will
be linear if a valid DME is present and not in hold. LIN is
annunciated green on the copilot’s EHSI display. If the
DME is lost or DME HOLD is selected, the LIN annuncia-
tion on the EFIS display is replaced by ANG which will
flash for approximately 10 seconds, then it remains steady.

5.0 EFIS TEST SWITCH

5.1 Pilot’s TEST Switch

Note

Pilot’s EFIS TEST switch is inhibited in flight.

a. Push pilot’s EFIS TEST switch. The pilot’s EFIS TEST switch normally places the pilot’s
displays and the MFD in test mode. In test, the EADI pitch
and roll attitudes are altered by 10 degrees nose up and 10
degrees roll right, and 20 degrees are added to displayed
heading. A red TEST will appear in center of EADI and
EHSI.
Yellow comparator flags PIT, ROL, and HDG will appear on
both the pilot’s and copilot’s EADI and EHSI.
If the EFIS TEST switch is held for four seconds or longer,
all flags associated with the displays will be displayed.
b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard operation.
c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN) Comparator indications should reset.
which is located on pilot’s annunciator panel.

5.2 Copilot’s TEST Switch

Note

Copilot’s EFIS TEST switch is inhibited in flight.

a. Push copilot’s EFIS TEST switch. The copilot’s EADI pitch and roll attitudes are altered by 10
degrees nose down and 10 degrees roll left, and 20 degrees
are subtracted from displayed heading.
Yellow comparator flags PIT, ROL, and HDG will appear on
the copilot’s EADI and EHSI display.
If the EFIS TEST switch is held for four seconds or longer,
all flags associated with the displays will be displayed.
b. Release switch. Displays revert to standard operation.
c. Push comparator reset button (COMPTR WARN). Comparator indications should reset.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-15

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

6.0 INTERFACE TESTS

6.1 VOR
a. Apply ac and dc power to the VOR radio.
b. Turn on VOR signal generator and select 0°.
c. Select VOR 1 as the active course and bearing pointer Verify that the NAV flag is removed from the display and
on the EHSI. that the bearing pointer points to 0°.
d. Rotate the course arrow. Verify that the deviation bar centers at 180° with a FROM
indication and at 0° with a TO indication.
e. Select additional radials using the signal generator. Verify that the bearing pointer points to the radial selected
and that the deviation bar centers with a TO indication at
the radial selected.

6.2 Localizer
a. Apply power to VOR/LOC receiver.
b. Select localizer mode on the VOR/LOC signal genera-
tor.
c. Select an appropriate LOC frequency.
d. Select VOR 1 as the active course on the EHSI. Verify that NAV flag is removed from the display. Verify
that the runway symbol and deviation scale appear at the
bottom of the EADI and the VOR changes to LOC.
e. Select zero deviation on the LOC signal generator. Verify that the runway symbol on the EADI and course de-
viation bar on the EHSI are centered.
f. Select left deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and deviation bar deflect to the left.
g. Select right deviation on the signal generator. Verify that the runway and deviation bar deflect to the
right.

6.3 Glideslope
a. Apply power to glideslope receiver.
b. Select the glideslope mode on the signal generator.
c. Select the glideslope deviations available on the signal Verify that the glideslope pointer on the EADI and EHSI
generator. track the selected deviation.

6.4 Radio Altitude

a. Apply power to radio altimeter.
b. Select a localizer frequency. Verify that the runway symbol appears at the bottom of the
EADI.
c. Set the DH counter at the lower right corner of EADI Verify that the DH annunciator in the center of the EADI is
(with DH knob on DSP-85A) to 200 feet. on when radio altitude is below 200 feet and is off above 200
feet.
Verify that runway symbol begins to expand when the radio
altitude goes below 200 feet, and that it touches the bottom
of the airplane symbol when the radio altitude is 0 feet.

6.5 DME
a. Apply power to DME radio.
b. Turn on DME signal generator.
c. Select an appropriate frequency.
d. Select various distances on the signal generator. Verify that the DME distance readout appears in upper left
corner of the EHSI.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-16

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

6.6 ADF
a. Select ADF 1 as the bearing pointer on the EHSI.
b. Select various radio stations. Verify that the ADF pointer on the EHSI points to the
proper bearings.

7.0 MFD OPERATION

Warning

The area within the scan arc and within 5 metres (15 feet) of an operating WXR-300 Weather Radar System constitutes
a hazardous area. Do not operate the system in any mode other than standby (STBY) or test (TST) when the antenna
might scan over personnel within that range. Never turn the transmitter on while in a hangar. FAA Advisory Circular
20-68B provides additional details regarding the radiation hazards associated with ground operation of airborne
weather radar.
7.1 Radar Mode
a. Push RDR button on MFD-85A. MFD-85A will display the mode selected on the WXP-85( )
panel (see below).
OFF — system deenergized
STBY — system energized, but no transmitter output
TEST — test pattern, but no transmitter output
b. Push RDR button again. Radar display will be deleted.

7.2 NAV Mode

a. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. NAV data menu will appear.
b. Push MFD-85A line select key.
c. Push line select key next to sources desired to be dis- Source color will change to green.
played.
d. Push NAV button on MFD-85A. Display will change to sector display with NAV info selected
on display. If VOR is selected on pilot’s or copilot’s EHSI,
course lines may be moved with CRS controls on CHP-86. If
VOR info valid, CRS and station ident for no. 1 will appear
on bottom left and no. 2 on bottom right.
LRN waypoint will appear in proper position. CRS to way-
point will appear below VOR 1 CRS for LRN 1 and below
VOR 2 CRS for LRN 2. (Only two NAV’s can be displayed at
a time.)

7.3 Remote Data

a. Push RMT button on MFD-85A. Source menu will appear.
b. Push line select key of source desired. Data will appear if available. If no data is available, after
five seconds NO DATA AVAILABLE will appear.

7.4 MFD/HSI Mode

a. Select HSI switch to ON MFD on pilot’s switch panel. Pilot’s HSI presentation will duplicate on the MFD-85A.
b. Select HSI switch to NORM on pilot’s switch panel. Normal MFD-85A display returns.

8.0 EFIS FAN MONITORS

8.1 EFIS Fan Fail
a. Push and hold annunciator test switch in master After 8 seconds, pilot EFD and DPU FAN, copilot EFD and
warning panel. DPU FAN, and pedestal MFD and MPU FAN annunciators
illuminate amber.
b. Release annunciator test switch. Annunciators extinguish.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-17

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-3. EFIS-85B(3)/86B(3) Testing/Troubleshooting Procedures.

TEST PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS/TROUBLESHOOTING

9.0 LRN APPR MODE INHIBIT CHECK

9.1 Setup Procedure
a. Set LRN-85 into SIMULATE FLIGHT mode. Set up a
waypoint 50 to 100 miles directly in front of the air-
plane.
b. Select LRN for display on pilot and copilot EFIS.
c. Select NAV mode on both mode select panels.
d. Engage the autopilot.

9.2 On LRN CDU set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi left of DTRK. Course deviation bar should move left 2 dots. V-bars com-
mand a 20-degree left bank. Autopilot moves control wheel
for a left bank.

9.3 On LRN CDU set up a parallel track 7.5 nmi right of Course deviation bar should deflect right 2 dots. V-bars
DTRK. command a 20-degree right bank. Autopilot moves control
wheel for a right bank.

9.4 Deselect LRN from copilot’s EFIS.

9.5 Select APPR mode on pilot’s mode selet panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns control wheel to neutral.

9.6 Deselect APPR mode on pilot’s mode select panel. Deselect

LRN from pilot’s EFIS.

9.7 Select LRN on copilot’s EFIS and press AP XFER on Copilot’s course deviation bar should be 2 dots to the right.
autopilot panel. V-bars are commanding 20-degree right bank. Autopilot
moves control wheel for a right bank.
9.8 Select APPR mode on copilot’s mode select panel. LRN data is flagged on EHSI. V-bars indicate zero roll
command. Autopilot returns control wheel to neutral.

9.9 Deselect APPR mode. Deselect LRN from EFIS. Press AP

XFER on autopilot panel. Disengage autopilot.

5.5 BITS MODE SELF-TEST GUIDE

5.5.1 Introduction

This BITS mode self-test guide is an operator reference to information stored in RAM memory in the fol-
lowing EFIS equipments: DPU-85H/86H Display Processor Unit (DPU), MPU-85H/86H Multifunction Proc-
essor Unit (MPU), and the MFD-85A Multifunction Display (MFD). The stored information may be used as a
troubleshooting aid to help identify a faulty unit in the system. Refer to the block diagrams found at the end
of this section.

The EFIS crt’s (the EADI, EHSI, and MFD) are used to display the parameters of this stored information.
Some of these parameters are translated from external inputs; others are passed across from the off-side or
result from internal operations. These parameters are stored in what is called Multiport RAM (MPR) loca-
tions in the DPU, MPU, and MFD. To view this MPR data, the BITS mode must be entered.

5.5.2 BITS Mode

The BITS mode is a ground test usually performed by flight-line maintenance personnel. In general, the
data displayed in the BITS mode is not self-reading and requires instructions to interpret. Refer to Table 5-4
for a numerical listing of the displayed MPR data or to Table 5-5 for an alphabetical listing. Table 5-6 and

Revised 12 May 1999 5-18

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-7 contain descriptions of the data stored in each MPR location. A sample of the MPR bits data
display is shown in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2. MPR Bits Display

Revised 12 May 1999 5-19

maintenance 523-0773952

5.5.2.1 Enter BITS Mode

a. Locate the EFIS system TEST switch. To enter the diagnostic/maintenance routines for each DPU, push
and hold the installer-supplied EFIS TEST switch and push the radio altimeter test switch on the on-
side DCP/DSP. Once the first page of the routine is displayed, the EFIS TEST switch may be released.
Pages of the routine may be changed by repeatedly pushing the radio altimeter test switch on the on-side
DCP/DSP.
To enter the diagnostic/maintenance routines for the MPU in a 5-tube system, push and hold the pilot’s
side EFIS TEST switch and push the radio altimeter test switch on the copilot’s DCP/DSP. Page se-
quencing is done by repeatedly pushing the radio altimeter test switch on the copilot’s DCP/DSP. Ground
test entry has been achieved when MPR is observed on the EADI, EHSI, and MFD.
b. Release the system TEST and RA TST buttons. The EADI, EHSI, and MFD should display seven col-
umns of data. The left column (DEC) displays a 3-digit location and the second through five columns
(MPR) display binary 1’s and 0’s of the data contained in each memory address. The sixth column dis-
plays address information and the last column (HEX) represents the 16-binary bits in the MPR column.
The DH SET knob is used to change the MPR data (1 click for each location). There are 2048 locations
(000 through 2048). Locations 000 through 1023 are for on-side (left-side) locations and 1024 through
2047 are for the off-side (right-side). Table 5-6 contains descriptions of the data stored in each MPR loca-
tion.
c. Push and release the RA TST button twice. The word MFD should be displayed over the fourth column
from the left. The left column (DEC) displays a 3-decimal location and the second column (HEX) displays
the hex location. The third through fifth columns (MFD) display binary 1’s and 0’s of the data contained
in each memory address. The sixth column displays address information. Table 5-7 contains descriptions
of the data stored in each MPR location for the MFD.
d. Repeatedly push and release the RA TST button. A calibration screen should be displayed. Rotate the
DH SET knob clockwise and various screens will appear. (The same screen should appear on both the
ADI and HSI.) These screens are used mainly for calibration procedures in the lab.

5.5.2.2 Exit BITS Mode

Repeatedly push and release the DH SET knob (or the RA TST switch). After the last test in the sequence,
the DPU/MPU will exit the test mode and the normal EADI, EHSI, and MFD displays will return.

Note

Cycling power to the box will also exit the ground test sequence.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-20

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

000/1024 00/400 NOT USED

001/1025 01/401 DP STATUS
002/1026 02/402 DP STATUS
003/1027 03/403 DP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
003/1027 03/403 DP STATUS (-003 STATUS)
004/1028 04/404 DP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
004/1028 04/404 DP STATUS (-003 STATUS)
005/1029 05/405 DP STATUS
006/1030 06/406 DP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
006/1030 06/406 ANALOG LRN XTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
007/1031 07/407 AIOP STATUS
008/1032 08/408 AIOP STATUS
009/1033 09/409 AIOP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
009/1033 09/409 ANALOG LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
010/1034 0A/40A ACTIVE DCP MODE SELECTION (ACTIVE/PRESELECT)
011/1035 0B/40B AIOP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
011/1035 0B/40B UNSCALED ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE FOR TVG (-003 STATUS)
012/1036 0C/40C AIOP STATUS
013/1037 0D/40D DIOP1 STATUS
014/1038 0E/40E DIOP1 STATUS
015/1039 0F/40F DIOP1 STATUS
016/1040 10/410 DIOP1 STATUS
017/1041 11/411 DIOP1 STATUS
018/1042 12/412 DIOP1 STATUS
019/1043 13/413 DIOP2 STATUS
020/1044 14/414 DIOP2 STATUS
021/1045 15/415 DIOP2 STATUS
022/1046 16/416 DIOP2 STATUS (6-WIRE BUS STATUS)
023/1047 17/417 DIOP2 STATUS (-002 STATUS)
023/1047 17/417 DIOP2 STATUS (429 LRN STATUS) (-003 STATUS)
024/1048 18/418 DIOP2 STATUS
025/1049 19/419 TREND VECTOR STATUS
026/1050 1A/41A TREND VECTOR STATUS
027/1051 1B/41B TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS)
027/1051 1B/41B LRN DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
028/1052 1C/41C TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS)
028/1052 1C/41C LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-21

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

029/1053 1D/41D TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS)

029/1053 1D/41D LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
030/1054 1E/41E TREND VECTOR STATUS
031/1055 1F/41F DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12)
032/1056 20/420 DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24)
033/1057 21/421 DISCRETES, STRAPS (25-36)
034/1058 22/422 DISCRETE, STRAPS (37-40)
035/1059 23/423 RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED)
036/1060 24/424 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION
037/1061 25/425 MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR BEARING
038/1062 26/426 MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR DISTANCE (MILES)
039/1063 27/427 MFD JOYSTICK AND SELECT KEY STATUS
040/1064 28/428 WXP DATA (PROCESSED)
041/1065 29/429 SYNCHRO VALID BITS
042/1066 2A/42A DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
043/1067 2B/42B DME TIME TO GO, (BINARY)
044/1068 2C/42C DISCRETE INPUTS
045/1069 2D/42D DISCRETE INPUTS
046/1070 2E/42E DISCRETES, CALCULATED
047/1071 2F/42F DISCRETES, CALCULATED
048/1072 30/430 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
049/1073 31/431 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
050/1074 32/432 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TIME TO GO (BINARY)
051/1075 33/433 CASE RELATED ACTIVE LATERAL BEARING ANGLE
052/1076 34/434 DISCRETES, STRAPS (25, 26, 28, 29)/ACT DCP
053/1077 35/435 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
054/1078 36/436 PRESET LATERAL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
055/1079 37/437 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
056/1080 38/438 ACTIVE HEADING ERROR (FILTERED)
057/1081 39/439 ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (FILTERED, KNOTS)
058/1082 3A/43A DISCRETES, CALCULATED
059/1083 3B/43B ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVN (VGU’S)
060/1084 3C/43C ADI MODE DISCRETES
061/1085 3D/43D HSI MODE DISCRETES
062/1086 3E/43E ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DISTANCE (BINARY)
063/1087 3F/43F SPEED DEVN OR AOA DEVN (VGU’S)
064/1088 40/440 ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE BRG TO WPT

Revised 12 May 1999 5-22

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

065/1089 41/441 PRESET LATERAL SOURCE BRG TO WPT

066/1090 42/442 PRESET LATERAL SOURCE DEVN (VGU’S)
067/1091 43/443 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
068/1092 44/444 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
069/1093 45/445 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
070/1094 46/446 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
071/1095 47/447 ACTIVE BINARY DIST FOR EFIS XMIT BUS
072/1096 48/448 PITCH STEERING COMMAND, SCALED FILTERED (VGU’S)
073/1097 04/449 ROLL STEERING COMMAND, SCALED FILTERED (VGU’S)
074/1098 4A/44A ACCELERATION VECTOR (VGU’S)
075/1099 4B/44B RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II
076/1100 4C/44C HEADING ERROR (RAW) (DEGREES)
077/1101 4D/44D TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS)
078/1102 4E/44E ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP SELECT MASKS
079/1103 4F/44F FCS ANNUNCIATORS
080/1104 50/450 ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DISPLAY DATA
081/1105 51/451 CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
082/1106 52/452 CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
083/1107 53/453 DISCRETES, CALCULATED
084/1108 54/454 HEADING ANGLE (ACTIVE)
085/1109 55/455 ROLL ANGLE (ACTIVE)
086/1110 56/456 PITCH ANGLE (ACTIVE)
087/1111 57/457 HEADING ERROR (ACT) FOR DPU CSDB XMIT BUS
088/1112 58/458 FD ANNUNCIATORS
089/1113 59/459 SELECTED COURSE ERROR (ACT) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
090/1114 5A/45A LATERAL DEVN (ACTIVE) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
091/1115 5B/45B TVG (ACCELERATION 10 SEC)
092/1116 5C/45C ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
093/1117 5D/45D IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET
094/1118 5E/45E FULL-TIME LOCALIZER DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
095/1119 5F/45F FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
096/1120 60/460 EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES
097/1121 61/461 SCALED HSI VNAV DEVN
098/1122 62/462 FD ANNUNCIATORS
099/1123 63/463 ACTIVE/PRESET SOURCE TYPE
100/1124 64/464 BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE
101/1125 65/465 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (BCD MILES)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-23

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

102/1126 66/466 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (BCD MILES)

103/1127 67/467 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT
104/1128 68/468 LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT
105/1129 69/469 LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT
106/1130 6A/46A LRN DESIRED TRACK
107/1131 6B/46B LRN WAYPOINT NUMBER (BINARY)
108/1132 6C/46C LRN DISTANCE TO—TO+1 WAYPOINT
109/1133 6D/46D LRN DESIRED TRACK TO—TO+1 WAYPOINT
110/1134 6E/46E LRN TO+1 BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER
111/1135 6F/46F LRN DIST TO+1—TO+2
112/1136 70/470 LRN DESIRED TRACK TO+1—TO+2
113/1137 71/471 LRN BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER TO+2
114/1138 72/472 LRN TIME TO GO (BCD MINUTES)
115/1139 73/473 LRN GROUND SPEED (BCD KNOTS)
116/1140 74/474 LRN BANK COMMAND
117/1141 75/475 LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
118/1142 76/476 LRN DESIRED TRACK
119/1143 77/477 LRN 6-WIRE STATUS
120/1144 78/478 LRN WIND VELOCITY
121/1145 79/479 LRN WIND DIRECTION
122/1146 7A/47A LRN MAGNETIC VARIATION (MAG VAR)
123/1147 7B/47B RESERVED
124/1148 7C/47C DCP MODES
125/1149 7D/47D DCP MODE (ACTIVE)
126/1150 7E/47E DCP ELAPSED TIME (MIN/SEC) AND STATUS
127/1151 7F/47F ACTIVE DCP ET (MIN/SEC) AND STATUS
128/1152 80/480 DCP ET (HR/MIN)
129/1153 81/481 ACTIVE DCP ET - HR/MIN
130/1154 82/482 DCP BEARING SENSOR SELECT
131/1155 83/483 DCP PRESELECT COURSE SENSOR SELECT
132/1156 84/484 DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR SELECT
133/1157 85/485 DCP MENU CURSOR MASK
134/1158 86/486 DCP SPARE
135/1159 87/487 FCS ANNUNCIATORS
136/1160 88/488 FCS ANNUNCIATORS
137/1161 89/489 ACTIVE COURSE DATA
138/1162 8A/48A DCP SPARE

Revised 12 May 1999 5-24

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

139/1163 8B/48B DCP PRESELECTED COURSE DATA

140/1164 8C/48C DCP SPARE
141/1165 8D/48D SELECTED HEADING
142/1166 8E/48E DCP SPARE
143/1167 8F/48F DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET)
144/1168 90/490 ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET)
145/1169 91/491 DCP SPARE
146/1170 92/492 DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1
147/1171 93/493 DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
148/1172 94/494 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1
149/1173 95/495 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
150/1174 96/496 DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2
151/1175 97/497 DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 2 (BCD)
152/1176 98/498 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (NAUTICAL MILES)
153/1177 99/499 DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES)
154/1178 9A/49A DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
155/1179 9B/49B DME TIME-TO-GO - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
156/1180 9C/49C DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
157/1181 9D/49D DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
158/1182 9E/49E DME TIME TO GO - CHANNEL 2 (BCD MINUTES)
159/1183 9F/49F DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 2 (BCD KNOTS)
160/1184 A0/4A0 DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 IDENT
161/1185 A1/4A1 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 1
162/1186 A2/4A2 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 2
163/1187 A3/4A3 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 3
164/1188 A4/4A4 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 4
165/1189 A5/4A5 DME IDENT STATUS - CHANNEL 2
166/1190 A6/4A6 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2
167/1191 A7/4A7 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 2
168/1192 A8/4A8 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 3
169/1193 A9/4A9 DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 4
170/1194 AA/4AA VNAV PITCH CMD AND VERT DEVN STATUS
171/1195 AB/4AB VNAV PITCH COMMANDS
172/1196 AC/4AC VNAV DEVIATION
173/1197 AD/4AD VNAV DISTANCE TO ALTITUDE/TRACK
174/1198 AE/4AE VNAV DIST TO ALT OR TRACK
175/1199 AF/4AF VNAV SELECTED OFFSET

Revised 12 May 1999 5-25

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

176/1200 B0/4B0 VNAV SELECTED ANGLE/COMPUTED ANGLE STATUS

177/1201 B1/4B1 VNAV SELECTED VERTICAL ANGLE
178/1202 B2/4B2 VNAV COMPUTED VERTICAL ANGLE
179/1203 B3/4B3 VNAV AIMPOINT ALT/VS SELECT STATUS
180/1204 B4/4B4 VNAV SELECTED AIMPOINT ALTITUDE
181/1205 B5/4B5 VERTICAL SPEED SELECTED
182/1206 B6/4B6 RESERVED
183/1207 B7/4B7 RESERVED
184/1208 B8/4B8 RESERVED
185/1209 B9/4B9 VOR DATA STATUS
186/1210 BA/4BA MARKER BEARING
187/1211 BB/4BB VOR BEARING
188/1212 BC/4BC VOR FREQUENCY (BCD)
189/1213 BD/4BD ILS STATUS
190/1214 BE/4BE GLIDESLOPE DEVN (DDM)
191/1215 BF/4BF GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS)
192/1216 C0/4C0 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM)
193/1217 C1/4C1 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS)
194/1218 C2/4C2 AHRS RATES (BODY AXIS) STATUS
195/1219 C3/4C3 AHRS PITCH RATE (DEGREES/SECOND)
196/1220 C4/4C4 AHRS ROLL RATE (DEGREES/SECOND)
197/1221 C5/4C5 AHRS YAW RATE (DEGREES/SECOND)
198/1222 C6/4C6 AHRS ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS)
199/1223 C7/4C7 AHRS LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
200/1224 C8/4C8 AHRS LATERAL ACCELERATION
201/1225 C9/4C9 AHRS NORMAL ACCELERATION
202/1226 CA/4CA AHRS ACCELERATIONS STATUS
203/1227 CB/4CB AHRS ALONG HEADING ACCELERATION
204/1228 CC/4CC AHRS CROSS HEADING ACCELERATION
205/1229 CD/4CD AHRS VERTICAL ACCELERATION
206/1230 CE/4CE AHRS ATTITUDE STATUS
207/1231 CF/4CF AHRS PITCH ATTITUDE
208/1232 D0/4D0 AHRS ROLL ATTITUDE
209/1233 D1/4D1 AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING
210/1234 D2/4D2 AHRS CONTROL STATUS
211/1235 D3/4D3 AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING
212/1236 D4/4D4 AHRS LATITUDE

Revised 12 May 1999 5-26

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

213/1237 D5/4D5 AHRS STIM MODE

214/1238 D6/4D6 RESERVED (-002 STATUS)
214/1238 D6/4D6 ADI STIM DISPLAY (-003 STATUS)
215/1239 D7/4D7 RESERVED (-002 STATUS)
215/1239 D7/4D7 HSI STIM DISPLAY (-003 STATUS)
216/1240 D8/4D8 ADF BEARING ANALOG
217/1241 D9/4D9 RESERVED
218/1242 DA/4DA FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
219/1243 DB/4DB FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
220/1244 DC/4DC FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
221/1245 DD/4DD FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
222/1246 DE/4DE FCS MODE STATUS
223/1247 DF/4DF FCS SPARE
224/1248 E0/4E0 FCS SPARE
225/1249 E1/4E1 FCS MODE STATUS
226/1250 E2/4E2 FCS STEERING STATUS
227/1251 E3/4E3 FCS ALTITUDE REFERENCE
228/1252 E4/4E4 FCS PITCH STEER
229/1253 E5/4E5 FCS ROLL STEER
230/1254 E6/4E6 FCS VS/IAS/MACH REFERENCE STATUS
231/1255 E7/4E7 FCS REFERENCE VERTICAL SPEED
232/1256 E8/4E8 FCS REFERENCE IAS
233/1257 E9/4E9 FCS REFERENCE MACH NUMBER
234/1258 EA/4EA FCS DIAGNOSTICS (256 LOCATIONS)
THRU THRU
489/1513 1E9/5E9
490/1514 1EA/5EA AIR DATA COMPUTER ALTITUDE STATUS
491/1515 1EB/5EB ADC PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET)
492/1516 1EC/5EC ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET)
493/1517 1ED/5ED ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET)
494/1518 1EE/5EE ADC BARO ALTITUDE
495/1519 1EF/5EF ADC VERTICAL SPEED/IAS STATUS
496/1520 1F0/5F0 ADC VERTICAL SPEED
497/1521 1F1/5F1 ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED
498/1522 1F2/5F2 ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (BCD)
499/1523 1F3/5F3 ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS)/SPARE STATUS
500/1524 1F4/5F4 ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS) (KNOTS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-27

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

501/1525 1F5/5F5 ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (BCD)

502/1526 1F6/5F6 ADC SPARE
503/1527 1F7/5F7 ADC MACH STATUS
504/1528 1F8/5F8 ADC MACH NUMBER (DISPLAY)
505/1529 1F9/5F9 ADC MACH NUMBER (TRUE)
506/1530 1FA/5FA ADC VS/IAS BUG STATUS
507/1531 1FB/5FB ADC VERTICAL SPEED BUG
508/1532 1FC/5FC ADC IAS BUG
509/1533 1FD/5FD ADC SAT/VMO/MMO STATUS
510/1534 1FE/5FE ADC STATIC AIR TEMP (SAT)
511/1535 1FF/5FF ADC MAX ALLOWABLE AIRSPEED (VMO/MMO)
512/1536 200/600 ADC TAT/PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE STATUS
513/1537 201/601 ADC TOTAL AIR TEMP (TAT)
514/1538 202/602 ADC PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE
515/1539 203/603 GYRO PITCH ANGLE
516/1540 204/604 GYRO ROLL ANGLE
517/1541 205/605 GYRO HEADING ANGLE
518/1542 206/606 DCP DIAGNOSTICS
519/1543 207/607 DCP DIAGNOSTICS
520/1544 208/608 DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1
521/1545 209/609 DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1
522/1546 20A/60A DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1
523/1547 20B/60B ADC DIAGNOSTICS
524/1548 20C/60C ADC DIAGNOSTICS
525/1549 20D/60D ADC DIAGNOSTICS
526/1550 20E/60E NAV DIAGNOSTICS
527/1551 20F/60F NAV DIAGNOSTICS
528/1552 210/610 NAV DIAGNOSTICS
529/1553 211/621 VNAV DIAGNOSTICS
530/1554 212/612 VNAV DIAGNOSTICS
531/1555 213/613 VNAV DIAGNOSTICS
532/1556 214/614 FCS DIAGNOSTICS
533/1557 215/615 FCS DIAGNOSTICS
534/1558 216/616 FCS DIAGNOSTICS
535/1559 217/617 FCS DIAGNOSTICS
536/1560 218/618 AHRS DIAGNOSTICS
537/1561 219/619 AHRS DIAGNOSTICS

Revised 12 May 1999 5-28

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

538/1562 21A/61A AHRS DIAGNOSTICS

539/1563 21B/61B AHRS DIAGNOSTICS
540/1564 21C/61C LRN WIND DIRECTION
541/1564 21D/61D LRN CROSSTRACK DEVN
542/1566 21E/61E LRN VERTICAL DEVN (DOTS)
543/1567 21F/61F EXTENDED MAPS TEXT (-003 STATUS)
544/1568 220/620 PLAN MODE (-003 STATUS)
545/1569 221/621 PLAN MODE TEXT (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
556/1581 22C/62C
557/1582 22D/62D EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
558/1583 22E/62E DELTA X FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN) (-003 STATUS)
559/1584 22F/62F DELTA Y FROM AIRCRAFT (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN) (-003 STATUS)
560/1585 230/630 IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
571/1596 23B/63B
572/1597 23C/63C EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
573/1598 23D/63D DELTA X FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
574/1599 23E/63E DELTA Y FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
575/1600 23F/63F IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
586/1611 24A/64A
587/1612 24B/64B EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
588/1613 24C/64C DELTA X FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
589/1614 24C/64C DELTA Y FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
590/1615 24D/64D IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
601/1626 25A/65A
602/1626 25A/65A EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
603/1627 25B/65B DELTA X FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
604/1628 25C/65C DELTA Y FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
605/1629 25D/65D IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
616/1640 268/668
617/1641 269/669 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
618/1642 26A/66A DELTA X FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
619/1643 26B/66B DELTA Y FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
620/1644 26C/66C IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
631/1655 277/677
632/1656 278/678 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-29

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

633/1657 279/679 DELTA X FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)

634/1658 27A/67A DELTA Y FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
635/1659 27B/67B IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
646/1670 286/686
647/1671 287/687 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
648/1672 288/688 DELTA X FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
649/1673 289/689 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
650/1674 28A/68A IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
661/1685 295/695
662/1686 296/696 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
663/1687 297/697 DELTA X FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
664/1688 298/698 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
665/1689 299/699 IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
676/1700 2A4/6A4
677/1701 2A5/6A5 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
678/1702 2A6/6A6 DELTA X FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
679/1703 2A7/6A7 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
680/1704 2A8/6A8 IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
691/1715 2B3/6B3
692/1716 2B4/6B4 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS)
693/1717 2B5/6B5 DELTA X FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS)
694/1718 2B6/6B6 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS)
695/1719 2B7/6B7 IDENT FOR ITEM 9 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
706/1730 2C2/6C2
707/1731 2C3/6C3 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS)
708/1732 2C4/6C4 DELTA X FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS)
709/1733 2C5/6C5 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS)
710/1734 2C6/6C6 IDENT FOR ITEM 10 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
721/1745 2D1/6D1
722/1746 2D2/6D2 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS)
723/1747 2D3/6D3 DELTA X FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS)
724/1748 2D4/6D4 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS)
725/1749 2D5/6D5 IDENT FOR ITEM 11 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
736/1760 2E0/6E0
737/1761 2E1/6E1 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-30

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

738/1762 2E2/6E2 DELTA X FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS)

739/1763 2E3/6E3 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS)
740/1764 2E4/6E4 IDENT FOR ITEM 12 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
751/1775 2EF/6EF
752/1776 2F0/6F0 EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS)
753/1777 2F1/6F1 DELTA X FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS)
754/1778 2F2/6F2 DELTA Y FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS)
755/1779 2F3/6F3 IDENT FOR ITEM 13 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
766/1790 2FE/6FE
767/1791 2FF/6FF AIRCRAFT SYMBOL POSITION IN PLAN MODE (-003 STATUS)
768/1792 300/700 DELTA X FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT (-003 STATUS)
769/1793 301/701 DELTA Y FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT (-003 STATUS)
770/1794 302/702 “TO’ WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
781/1805 30D/70D
782/1806 30E/70E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
783/1807 30F/70F EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
784/1808 310/710 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
785/1809 311/711 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
796/1820 31C/71C
797/1821 31D/71D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
798/1822 31E/71E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
799/1823 31F/71F EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
800/1824 320/720 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
811/1835 32B/72B
812/1836 32C/72C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
813/1837 32D/72D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
814/1838 32E/72E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
815/1839 32F/72F EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
826/1850 33A/73A
827/1851 33B/73B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
828/1852 33C/73C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
829/1853 33D/73D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
830/1854 33E/73E EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
841/1865 349/749
842/1866 34A/74A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-31

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

843/1867 34B/74B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
844/1868 34C/74C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
845/1869 34D/74D EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
856/18880 358/758
857/1881 359/759 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
858/1882 35A/75A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
859/1883 35B/75B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
860/1884 35C/75C EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
871/1895 367/767
872/1896 368/768 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
873/1897 369/769 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
874/1898 36A/76A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
875/1899 36B/76B EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
886/1910 376/776
887/1911 377/777 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
888/1912 378/778 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
889/1913 379/779 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
890/1914 37A/77A EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
901/1925 385/785
902/1926 386/786 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
903/1927 387/787 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
904/1928 388/788 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
905/1929 389/789 EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
916/1940 394/794
917/1941 395/795 “FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)

918/1942 396/796 “FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE (-003 STATUS)

919/1943 397/797 “FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE (-003 STATUS)
920/1944 398/798 “FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT (12 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU
931/1955 3A3/7A3
932/1956 3A4/7A4 MLS BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
933/1957 3A5/7A5 MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
934/1958 3A6/7A6 MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
935/1959 3A7/7A7 MLS CHANNEL SELECTION (BCD) (-003 STATUS)
936/1960 3A8/7A8 MLS BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
937/1961 3A9/7A9 MLS FRONT AZIMUTH COMPENSATED DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-32

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

938/1962 3AA/7AA MLS AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)

939/1963 3AB/7AB MLS DME FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS)
940/1964 3AC/7AC MLS DME FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS)
941/1965 3AD/7AD IAS SCALE SELECTION (-003 STATUS)
942/1966 3AE/7AE IAS SCALE SELECTION (-003 STATUS)
943/1967 3AF/7AF IAS POINTER DISPLACEMENT (-003 STATUS)
944/1968 3B0/7B0 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT BOTTOM OF VMO LINE (-003 STATUS)
945/1969 3B1/7B1 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT TOP OF VMO LINE (-003 STATUS)
946/1970 3B2/7B2 IAS REFERENCE POINTER PLACEMENT (-003 STATUS)
947/1971 3B3/7B3 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA (DIGITAL) (-003 STATUS)
948/1972 3B4/7B4 CALCULATED DISCRETES, AMD STRAPS (-003 STATUS)
949/1973 3B5/7B5 MLS FLAGS (-003 STATUS)
950/1974 3B6/7B6 LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
951/1975 3B7/7B7 LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
952/1976 3B8/7B8 LRN 429 BEARING TO WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
953/1977 3B9/7B9 LRN 429 MAGNETIC VARIATION (-003 STATUS)
954/1978 3BA/7BA LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
955/1979 3BB/7BB LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
956/1980 3BC/7BC LRN 429 BANK COMMAND (-003 STATUS)
957/1981 3BD/7BD LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
958/1982 3BE/7BE LRN 429 WIND DIRECTION (-003 STATUS)
959/1983 3BF/7BF LRN 429 WIND VELOCITY (-003 STATUS)
960/1984 3C0/7C0 LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
961/1985 3C1/7C1 LRN 429 VERTICAL DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)}
962/1986 3C2/7C2 LRN 429 TIME TO GO (-003 STATUS)
963/1987 3C3/7C3 LRN 429 GROUND SPEED (-003 STATUS)
964/1988 3C4/7C4 LRN 429 GROUND SPEED (-003 STATUS)
965/1989 3C5/7C5 AHS 429 ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS) (-003 STATUS)
966/1990 3C6/7C6 AHS 429 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS)
967/1991 3C7/7C7 AHS 429 LATERAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS)
968/1992 3C8/7C8 AHS 429 NORMAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS)
969/1993 3C9/7C9 AHS 429 ATTITUDE TEST MODE (-003 STATUS)}
970/1994 3CA/7CA AHS 429 PITCH ATTITUDE (-003 STATUS)
971/1995 3CB/7CB AHS 429 ROLL ATTITUDE (-003 STATUS)
972/1996 3CC/7CC LRN 429 MAGNETIC HEADING (-003 STATUS)
973/1997 3CD/7CD MLS 429 ILS DATA (-003 STATUS)
974/1998 3CE/7CE MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-33

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-4. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Numerical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

975/1999 3CF/7CF MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)

976/2000 3D0/7D0 MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
977/2001 3D1/7D1 MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
978/2002 3D2/7D2 ADF BEARING (-003 STATUS)
979/2003 3D3/7D3 ADF FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS)
980/2004 3D4/7D4 PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE (-003 STATUS)
981/2005 3D5/7D5 PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE (-003 STATUS)
982/2006 3D6/7D6 TRUE HEADING FOR EXTENDED PAGES (-003 STATUS)
983/2007 3D7/7D7 DRIFT ANGLE (-003 STATUS)
984/2008 3D8/7D8 DESIRED TRACK (-003 STATUS)
985/2009 3D9/7D9 LRN 429 DESIRED TRACK (-003 STATUS)
986/2010 3DA/7DA LRN FLAGS (-003 STATUS)
987/2011 3DB/7DB AHS FLAGS (-003 STATUS)
988/2012 3DC/7DC WIND DIRECTION (-003 STATUS)
989/2013 3DD/7DD CROSS-SIDE ANNUNCIATIONS FOR ADI AND HSI (-003 STATUS)
990/2014 3DE/7DE RESERVED
THRU THRU
1023/2047 3FF/7FF

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

ACCELERATION VECTOR (VGU’S) 074/1098 4A/44A

ACTIVE BINARY DIST FOR EFIS XMIT BUS 071/1095 47/447
ACTIVE COURSE DATA 137/1161 89/489
ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET) 144/1168 90/490
ACTIVE DCP ET (MIN/SEC) AND STATUS 127/1151 7F/47F
ACTIVE DCP ET - HR/MIN 129/1153 81/481
ACTIVE DCP MODE SELECTION (ACTIVE/PRESELECT) 010/1034 0A/40A
ACTIVE HEADING ERROR (FILTERED) 056/1080 38/438
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE BRG TO WPT 064/1088 40/440
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK 055/1079 37/437
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION 036/1060 24/424
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE DISTANCE (BINARY) 062/1086 3E/43E
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY) 053/1077 35/435
ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TIME TO GO (BINARY) 050/1074 32/432

Revised 12 May 1999 5-34

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DISPLAY DATA 080/1104 50/450

ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 092/1116 5C/45C
ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP SELECT MASKS 078/1102 4E/44E
ACTIVE/PRESET SOURCE TYPE 099/1123 63/463
ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET) 492/1516 1EC/5EC
ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET) 493/1517 1ED/5ED
ADC BARO ALTITUDE 494/1518 1EE/5EE
ADC DIAGNOSTICS 523/1547 20B/60B
ADC DIAGNOSTICS 524/1548 20C/60C
ADC DIAGNOSTICS 525/1549 20D/60D
ADC IAS BUG 508/1532 1FC/5FC
ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED 497/1521 1F1/5F1
ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (BCD) 498/1522 1F2/5F2
ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (FILTERED, KNOTS) 057/1081 39/439
ADC MACH NUMBER (DISPLAY) 504/1528 1F8/5F8
ADC MACH NUMBER (TRUE) 505/1529 1F9/5F9
ADC MACH STATUS 503/1527 1F7/5F7
ADC MAX ALLOWABLE AIRSPEED (VMO/MMO) 511/1535 1FF/5FF
ADC PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE 514/1538 202/602
ADC PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET) 491/1515 1EB/5EB
ADC SAT/VMO/MMO STATUS 509/1533 1FD/5FD
ADC SPARE 502/1526 1F6/5F6
ADC STATIC AIR TEMP (SAT) 510/1534 1FE/5FE
ADC TAT/PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE STATUS 512/1536 200/600
ADC TOTAL AIR TEMP (TAT) 513/1537 201/601
ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (BCD) 501/1525 1F5/5F5
ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS) (KNOTS) 500/1524 1F4/5F4
ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS)/SPARE STATUS 499/1523 1F3/5F3
ADC VERTICAL SPEED 496/1520 1F0/5F0
ADC VERTICAL SPEED BUG 507/1531 1FB/5FB
ADC VERTICAL SPEED/IAS STATUS 495/1519 1EF/5EF
ADC VS/IAS BUG STATUS 506/1530 1FA/5FA
ADF BEARING (-003 STATUS) 978/2002 3D2/7D2
ADF BEARING ANALOG 216/1240 D8/4D8
ADF FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS) 979/2003 3D3/7D3
ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVN (VGU’S) 059/1083 3B/43B
ADI MODE DISCRETES 060/1084 3C/43C

Revised 12 May 1999 5-35

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

ADI STIM DISPLAY (-003 STATUS) 214/1238 D6/4D6

AHRS ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS) 198/1222 C6/4C6
AHRS ACCELERATIONS STATUS 202/1226 CA/4CA
AHRS ALONG HEADING ACCELERATION 203/1227 CB/4CB
AHRS ATTITUDE STATUS 206/1230 CE/4CE
AHRS CONTROL STATUS 210/1234 D2/4D2
AHRS CROSS HEADING ACCELERATION 204/1228 CC/4CC
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS 536/1560 218/618
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS 537/1561 219/619
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS 538/1562 21A/61A
AHRS DIAGNOSTICS 539/1563 21B/61B
AHRS LATERAL ACCELERATION 200/1224 C8/4C8
AHRS LATITUDE 212/1236 D4/4D4
AHRS LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION 199/1223 C7/4C7
AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING 209/1233 D1/4D1
AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING 211/1235 D3/4D3
AHRS NORMAL ACCELERATION 201/1225 C9/4C9
AHRS PITCH ATTITUDE 207/1231 CF/4CF
AHRS PITCH RATE (DEGREES/SECOND) 195/1219 C3/4C3
AHRS RATES (BODY AXIS) STATUS 194/1218 C2/4C2
AHRS ROLL ATTITUDE 208/1232 D0/4D0
AHRS ROLL RATE (DEGREES/SECOND) 196/1220 C4/4C4
AHRS STIM MODE 213/1237 D5/4D5
AHRS VERTICAL ACCELERATION 205/1229 CD/4CD
AHRS YAW RATE (DEGREES/SECOND) 197/1221 C5/4C5
AHS 429 ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS) (-003 STATUS) 965/1989 3C5/7C5
AHS 429 ATTITUDE TEST MODE (-003 STATUS) 969/1993 3C9/7C9
AHS 429 LATERAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS) 967/1991 3C7/7C7
AHS 429 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS) 966/1990 3C6/7C6
AHS 429 NORMAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS) 968/1992 3C8/7C8
AHS 429 PITCH ATTITUDE (-003 STATUS) 970/1994 3CA/7CA
AHS 429 ROLL ATTITUDE (-003 STATUS) 971/1995 3CB/7CB
AHS FLAGS (-003 STATUS) 987/2011 3DB/7DB
AIOP STATUS 007/1031 07/407
AIOP STATUS 008/1032 08/408
AIOP STATUS 012/1036 0C/40C
AIOP STATUS (-002 STATUS) 009/1033 09/409

Revised 12 May 1999 5-36

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

AIOP STATUS (-002 STATUS) 011/1035 0B/40B

AIR DATA COMPUTER ALTITUDE STATUS 490/1514 1EA/5EA
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL POSITION IN PLAN MODE (-003 STATUS) 767/1791 2FF/6FF
ANALOG LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS) 009/1033 09/409
ANALOG LRN XTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS) 006/1030 06/406
BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE 100/1124 64/464
CALCULATED DISCRETES, AMD STRAPS (-003 STATUS) 948/1972 3B4/7B4
CASE RELATED ACTIVE LATERAL BEARING ANGLE 051/1075 33/433
CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS 081/1105 51/451
CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS 082/1106 52/452
CROSS-SIDE ANNUNCIATIONS FOR ADI AND HSI (-003 STATUS) 989/2013 3DD/7DD
DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR SELECT 132/1156 84/484
DCP BEARING SENSOR SELECT 130/1154 82/482
DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET) 143/1167 8F/48F
DCP DIAGNOSTICS 518/1542 206/606
DCP DIAGNOSTICS 519/1543 207/607
DCP ELAPSED TIME (MIN/SEC) AND STATUS 126/1150 7E/47E
DCP ET (HR/MIN) 128/1152 80/480
DCP MENU CURSOR MASK 133/1157 85/485
DCP MODE (ACTIVE) 125/1149 7D/47D
DCP MODES 124/1148 7C/47C
DCP PRESELECT COURSE SENSOR SELECT 131/1155 83/483
DCP PRESELECTED COURSE DATA 139/1163 8B/48B
DCP SPARE 134/1158 86/486
DCP SPARE 138/1162 8A/48A
DCP SPARE 140/1164 8C/48C
DCP SPARE 142/1166 8E/48E
DCP SPARE 145/1169 91/491
DELTA X FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS) 573/1598 23D/63D
DELTA X FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS) 588/1613 24C/64C
DELTA X FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS) 603/1627 25B/65B
DELTA X FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS) 618/1642 26A/66A
DELTA X FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS) 633/1657 279/679
DELTA X FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS) 648/1672 288/688
DELTA X FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS) 663/1687 297/697
DELTA X FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS) 678/1702 2A6/6A6
DELTA X FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS) 693/1717 2B5/6B5

Revised 12 May 1999 5-37

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

DELTA X FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS) 708/1732 2C4/6C4

DELTA X FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS) 723/1747 2D3/6D3
DELTA X FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS) 738/1762 2E2/6E2
DELTA X FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS) 753/1777 2F1/6F1
DELTA X FROM A/C (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN) (-003 STATUS) 558/1583 22E/62E
DELTA X FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT (-003 STATUS) 768/1792 300/700
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS) 574/1599 23E/63E
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS) 589/1614 24C/64C
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS) 604/1628 25C/65C
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS) 619/1643 26B/66B
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS) 634/1658 27A/67A
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS) 649/1673 289/689
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS) 664/1688 298/698
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS) 679/1703 2A7/6A7
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS) 694/1718 2B6/6B6
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS) 709/1733 2C5/6C5
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS) 724/1748 2D4/6D4
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS) 739/1763 2E3/6E3
DELTA Y FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS) 754/1778 2F2/6F2
DELTA Y FROM A/C (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN) (-003 STATUS) 559/1584 22F/62F
DELTA Y FROM TUBE CENTER TO AIRCRAFT (-003 STATUS) 769/1793 301/701
DESIRED TRACK (-003 STATUS) 984/2008 3D8/7D8
DIOP1 STATUS 013/1037 0D/40D
DIOP1 STATUS 014/1038 0E/40E
DIOP1 STATUS 015/1039 0F/40F
DIOP1 STATUS 016/1040 10/410
DIOP1 STATUS 017/1041 11/411
DIOP1 STATUS 018/1042 12/412
DIOP2 STATUS 019/1043 13/413
DIOP2 STATUS 020/1044 14/414
DIOP2 STATUS 021/1045 15/415
DIOP2 STATUS 024/1048 18/418
DIOP2 STATUS (-002 STATUS) 023/1047 17/417
DIOP2 STATUS (429 LRN STATUS) (-003 STATUS) 023/1047 17/417
DIOP2 STATUS (6-WIRE BUS STATUS) 022/1046 16/416
DISCRETE INPUTS 044/1068 2C/42C
DISCRETE INPUTS 045/1069 2D/42D

Revised 12 May 1999 5-38

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

DISCRETE, STRAPS (37-40) 034/1058 22/422

DISCRETES, CALCULATED 046/1070 2E/42E
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 047/1071 2F/42F
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 048/1072 30/430
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 049/1073 31/431
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 058/1082 3A/43A
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 067/1091 43/443
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 068/1092 44/444
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 069/1093 45/445
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 070/1094 46/446
DISCRETES, CALCULATED 083/1107 53/453
DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12) 031/1055 1F/41F
DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24) 032/1056 20/420
DISCRETES, STRAPS (25, 26, 28, 29)/ACT DCP 052/1076 34/434
DISCRETES, STRAPS (25-36) 033/1057 21/421
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 520/1544 208/608
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 521/1545 209/609
DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1 522/1546 20A/60A
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1 148/1172 94/494
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 149/1173 95/495
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (NAUTICAL MILES) 152/1176 98/498
DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (BCD NAUTICAL MILES) 153/1177 99/499
DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 1 (BCD) 147/1171 93/493
DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 2 (BCD) 151/1175 97/497
DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY) 042/1066 2A/42A
DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 1 (BCD) 156/1180 9C/49C
DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 2 (BCD KNOTS) 159/1183 9F/49F
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 1 161/1185 A1/4A1
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 2 162/1186 A2/4A2
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 3 163/1187 A3/4A3
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 4 164/1188 A4/4A4
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2 166/1190 A6/4A6
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 2 167/1191 A7/4A7
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 3 168/1192 A8/4A8
DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 4 169/1193 A9/4A9
DME IDENT STATUS - CHANNEL 2 165/1189 A5/4A5
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 146/1170 92/492

Revised 12 May 1999 5-39

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 (TTG AND VELOCITY) 154/1178 9A/49A

DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 IDENT 160/1184 A0/4A0
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 150/1174 96/496
DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 (TTG AND VELOCITY) 157/1181 9D/49D
DME TIME TO GO - CHANNEL 2 (BCD MINUTES) 158/1182 9E/49E
DME TIME TO GO, (BINARY) 043/1067 2B/42B
DME TIME TO GO - CHANNEL 1 (BCD) 155/1179 9B/49B
DP STATUS 001/1025 01/401
DP STATUS 002/1026 02/402
DP STATUS 005/1029 05/405
DP STATUS (-002 STATUS) 003/1027 03/403
DP STATUS (-002 STATUS) 004/1028 04/404
DP STATUS (-002 STATUS) 006/1030 06/406
DP STATUS (-003 STATUS) 003/1027 03/403
DP STATUS (-003 STATUS) 004/1028 04/404
DRIFT ANGLE (-003 STATUS) 983/2007 3D7/7D7
EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES 096/1120 60/460
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS) 784/1808 310/710
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS) 799/1823 31F/71F
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS) 814/1838 32E/72E
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS) 829/1853 33D/73D
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS) 844/1868 34C/74C
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS) 859/1883 35B/75B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS) 874/1898 36A/76A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS) 889/1913 379/779
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS) 904/1928 388/788
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS) 782/1806 30E/70E
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS) 797/1821 31D/71D
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS) 812/1836 32C/72C
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS) 827/1851 33B/73B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS) 842/1866 34A/74A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS) 857/1881 359/759
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS) 872/1896 368/768
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS) 887/1911 377/777
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS) 902/1926 386/786

Revised 12 May 1999 5-40

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS) 785/1809 311/711
THRU THRU
796/1820 31C/71C
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS) 800/1824 320/720
THRU THRU
811/1835 32B/72B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS) 815/1839 32F/72F
THRU THRU
826/1850 33A/73A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS) 830/1854 33E/73E
THRU THRU
841/1865 349/749
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS) 845/1869 34D/74D
THRU THRU
856/1880 358/758
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS) 860/1884 35C/75C
THRU THRU
871/1895 367/767
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS) 875/1899 36B/76B
THRU THRU
886/1910 376/776
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS) 890/1914 37A/77A
THRU THRU
901/1925 385/785
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS) 905/1929 389/789
THRU THRU
916/1940 394/794
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS) 783/1807 30F/70F
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS) 798/1822 31E/71E
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS) 813/1837 32D/72D
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS) 828/1852 33C/73C
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS) 843/1867 34B/74B
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS) 858/1882 35A/75A
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS) 873/1897 369/769
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS) 888/1912 378/778
EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS) 903/1927 387/787
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS) 557/1582 22D/62D
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS) 572/1597 23C/63C
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS) 587/1612 24B/64B
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS) 602/1626 25A/65A
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS) 617/1641 269/669
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS) 632/1656 278/678
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS) 647/1671 287/687
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS) 662/1686 296/696

Revised 12 May 1999 5-41

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS) 677/1701 2A5/6A5

EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS) 692/1716 2B4/6B4
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS) 707/1731 2C3/6C3
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS) 722/1746 2D2/6D2
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS) 737/1761 2E1/6E1
EXTENDED MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS) 752/1776 2F0/6F0
EXTENDED MAPS TEXT (-003 STATUS) 543/1567 21F/61F
FCS ALTITUDE REFERENCE 227/1251 E3/4E3
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 218/1242 DA/4DA
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 219/1243 DB/4DB
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 220/1244 DC/4DC
FCS ANNUNCIATIONS 221/1245 DD/4DD
FCS ANNUNCIATORS 079/1103 4F/44F
FCS ANNUNCIATORS 135/1159 87/487
FCS ANNUNCIATORS 136/1160 88/488
FCS DIAGNOSTICS 532/1556 214/614
FCS DIAGNOSTICS 533/1557 215/615
FCS DIAGNOSTICS 534/1558 216/616
FCS DIAGNOSTICS 535/1559 217/617
FCS DIAGNOSTICS (256 LOCATIONS) 234/1258 EA/4EA
THRU THRU
489/1513 1E9/5E9
FCS MODE STATUS 222/1246 DE/4DE
FCS MODE STATUS 225/1249 E1/4E1
FCS PITCH STEER 228/1252 E4/4E4
FCS REFERENCE IAS 232/1256 E8/4E8
FCS REFERENCE MACH NUMBER 233/1257 E9/4E9
FCS REFERENCE VERTICAL SPEED 231/1255 E7/4E7
FCS ROLL STEER 229/1253 E5/4E5
FCS SPARE 223/1247 DF/4DF
FCS SPARE 224/1248 E0/4E0
FCS STEERING STATUS 226/1250 E2/4E2
FCS VS/IAS/MACH REFERENCE STATUS 230/1254 E6/4E6
FD ANNUNCIATORS 088/1112 58/458
FD ANNUNCIATORS 098/1122 62/462
“FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS) 917/1941 395/795
“FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT RANGE (-003 STATUS) 918/1942 396/796

Revised 12 May 1999 5-42

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

“FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE (-003 STATUS) 919/1943 397/797

“FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT IDENT (-003 STATUS) 920/1944 398/798
THRU THRU
931/1955 3A3/7A3
FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 095/1119 5F/45F
FULL-TIME LOCALIZER DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 094/1118 5E/45E
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS) 191/1215 BF/4BF
GLIDESLOPE DEVN (DDM) 190/1214 BE/4BE
GYRO HEADING ANGLE 517/1541 205/605
GYRO PITCH ANGLE 515/1539 203/603
GYRO ROLL ANGLE 516/1540 204/604
HEADING ANGLE (ACTIVE) 084/1108 54/454
HEADING ERROR (ACT) FOR DPU CSDB XMIT BUS 087/1111 57/457
HEADING ERROR (RAW) (DEGREES) 076/1100 4C/44C
HSI MODE DISCRETES 061/1085 3D/43D
HSI STIM DISPLAY (-003 STATUS) 215/1239 D7/4D7
IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET 093/1117 5D/45D
IAS POINTER DISPLACEMENT (-003 STATUS) 943/1967 3AF/7AF
IAS REFERENCE POINTER PLACEMENT (-003 STATUS) 946/1970 3B2/7B2
IAS SCALE SELECTION (-003 STATUS) 941/1965 3AD/7AD
IAS SCALE SELECTION (-003 STATUS) 942/1966 3AE/7AE
IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 560/1585 230/630
THRU THRU
571/1596 23B/63B
IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 575/1600 23F/63F
THRU THRU
586/1611 24A/64A
IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 590/1615 24D/64D
THRU THRU
601/1626 25A/65A
IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 605/1629 25D/65D
THRU THRU
616/1640 268/668
IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 620/1644 26C/66C
THRU THRU
631/1655 277/677
IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 635/1659 27B/67B
THRU THRU
646/1670 286/686
IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS), (-003 STATUS) 650/1674 28A/68A
THRU THRU
661/1685 295/695

Revised 12 May 1999 5-43

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 665/1689 299/699

THRU THRU
676/1700 2A4/6A4
IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 680/1704 2A8/6A8
THRU THRU
691/1715 2B3/6B3
IDENT FOR ITEM 9 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 695/1719 2B7/6B7
THRU THRU
706/1730 2C2/6C2
IDENT FOR ITEM 10 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 710/1734 2C6/6C6
THRU THRU
721/1745 2D1/6D1
IDENT FOR ITEM 11 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 725/1749 2D5/6D5
THRU THRU
736/1760 2E0/6E0
IDENT FOR ITEM 12 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 740/1764 2E4/6E4
THRU THRU
751/1775 2EF/6EF
IDENT FOR ITEM 13 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 755/1779 2F3/6F3
THRU THRU
766/1790 2FE/6FE
ILS STATUS 189/1213 BD/4BD
LATERAL DEVN (ACTIVE) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 090/1114 5A/45A
LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM) 192/1216 C0/4C0
LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS) 193/1217 C1/4C1
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION DATA (DIGITAL) (-003 STATUS) 947/1971 3B3/7B3
LRN 429 BANK COMMAND (-003 STATUS) 956/1980 3BC/7BC
LRN 429 BEARING TO WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS) 952/1976 3B8/7B8
LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS) 957/1981 3BD/7BD
LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS) 960/1984 3C0/7C0
LRN 429 DESIRED TRACK (-003 STATUS) 985/2009 3D9/7D9
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS) 950/1974 3B6/7B6
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS) 951/1975 3B7/7B7
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS) 954/1978 3BA/7BA
LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS) 955/1979 3BB/7BB
LRN 429 GROUND SPEED (-003 STATUS) 963/1987 3C3/7C3
LRN 429 GROUND SPEED (-003 STATUS) 964/1988 3C4/7C4
LRN 429 MAGNETIC HEADING (-003 STATUS) 972/1996 3CC/7CC
LRN 429 MAGNETIC VARIATION (-003 STATUS) 953/1977 3B9/7B9
LRN 429 TIME TO GO (-003 STATUS) 962/1986 3C2/7C2
LRN 429 VERTICAL DEVIATION (-003 STATUS) 961/1985 3C1/7C1
LRN 429 WIND DIRECTION (-003 STATUS) 958/1982 3BE/7BE

Revised 12 May 1999 5-44

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

LRN 429 WIND VELOCITY (-003 STATUS) 959/1983 3BF/7BF

LRN 6-WIRE STATUS 119/1143 77/477
LRN BANK COMMAND 116/1140 74/474
LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT 105/1129 69/469
LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS) 028/1052 1C/41C
LRN BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER TO+2 113/1137 71/471
LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION 117/1141 75/475
LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS) 029/1053 1D/41D
LRN CROSSTRACK DEVN 541/1564 21D/61D
LRN DESIRED TRACK 106/1130 6A/46A
LRN DESIRED TRACK 118/1142 76/476
LRN DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS) 027/1051 1B/41B
LRN DESIRED TRACK TO+1—TO+2 112/1136 70/470
LRN DESIRED TRACK TO—TO+1 WAYPOINT 109/1133 6D/46D
LRN DIST TO+1—TO+2 111/1135 6F/46F
LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (BCD MILES) 101/1125 65/465
LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (BCD MILES) 102/1126 66/466
LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT 103/1127 67/467
LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT 104/1128 68/468
LRN DISTANCE TO—TO+1 WAYPOINT 108/1132 6C/46C
LRN FLAGS (-003 STATUS) 986/2010 3DA/7DA
LRN GROUND SPEED (BCD KNOTS) 115/1139 73/473
LRN MAGNETIC VARIATION (MAG VAR) 122/1146 7A/47A
LRN TIME TO GO (BCD MINUTES) 114/1138 72/472
LRN TO+1 BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER 110/1134 6E/46E
LRN VERTICAL DEVN (DOTS) 542/1566 21E/61E
LRN WAYPOINT NUMBER (BINARY) 107/1131 6B/46B
LRN WIND DIRECTION 121/1145 79/479
LRN WIND DIRECTION 540/1564 21C/61C
LRN WIND VELOCITY 120/1144 78/478
MARKER BEARING 186/1210 BA/4BA
MFD JOYSTICK AND SELECT KEY STATUS 039/1063 27/427
MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR BEARING 037/1061 25/425
MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR DISTANCE (MILES) 038/1062 26/426
MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (-003 STATUS) 974/1998 3CE/7CE
MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS) 975/1999 3CF/7CF
MLS 429 ILS DATA (-003 STATUS) 973/1997 3CD/7CD

Revised 12 May 1999 5-45

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (-003 STATUS) 976/2000 3D0/7D0

MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS) 977/2001 3D1/7D1
MLS AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS) 938/1962 3AA/7AA
MLS BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS) 936/1960 3A8/7A8
MLS BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS) 932/1956 3A4/7A4
MLS CHANNEL SELECTION (BCD) (-003 STATUS) 935/1959 3A7/7A7
MLS DME FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS) 939/1963 3AB/7AB
MLS DME FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS) 940/1964 3AC/7AC
MLS FLAGS (-003 STATUS) 949/1973 3B5/7B5
MLS FRONT AZIMUTH COMPENSATED DEV (DOTS) (-003 STATUS) 937/1961 3A9/7A9
MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS) 933/1957 3A5/7A5
MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS) 934/1958 3A6/7A6
NAV DIAGNOSTICS 526/1550 20E/60E
NAV DIAGNOSTICS 527/1551 20F/60F
NAV DIAGNOSTICS 528/1552 210/610
NOT USED 000/1024 00/400
PITCH ANGLE (ACTIVE) 086/1110 56/456
PITCH STEERING COMMAND, SCALED FILTERED (VGU’S) 072/1096 48/448
PLAN MODE (-003 STATUS) 544/1568 220/620
PLAN MODE TEXT (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 545/1569 221/621
THRU THRU
556/1581 22C/62C
PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE (-003 STATUS) 980/2004 3D4/7D4
PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE (-003 STATUS) 981/2005 3D5/7D5
PRESET LATERAL SOURCE BRG TO WPT 065/1089 41/441
PRESET LATERAL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK 054/1078 36/436
PRESET LATERAL SOURCE DEVN (VGU’S) 066/1090 42/442
RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II 075/1099 4B/44B
RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED) 035/1059 23/423
RESERVED 123/1147 7B/47B
RESERVED 182/1206 B6/4B6
RESERVED 183/1207 B7/4B7
RESERVED 184/1208 B8/4B8
RESERVED 217/1241 D9/4D9
RESERVED 990/2014 3DE/7DE
THRU THRU
1023/2047 3FF/7FF
RESERVED (-002 STATUS) 214/1238 D6/4D6

Revised 12 May 1999 5-46

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

RESERVED (-002 STATUS) 215/1239 D7/4D7

ROLL ANGLE (ACTIVE) 085/1109 55/455
ROLL STEERING COMMAND, SCALED FILTERED (VGU’S) 073/1097 04/449
SCALED HSI VNAV DEVN 097/1121 61/461
SELECTED COURSE ERROR (ACT) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS 089/1113 59/459
SELECTED HEADING 141/1165 8D/48D
SPEED DEVN OR AOA DEVN (VGU’S) 063/1087 3F/43F
SYNCHRO VALID BITS 041/1065 29/429
“TO’ WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS) 770/1794 302/702
THRU THRU
781/1805 30D/70D
TREND VECTOR STATUS 025/1049 19/419
TREND VECTOR STATUS 026/1050 1A/41A
TREND VECTOR STATUS 030/1054 1E/41E
TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS) 027/1051 1B/41B
TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS) 028/1052 1C/41C
TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS) 029/1053 1D/41D
TRUE HEADING FOR EXTENDED PAGES (-003 STATUS) 982/2006 3D6/7D6
TVG (ACCELERATION 10 SEC) 091/1115 5B/45B
TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS) 077/1101 4D/44D
UNSCALED ACTIVE PITCH ANGLE FOR TVG (-003 STATUS) 011/1035 0B/40B
VERTICAL SPEED SELECTED 181/1205 B5/4B5
VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT BOTTOM OF VMO LINE (-003 STATUS) 944/1968 3B0/7B0
VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT TOP OF VMO LINE (-003 STATUS) 945/1969 3B1/7B1
VNAV AIMPOINT ALT/VS SELECT STATUS 179/1203 B3/4B3
VNAV COMPUTED VERTICAL ANGLE 178/1202 B2/4B2
VNAV DEVIATION 172/1196 AC/4AC
VNAV DIAGNOSTICS 529/1553 211/621
VNAV DIAGNOSTICS 530/1554 212/612
VNAV DIAGNOSTICS 531/1555 213/613
VNAV DIST TO ALT OR TRACK 174/1198 AE/4AE
VNAV DISTANCE TO ALTITUDE/TRACK 173/1197 AD/4AD
VNAV PITCH CMD AND VERT DEVN STATUS 170/1194 AA/4AA
VNAV PITCH COMMANDS 171/1195 AB/4AB
VNAV SELECTED AIMPOINT ALTITUDE 180/1204 B4/4B4
VNAV SELECTED ANGLE/COMPUTED ANGLE STATUS 176/1200 B0/4B0
VNAV SELECTED OFFSET 175/1199 AF/4AF

Revised 12 May 1999 5-47

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-5. EFIS-85B(3/13)/86B(3/13) Multiport RAM (MPR) Alphabetical Index.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
MPR DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

VNAV SELECTED VERTICAL ANGLE 177/1201 B1/4B1

VOR BEARING 187/1211 BB/4BB
VOR DATA STATUS 185/1209 B9/4B9
VOR FREQUENCY (BCD) 188/1212 BC/4BC
WIND DIRECTION (-003 STATUS) 988/2012 3DC/7DC
WXP DATA (PROCESSED) 040/1064 28/428

Revised 12 May 1999 5-48

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

000/1024 00/400 NOT USED

001/1025 01/401 DISPLAY DISPLAY DP STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-4- SLIDING ACTIVITY BIT
AND X-SIDE 3-0- NOT USED
AIOP
002/1026 02/402 DISPLAY GENERAL DP STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- DPU/MPU IN TEST MODE
14- DPU/MPU ROLLING MONITOR CHECK FAULT
13- DP MPRAM WRITE CHECK FAULT
12- DPU/MPU IN CONTROL = 0/1
11- BOX TYPE: DPU/MPU = 0/1
10- HDG COMPARATOR VALID
9- PITCH COMPARATOR VALID
8- ROLL COMPARATOR VALID
7- ROMS 0 AND 1 CHECKSUM FAULT
6- ROMS 2 AND 3 CHECKSUM FAULT
5- ROMS 4 AND 5 CHECKSUM FAULT
4- ROMS 6 AND 7 CHECKSUM FAULT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
003/1027 03/403 DISPLAY MPU DP/MFD DP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
PROCESSOR TEXT PAGE 15-9- NOT DEFINED
8- MFD REMOTE MODE EXT PAGE/FCS NORM = 1/0
7- MFD REMOTE MODE EXT PAGE (0000 TO 1111)
6- MFD REMOTE MODE EXT PAGE
5- MFD REMOTE MODE EXT PAGE
4- MFD REMOTE MODE EXT PAGE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
003/1027 03/403 DISPLAY MPU DP/MFD DP STATUS (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR TEXT PAGE 15- SEL0 TOP SELECT KEY
14- SEL1 SECOND SELECT KEY
13- SEL2 THIRD SELECT KEY
12- SEL3 BOTTOM SELECT KEY
11- J3 JOYSTICK LEFT
10- J2 JOYSTICK DOWN
9- J1 JOYSTICK RIGHT
8- J0 JOYSTICK UP
7- PAD = 0
6- PAD = 0
5- FCS/EXT PAGE/EXTENDED MAP
4- FCS/EXT PAGE/EXTENDED MAP
BITS: 5 4
0 0 FCS
0 1 EXT PAGE
1 0 EXT MAP
3-0- NOT DEFINED
004/1028 04/404 DISPLAY DP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-49

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

004/1028 04/404 DISPLAY DP STATUS (-003 STATUS)

PROCESSOR 15-10- NOT DEFINED
9- EXTENDED MAP MODE
8- EXTENDED MAP MODE
7- EXTENDED MAP MODE
BITS: 9 8 7 DEFINE CURRENT MAP MODE
0 0 0 RADAR ONLY
0 0 1 NAV ONLY
0 1 0 RADAR + NAV
0 1 1 NORTH UP - A/C ON EDGE OF TUBE
1 0 0 A/C AT TUBE CENTER
1 0 1 PLAN MODE - NORTH UP
6- CURRENT ACTIVE RANGE
5- CURRENT ACTIVE RANGE
4- CURRENT ACTIVE RANGE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
005/1029 05/405 DISPLAY DP STATUS
PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
006/1030 06/406 DISPLAY DP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
006/1030 06/406 AIOP DISPLAY ANALOG LRN XTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR 15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3- 0.001953125 DOT
2- 0.0009765625 DOT
1- 0.00048828125 DOT
0- 0.000244140625 DOT
007/1031 07/407 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS 15-0- SLIDING ACTIVITY BIT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR
008/1032 08/408 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- AIOP TEST MODE
14- AIOP FLAGS TEST
13- AIOP INCREMENTAL DATA TEST
12- AIOP IN CAT II TEST
11- NOT DEFINED
10- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED
009/1033 09/409 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-50

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

009/1033 09/409 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ANALOG LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 180 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2- 0.02197265625 DEGREE
1- 0.010986328125 DEGREE
0- 0.0054931640625 DEGREE
010/1034 OA/40A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP MODE SELECTION (ACTIVE/PRESELECT)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- LRN2 ACTIVE
14- LRN1 ACTIVE
13- ADF2 ACTIVE
12- ADF1 ACTIVE
11- VOR/LOC2 ACTIVE
10- VOR/LOC1 ACTIVE
9- LRN2 PRESELECT
8- LRN1 PRESELECT
7- ADF2 PRESELECT
6- ADF1 PRESELECT
5- VOR/LOC2 PRESELECT
4- VOR/LOC1 PRESELECT
3- MENU PRESELECT
2- COURSE CONTROL DOT PRESELECT
1-0- NOT DEFINED
011/1035 0B/40B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS (-002 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DESFINED
011/1035 0B/40B ANALOG I/O TVG I/O UNSCALED ACT PITCH ANGLE FOR TVG (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
012/1036 0C/40C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY AIOP STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
013/1037 0D/40D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SLIDING ACTIVITY BIT
NO. 1
014/1038 0E/40E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-12- NOT DEFINED
NO. 1 11- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT
10- INTERNAL RAM FAULT
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-51

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

015/1039 0F/40F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- ADC CSDB BUS VALID
NO. 1 14- DCP CSDB BUS VALID
13- DME CSDB BUS VALID
12- VNI CSDB BUS VALID
11- NAV CSDB BUS VALID
10- WXP SERIAL BUS VALID
9- FCS CSDB BUS VALID
8-0- NOT DEFINED
016/1040 10/410 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-6- NOT DEFINED
NO. 1 5- VALID = 1, (NAV CSDB VALID) .AND. (VOR BRG VALID)
4- VALID = 1, (DME CSDB VALID) .AND. (DME DISTANCE
VALID) .AND. (.NOT. DME HOLD)
3-0- NOT DEFINED
017/1041 11/411 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
NO. 1
018/1042 12/412 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP1 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR BUS ACTIVITY STATUS FOR EXTENDED DATA PAGES
NO. 1 ONLY
15-0- NOT DEFINED
019/1043 13/413 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SLIDING ACTIVITY BIT
NO. 2
020/\1044 14/414 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-12- NOT DEFINED
NO. 2 11- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT
10- INTERNAL RAM FAULT
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED
021/1045 15/415 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- AHRS BUS VALID = 1
NO. 2 14-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-52

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

022/1046 16/416 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS (6-WIRE BUS STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- NOT DEFINED
NO. 2 AND DIGITAL 14- WIND AVAILABLE = 1, IF LABEL MONITORS FOR
I/O PROCES- WIND DIRECTION AND WIND VELOCITY HAVE NOT
SOR NO. 1 TIMED OUT
13-10- NOT DEFINED
9- LRN 6-WIRE XTRACK DEVIATION (C0H LABEL) VALID =
1
8- LRN 6-WIRE XTRACK DEVIATION (C0H LABEL) 1/0 =
LEFT/RIGHT OF COURSE
7- NOT DEFINED
6- NOT DEFINED
5- MAG VAR VALID = 1
4- LRN STATUS VALID = 1
3- LRN 6-WIRE BRG TO WPT VALID = 1
2- LRN 6-WIRE DESIRED TRACK VALID = 1
1- LRN 6-WIRE DISPLAY DEVIATION VALID = 1
0- LRN 6-WIRE VERTICAL DEVIATION VALID = 1
023/1047 17/417 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS (-002 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
NO. 2
023/1047 17/417 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS (429 LRN STATUS) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- NOT DEFINED
NO. 2 14- WIND AVAILABLE = 1, IF LABEL MONITORS FOR
WIND DIRECTION AND WIND VELOCITY HAVE NOT
TIMED OUT
13-10- NOT DEFINED
9- LRN 429 XTRACK DEVIATION VALID = 1 (LABEL 72)
8- LRN 429 XTRACK DEVIATION 1/0 = LEFT/RIGHT OF
COURSE (LABEL 72)
7- NOT DEFINED 6- NOT DEFINED
5- MAG VAR VALID = 1 (LABEL E6)
4- NOT DEFINED
3- LRN 429 BRG TO WPT VALID = 1 (LABEL B2, TCN/RNV
LABEL 49)
2- NOT DEFINED
1- LRN 429 LATERAL DEVN VALID = 1 (LABEL 72)
0- LRN 429 VERTICAL DEVN VALID = 1 (LABEL F2)
024/1048 18/418 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DIOP2 STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
NO. 2
025/1049 19/419 TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS
VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SLIDING ACTIVITY BIT
PROCESSOR

Revised 12 May 1999 5-53

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

026/1050 1A/41A TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS

VECTOR PROCESSOR 15- LONGITUDINAL ACCELEROMETER VALID
PROCESSOR 14- ACCEL VECTOR CALCULATION VALID
13- ACCEL VECTOR LIMIT, DRAW BAR
12- REFERENCE AIRSPEED VALID
11- TVG IN TEST MODE
10- EPROM CHECKSUM FAULT
9- EXTERNAL RAM FAULT
8- EPROM REV NUMBER
7- EPROM REV NUMBER
6- EPROM REV NUMBER
5- EPROM REV NUMBER
4- EPROM REV NUMBER
3-0- NOT DEFINED
027/1051 1B/41B TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS)
VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
PROCESSOR
027/1051 1B/41B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR WILL CONTAIN ANALOG OR 6-WIRE DATA DEPENDING
ON STRAP
31 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
028/1052 1C/41C TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS)
VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
PROCESSOR
028/1052 1C/41C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR WILL CONTAIN ANALOG OR 6-WIRE DATA DEPENDING
ON STRAP 31
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
029/1053 1D/41D TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS (-002 STATUS)
VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
PROCESSOR
029/1053 1D/41D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR WILL CONTAIN ANALOG OR 6-WIRE DATA DEPENDING
ON STRAP 31
15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
030/1054 1E/41E TREND DISPLAY TREND VECTOR STATUS
VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- NOT DEFINED
PROCESSOR
031/1055 1F/41F ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (1-12)
PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 1 FCS TYPE
14- STRAP 2 FCS TYPE
13- STRAP 3 FCS TYPE
12- STRAP 4 LRN MAG REF, 1 = TRUE
11- STRAP 5 LNAV ANNUNCIATION
10- STRAP 6 LNAV ANNUNCIATION
9- STRAP 7 RADIO ALTIMETER TYPE
8- STRAP 8 RADIO ALTIMETER TYPE
7- STRAP 9 CROSS-SIDE DATA FLAG DSPLY
6- STRAP 10 VOR PORT SELECT
5- STRAP 11 DPU SIDE, 0 = PILOT
4- STRAP 12 COMPARATOR WARN RESET
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-54

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

032/1056 20/420 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (13-24)

PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 13 SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE SEL
14- STRAP 14 ATTITUDE/HEADING TYPE
13- STRAP 15 ADF TYPE
12- STRAP 16 LRN SYNCHRO TYPE, 0 = DESIRED TRACK
11- STRAP 17 HEADING, 1 = MAG
10- STRAP 18 VNAV TYPE
9- STRAP 19 REVERSIONARY, 1 = COMPOSITE
8- STRAP 20 COMMAND BARS, 1 = VBAR
7- STRAP 21 LINEAR DEVIATION, 1 = NORMAL
6- STRAP 22 MASTER WARN RESET
5- STRAP 23 SPEED DEVIATION SOURCE SEL
4- STRAP 24 VOR PORT SELECT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
033/1057 21/421 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (25-36)
PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 25 ATTITUDE SOURCE
14- STRAP 26 HEADING SOURCE
13- STRAP 27 AIR DATA ENABLE
12- STRAP 28 DCP SOURCE, 1 = ONSIDE
11- STRAP 29 RISING RUNWAY ENABLE
10- STRAP 30 DUAL HEADING SELECT
9- STRAP 31 LRN SOURCE
8- STRAP 32 LRN SOURCE
7- STRAP 33 FCS BUS, 1 = PRIMARY
6- STRAP 34 ADF TYPE SELECT
5- STRAP 35 ATTITUDE/HEADING TYPE
4- STRAP 36 LNAV ANNUNCIATION
3-0- NOT DEFINED
034/1058 22/422 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE, STRAPS (37-40)
PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 37 VNAV TYPE
14- STRAP 38 NOT USED
13- STRAP 39 SB 33 STRAP
12- STRAP 40 NOT USED
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- DELAYED ILS MODE, 0 = ILS, 1 = VOR
7-0- NOT DEFINED
035/1059 23/423 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY RADIO ALTITUDE (FILTERED)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 2048 FEET (MSB)
14- 1024 FEET
13- 512 FEET
12- 256 FEET
11- 128 FEET
10- 64 FEET
9- 32 FEET
8- 16 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3- 0.5 FOOT
2- 0.25 FOOT
1- 0.125 FOOT
0- 0.0625 FOOT

Revised 12 May 1999 5-55

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

036/1060 24/424 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LATERAL SOURCE DEVIATION (ACTIVE) 2’S COMPLE-
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MENT VGU’S
15- 2048 VGU (MSB)
14- 1024 VGU
13- 512 VGU
12- 256 VGU
11- 128 VGU
10- 64 VGU
9- 32 VGU
8- 16 VGU
7- 8 VGU
6- 4 VGU
5- 2 VGU
4- 1 VGU
3- 0.5 VGU
2- 0.25 VGU
1- 0.125 VGU
0- 0.0625 VGU
037/1061 25/425 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR BEARING 2’S COM-
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PLEMENT DEGREES
NO. 1 15- 180 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
038/1062 26/426 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK WAYPOINT CURSOR DISTANCE (MILES)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 512 MILES (MSB)
14- 256 MILES
13- 128 MILES
12- 64 MILES
11- 32 MILES
10- 16 MILES
9- 8 MILES
8- 4 MILES
7- 2 MILES
6- 1 MILE
5- 0.5 MILE
4- 0.25 MILE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
039/1063 27/427 DISPLAY DIGITAL I/O MFD JOYSTICK AND SELECT KEY STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- SEL0 TOP SELECT KEY
NO. 1 14- SEL1
13- SEL2
12- SEL3 BOTTOM SELECT KEY
11- J3 JOYSTICK LEFT
10- J2 JOYSTICK DOWN
9- J1 JOYSTICK RIGHT
8- J0 JOYSTICK UP
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-56

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

040/1064 28/428 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PROCESSED WXP DATA

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- (TGT) .AND. (TGT SWITCH), DISPLAY = 1
NO. 1 14- R4 BITS: R4 R2 R1 RANGES
13- R2 0 0 1 10 NMI
12- R1 0 1 0 25 NMI
0 1 1 50 NMI
1 0 0 100 NMI
1 0 1 200 NMI
1 1 0 300 NMI
11- M8 WXP-85, 0 = ON, 1 = OFF
10- M4 BITS: M4 M2 M1 WXP-85 MODES
9- M2 0 0 0 FAULT
8- M1 0 0 1 HOLD
0 1 0 STBY
0 1 1 TEST
1 0 0 WX
1 0 1 NORM
1 1 0 GAIN
1 1 1 MAP
7- TGT, 1 = DISPLAY
6-0- PADS = 0
041/1065 29/429 ANALOG I/O GENERAL SYNCHRO VALID BITS
PROCESSOR 15- PITCH SYNCHRO/AHRS DATA VALID
14- ROLL SYNCHRO/AHRS DATA VALID
13- HEADING SYNCHRO/AHRS DATA VALID
12- NOT DEFINED
11- ADF SYNCHRO VALID
10- BRG TO WPT SYNCHRO VALID
9- DESIRED TRACK SYNCHRO VALID
8- NOT DEFINED
7- DCP SELECTED HEADING SYNC = 1
6- DP DR ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW CONTROL BIT
5- DP MSG ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW CONTROL BIT
4- DP XTK ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW CONTROL BIT
3- EFIS XMIT - DIST ELEVATION CORRECTION (ACT)
2- EFIS XMIT - DIST VALID (ACTIVE)
1- DATA ORIGIN (ACTIVE)
0- FULL TIME ILS DATA ORIGIN
042/1066 2A/42A ANALOG I/O GENERAL DME GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
PROCESSOR 15- 2048 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 1024 KNOTS
13- 512 KNOTS
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-57

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

043/1067 2B/42B ANALOG I/O GENERAL DME TTG (TIME TO GO) (BINARY)
PROCESSOR 15- 204.8 MINUTES (MSB)
14- 102.4 MINUTES
13- 51.2 MINUTES
12- 25.6 MINUTES
11- 12.8 MINUTES
10- 6.4 MINUTES
9- 3.2 MINUTES
8- 1.6 MINUTES
7- 0.8 MINUTE
6- 0.4 MINUTE
5- 0.2 MINUTE
4- 0.1 MINUTE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
044/1068 2C/42C ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE INPUTS
PROCESSOR 15- NOT DEFINED
14- NOT DEFINED
13- STRAP 31, LRN 6-WIRE ONLY = 0
12- NOT DEFINED
11- DRIVE TRANSFER = 0
10- COMPOSITE/OFF
9- OFF/COMPOSITE
8- STRAP 27 AIR DATA DISPLAY DISABLE
7- FLIGHT DIRECTOR OFF = 1
6- FLIGHT DIRECTOR IN-VIEW BIAS
5- FLIGHT DIRECTOR VALID HIGH FLAG
4- LRN/INS VALID
3- NOT DEFINED
2- ADF VALID = 1
1- STRAP 30, DUAL CHP
0- DG/SLAVED = 0/1
045/1069 2D/42D ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETE INPUTS
PROCESSOR 15- RADIO ALTIMETER VALID
14- NOT DEFINED
13- ATTITUDE VALID
12- HEADING VALID
11- AIR DATA COMPUTER VALID
10- NOT DEFINED
9- GLIDESLOPE VALID
8- SPEED/AOA VALID
7- NOT DEFINED
6- ADF VALID =1
5- STRAP 30, DUAL CHP
4- DG/SLAVED = 0/1
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-58

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

046/1070 2E/42E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP SPEED DEVIATION FLAG IN VIEW
14- DP SPEED DEVIATION SCALE IN VIEW
13- DP VBARS IN VIEW
12- DP VBAR AIRCRAFT IN VIEW
11- DP CROSSPOINTERS IN VIEW
10- DP CROSSPOINTERS AIRCRAFT IN VIEW
9- DP FLIGHT DIRECTOR FLAG IN VIEW
8- FD COMMANDS IN VIEW
7- DP EXTREME ATTITUDE MODE IN VIEW
6- DP XSIDE DATA FLAG IN VIEW
5- DP DCP FLAG IN VIEW
4- DP ALTERNATE DCP ANNUNCIATOR IN VIEW
3-0- NOT DEFINED
047/1071 2F/42F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED (ALS = ACTIVE LATERAL
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SOURCE)
15- DP HSI DEVN BAR/ADI DEVN POINTER IN VIEW
14- DP HSI/ADI DEVN SCALE IN VIEW
13- DP COURSE POINTER IN VIEW
12- DP ALS FROM POINTER IN VIEW
11- DP ALS TO POINTER IN VIEW
10- DP HSI NAV DEVN FLAG IN VIEW
9- DP ACT LAT SOURCE MENU MODE
8- DP COURSE CONTROL DOT
7- NOT DEFINED
6- LRN FROM STATUS
5- LRN TO STATUS
4- ANALOG VNI ON
3- DELAYED GW/MLS/ANALOG VNI VALID = 1
2- HEADING ERROR VALID
1- ACTIVE HEADING ERROR VALID
0- ACTIVE LAT SOURCE CROSS-SIDE DATA BEING USED
048/1072 30/430 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP DEVN BAR IN VIEW
14- DP PLD DME NCD IN VIEW (YELLOW D)
13- DP COURSE PNTR IN VIEW
12- DP PLD DME FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP PLD DME HOLD IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP PRESEL LAT SOURCE NAV FLAG
9- DP PRESEL LAT SOURCE MENU MODE
8- DP COURSE CONTROL DOT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
049/1073 31/431 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- ACT BRG SOURCE LRN MODE
14- ACT BRG SOURCE VOR MODE
13- ACT BRG SOURCE ILS MODE
12- ACT BRG SOURCE ADF MODE
11- DP ACT BRG SOURCE PNTR IN VIEW
10- DP ACT BRG SOURCE NAV FLAG
9- DP ACT BRG SOURCE MENU MODE
8- MENU BOX/MASTER FLASH CONTROL BIT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
050/1074 32/432 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE TTG (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (MINUTES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 043/1067
051/1075 33/433 ANALOG I/O GENERAL CASE RELATED ACT LATL BRG ANGLE
PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033

Revised 12 May 1999 5-59

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

052/1076 34/434 ANALOG I/O GENERAL DISCRETES, STRAPS (25, 26, 28, 29)/ACT DCP
PROCESSOR 15- STRAP 25 ALTERNATE ATTITUDE
14- STRAP 26 ALTERNATE HEADING
13- STRAP 28 ALTERNATE DCP
12- STRAP 29 RISING RUNWAY INHIBIT
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- ANALOG LRN TO/FROM
7- ALTITUDE ALERT
6- DCP RANGE D2
5- DCP RANGE D1
4- DCP RANGE D0
3- DCP WIND SWITCH
2- DCP VNAV ENABLE SWITCH
1- DCP WXR ENABLE SWITCH
0- RESERVED
053/1077 35/435 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACT LATL SOURCE GROUND SPEED (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 2048 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 1024 KNOTS
13- 512 KNOTS
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3- 0.5 KNOT
2- 0.25 KNOT
1- 0.125 KNOT
0- 0.0625 KNOT
054/1078 36/436 ANALOG I/O GENERAL PRESET LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
PROCESSOR AND EFIS XMIT BUS (DEGREES)
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 009/1033
055/1079 37/437 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DESIRED TRACK
PROCESSOR AND EFIS XMIT BUS (DEGREES)
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 009/1033
056/1080 38/438 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE HEADING ERROR (FILTERED)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 009/1033

Revised 12 May 1999 5-60

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

057/1081 39/439 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED (FILTERED, KNOTS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- 512 KNOTS (MSB)
14- 256 KNOTS
13- 128 KNOTS
12- 64 KNOTS
11- 32 KNOTS
10- 16 KNOTS
9- 8 KNOTS
8- 4 KNOTS
7- 2 KNOTS
6- 1 KNOT
5- 0.5 KNOT
4- 0.25 KNOT
3- 0.125 KNOT
2- 0.0625 KNOT
1- 0.03125 KNOT
0- 0.015625 KNOT
058/1082 3A/43A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP ACT LATL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
14- DP PRESEL LATL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
13- DP ACT BEARING SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
12- DP ATT SOURCE; ATT1/ATT2 = 0/1
11- DP B/C ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DME HOLD
9- GROUND SPEED DATA VALID
8- TTG DATA VALID
7- ACTIVE ATTITUDE SOURCE VALID
6- ACTIVE HEADING SOURCE VALID
5- ACTIVE HEADING TRUE/MAG STRAP = 0/1
4- ACTIVE HEADING DG/SLAVED = 0/1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
059/1083 3B/43B ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI ACTIVE VERTICAL DEVN (VGU’S)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS LOCATION 036/1060
060/1084 3C/43C ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI MODE DISCRETES
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP VMO ALERT IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- DP VMO WARN IN VIEW CTL BIT
13- DP VMO YELLOW DIGITS IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVN SCALE IN VIEW
11- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVN PNTR IN VIEW
10- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVN FLAG IN VIEW
9- DP DH ANNUN IN VIEW
8- DP DH SET IN VIEW
7- DP RADIO ALT IN VIEW
6- DP RADIO ALT FLAG IN VIEW
5- DP ATTITUDE SCALE AND SKY RASTER IN VIEW
4- DP ACTIVE ATTITUDE FLAG IN VIEW
3- BACK COURSE MODE
2- ACTIVE GS VALID
1-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-61

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

061/1085 3D/43D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HSI MODE DISCRETES

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP DIGITAL SELECTED COURSE DATA IN VIEW
14- DP TRUE LUBBER IN VIEW
13- DP MAG LUBBER IN VIEW
12- DP HEADING FLAG IN VIEW
11- DP ACT LATL SOURCE LINEAR ANNUN IN VIEW
10- DP HEADING SOURCE, HDG1/HDG2 = 0/1
9- DP REVERSE ADI LATL DEVN PNTR SENSING
8- DP ACT LATL SOURCE ANGULAR ANNUN IN VIEW
7- DP SECTOR MODE SEL HDG LINE IN VIEW CTL BIT
6- DP DG ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
5- DP ACT MAP VALID CTL BIT
4- DP PRESEL MAP VALID CTL BIT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
062/1086 3E/43E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATL SOURCE DISTANCE (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (VARIABLE RESOLUTION)
15- 2048 OR 204.8 MILES (MSB)
14- 1024 OR 102.4 MILES
13- 512 OR 51.2 MILES
12- 256 OR 25.6 MILES
11- 128 OR 12.8 MILES
10- 64 OR 6.4 MILES
9- 32 OR 3.2 MILES
8- 16 OR 1.6 MILES
7- 8 OR 0.8 MILE
6- 4 OR 0.4 MILE
5- 2 OR 0.2 MILE
4- 1 OR 0.1 MILE
3- 0.5 OR 0.05 MILE
2- 0.25 OR 0.025 MILE
1- 0.125 OR 0.0125 MILE
0- 0.0625 OR 0.00625 MILE
063/1087 3F/43F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SPEED DEVN OR AOA DEVN (VGU’S)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 036/1060
064/1088 40/440 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE LATL SOURCE BRG TO WPT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
065/1089 41/441 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESET LATL SOURCE BRG TO WPT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
066/1090 42/442 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PRESET LATL SOURCE DEVN (VGU’S)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS LOCATION 036/1060

Revised 12 May 1999 5-62

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

067/1091 43/443 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- NAV PULSE INHIBIT FOR LRN ALD TRUE/MAG
CHANGE
14- LRN TRUE/MAG = 1/0
13- LRN DISTANCE VALID = 1
12- DP BRG1 XSIDE DATA USED ANNUN IN VIEW
11- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST DATA-X-1
10- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST DATA-X-0.1
9- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST NCD IN VIEW
8- DP ACT LATL SOURCE DIST FLAG IN VIEW
7- LRN VALID = 1
6- LRN BRG VALID = 1
5- LRN MAP DISPLAY VALID = 1
4- LRN AP DEVIATION VALID = 1
3- LRN AP SELECTED COURSE DATA VALID = 1
2- LRN AP NAV SOURCE VALID = 1
1- LRN GROUND SPEED VALID = 1
0- LRN TTG VALID = 1
068/1092 44/444 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP ADI VERT DEV SCALE AND PNTR IN VIEW
14- DP ADI VERT DEV FLAG IN VIEW
13- DP ADI B/L ANNUN IN VIEW
12- DP HSI B/L ANNUN IN VIEW
11- DP HSI VNAV COLOR, 0/1 = ONSIDE/XSIDE
10- DP ADI LATL DEVN FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- NOT DEFINED
8- DP X-SIDE ACT LATL SOURCE ANNUN IN VIEW
7- DP ADI VERTICAL DEVN SOURCE TYPE
6- DP ADI VERTICAL DEVN SOURCE TYPE
5- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVN SOURCE TYPE
4- DP HSI VERTICAL DEVN SOURCE TYPE
3-0- NOT DEFINED
069/1093 45/445 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (ALS = ACTIVE LATERAL SOURCE)
15- ALS LRN PORT
14- ALS VOR PORT
13- ALS ILS PORT
12- ALS LOC MODE AND ILS PORT
11- ACT APPROACH MODE
10- ALS SOURCE TRUE/MAG: 1/0
9- ACT BRG SOURCE TRUE/MAG: 1/0
8- PRE LATERAL SOURCE TRUE/MAG:1/0
7- DP HDG TRUE/MAG CONFLICT = 1
6- DP DSP/DCP 1/0 ANNUN IDENT BIT
5- ACT NAV PULSE INHIB FOR LRN ALD TRUE/MAG
CHANGE
4-0- NOT DEFINED
070/1094 46/446 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP NAV DATA FLAG IN VIEW
14- DP ALS GROUND SPEED NAV DATA IN VIEW
13- DP ALS TTG NAV DATA IN VIEW
12- DP ALS GROUND SPEED NCD IN VIEW
11- DP ALS TTG NCD IN VIEW
10- DP ALS OM IN VIEW
9- DP ALS MM IN VIEW
8- DP ALS IM IN VIEW
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-63

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

071/1095 47/447 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACT BINARY DIST FOR EFIS XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR NO. 2 PROC- 15- 2048 MILES (MSB)
ESSOR 14- 1024 MILES
13- 512 MILES
12- 256 MILES
11- 128 MILES
10- 64 MILES
9- 32 MILES
8- 16 MILES
7- 8 MILES
6- 4 MILES
5- 2 MILES
4- 1 MILE
3- 0.5 MILE
2- 0.25 MILE
1- 0.125 MILE
0- 0.0625 MILE
072/1096 48/448 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PITCH STEERING COMMAND, SCALED FILTERED (VGU’S)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS LOCATION 036/1060
073/1097 04/449 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ROLL STEERING COMMAND, SCALED FILTERED (VGU’S)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS LOCATION 036/1060
074/1098 4A/44A ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACCELERATION VECTOR (VGU’S)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS LOCATION 036/1060
075/1099 4B/44B ANALOG I/O ANALOG I/O RADIO ALT (UNFILTERED) FOR CAT II
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (FEET) SAME AS LOCATION 035/1059
AND DIGITAL
I/O NO. 2
PROCESSOR
076/1100 4C/44C ANALOG I/O GENERAL HEADING ERROR (RAW) (DEGREES)
PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
077/1101 4D/44D TREND DISPLAY TVG REF AIRSPEED (RAS)
VECTOR PROCESSOR 15- NOT DEFINED
GENERA- AND ANALOG 14- NOT DEFINED
TOR PROC- I/O PROCES- 13- NOT DEFINED
ESSOR SOR 12- 256 KNOTS (MSB)
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-64

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

078/1102 4E/44E ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE/PRESEL DCP SELECT MASKS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- ACTIVE LRN2 SELECTED
AND XSIDE 14- ACTIVE LRN1 SELECTED
AIOP 13- ACTIVE ADF2 SELECTED
12- ACTIVE ADF1 SELECTED
11- ACTIVE V/L2 SELECTED
10- ACTIVE V/L1 SELECTED
9- PRESEL LRN2 SELECTED
8- PRESEL LRN1 SELECTED
7- PRESEL ADF2 SELECTED
6- PRESEL ADF1 SELECTED
5- PRESEL V/L2 SELECTED
4- PRESEL V/L1 SELECTED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
079/1103 4F/44F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FCS ANNUNCIATORS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14- VERTICAL CAPTURE ANNUN
13- VERTICAL CAPTURE ANNUN
12- VERTICAL CAPTURE ANNUN
11- VERTICAL CAPTURE ANNUN
10- VERTICAL CAPTURE ANNUN
9- PAD = 0
8- LATERAL CAPTURE ANNUN
7- LATERAL CAPTURE ANNUN
6- LATERAL CAPTURE ANNUN
5- LATERAL CAPTURE ANNUN
4- LATERAL CAPTURE ANNUN
3-0- PADS = 0
080/1104 50/450 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE SELECTED HEADING DISPLAY DATA
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 256 DEGREES (MSB)
11- 128 DEGREES
10- 64 DEGREES
9- 32 DEGREES
8- 16 DEGREES
7- 8 DEGREES
6- 4 DEGREES
5- 2 DEGREES
4- 1 DEGREE
3-0- PADS = 0
081/1105 51/451 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP LOCALIZER COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- DP GLIDESLOPE COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
13- DP RADIO ALT COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP PITCH COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP ROLL COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP HEADING COMP IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- *** SPARE COMP IN VIEW
8- *** SPARE COMP IN VIEW
7-2- NOT DEFINED
1- DP LOCALIZER EXCESSIVE DEVN TRIP VALID
0- DP GLIDESLOPE EXCESSIVE DEVN TRIP VALID

Revised 12 May 1999 5-65

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

082/1106 52/452 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CAT II DP COMPARATOR STATUS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP LOC EXCESS DEVN IN VIEW CTL BIT
AND ANALOG 14- DP GS EXCESS DEVN IN VIEW CTL BIT
I/O PROCES- 13- NOT DEFINED
SOR 12- LOC VALID FOR 15 SEC
11- GS VALID FOR 15 SEC
10- NOT DEFINED
9- CAT II REQUEST
8- CAT II LIGHT CONDITIONS
7- RADIO ALTITUDE LESS THAN 50 FEET
6- AL101 AND GREATER THAN 480 FEET
5- CAT II GO AROUND MODE
4- CAT II REQUEST VALID
3- RADIO ALTITUDE LESS THAN 1000 FEET
2- RADIO ALTITUDE LESS THAN 600 FEET
1- RADIO ALTITUDE LESS THAN 400 FEET
0- RADIO ALTITUDE VALID AND ON SCALE
083/1107 53/453 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY DISCRETES, CALCULATED
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- DP AOA FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
14- ADC IAS VALID
13- DP REF AIRSPEED ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
12- DP AOA ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
11- DP IAS DATA IN VIEW CTL BIT
10- DP TVG DATA IN VIEW CTL BIT
9- ADC PRESELECT ERROR VALID
8- DP ANALOG FAST/SLOW SPD ANNUN IN VIEW CTL BIT
7- DP ANALOG FAST/SLOW SPD FLAG IN VIEW CTL BIT
6- NOT DEFINED
5- ADC VMO VALID
4- ADC TAS (TRUE AIRSPEED) VALID
3-0- NOT DEFINED
084/1108 54/454 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HEADING ANGLE (ACTIVE)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
085/1109 55/455 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ROLL ANGLE (ACTIVE)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
086/1110 56/456 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY PITCH ANGLE (ACTIVE)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
087/1111 57/457 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O HEADING ERROR (ACT) FOR DPU CSDB XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
NO. 2 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
088/1112 58/458 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FD ANNUNCIATORS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
14- PAD = 0 (GROWTH)
13- THIRD VERTICAL ARM
12- LATERAL ARM ANNUNCIATOR
11- LATERAL ARM ANNUNCIATOR
10- LATERAL ARM ANNUNCIATOR
9- LATERAL ARM ANNUNCIATOR
8- LATERAL ARM ANNUNCIATOR
7- YAW DAMPER ANNUN
6- YAW DAMPER ANNUN
5- PAD = 0
4- BC ANNUN IN VIEW
3-0- PADS = 0

Revised 12 May 1999 5-66

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

089/1113 59/459 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O SEL COURSE ERROR (ACT) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
NO. 2 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
090/1114 5A/45A ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O LATERAL DEVN (ACTIVE) FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
NO. 2 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
091/1115 5B/45B TREND ANALOG I/O TVG (ACCELERATION 10 SEC)
VECTOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (KNOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 057/1081
GENERA-
TOR PROC-
ESSOR
092/1116 5C/45C ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O ACTIVE VERT DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
NO. 2 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
093/1117 5D/45D ANALOG I/O DISPLAY IAS DISPLAY BASE OFFSET
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 036/1060
094/1118 5E/45E ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O FULL-TIME LOC DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT BUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER LEFT
NO. 2 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
095/1119 5F/45F ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O FULL-TIME GLIDESLOPE DEVN FOR EFIS CSDB XMIT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR BUS
NO. 2 SENSE: POSITIVE = STEER DOWN
15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
096/1120 60/460 ANALOG I/O DIGITAL I/O EFIS XMIT BUS DISCRETES
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- NAV PULSE
NO. 2 14- GLIDESLOPE DISPLAY ON
13- VNAV DISPLAY ON
12- ACTIVE LIN/ANG
11- ACTIVE SELECTED COURSE VALID
10- CRS ERROR VALID
9- ACTIVE LNAV SCALE CODE
8- ACTIVE LNAV SCALE CODE
7- ACTIVE TO
6- ACTIVE FROM
5- DH TRIP
4- ACTIVE LAT DEVN VALID
3- ACTIVE VERT DEVN VALID
2- ACTIVE DME HOLD
1- FULL TIME LOC DEVN VALID
0- FULL TIME GS DEVN VALID
097/1121 61/461 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY SCALED HSI VNAV DEVN
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (VGU) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 036/1060

Revised 12 May 1999 5-67

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

098/1122 62/462 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY FD ANNUNCIATORS

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- FCC-85 RUDDER TRIM ANNUN
14- FCC-85 AILERON TRIM ANNUN
13- FCC-85 ELEVATOR TRIM ANNUN
12- APS-65 TRIM ANNUN
11- SYNC ANNUN
10- FIRST VERTICAL ARMED ANNUN
9- FIRST VERTICAL ARMED ANNUN
8- SECOND VERTICAL ARMED ANNUN
7- AP ENGAGE ANNUN
6- AP ENGAGE ANNUN
5- AP ENGAGE ANNUN
4- AP ENGAGE ANNUN
3-0- PADS = 0
099/1123 63/463 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ACTIVE/PRESET SOURCE TYPE
PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14-10- ACTIVE SOURCE TYPE
9- PAD = 0
8-4- PRESET SOURCE TYPE
3-0- PADS = 0
100/1124 64/464 ANALOG I/O GENERAL BEARING/MENU SOURCE TYPE
PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
14-10- BEARING SOURCE TYPE
9- PAD = 0
8-4- MENU SOURCE TYPE
3-0- PADS = 0
101/1125 65/465 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (BCD MILES)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX, BITS 31-20 (HI BYTES)
NO. 2 AND ANALOG 15- STATUS (0,0 OR 1,1 = VALID)
I/O PROCES- 14- STATUS
SOR 13- 2000 MILES (MSB)
12- 1000 MILES
11- 800 MILES
10- 400 MILES
9- 200 MILES
8- 100 MILES
7- 80 MILES
6- 40 MILES
5- 20 MILES
4- 10 MILES
3-0- NOT DEFINED
102/1126 66/466 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (BCD MILES)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX, BITS 19-12 (LO BYTES)
NO. 2 AND ANALOG 15- 8 MILES (MSB)
I/O PROCES- 14- 4 MILES
SOR 13- 2 MILES
12- 1 MILE
11- 0.8 MILE
10- 0.4 MILE
9- 0.2 MILE
8- 0.1 MILE
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-68

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

103/1127 67/467 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR BINARY NAUTICAL MILES, HI 3 BYTES
NO. 2 PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX,
15- VALID = 0, IF 6-WIRE AND ANALOG, IF DISTANCE
ONLY IS VALID. IF 6-WIRE ONLY, IF DISTANCE, BEAR-
ING, AND COURSE ARE VALID.
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- PAD = 0
9- PAD = 0
7- PAD = 0
6- 2048 NMI (MSB)
5- 1024 NMI
4- 512 NMI
3-0- PADS = 0
104/1128 68/468 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR BINARY NAUTICAL MILES, LOW 12 BITS
NO. 2 PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 80 HEX.
15- 256 NMI (MSB)
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3- 0.0625 NMI
2- 0.03125 NMI
1- 0.015625 NMI
0- 0.0078125 NMI
105/1129 69/469 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY LRN BEARING TO WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B2 HEX, BITS 29-17,
OR DIGITAL AND ANALOG 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
I/O PROC- I/O PROCES- MAG VAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE
ESSOR NO. 2 SOR 15- 180.0 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-69

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

106/1130 6A/46A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F6 HEX, BITS 29-17,
NO. 2 AND ANALOG 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
I/O PROCES- MAGVAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE
SOR 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 105/1129
107/1131 6B/46B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WAYPOINT NUMBER (BINARY)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B2 HEX, BITS 14-8
NO. 2 15- VALID = 0, IF LRN WAYPOINT TO NUMBER IS VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- 64 BINARY (MSB)
9- 32
8- 16
7- 8
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
108/1132 6C/46C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DISTANCE TO—TO +1 WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR BINARY NAUTICAL MILES
NO. 2 LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS 28-17
15- 256 NMI (MSB)
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3-0- NOT USED
109/1133 6D/46D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK TO—TO+1 WAYPOINT
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F6 HEX, BITS 29-17
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
MAGVAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 105/1129

Revised 12 May 1999 5-70

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

110/1134 6E/46E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN TO+1 BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS 14-8
NO. 2 15- VALID = 0, IF LRN WAY POINT TO+1 NUMBER IS
VALID .AND. TO+1 DISTANCE IS VALID .AND. TO+1
COURSE IS VALID .AND..IF. A MAG COMPASS .THEN.
MAGVAR VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- 64 BINARY (MSB)
9- 32
8- 16
7- 8
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
111/1135 6F/46F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DIST TO+1—TO+2
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS 28-17
NO. 2 BINARY NMI
15-0- (NMI) SAME AS LOCATION 108/1132
112/1136 70/470 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN DESIRED TRACK TO+1—TO+2
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F6 HEX, BITS 29-17
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
MAGVAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCE
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 105/1129
113/1137 71/471 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN BINARY WAYPOINT NUMBER TO+2
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 76 HEX, BITS 14-8,
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 110/1134
114/1138 72/472 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN TIME TO GO (BCD MINUTES)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 40 HEX, BITS 31-16
NO. 2 15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 200 MINUTES
12- 100 MINUTES
11- 80 MINUTES
10- 40 MINUTES
9- 20 MINUTES
8- 10 MINUTES
7- 8 MINUTES
6- 4 MINUTES
5- 2 MINUTES
4- 1 MINUTE
3- 0.8 MINUTE
2- 0.4 MINUTE
1- 0.2 MINUTE
0- 0.1 MINUTE

Revised 12 May 1999 5-71

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

115/1139 73/473 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN GROUND SPEED (BCD KNOTS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 50 HEX, BITS 31-16
NO. 2 15- STATUS
14- STATUS
13- 2000 KNOTS
12- 1000 KNOTS
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT
116/1140 74/474 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LRN BANK COMMAND
PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 8A HEX, BITS 30-19
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
15- 180.0 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- BANK COMMAND VALID = 1
2- BANK COMMAND AVAILABLE = 1
1-0- NOT DEFINED
117/1141 75/475 DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN CROSSTRACK DEVIATION
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B6 HEX, BITS 8-19
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
118/1142 76/476 ANALOG I/O GENERAL LRN DESIRED TRACK
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
OR DIGITAL 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
I/O PROC-
ESSOR NO. 2

Revised 12 May 1999 5-72

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

119/1143 77/477 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 6-WIRE STATUS MULTIPLE BITS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- NOT DEFINED
NO. 2 14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- APPROACH MODE = 1
11- HSI VALID = 1
10- TRUE MODE = 1
9- FROM IN VIEW
8- TO IN VIEW
7- MESSAGE ALERT
6- CROSSTRACK WARN
5- DEAD RECKON
4- WAYPOINT ALERT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
120/1144 78/478 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WIND VELOCITY
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (BINARY KNOTS)
NO. 2 AND DIGITAL LRN 6-WIRE LABEL B0 HEX, BITS 31-20, THE STATUS IN-
I/O NO. 1 CORPORATES THE WIND VELOCITY ALONG WITH THE
PROCESSOR WIND DIRECTION STATUS. 0 IF VALID AND = 1 IF INVA-
LID.
(BINARY KNOTS)
15- VALID = 0, IF WIND DATA IS VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 256 KNOTS (MSB)
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT USED
121/1145 79/479 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WIND DIRECTION
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 70 HEX, BITS 31-20
NO. 2 AND DIGITAL BINARY ANGULAR FORMAT IN DEGREES.
I/O NO. 1 WIND ANGLE TRUE FROM WHICH THE WIND IS BLOW-
PROCESSOR ING.
MAGVAR CORRECTED IF LRN REFERENCE IS MAG.
WIND WITH AIRPLANE HEADING.
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
122/1146 7A/47A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN MAGNETIC VARIATION (MAG VAR)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 98 HEX, BITS 31-16
NO. 2 BINARY ANGULAR DATA. THE MAGVAR DATA IS AL-
READY CORRECTED FOR EAST OR WEST VARIATION.
THEREFORE ADD THE MAGVAR TO THE DATA TO BE
CORRECTED.
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 009/1033
123/1147 7B/47B RESERVED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-73

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

124/1148 7C/47C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP MODES

PROCESSOR 15- RA TEST
NO. 1 14- DH CONTROL
13- RADAR MODE
12- SECTOR MODE
11- HSI MODE
10- ELAPSED TIME
9- SPEED
8- TIME TO GO
7- WIND
6- VNAV
5- WX SWITCH
4- NOT USED
3- ALTITUDE ALERT
2- MAP RANGE BITS: 2 1 0 RANGES
1- MAP RANGE 0 0 0 RNG 0
0- MAP RANGE 0 0 1 RNG 1
0 1 0 RNG 2
0 1 1 RNG 3
1 0 0 RNG 4
1 0 1 RNG 5
125/1149 7D/47D ANALOG I/O GENERAL DCP MODE (ACTIVE)
PROCESSOR 15- RA TEST
14- DH CONTROL
13- RADAR MODE
12- SECTOR MODE
11- HSI MODE
10- ELAPSED TIME
9- SPEED
8- TIME TO GO
7- WIND
6- VNAV
5- WX SWITCH
4- NOT USED
3- ALTITUDE ALERT
2- MAP RANGE BITS: 2 1 0 RANGES
1- MAP RANGE 0 0 0 RNG 0
0- MAP RANGE 0 0 1 RNG 1
0 1 0 RNG 2
0 1 1 RNG 3
1 0 0 RNG 4
1 0 1 RNG 5

Revised 12 May 1999 5-74

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

126/1150 7E/47E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP ELAPSED TIME (MIN/SEC) AND STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- M/S 80
NO. 1 14- M/S 40
13- M/S 20
12- M/S 10
11- M/S 8
10- M/S 4
9- M/S 2
8- M/S 1
7- ROM FAULT
6- RAM FAULT
5- SWITCH SHIFT REGISTER FAULT
4- AUX SHIFT REGISTER FAULT
3- SWITCH AUX SHIFT REGISTER FAULT
2- DCP-85E IDENT = 1
1- CAT II REQUEST
0- DSP-85 IDENT = 1
127/1151 7F/47F ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP ET (MIN/SEC) AND STATUS
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 126/1150
128/1152 80/480 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP ET (HR/MIN)
PROCESSOR 15- H/M 80
NO. 1 14- H/M 40
13- H/M 20
12- H/M 10
11- H/M 8
10- H/M 4
9- H/M 2
8- H/M 1
7-0- SPARE
129/1153 81/481 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ACTIVE DCP ET - HR/MIN
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 128/1152
130/1154 82/482 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP BEARING SENSOR SELECT
PROCESSOR 15- LRN2
NO. 1 14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- MENU MODE
8- NOT USED
7-0- NOT DEFINED
131/1155 83/483 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP PRESELECT COURSE SENSOR SELECT
PROCESSOR 15- LRN2
NO. 1 14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9- MENU MODE
8- CRS CONTROL FLAG
7-0- NOT DEFINED
132/1156 84/484 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP ACTIVE COURSE SENSOR SELECT
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 131/1155
NO. 1

Revised 12 May 1999 5-75

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

133/1157 85/485 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP MENU CURSOR MASK

PROCESSOR 15- LRN2
NO. 1 14- LRN1
13- ADF2
12- ADF1
11- VOR/LOC2
10- VOR/LOC1
9-0- PADS = 0
134/1158 86/486 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-8- SPARE
NO. 1 7-0- NOT DEFINED
135/1159 87/487 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATORS
PROCESSOR 15- ANNUN INPUT 24
NO. 1 14- ANNUN INPUT 23
13- ANNUN INPUT 22
12- ANNUN INPUT 21
11- ANNUN INPUT 20
10- ANNUN INPUT 19
9- ANNUN INPUT 18
8- ANNUN INPUT 17
7- ANNUN INPUT 16
6- ANNUN INPUT 15
5- ANNUN INPUT 14
4- ANNUN INPUT 13
3- ANNUN INPUT 12
2- ANNUN INPUT 11
1- ANNUN INPUT 10
0- ANNUN INPUT 9
136/1160 88/488 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATORS
PROCESSOR 15- ANNUN INPUT 8
NO. 1 14- ANNUN INPUT 7
13- ANNUN INPUT 6
12- ANNUN INPUT 5
11- ANNUN INPUT 4
10- ANNUN INPUT 3
9- ANNUN INPUT 2
8- ANNUN INPUT 1
7-0- NOT DEFINED
137/1161 89/489 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ACTIVE COURSE DATA
PROCESSOR SCALING FACTOR OF 360/4096
NO. 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 037/1061
138/1162 8A/48A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-8- SPARE
NO. 1 7-0- NOT DEFINED
139/1163 8B/48B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP PRESELECTED COURSE DATA
PROCESSOR SCALING FACTOR OF 360/4096
NO. 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 037/1061
140/1164 8C/48C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-8- SPARE
NO. 1 7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-76

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

141/1165 8D/48D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL SELECTED HEADING

PROCESSOR SCALING FACTOR OF 360/4096
NO. 1 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 037/1061
142/1166 8E/48E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-8- SPARE
NO. 1 7-0- NOT DEFINED
143/1167 8F/48F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET)
PROCESSOR 15- NOT USED
NO. 1 14- NOT USED
13- 512 FEET (MSB)
12- 256 FEET
11- 128 FEET
10- 64 FEET
9- 32 FEET
8- 16 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
144/1168 90/490 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ACTIVE DCP DECISION HEIGHT (BINARY 0 TO 999 FEET)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- (FEET) SAME AS LOCATION 143/1167
145/1169 91/491 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-8- SPARES
NO. 1 7-0- NOT DEFINED
146/1170 92/492 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1
PROCESSOR 15- FREQ VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- DISTANCE VALID = 1
13- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
12- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
11- DME HOLD ON = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- (0,1) CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
8- (1,0) CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE
7-0- NOT DEFINED
147/1171 93/493 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
PROCESSOR 15- 80 MHZ
NO. 1 14- 40 MHZ
13- 20 MHZ
12- 10 MHZ
11- 8 MHZ
10- 4 MHZ
9- 2 MHZ
8- 1 MHZ
7- 0.8 MHZ
6- 0.4 MHZ
5- 0.2 MHZ
4- 0.1 MHZ
3- 0.08 MHZ
2- 0.04 MHZ
1- 0.02 MHZ
0- 0.01 MHZ

Revised 12 May 1999 5-77

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

148/1172 94/494 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1

PROCESSOR NMI
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 104/1128
149/1173 95/495 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 1 (BCD NMI)
PROCESSOR 15- 800 NMI
NO. 1 14- 400 NMI
13- 200 NMI
12- 100 NMI
11- 80 NMI
10- 40 NMI
9- 20 NMI
8- 10 NMI
7- 8 NMI
6- 4 NMI
5- 2 NMI
4- 1 NMI
3- 0.8 NMI
2- 0.4 NMI
1- 0.2 NMI
0- 0.1 NMI
150/1174 96/496 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2
PROCESSOR 15- FREQ VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- DISTANCE VALID = 1
13- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
12- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
11- DME HOLD ON = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- (0,1) CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
8- (1,0) CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE
7-0- NOT DEFINED
151/1175 97/497 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME FREQUENCY - CHANNEL 2 (BCD)
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 147/1171
NO. 1
152/1176 98/498 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (NMI)
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS 104/1128
NO. 1
153/1177 99/499 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DISTANCE - CHANNEL 2 (BCD NMI)
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS 149/1173
NO. 1
154/1178 9A/49A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
PROCESSOR 15- TIME TO GO AND VELOCITY VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- PAD = 0
13- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
12- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- (0,1) CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
8- (1,0) CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-78

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

155/1179 9B/49B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME TIME TO GO - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)

PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
NO. 1 14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- 100 MINUTES
11- 80 MINUTES
10- 40 MINUTES
9- 20 MINUTES
8- 10 MINUTES
7- 8 MINUTES
6- 4 MINUTES
5- 2 MINUTES
4- 1 MINUTE
3- 0.8 MINUTE
2- 0.4 MINUTE
1- 0.2 MINUTE
0- 0.1 MINUTE
156/1180 9C/49C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 1 (BCD)
PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
NO. 1 14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT
157/1181 9D/49D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 2 (TTG AND VELOCITY)
PROCESSOR 15- TIME TO GO AND VELOCITY VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- PAD = 0
13- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
12- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- (0,1) CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
8- (1,0) CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE
7-0- NOT DEFINED
158/1182 9E/49E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME TIME TO GO - CHANNEL 2 (BCD MINUTES)
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 155/1179
NO. 1
159/1183 9F/49F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME GROUND SPEED - CHANNEL 2 (BCD KNOTS)
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 156/1180
NO. 1

Revised 12 May 1999 5-79

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

160/1184 A0/4A0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME STATUS - CHANNEL 1 IDENT

PROCESSOR 15- IDENT VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- ANALOG AND 568 DATA
13- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
12- (0,1) SEARCH, (1,0) PRETRACK
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- (0,1) CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
8- (1,0) CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE
7-0- NOT DEFINED
161/1185 A1/4A1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 1
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR THE ASCII CHARACTER WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED
NO. 1 FROM IT, ROTATED TWICE TO THE LEFT (WITH TRAIL-
ING 0’S) AND PUT IN THE POSITION SHOWN. THE CHAR-
ACTER WILL BE USED DIRECTLY IN EFIS AS THE CHAR-
ACTER ADDRESS.
15- 1 = INVALID, 1ST CHARACTER ONLY
14-12- PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5- CHARACTER
4- CHARACTER (LSB)
3-0- PAD = 0
162/1186 A2/4A2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 2
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 161/1185
NO. 1
163/1187 A3/4A3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 3
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 161/1185
NO. 1
164/1188 A4/4A4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 1, CHARACTER 4
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 161/1185
NO. 1
165/1189 A5/4A5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME IDENT STATUS - CHANNEL 2
PROCESSOR 15- IDENT VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- ANALOG AND 568 DATA
13- (0,1) = SEARCH, (1,0) = PRETRACK
12- (0,1) = SEARCH, (1,0) = PRETRACK
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- (0,1) CHANNEL 1 ACTIVE
8- (1,0) CHANNEL 2 ACTIVE
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-80

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

166/1190 A6/4A6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR THE ASCII CHARACTER WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED
NO. 1 FROM IT, ROTATED TWICE TO THE LEFT (WITH TRAIL-
ING 0’S) AND PUT IN THE POSITION SHOWN. THE CHAR-
ACTER WILL BE USED DIRECTLY IN EFIS AS THE CHAR-
ACTER ADDRESS.
15- 1 = INVALID, 1ST CHARACTER ONLY
14-12 PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5- CHARACTER
4- CHARACTER (LSB)
3-0- PAD = 0
167/1191 A7/4A7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 2
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 166/1190
NO. 1
168/1192 A8/4A8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 3
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 166/1190
NO. 1
169/1193 A9/4A9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DME IDENT - CHANNEL 2, CHARACTER 4
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 166/1190
NO. 1
170/1194 AA/4AA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV PITCH CMD AND VERT DEVN STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- PITCH COMMAND VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- VERTICAL DEVN VALID = 1
13- RESERVED VERTICAL CLEAR
12- VNAV STATE STANDBY = 1
11- FCS VNAV CAPTURE = 1
10- CAPTURE ALERT ON = 1
9- LRU IDENT
8- DATA IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
171/1195 AB/4AB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV PITCH COMMANDS
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES
NO. 1 15- 90.0 DEGREES
14- 45.0 DEGREES
13- 22.5 DEGREES
12- 11.25 DEGREES
11- 5.625 DEGREES
10- 2.8125 DEGREES
9- 1.40625 DEGREES
8- 0.703125 DEGREE
7- 0.3515625 DEGREE
6- 0.17578125 DEGREE
5- 0.087890625 DEGREE
4- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
3- 0.02197265625 DEGREE
2- 0.010986328125 DEGREE
1- 0.0054931640625 DEGREE
0- 0.00274658203125 DEGREE

Revised 12 May 1999 5-81

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

172/1196 AC/4AC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV DEVIATION

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15- 8192 FEET (MSB)
14- 4096 FEET
13- 2048 FEET
12- 1024 FEET
11- 512 FEET
10- 256 FEET
9- 128 FEET
8- 64 FEET
7- 32 FEET
6- 16 FEET
5- 8 FEET
4- 4 FEET
3- 2 FEET
2- 1 FOOT
1- 0.5 FOOT
0- 0.25 FOOT
173/1197 AD/4AD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV DISTANCE TO ALTITUDE/TRACK
PROCESSOR 15- DISTANCE ALTITUDE VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- DISTANCE TRACK VALID = 1
13- OFFSET VALID = 1
12- FCS VNAV SELECT = 1
11- VNAV STATE CAPTURE = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- LRU IDENT
8- DATA IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
174/1198 AE/4AE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV DIST TO ALT OR TRACK
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15-0- (NMI) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 071/1095
175/1199 AF/4AF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV SELECTED OFFSET 2’S COMPLEMENT
PROCESSOR 15-0- (NMI) SAME AS LOCATION 071/1095
NO. 1
176/1200 B0/4B0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV SELECTED ANGLE/COMPUTED ANGLE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- SELECTED ANGLE VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- COMPUTED ANGLE VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- ANGLE MODE ARMED = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- LRU IDENT
8- DATA IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
177/1201 B1/4B1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV SELECTED VERTICAL ANGLE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 171/1195
178/1202 B2/4B2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV COMPUTED VERTICAL ANGLE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS LOCATION 171/1195

Revised 12 May 1999 5-82

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

179/1203 B3/4B3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV AIMPOINT ALT/VS SELECT STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- ALTITUDE AIMPOINT VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- VERTICAL SPEED SELECTED VALID = 1
13- VNAV SCALE ENABLE = 1
12- ELEV CORRECTION = 1
11- VERTICAL SPEED SELECTED MODE ARMED = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- LRU IDENT
8- DATA IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
180/1204 B4/4B4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV SELECTED AIMPOINT ALTITUDE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15- 32 768 FEET (MSB)
14- 16 384 FEET
13- 8 192 FEET
12- 4 096 FEET
11- 2 048 FEET
10- 1 024 FEET
9- 512 FEET
8- 256 FEET
7- 128 FEET
6- 64 FEET
5- 32 FEET
4- 16 FEET
3- 8 FEET
2- 4 FEET
1- 2 FEET
0- 1 FOOT
181/1205 B5/4B5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VERTICAL SPEED SELECTED
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT (FT/MIN)
NO. 1 15- 20 480 FT/MIN (MSB)
14- 10 240 FT/MIN
13- 5 120 FT/MIN
12- 2 560 FT/MIN
11- 1 280 FT/MIN
10- 640 FT/MIN
9- 320 FT/MIN
8- 160 FT/MIN
7- 80 FT/MIN
6- 40 FT/MIN
5- 20 FT/MIN
4- 10 FT/MIN
3- 5 FT/MIN
2- 2.5 FT/MIN
1- 1.25 FT/MIN
0- 0.625 FT/MIN
182/1206 B6/4B6 RESERVED
183/1207 B7/4B7 RESERVED
184/1208 B8/4B8 RESERVED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-83

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

185/1209 B9/4B9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR DATA STATUS

PROCESSOR 15- VOR VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- FREQ VALID = 1
13- 2/5 TUNE ENABLE = 1
12- MARKER SENSE LOW = 1
11- ROT MOD FILTER ACTIVATION = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
186/1210 BA/4BA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL MARKER BEARING
PROCESSOR FROM A/C TO STATION AND MARKERS
NO. 1 2’S COMPLEMENT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 037/1061
187/1211 BB/4BB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR BEARING
PROCESSOR FROM A/C TO STATION
NO. 1 2’S COMPLEMENT
15-0- (DEGREES) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 037/1061
188/1212 BC/4BC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VOR FREQUENCY (BCD)
PROCESSOR 15- PAD = 0
NO. 1 14- 40 MHZ
13- 20 MHZ
12- 10 MHZ
11- 8 MHZ
10- 4 MHZ
9- 2 MHZ
8- 1 MHZ
7- 0.8 MHZ
6- 0.4 MHZ
5- 0.2 MHZ
4- 0.1 MHZ
3- 0.08 MHZ
2- 0.04 MHZ
1- 0.02 MHZ
0- 0.01 MHZ
189/1213 BD/4BD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ILS STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- GS VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- LOC VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- MARKER SENSE LOW = 1
11- GLS/NO, NO = 1
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-84

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

190/1214 BE/4BE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL GLIDESLOPE DEVN (DDM)

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 GS DEVN % / 100 DDM (FULL SCALE = 0.175)
15- 0.80 DDM (MSB)
14- 0.4 DDM
13- 0.2 DDM
12- 0.1 DDM
11- 0.05 DDM
10- 0.025 DDM
9- 0.125 DDM
8- 0.0625 DDM
7- 0.03125 DDM
6- 0.015625 DDM
5- 0.0078125 DDM
4- 0.00390625 DDM
3- PAD = 0
2- INNER MARKER ON = 1
1- MIDDLE MARKER ON = 1
0- OUTER MARKER ON = 1
191/1215 BF/4BF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (DOTS)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
192/1216 C0/4C0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DDM)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 LOC DEVN % / 100 DDM (FULL SCALE = 0.155)
15- 0.40 DDM (MSB)
14- 0.2 DDM
13- 0.1 DDM
12- 0.05 DDM
11- 0.025 DDM
10- 0.125 DDM
9- 0.0625 DDM
8- 0.03125 DDM
7- 0.015625 DDM
6- 0.0078125 DDM
5- 0.00390625 DDM
4- 0.001953125 DDM
3-0- PADS = 0
193/1217 C1/4C1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
194/1218 C2/4C2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS RATES (BODY AXIS) STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- DATA VALID = 1
NO. 2 14- PAD = 0
13- DG MODE ON = 1
12- STRUT SWITCH GROUND = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- PAD = 0

Revised 12 May 1999 5-85

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

195/1219 C3/4C3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS PITCH RATE (DEG/SEC)

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 2 15- 256 DEG/SEC (MSB)
14- 128 DEG/SEC
13- 64 DEG/SEC
12- 32 DEG/SEC
11- 16 DEG/SEC
10- 8 DEG/SEC
9- 4 DEG/SEC
8- 2 DEG/SEC
7- 1 DEG/SEC
6- 0.5 DEG/SEC
5- 0.25 DEG/SEC
4- 0.125 DEG/SEC
3- 0.0625 DEG/SEC
2- 0.03125 DEG/SEC
1- 0.015625 DEG/SEC
0- 0.0078125 DEG/SEC
196/1220 C4/4C4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ROLL RATE (DEG/SEC)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 195/1219
197/1221 C5/4C5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS YAW RATE (DEG/SEC)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 195/1219
198/1222 C6/4C6 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 2 15- DATA VALID = 1
14- PAD = 0
13- DG MODE = 1
12- STRUT SWITCH GROUND = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
199/1223 C7/4C7 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR 15- 10 G’S (MSB)
NO. 2 14- 5 G’S
13- 2.5 G’S
12- 1.25 G’S
11- 0.625 G’S
10- 0.3125 G’S
9- 0.15625 G’S
8- 0.0390625 G’S
7- 0.01953125 G’S
6- 0.009765625 G’S
5- 0.0048828125 G’S
4- 0.00244140625 G’S
3- 0.001220703125 G’S
2- 0.0006103525625 G’S
1- 0.00030517678125 G’S
0- 0.000152588390625 G’S
200/1224 C8/4C8 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS LATERAL ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 199/1223

Revised 12 May 1999 5-86

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

201/1225 C9/4C9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS NORMAL ACCELERATION

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 199/1223
202/1226 CA/4CA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ACCELERATIONS STATUS
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 2 15- DATA VALID = 1
14- PAD = 0
13- DG MODE ON = 1
12- STRUT SWITCH GROUND = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
203/1227 CB/4CB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ALONG HEADING ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 199/1223
204/1228 CC/4CC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS CROSS HEADING ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 199/1223
205/1229 CD/4CD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS VERTICAL ACCELERATION
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 199/1223
206/1230 CE/4CE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ATTITUDE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- ATTITUDE VALID = 1
NO. 2 14- HEADING VALID = 1
13- RESERVED (REV MODE 2)
12- REV MODE 1, ON = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
207/1231 CF/4CF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS PITCH ATTITUDE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 2 15- 180 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2- 0.02197265625 DEGREE
1- 0.010986328125 DEGREE
0- 0.0054931640625 DEGREE
208/1232 D0/4D0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS ROLL ATTITUDE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231

Revised 12 May 1999 5-87

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

209/1233 D1/4D1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
210/1234 D2/4D2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS CONTROL STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- ATTITUDE VALID = 1
NO. 2 14- HEADING VALID = 1
13- RESERVED (REV MODE 2)
12- REV MODE 1, ON = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1 (STIM)
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
211/1235 D3/4D3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS MAGNETIC HEADING
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
212/1236 D4/4D4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS LATITUDE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
213/1237 D5/4D5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS STIM MODE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 2 DIFFERENCE LEFT COMPASS CARD SLAVING AND 2
DIGIT STIM MODE
15- 10 DEGREES DIFF LEFT (MSB)
14- 5 DEGREES DIFF LEFT
13- 2.5 DEGREES DIFF LEFT
12- 1.25 DEGREES DIFF LEFT
11- 0.625 DEGREE DIFF LEFT
10- 0.3125 DEGREE DIFF LEFT
9- 0.15625 DEGREE DIFF LEFT
8- 0.0390625 DEGREE DIFF LEFT
7- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
6- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
5- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
4- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
3- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
2- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
1- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
0- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
214/1238 D6/4D6 RESERVED (-002 STATUS)
214/1238 D6/4D6 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY ADI STIM DISPLAY (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- IF = 1, STIM XX IN VIEW ON ADI
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- NOT DEFINED
11- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
10- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
9- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
8- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
7- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
6- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
5- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
4- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
215/1239 D7/4D7 RESERVED (-002 STATUS)

Revised 12 May 1999 5-88

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

215/1239 D7/4D7 ANALOG I/O DISPLAY HSI STIM DISPLAY (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- IF = 1, STIM XX IN VIEW ON HSI
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- NOT DEFINED
11- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
10- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
9- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
8- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
7- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
6- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
5- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
4- STIMULUS MODE CYCLE IDENT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
216/1240 D8/4D8 ANALOG I/O GENERAL ADF BEARING ANALOG
PROCESSOR AIOP SYNCHRO DATA
2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
217/1241 D9/4D9 RESERVED
218/1242 DA/4DA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
PROCESSOR 15- GLIDESLOPE EXTENSION
NO. 1 14- GLIDESLOPE CAPTURE
13- GLIDESLOPE ARM
12- NAV 1 CAPTURE
11- NAV 1 ARM
10- SPEED HOLD
9- ALTITUDE PRESELECT CAPTURE
8- ALTITUDE PRESELECT ARM
7-0- NOT DEFINED
219/1243 DB/4DB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
PROCESSOR 15- VERTICAL SPEED
NO. 1 14- CLIMB
13- GO AROUND PITCH
12- GO AROUND ROLL
11- PITCH
10- ROLL
9- VNAV CAPTURE
8- VNAV ARM
7- APPROACH CAPTURE
6- APPROACH ARM
5- SPARE
4- REPORT CODE
3- ALTITUDE HOLD
2- IAS HOLD
1- MACH HOLD
0- TEST

Revised 12 May 1999 5-89

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

220/1244 DC/4DC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS

PROCESSOR 15- NAV 2 CAPTURE
NO. 1 14- NAV 2 ARMED
13- SPARE
12- SPARE
11- SPARE
10- SPARE
9- SPARE
8- SPARE
7- BACK COURSE
6- DEAD RECKONING
5- HEADING SELECT
4- HEADING HOLD
3- TURBULENCE
2- TRANSFER
1- DESCENT
0- HALF
221/1245 DD/4DD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ANNUNCIATIONS
PROCESSOR 15-11- SPARES
NO. 1 10- NAC TEST
9- V-BAR IN VIEW
8- STEERING VALID
7- RADIO COUPLED
6- RUDDER OUT OF TRIM
5- AILERON OUT OF TRIM
4- ELEVATOR OUT OF TRIM
3- YAW DAMPER DISCONNECT
2- AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT
1- TRIM BAD
0- SPARE
222/1246 DE/4DE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS MODE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- HEADING BUG SYNC = 1
NO. 1 14-13- SPARES
12- ROLL STEERING IN VIEW
11- PITCH STEERING IN VIEW
10- AIRCRAFT WEIGHT HEAVY
9- AIRCRAFT WEIGHT MEDIUM
8- AIRCRAFT WEIGHT LIGHT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
223/1247 DF/4DF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-0- SPARES
NO. 1
224/1248 E0/4E0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-0- SPARES
NO. 1
225/1249 E1/4E1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS MODE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- REVERSE
NO. 1 14- GO AROUND
13- ENGAGE YAW DAMPER
12- ENGAGE AUTOPILOT
11- SOFT RIDE
10- DESCENT
9- TRIM RUN
8- AUTOPILOT FAIL
7-0- SPARES

Revised 12 May 1999 5-90

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

226/1250 E2/4E2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS STEERING STATUS

PROCESSOR 15- ALTITUDE REFERENCE VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- PITCH STEER VALID = 1
13- ROLL STEER VALID = 1
12-11- PAD = 0
10- RESERVED (TEST)
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
227/1251 E3/4E3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ALTITUDE REFERENCE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT (BIASED +24 576 FEET)
NO. 1 15- 32 768 FEET (MSB)
14- 16 384 FEET
13- 8 192 FEET
12- 4 096 FEET
11- 2 048 FEET
10- 1 024 FEET
9- 512 FEET
8- 256 FEET
7- 128 FEET
6- 64 FEET
5- 32 FEET
4- 16 FEET
3- 8 FEET
2- 4 FEET
1- 2 FEET
0- 1 FOOT
228/1252 E4/4E4 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS PITCH STEER
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
229/1253 E5/4E5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS ROLL STEER
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
230/1254 E6/4E6 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS VS/IAS/MACH REFERENCE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- VS REF : DSPLY ON CMD = 1
NO. 1 14- IAS REF : DSPLY ON CMD = 1
13- MACH REF : DSPLY ON CMD = 1
12- VS BUG : SLAVE = 1
11- IAS BUG : SLAVE = 1
10- RESERVED TEST
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
231/1255 E7/4E7 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS REFERENCE VERTICAL SPEED
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT FEET/MINUTE
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 181/1204
232/1256 E8/4E8 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS REFERENCE IAS
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, KNOTS
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 57/1081

Revised 12 May 1999 5-91

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

233/1257 E9/4E9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS REFERENCE MACH NUMBER

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15- 1.024 MACH NUMBER (MSB)
14- 0.512 MACH NUMBER
13- 0.256 MACH NUMBER
12- 0.128 MACH NUMBER
11- 0.064 MACH NUMBER
10- 0.032 MACH NUMBER
9- 0.016 MACH NUMBER
8- 0.008 MACH NUMBER
7- 0.004 MACH NUMBER
6- 0.002 MACH NUMBER
5- 0.001 MACH NUMBER
4- 0.0005 MACH NUMBER
3- 0.00025 MACH NUMBER
2- 0.000125 MACH NUMBER
1- 0.0000625 MACH NUMBER
0- 0.00003125 MACH NUMBER
234/1258 EA/4EA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY FCS DIAGNOSTICS (256 LOCATIONS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 256 MPRAM LOCATIONS WILL BE RESERVED FOR THIS
489/1513 1E9/5E9 NO. 2 LABEL. TO READ OR WRITE DATA, AN OFFSET MUST BE
USED. AN OFFSET VALUE OF 0 TO 255 MUST BE ADDED
TO THE BASE ADDRESS TO ADDRESS THE CORRECT
BYTE. THE ORDER OF DATA INPUT INTO MPRAM IS DE-
TERMINED BY AN FCS CSDB BYTE. THIS BYTE WILL
HAVE AN INITIAL OFFSET, AND THE REMAINING BYTES
(2-7) WILL BE STORED SEQUENTIALLY FROM THAT
POINT.
THE DATA WILL BE CONVERTED FROM ASCII TO A
FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE CHARACTER
IN THE CHARACTER GENERATOR PROM. THE ASCII
DATA WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED FROM IT. THE DATA
WILL BE ROTATED 2 BITS TO THE LEFT (WITH TRAILING
0’S) AND THEN POSITIONED AS SHOWN BELOW.
15-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5- COLOR BIT BITS: 5 4
4- COLOR BIT 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
3-0- PADS = 0
490/1514 1EA/5EA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AIR DATA COMPUTER ALTITUDE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- PRESSURE ALTITUDE VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- BARO ALTITUDE VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- STRUT SWITCH GROUND = 1
11- RESERVED SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-92

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

491/1515 1EB/5EB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC PRESSURE ALTITUDE (FEET)

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT (BIASED +24576 FEET)
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 227/1251
492/1516 1EC/5EC DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET)
PROCESSOR 15- 80 000 FEET
NO. 1 14- 40 000 FEET
13- 20 000 FEET
12- 10 000 FEET
11- 8 000 FEET
10- 4 000 FEET
9- 2 000 FEET
8- 1 000 FEET
7-0- NOT DEFINED
493/1517 1ED/5ED DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC ALTITUDE (BCD FEET)
PROCESSOR 15- 800 FEET
NO. 1 14- 400 FEET
13- 200 FEET
12- 100 FEET
11- 80 FEET
10- 40 FEET
9- 20 FEET
8- 10 FEET
7- 8 FEET
6- 4 FEET
5- 2 FEET
4- 1 FOOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
494/1518 1EE/5EE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC BARO ALTITUDE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT (BIASED +24576 FEET)
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 227/1251
495/1519 1EF/5EF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VERTICAL SPEED/IAS STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- VERT SPEED VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- IAS VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- ADC VALID = 1
11- PAD = 0
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
496/1520 1F0/5F0 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VERTICAL SPEED
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, FEET/MINUTE
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 231/1255
497/1521 1F1/5F1 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC INDICATED AIRSPEED
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, KNOTS
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 232/1256

Revised 12 May 1999 5-93

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

498/1522 1F2/5F2 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC IAS (BCD)

PROCESSOR 15- 8000 KNOTS (MSB)
NO. 1 14- 4000 KNOTS
13- 2000 KNOTS
12- 1000 KNOTS
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3- 8 KNOTS
2- 4 KNOTS
1- 2 KNOTS
0- 1 KNOT
499/1523 1F3/5F3 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS)/SPARE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- TAS VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- SPARE VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- STRUT SWITCH GROUND = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
500/1524 1F4/5F4 DIGITAL I/O ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (TAS) (KNOTS)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15- 1024 KNOTS
14- 512 KNOTS
13- 256 KNOTS
12- 128 KNOTS
11- 64 KNOTS
10- 32 KNOTS
9- 16 KNOTS
8- 8 KNOTS
7- 4 KNOTS
6- 2 KNOTS
5- 1 KNOT
4- 0.5 KNOT
3- 0.25 KNOT
2- 0.125 KNOT
1- 0.0625 KNOT
0- 0.03125 KNOT
501/1525 1F5/5F5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TRUE AIRSPEED (BCD)
PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 498/1522
NO. 1
502/1526 1F6/5F6 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC SPARE
PROCESSOR 15-0- SPARES
NO. 1

Revised 12 May 1999 5-94

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

503/1527 1F7/5F7 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MACH STATUS

PROCESSOR 15- MACH DISPLAY VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- MACH TRUE VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- MACH DISPLAY TRUE = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
504/1528 1F8/5F8 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MACH NUMBER (DISPLAY)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT
NO. 1 15- 1.024 MACH
14- 0.512 MACH
13- 0.256 MACH
12- 0.128 MACH
11- 0.064 MACH
10- 0.032 MACH
9- 0.016 MACH
8- 0.008 MACH
7- 0.004 MACH
6- 0.002 MACH
5- 0.001 MACH
4- 0.0005 MACH
3- 0.00025 MACH
2- 0.000125 MACH
1- 0.0000625 MACH
0- 0.00003125 MACH
505/1529 1F9/5F9 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MACH NUMBER (TRUE)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT MACH NUMBER
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 504/1528
506/1530 1FA/5FA DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VS/IAS BUG STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- VS BUG VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- IAS BUG VALID = 1
13- RESERVED VS HOLD = 1
12- RESERVED IAS HOLD = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
507/1531 1FB/5FB DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC VERTICAL SPEED BUG
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, FEET/MINUTE
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 496/1520
508/1532 1FC/5FC DIGITAL I/O ADC IAS BUG
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, KNOTS
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 232/1256

Revised 12 May 1999 5-95

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

509/1533 1FD/5FD DIGITAL I/O ADC SAT/VMO/MMO STATUS

PROCESSOR 15- STATIC AIR TEMP VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- VMO/MMO VALID = 1
13- OVERSPEED WARNING ON = 1
12- OVERSPEED TEST ON = 1
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
510/1534 1FE/5FE DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC STATIC AIR TEMP (SAT)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES CELSIUS
NO. 1 15- 512 DEGREES CELSIUS (MSB)
14- 256 DEGREES CELSIUS
13- 128 DEGREES CELSIUS
12- 64 DEGREES CELSIUS
11- 32 DEGREES CELSIUS
10- 16 DEGREES CELSIUS
9- 8 DEGREES CELSIUS
8- 4 DEGREES CELSIUS
7- 2 DEGREES CELSIUS
6- 1 DEGREE CELSIUS
5- 0.5 DEGREE CELSIUS
4- 0.25 DEGREE CELSIUS
3- 0.125 DEGREE CELSIUS
2- 0.0625 DEGREE CELSIUS
1- 0.03125 DEGREE CELSIUS
0- 0.015625 DEGREE CELSIUS
511/1535 1FF/5FF DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC MAX ALLOWABLE AIRSPEED (VMO/MMO)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT KNOTS
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 232/1256
512/1536 200/600 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TAT/PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE STATUS
PROCESSOR 15- TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE VALID = 1
NO. 1 14- PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE VALID = 1
13- PAD = 0
12- RESERVED
11- SOURCE IDENT
10- TEST ON = 1
9- SOURCE IDENT
8- SOURCE IDENT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
513/1537 201/601 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC TOTAL AIR TEMP (TAT)
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES CELSIUS
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 510/1534
514/1538 202/602 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC PRESELECTOR ALTITUDE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, FEET
NO. 1 15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 494/1518
515/1539 203/603 ANALOG I/O GENERAL GYRO PITCH ANGLE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
516/1540 204/604 ANALOG I/O GENERAL GYRO ROLL ANGLE
PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231

Revised 12 May 1999 5-96

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

517/1541 205/605 ANALOG I/O GENERAL GYRO HEADING ANGLE

PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS LOCATION 207/1231
518/1542 206/606 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
519/1543 207/607 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DCP DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 3 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 3
7-0- NOT DEFINED
520/1544 208/608 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
521/1545 209/609 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 4 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
522/1546 20A/60A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL DME DIAGNOSTICS CHANNEL 1
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 5 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 5
7-0- NOT DEFINED
523/1547 20B/60B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
524/1548 20C/60C DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 4 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
525/1549 20D/60D DIGITAL I/O GENERAL ADC DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 5 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 5
7-0- NOT DEFINED
526/1550 20E/60E DIGITAL I/O GENERAL NAV DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
527/1551 20F/60F DIGITAL I/O GENERAL NAV DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 4 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3

Revised 12 May 1999 5-97

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

528/1552 210/610 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL NAV DIAGNOSTICS

PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 5 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 5
7-0- NOT DEFINED
529/1553 211/621 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
530/1554 212/612 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 4 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
531/1555 213/613 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL VNAV DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 5 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 5
7-0- NOT DEFINED
532/1556 214/614 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
533/1557 215/615 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 4 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
534/1558 216/616 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 6 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 6
7- BYTE 5 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 5
535/1559 217/617 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL FCS DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 7 (MSB)
NO. 1 14-8- BYTE 7
7-0- NOT DEFINED
536/1560 218/618 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 2 (MSB)
NO. 2 14-8- BYTE 2
7- BYTE 1 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 1
537/1561 219/619 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 4 (MSB)
NO. 2 14-8- BYTE 4
7- BYTE 3 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 3
538/1562 21A/61A DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS
PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 6 (MSB)
NO. 2 14-8- BYTE 6
7- BYTE 5 (MSB)
6-0- BYTE 5

Revised 12 May 1999 5-98

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

539/1563 21B/61B DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHRS DIAGNOSTICS

PROCESSOR 15- BYTE 7 (MSB)
NO. 2 14-8- BYTE 7
7-0- NOT DEFINED
540/1564 21C/61C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN WIND DIRECTION
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 6-WIRE LABEL 70 HEX, BITS 31-20 WIND ANGLE
NO. 2 AND DIGITAL TRUE FROM WHICH THE WIND IS BLOWING. BINARY
I/O NO. 1 ANGULAR FORMAT, DEGREES. MAGVAR CORRECTED IF
PROCESSOR LRN REF IS MAG. WIND WITHOUT AIRPLANE HEADING.
15- 180 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2-0- NOT DEFINED
541/1564 21D/61D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN CROSSTRACK DEVN
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL C0 HEX, BITS 28-19
NO. 2 (NMI), RIGHT/LEFT OF COURSE INFORMATION IS LO-
CATED IN LOCATION 022/1046
15- 256 NMI
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3- 0.0625 NMI
2- 0.03125 NMI
1- 0.015625 NMI
0- 0.0078125 NMI

Revised 12 May 1999 5-99

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

542/1566 21E/61E ANALOG I/O GENERAL LRN VERTICAL DEVN (DOTS)

PROCESSOR PROCESSED LRN 6-WIRE LABEL F2 HEX, BITS 28-19
OR DIGITAL 15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
I/O PROC- 14- 4 DOTS
ESSOR NO. 2 13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED
543/1567 21F/61F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED MAPS TEXT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15- COLOR BITS: 15 14
NO. 2 14- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0

Revised 12 May 1999 5-100

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

544/1568 220/620 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PLAN MODE (-003 STATUS)

PROCESSOR 15- 1 = REMOTE SITE RCV AND VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- PAD = 0
10- COLOR BITS: 10 9
9- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
8- SYMBOL
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
BITS: 8 7 6 5 4 SYMBOL
0 0 0 0 0 WAYPOINT
0 0 0 0 1 VOR
0 0 0 1 0 AIRPORT
0 0 0 1 1 NDB
0 0 1 0 0 ALTITUDE INTERCEPT
0 0 1 0 1 NO SYMBOL
0 0 1 1 0 VORTAC
0 0 1 1 1 FAN MARKER
0 1 0 0 0 INTERSECTION
0 1 0 0 1 AIRPORT 2
0 1 0 1 0 AIRCRAFT
0 1 0 1 1 AIRCRAFT CARRIER
0 1 1 0 0 SUBMARINE
0 1 1 0 1 DESTROYER
0 1 1 1 0 RADAR SITE
0 1 1 1 1 TANK
1 0 0 0 0 UNDEFINED
3-0- NOT DEFINED
545/1569 221/621 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PLAN MODE TEXT (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR THE DATA WILL BE CONVERTED FROM ASCII TO A
556/1581 22C/62C FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE CHARACTER
IN THE CHARACTER GENERATOR PROM. THE ASCII
DATA WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED FROM IT. THE DATA
WILL BE ROTATED 2 BITS TO THE LEFT (WITH TRAILING
0’S) AND THEN POSITIONED AS SHOWN BELOW.
15-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0
557/1582 22D/62D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR UP TO 14 POINTS CAN BE PLOTTED
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568

Revised 12 May 1999 5-101

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

558/1583 22E/62E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FROM AIRCRAFT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN MODE) TO THE POINT. 2’S
NO. 2 COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES. IF NUMBER IS POSI-
TIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST OF THE AIRCRAFT.
NOTE THAT IF DISTANCE IS GREATER THAN 600 NMI,
POINT IS FLAGGED AS INVALID SO DISPLAY PROCES-
SOR WILL NOT HAVE TO DETERMINE IF IT IS ON-
SCREEN. ALL 16 BITS ARE USED FOR PLOTTING.
15- (-1024) NMI
14- 512 NMI
13- 256 NMI
12- 128 NMI
11- 64 NMI
10- 32 NMI
9- 16 NMI
8- 8 NMI
7- 4 NMI
6- 2 NMI
5- 1 NMI
4- 0.5 NMI
3- 0.25 NMI
2- 0.125 NMI
1- 0.0625 NMI
0- 0.03125 NMI
559/1584 22F/62F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FROM AIRCRAFT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (OR TUBE CENTER IN PLAN MODE) TO THE POINT. 2’S
NO. 2 COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.IF NUMBER IS POSI-
TIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
560/1585 230/630 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR THE DATA WILL BE CONVERTED FROM ASCII TO A
571/1596 23B/63B FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE CHARACTER
IN THE CHARACTER GENERATOR PROM. THE ASCII
DATA WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED FROM IT. THE DATA
WILL BE ROTATED 2 BITS TO THE LEFT (WITH TRAILING
0’S), AND THEN POSITIONED AS SHOWN BELOW.
15-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0
572/1597 23C/63C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
573/1598 23D/63D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583

Revised 12 May 1999 5-102

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

574/1599 23E/63E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
575/1600 23F/63F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
586/1611 24A/64A
587/1612 24B/64B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
588/1613 24C/64C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
589/1614 24C/64C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
590/1615 24D/64D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
601/1626 25A/65A NO. 2
602/1626 25A/65A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
603/1627 25B/65B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
604/1628 25C/65C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
605/1629 25D/65D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
616/1640 268/668 NO. 2
617/1641 269/669 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
618/1642 26A/66A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583

Revised 12 May 1999 5-103

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

619/1643 26B/66B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
620/1644 26C/66C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
631/1655 277/677 NO. 2
632/1656 278/678 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
633/1657 279/679 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
634/1658 27A/67A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
635/1659 27B/67B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
646/1670 286/686 NO. 2
647/1671 287/687 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
648/1672 288/688 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
649/1673 289/689 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
650/1674 28A/68A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
661/1685 295/695 NO. 2
662/1686 296/696 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
663/1687 297/697 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583

Revised 12 May 1999 5-104

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

664/1688 298/698 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
665/1689 299/699 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
676/1700 2A4/6A4 NO. 2
677/1701 2A5/6A5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
678/1702 2A6/6A6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
679/1703 2A7/6A7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
680/1704 2A8/6A8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
691/1715 2B3/6B3 NO. 2
692/1716 2B4/6B4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
693/1717 2B5/6B5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
694/1718 2B6/6B6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 9 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
695/1719 2B7/6B7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 9 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
706/1730 2C2/6C2 NO. 2
707/1731 2C3/6C3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
708/1732 2C4/6C4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583

Revised 12 May 1999 5-105

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

709/1733 2C5/6C5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 10 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
710/1734 2C6/6C6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 10 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
721/1745 2D1/6D1 NO. 2
722/1746 2D2/6D2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
723/1747 2D3/6D3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
724/1748 2D4/6D4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 11 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
725/1749 2D5/6D5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 11 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
736/1760 2E0/6E0 NO. 2
737/1761 2E1/6E1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
738/1762 2E2/6E2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
739/1763 2E3/6E3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 12 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
740/1764 2E4/6E4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 12 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
751/1775 2EF/6EF NO. 2
752/1776 2F0/6F0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT MAP INFORMATION FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 544/1568
NO. 2
753/1777 2F1/6F1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583

Revised 12 May 1999 5-106

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

754/1778 2F2/6F2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FOR ITEM 13 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE AIRCRAFT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
755/1779 2F3/6F3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY IDENT FOR ITEM 13 (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 560/1585
766/1790 2FE/6FE NO. 2
767/1791 2FF/6FF DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY A/C SYMBOL POSITION IN PLAN MODE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR IF DISTANCE IS GREATER THAN 600 NMI, THEN THE
NO. 2 POINT SHOULD BE FLAGGED AS INVALID SO AIRCRAFT
IS NOT PLOTTED.
15- 1 = VALID
14-11- PADS = 0
10- COLOR BITS: 10 9
9- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
8- SYMBOL (DEFINED IN DEC LOCATION 544/1568)
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
3-0- PADS = 0
768/1792 300/700 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA X FROM TUBE CENTER TO A/C (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE EAST
OF THE TUBE CENTER.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
769/1793 301/701 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DELTA Y FROM TUBE CENTER TO A/C (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 IF NUMBER IS POSITIVE, IT IS PLOTTED TO THE NORTH
OF THE TUBE CENTER.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
770/1794 302/702 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “TO’ WAYPOINT IDENT (12 LOCATIONS) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR THE DATA WILL BE CONVERTED FROM ASCII TO A
781/1805 30D/70D NO. 2 FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE CHARACTER
IN THE CHARACTER GENERATOR PROM. THE ASCII
DATA WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED FROM IT. THE DATA
WILL BE ROTATED 2 BITS TO THE LEFT (WITH TRAILING
0’S), AND THEN POSITIONED AS SHOWN BELOW.
15- 1 = ROTATE IN PROGRESS, DON’T PLOT DATA.
14-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0

Revised 12 May 1999 5-107

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

782/1806 30E/70E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR IF WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE AND VALID
NO. 2 ON HIGH-SPEED 429 BUS, IT WILL BE PLACED HERE.
THE FORMAT WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE ABOVE EX-
TENDED ITEMS. THE FIRST POINT WILL BE PLOTTED
USING DISTANCE TO GO AND BEARING TO WAYPOINT.
THE CRS LINE INTO FIRST WAYPOINT WILL BE PLOT-
TED USING DESIRED TRACK. THE SECOND WAYPOINT
WILL BE PLOTTED IN REFERENCE TO THE FIRST WAY-
POINT. THE THIRD WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS GIVEN
IN RELATION TO THE SECOND WAYPOINT. IF INVALID
OR DISTANCE IS GREATER THAN 600 NMI, THAT POINT
IS FLAGGED AND PLOTTING IS STOPPED AT PREVIOUS
POINT.
15- 1 = 429 WAYPOINT VALID (CRS VALID)
14- 1 = POINT ON SCREEN (DIST VALID)
13- 1 = DRAW INBOUND LINE
12-11- PADS = 0
10- COLOR BITS: 10 9
9- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
8- SYMBOL
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
3-0- NOT DEFINED
783/1807 30F/70F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
784/1808 310/710 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
785/1809 311/711 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 0 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS)
796/1820 31C/71C NO. 2 THE DATA WILL BE CONVERTED FROM ASCII TO A
FORM USED TO ADDRESS DIRECTLY THE CHARACTER
IN THE CHARACTER GENERATOR PROM. THE ASCII
DATA WILL HAVE 20H SUBTRACTED FROM IT. THE DATA
WILL BE ROTATED 2 BITS TO THE LEFT (WITH TRAILING
0’S), AND THEN POSITIONED AS SHOWN BELOW.
15-12- PADS = 0
11- CHARACTER (MSB)
10- CHARACTER
9- CHARACTER
8- CHARACTER
7- CHARACTER
6- CHARACTER
5-0- PADS = 0
797/1821 31D/71D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2

Revised 12 May 1999 5-108

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

798/1822 31E/71E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
799/1823 31F/71F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
800/1824 320/720 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 1 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS)
811/1835 32B/72B NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
812/1836 32C/72C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2
813/1837 32D/72D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
814/1838 32E/72E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
815/1839 32F/72F DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 2 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS)
826/1850 33A/73A NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
827/1851 33B/73B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2
828/1852 33C/73C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
829/1853 33D/73D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
830/1854 33E/73E DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 3 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS)
841/1865 349/749 NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
842/1866 34A/74A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2
843/1867 34B/74B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
844/1868 34C/74C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
845/1869 34D/74D DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 4 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS).
856/1880 358/758 NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
857/1881 359/759 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2

Revised 12 May 1999 5-109

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

858/1882 35A/75A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
859/1883 35B/75B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
860/1884 35C/75C DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 5 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS).
871/1895 367/767 NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
872/1896 368/768 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2
873/1897 369/769 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
874/1898 36A/76A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
875/1899 36B/76B DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 6 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS).
886/1910 376/776 NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
887/1911 377/777 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2
888/1912 378/778 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
889/1913 379/779 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
890/1914 37A/77A DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 7 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS).
901/1925 385/785 NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
902/1926 386/786 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 782/1806
NO. 2
903/1927 387/787 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 783/1807
904/1928 388/788 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 784/1808
905/1929 389/789 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY EXT DATA WAYPOINT IDENT FOR ITEM 8 (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR (12 LOCATIONS).
916/1940 394/794 NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809

Revised 12 May 1999 5-110

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

917/1941 395/795 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM’ EXTENDED DATA WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR IF WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE AND VALID
NO. 2 ON HIGH-SPEED 429 BUS, IT WILL BE PLACED HERE.
THE FORMAT WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE ABOVE EX-
TENDED ITEMS. THE FIRST POINT WILL BE PLOTTED
USING DISTANCE TO GO AND BEARING TO WAYPOINT.
THE CRS LINE INTO FIRST WAYPOINT WILL BE PLOT-
TED USING DESIRED TRACK. THE SECOND WAYPOINT
WILL BE PLOTTED IN REFERENCE TO THE FIRST WAY-
POINT. THE THIRD WAYPOINT INFORMATION IS GIVEN
IN RELATION TO THE SECOND WAYPOINT. IF INVALID
OR DISTANCE IS GREATER THAN 600 NMI, THAT POINT
IS FLAGGED AND PLOTTING IS STOPPED AT PREVIOUS
POINT.
15- 1 = 429 WAYPOINT RECEIVED AND VALID
14- 1 = POINT ON SCREEN, LINE DRAWN
13-11- PADS = 0
10- COLOR BITS: 10 9
9- COLOR 0 0 GREEN
0 1 YELLOW
1 0 CYAN
1 1 RED
8- SYMBOL (DEFINED IN DEC LOCATION 544/1568)
7- SYMBOL
6- SYMBOL
5- SYMBOL
4- SYMBOL
3-0- NOT DEFINED
918/1942 396/796 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM’ EXT DATA WAYPOINT RANGE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 558/1583
919/1943 397/797 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM’ EXT DATA WAYPOINT ANGLE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES.
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
920/1944 398/798 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY “FROM’ EXT DATA WPT IDENT (12 LOC) (-003 STATUS)
THRU THRU PROCESSOR PROCESSOR THE TEXT PLOTTED NEXT TO “FROM’ WAYPOINT CAN
931/1955 3A3/7A3 NO. 2 BE IDENT OR UP TO 12 CHARACTERS OF TEXT.
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 785/1809
932/1956 3A4/7A4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 07 HEX
NO. 2 15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5-0- NOT DEFINED
933/1957 3A5/7A5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 1E HEX
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231

Revised 12 May 1999 5-111

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

934/1958 3A6/7A6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS GLIDEPATH ANGLE DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 56 HEX
NO. 2 15- 8 DOTS (MSB)
14- 4 DOTS
13- 2 DOTS
12- 1 DOT
11- 0.5 DOT
10- 0.25 DOT
9- 0.125 DOT
8- 0.0625 DOT
7- 0.03125 DOT
6- 0.015625 DOT
5- 0.0078125 DOT
4- 0.00390625 DOT
3- 0.001953125 DOT
2- 0.0009765625 DOT
1-0- NOT DEFINED
935/1959 3A7/7A7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS CHANNEL SELECTION (BCD) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 78 HEX
NO. 2 15- 14- 400
13- 200
12- 100
11- 80
10- 40
9- 20
8- 10
7- 8
6- 4
5- 2
4- 1
3-0- PADS = 0
936/1960 3A8/7A8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 7E HEX
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
937/1961 3A9/7A9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS FRONT AZIMUTH COMPENSATED DEV (-003
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STATUS)
NO. 2 MLS 429 LABEL 96 HEX
15-0- (DOTS) SAME AS DEC LOCATION 934/1958
938/1962 3AA/7AA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS AZIMUTH ANGLE (DEGREES) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 9E HEX
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231

Revised 12 May 1999 5-112

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

939/1963 3AB/7AB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS DME FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL B8 HEX
NO. 2 15- DISPLAY = 1 ENABLE, = 0 DISABLE
14- NAV MODE BITS: 14 13
13- NAV MODE 0 0 VOR
0 1 ILS
1 0 MLS
1 1 SPARE
12- DME MODE BITS: 12 11 10
11- DME MODE 0 0 0 STANDBY
10- DME MODE 0 0 1 DIRECTED FREQUENCY 1
0 1 0 DIRECTED FREQUENCY 2
0 1 1 DIRECTED FREQUENCY 3
1 0 0 HOLD FREQUENCY 1
1 0 1 HOLD FREQUENCY 2
1 1 0 FREE SCAN (NOT USED)
1 1 1 SPARE
9- NOT DEFINED
8- IDENT = 1 AUDIO ON, = 0 AUDIO OFF
7-0- NOT DEFINED
940/1964 3AC/7AC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS DME FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL B8 HEX
NO. 2 15-
14- 40
13- 20
12- 10
11- 8
10- 4
9- 2
8- 1
7- 0.8
6- 0.4
5- 0.2
4- 0.1
3- 0.08
2- 0.04
1- 0.02
0- 0.01
941/1965 3AD/7AD ANALOG I/O IAS SCALE SELECTION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR 15- COMBINED AIR DATA FLAG
14- 1 = 50-DEGREE UP CHEVRON IN VIEW
13- 1 = 35-DEGREE DOWN CHEVRON IN VIEW
12-10- PADS = 0
9- 1 = DIGITAL HEADING IN VIEW (COMPOSITE)
8- 1 = DIGITAL HEADING IN VIEW (COMPOSITE)
7- IAS REFERENCE (DIGITAL) IN VIEW
6- IAS FLAG IN VIEW
5- HIGH-SPEED IAS SCALE SELECT
4- LOW-SPEED IAS SCALE SELECT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-113

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

942/1966 3AE/7AE IAS SCALE SELECTION (-003 STATUS)

15- PAD = 0
14- EXCESSIVE GLIDESLOPE DEVN UP IN VIEW
13- EXCESSIVE GLIDESLOPE DEVN DOWN IN VIEW
12- EXCESSIVE LOCALIZER DEVN RIGHT IN VIEW
11- EXCESSIVE LOCALIZER DEVN LEFT IN VIEW
10- 1 = IAS MASTER WARN
9- 1 = LAC-80 FLAG IN VIEW
8- 1 = MACH NUMBER IN VIEW
7- 1 = IAS REFERENCE BUG IN VIEW
6- 1 = EXCESSIVE IAS DEVN SPEED UP
5- 1 = EXCESSIVE IAS DEVN SLOW DOWN
4- 1 = IAS WARN
3-0- NOT DEFINED
943/1967 3AF/7AF IAS POINTER DISPLACEMENT (-003 STATUS)
(VGU’S)
15- (-2048) VGU (MSB)
14- 1024 VGU
13- 512 VGU
12- 256 VGU
11- 128 VGU
10- 64 VGU
9- 32 VGU
8- 16 VGU
7- 8 VGU
6- 4 VGU
5- 2 VGU
4- 1 VGU
3-0- NOT DEFINED
944/1968 3B0/7B0 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT (-003 STATUS)
BOTTOM OF VMO LINE (VGU’S)
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 943/1967
945/1969 3B1/7B1 VMO POINTER DISPLACEMENT (-003 STATUS)
TOP OF VMO LINE (VGU’S)
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 943/1967
946/1970 3B2/7B2 IAS REFERENCE POINTER PLACEMENT (-003 STATUS)
(VGU’S)
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 943/1967
947/1971 3B3/7B3 TREND LONGITUDINAL ACCEL DATA (DIGITAL) (-003 STATUS)
VECTOR (G’S)
15- (-20.48) G (MSB)
14- 10.24 G
13- 5.12 G
12- 2.56 G
11- 1.28 G
10- 0.64 G
9- 0.32 G
8- 0.16 G
7- 0.08 G
6- 0.04 G
5- 0.02 G
4- 0.01 G
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-114

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

948/1972 3B4/7B4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY CALCULATED DISCRETES, AMD STRAPS (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR # DETERMINED BY STRAPS 11 AND 36
NO. 2 15- 0 = 6-WIRE, 1 = 429 ACTIVE
14- NOT DEFINED
13- 0 = TRUE, 1 = MAG
12- HDG# BITS: 12 11
11- HDG# 0 0 =4
0 1 =1
1 0 =2
1 1 =3
10- ATT# BITS: 10 9
9- ATT# 0 0 =4
0 1 =1
1 0 =2
1 1 =3
8- ANNUN X BITS: 8 7
7- ANNUN X 0 0 =4
0 1 =1
1 0 =2
1 1 =3
6- LRN ANNUN
5- LRN ANNUN
4- LRN ANNUN
3-0- NOT DEFINED
949/1973 3B5/7B5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL MLS FLAGS
PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL VALID MONITOR
NO. 2 15- BACK AZIMUTH DEVIATION 07 HEX VALID = 1
14- GLIDEPATH ANGLE 1E HEX VALID = 1
13- GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION 3E HEX VALID = 1
12- GLIDEPATH ANGLE DEVIATION 56 HEX VALID = 1
11- MLS CHANNEL 78 HEX VALID = 1
10- BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE 7E HEX VALID = 1
9- FRONT AZIMUTH DEVIATION 96 HEX VALID = 1
8- AZIMUTH 9E HEX VALID = 1
7- DME FREQUENCY DISCRETE B8 HEX VALID = 1
6- LOCALIZER DEVIATION DE HEX VALID = 1
5-0- NOT DEFINED
950/1974 3B6/7B6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSED LRN 429 LABEL 95 HEX, TCN 429 LABEL 81
NO. 2 HEX, RNAV LOW-SPEED 429 LABEL 41 HEX (HIGH 3 BITS)
15- VALID = 0, IF 429 DISTANCE, BEARING, AND DESIRED
TRACK ARE VALID
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- NOT DEFINED
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- 4096 NMI (MSB)
6- 2048 NMI
5- 1024 NMI
4- 512 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-115

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

951/1975 3B7/7B7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR PROCESSED LRN 429 LABEL 95 HEX, TCN 429 LABEL 81
NO. 2 HEX, RNAV LOW-SPEED 429 LABEL 41 HEX (LOW 12 BITS)
15- 256 NMI (MSB)
14- 128 NMI
13- 64 NMI
12- 32 NMI
11- 16 NMI
10- 8 NMI
9- 4 NMI
8- 2 NMI
7- 1 NMI
6- 0.5 NMI
5- 0.25 NMI
4- 0.125 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
952/1976 3B8/7B8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 BEARING TO WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL B2 HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES.
MAGVAR CORRECTED IF LRN MAG REFERENCED
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 105/1129
953/1977 3B9/7B9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 MAGNETIC VARIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL E6 HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT DEGREES, ADD MAGVAR TO THE
DATA TO BE CORRECTED, WEST VARIATION = POSITIVE
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
954/1978 3BA/7BA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 95 HEX BCD, NAUTICAL MILES
NO. 2 15- 80 NMI
14- 40 NMI
13- 20 NMI
12- 10 NMI
11- 8 NMI
10- 4 NMI
9- 2 NMI
8- 1 NMI
7- 0.8 NMI
6- 0.4 NMI
5- 0.2 NMI
4- 0.1 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED
955/1979 3BB/7BB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DISTANCE TO “TO’ WAYPOINT (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 95 HEX BCD, NAUTICAL MILES
NO. 2
15- STATUS BITS: 15 14
14- STATUS 1 1 VALID
13- 0
12- PAD = 0
11- 8000 NMI
10- 4000 NMI
9- 2000 NMI
8- 1000 NMI
7- 800 NMI
6- 400 NMI
5- 200 NMI
4- 100 NMI
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-116

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

956/1980 3BC/7BC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 BANK COMMAND (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 8A HEX 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
NO. 2 15- 180.0 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- BANK COMMAND VALID = 1
2- BANK COMMAND AVAILABLE = 1
1-0- NOT DEFINED
957/1981 3BD/7BD DIGITAL I/O ANALOG I/O LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR DOTS
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
958/1982 3BE/7BE DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 WIND DIRECTION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 73 HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
959/1983 3BF/7BF DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 WIND VELOCITY (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL B3 HEX BINARY KNOTS
NO. 2 15- VALID = 0, IF WIND DATA IS VALID
14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- 256 KNOTS
11- 128 KNOTS
10- 64 KNOTS
9- 32 KNOTS
8- 16 KNOTS
7- 8 KNOTS
6- 4 KNOTS
5- 2 KNOTS
4- 1 KNOT
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-117

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

960/1984 3C0/7C0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 CROSSTRACK DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 72 HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT NAUTICAL MILES.
POSITIVE = FLY RIGHT
15- (-1024) NMI
14- 512 NMI
13- 256 NMI
12- 128 NMI
11- 64 NMI
10- 32 NMI
9- 16 NMI
8- 8 NMI
7- 4 NMI
6- 2 NMI
5- 1 NMI
4- 0.5 NMI
3- 0.25 NMI
2- 0.125 NMI
1- 0.0625 NMI
0- 0.03125 NMI
961/1985 3C1/7C1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 VERTICAL DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL F2 HEX
NO. 2 DOTS
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 117/1141
962/1986 3C2/7C2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 TIME TO GO (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 55 HEX
NO. 2 (BCD) MINUTES
15- STATUS 1 = VALID
14- 400 MIN
13- 200 MIN
12- 100 MIN
11- 80 MIN
10- 40 MIN
9- 20 MIN
8- 10 MIN
7- 8 MIN
6- 4 MIN
5- 2 MIN
4- 1 MIN
3-0- NOT DEFINED
963/1987 3C3/7C3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 GROUND SPEED (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 53 HEX
NO. 2 (BCD) KNOTS
15- STATUS 1 = VALID
14- PAD = 0
13- PAD = 0
12- PAD = 0
11- 800 KNOTS
10- 400 KNOTS
9- 200 KNOTS
8- 100 KNOTS
7- 80 KNOTS
6- 40 KNOTS
5- 20 KNOTS
4- 10 KNOTS
3-0- NOT DEFINED

Revised 12 May 1999 5-118

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

964/1988 3C4/7C4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 GROUND SPEED (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 53 HEX
NO. 2 (BCD) KNOTS
15- 8 KNOTS
14- 4 KNOTS
13- 2 KNOTS
12- 1 KNOT
11- 0.8 KNOT
10- 0.4 KNOT
9- 0.2 KNOT
8- 0.1 KNOT
7-0- NOT DEFINED
965/1989 3C5/7C5 DIGITAL I/O GENERAL AHS 429 ACCELERATIONS (BODY AXIS) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR 15- ACCELERATION DATA VALID = 1
NO. 2 14- NOT DEFINED
13- NOT DEFINED
12- STRUT SWITCH, GROUND = 1
11- NOT DEFINED
10- NOT DEFINED
9- NOT DEFINED
8- NOT DEFINED
7- NOT DEFINED
6- NOT DEFINED
5- NOT DEFINED
4- AHS ATTITUDE BUS VALID = 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
966/1990 3C6/7C6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL 9B HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
15- 10 G (MSB) SIGN BIT
14- 5 G
13- 2.5 G
12- 1.25 G
11- 0.625 G
10- 0.3125 G
9- 0.15625 G
8- 0.078125 G
7- 0.0390625 G
6- 0.01953125 G
5- 0.009765625 G
4- 0.0048828125 G
3- 0.00244140625 G
2- 0.001220703125 G
1- 0.0006103525625 G
0- 0.00030517678125 G
967/1991 3C7/7C7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 LATERAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL 5B HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 966/1990
968/1992 3C8/7C8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 NORMAL ACCELERATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL DB HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, G’S
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 966/1990

Revised 12 May 1999 5-119

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

969/1993 3C9/7C9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 ATTITUDE TEST MODE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL 0B, 2B, 33, AB HEX
NO. 2 15- ATTITUDE VALID = 1
14- HEADING VALID = 1
13-0- NOT DEFINED
970/1994 3CA/7CA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 PITCH ATTITUDE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL 2B HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
971/1995 3CB/7CB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS 429 ROLL ATTITUDE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AHS 429 LABEL AB HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
972/1996 3CC/7CC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 MAGNETIC HEADING (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 33 HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
973/1997 3CD/7CD DIGITAL I/O GENERAL MLS 429 ILS DATA (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 3E, DE HEX
NO. 2 15- GLIDESLOPE VALID = 1 LABEL 3E HEX
14- LOCALIZER VALID = 1 LABEL DE HEX
13-0- NOT DEFINED
974/1998 3CE/7CE DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 3E HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DDM
GS DEVN 100 PERCENT (FULL SCALE = 0.175)
15- 0.8 DDM MSB
14- 0.4 DDM
13- 0.2 DDM
12- 0.1 DDM
11- 0.05 DDM
10- 0.025 DDM
9- 0.0125 DDM
8- 0.00625 DDM
7- 0.003125 DDM
6- 0.0015625 DDM
5- 0.00078125 DDM
4- 0.000390625 DDM
3-0- NOT DEFINED
975/1999 3CF/7CF DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 GLIDESLOPE DEVN (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL 3E HEX
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030

Revised 12 May 1999 5-120

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

976/2000 3D0/7D0 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL DE HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DDM
LOC DEVN 100 PERCENT (FULL SCALE = 0.175)
15- 0.4 DDM MSB
14- 0.2 DDM
13- 0.1 DDM
12- 0.05 DDM
11- 0.025 DDM
10- 0.0125 DDM
9- 0.00625 DDM
8- 0.003125 DDM
7- 0.0015625 DDM
6- 0.00078125 DDM
5- 0.000390625 DDM
4-0- NOT DEFINED
977/2001 3D1/7D1 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY MLS 429 LOCALIZER DEVIATION (DOTS) (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR MLS 429 LABEL DE HEX
NO. 2 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 006/1030
978/2002 3D2/7D2 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY ADF BEARING (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR ADF 429 LABEL 4E HEX
NO. 2 2’S COMPLEMENT, DEGREES
15- 180.0 DEGREES (MSB)
14- 90.0 DEGREES
13- 45.0 DEGREES
12- 22.5 DEGREES
11- 11.25 DEGREES
10- 5.625 DEGREES
9- 2.8125 DEGREES
8- 1.40625 DEGREES
7- 0.703125 DEGREE
6- 0.3515625 DEGREE
5- 0.17578125 DEGREE
4- 0.087890625 DEGREE
3- 0.0439453125 DEGREE
2- NOT DEFINED
1- NOT DEFINED
0- BEARING VALID = 1
979/2003 3D3/7D3 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY ADF FREQUENCY (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR ADF 429 LABEL 58 HEX
NO. 2 (BCD) KNOTS
15- STATUS 1 = VALID
14- 2000
13- 1000
12- 800
11- 400
10- 200
9- 100
8- 80
7- 40
6- 20
5- 10
4- 8
3- 4
2- 2
1- 1
0- 1 = 0.5, 0 = 0.0

Revised 12 May 1999 5-121

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

980/2004 3D4/7D4 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 13 HEX.
NO. 2 DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
981/2005 3D5/7D5 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 93 HEX.
NO. 2 DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
982/2006 3D6/7D6 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY TRUE HEADING FOR EXTENDED PAGES (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 33 HEX.
NO. 2 DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
983/2007 3D7/7D7 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DRIFT ANGLE (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 8B HEX.
NO. 2 DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
984/2008 3D8/7D8 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY DESIRED TRACK (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 32 HEX.
NO. 2 DEGREES
CORRECTED IF IN MAG MODE FOR EXTENDED PAGES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
985/2009 3D9/7D9 DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN 429 DESIRED TRACK (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL D3 HEX
NO. 2 DEGREES
15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
986/2010 3DA/7DA DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY LRN FLAGS (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN LABEL VALID FLAGS 15-NOT DEFINED
NO. 2 14-P.P. LATITUDE 13 HEX VALID = 1
13-DESIRED TRACK 32 HEX VALID = 1
12-TRUE HEADING 33 HEX VALID = 1
11-PITCH COMMAND 4A HEX VALID = 1
10-WPT LATITUDE 63 HEX VALID = 1
9-DRIFT ANGLE 8B HEX VALID = 1
8-P.P. LONGITUDE 93 HEX VALID = 1
7-DISTANCE “TO’ 95 HEX VALID = 1
6-BEARING “TO’ B2 HEX VALID = 1
5-TRACK ANGLE D3 HEX VALID = 1
4-WPT LONGITUDE E3 HEX VALID = 1
3-MAG VAR E6 HEX VALID = 1
2-VERTICAL DEV F2 HEX VALID = 1
1-NOT DEFINED
0-WPT HEADER 8C HEX VALID = 1

Revised 12 May 1999 5-122

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-6. DPU/MPU Multiport RAM (MPR) Locations With Descriptions.

DECIMAL HEX
LOCATION LOCATION
SOURCE DESTINATION DESCRIPTION
NO. 1 SIDE/ NO. 1 SIDE/
NO. 2 SIDE NO. 2 SIDE

987/2011 3DB/7DB DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY AHS FLAGS (-003 STATUS)

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR AHS LABEL VALID FLAGS
NO. 2 15-MAG HEADING 0B HEX VALID = 1 BUS MONITOR
14-TRUE HEADING 33 HEX VALID = 1 BUS MONITOR
13-PITCH 2B HEX VALID = 1 BUS MONITOR
12-LATERAL ACCEL 5B HEX VALID = 1 COMPOSITE
11-LONG ACCEL 9B HEX VALID = 1 COMPOSITE
10-ROLL AB HEX VALID = 1 BUS MONITOR
9-NORM ACCEL DB HEX VALID = 1 COMPOSITE
8-NOT DEFINED
7-MAG HEADING SSM VALID = 1
6-TRUE HEADING SSM VALID = 1
5-PITCH SSM VALID = 1
4-ROLL SSM VALID = 1
3-0- NOT DEFINED
988/2012 3DC/7DC DIGITAL I/O DISPLAY WIND DIRECTION (-003 STATUS)
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR LRN 429 LABEL 73 HEX
NO. 2 AND DIGITAL 15-0- SAME AS DEC LOCATION 207/1231
I/O PROCES-
SOR NO. 1
989/2013 3DD/7DD ANALOG I/O DISPLAY CROSS-SIDE ANNUNCIATIONS FOR ADI AND HSI (-003
PROCESSOR PROCESSOR STATUS)
15- 1 = PDATA ON ADI
14- 1 = XFR ON ADI
13- 1 = CDRV ON ADI
12- 1 = XADC ON ADI
11- 1 = XCTL ON ADI
10- = 0 SPARE
9- = 0 SPARE
8- = 0 SPARE
7- 1 = PDATA ON HSI
6- 1 = XFR ON HSI
5- 1 = CDRV ON HSI
4- 1 = XCTL ON HSI
3-0- NOT DEFINED 3-0- NOT DEFINED
990/2014 3DE/7DE RESERVED
THRU THRU
1023/2047 3FF/7FF

Revised 12 May 1999 5-123

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-7. MFD RAM Locations With Definitions.

DECIMAL LOCATION DEFINITION

000-239 The 240 characters last displayed on the MFD in PAGE, EMG, or RMT mode. (Upper 8 bits only).
240 (Note 1) X-position of joystick
241 (Note 1) Y-position of joystick
242 MFD MODES
11- Enter joystick position (active for 20 ms)
10- Not used
9- Not used
8- Radar
7- NAV
6- Remote
5- Page
4- Emergency
3-0 Not used
243 Remote Mode Joystick and Select
11- RMT 1
10- RMT 2
9- RMT 3
8- RMT 4
7- Joystick left
6- Joystick down
5- Joystick right
4- Joystick up 3-0 Not used
244 Remote Mode Selected Device
11-8 Not used
7- RMT 1
6- RMT 2
5- RMT 3
4- RMT 4
3-0 Not used
245 Selected Range When No Radar
HEX RANGE (NMI)
700 600
600 300
500 200
400 100
300 50
200 25
100 10
000 5
246 Menu Mode (RMT or NAV only)
11- Menu mode active
10-0 Not used
247 Selected NAV Sources
11- Not used
10- Not used
9- HDG
8- Not used
7- LRN 1
6- LRN 2
5- VOR 1
4- VOR 2
3-0 Not used

Revised 12 May 1999 5-124

maintenance 523-0773952

Table 5-7. MFD RAM Locations With Definitions.

DECIMAL LOCATION DEFINITION

248 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 1

Word 253 (HEX)
010 RD1 Register
020 MDE Register
030 See word 253
040 Lower RAM “1” Check Address
050 Lower EEPROM Address
060 Lower EEPROM Address
249 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 1
Word 253 (HEX)
010 RD2 Register
020 JOYSW Register
030 See word 253
040 Lower RAM “1” Check Address
050 Upper EEPROM Address
060 Upper EEPROM Address
250 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 1
Word 253 (HEX)
010 RD3 Register
020 PGESW Register
030 See word 253
040 Diagnostic Data
050 No Data
060 No Data
251 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 2, SELSW Register
252 (Note 2) MFD Internal Test 2, RDPSW Register
253 (Notes 2 and 3) MFD Internal Test 1 Mode Counter
HEX VALUE
010 RD Register Contents Displayed
020 MDE, JOYSW, PGESW Registers Contents Displayed
030 Joystick X- and Y-Position Data Displayed (240 and 241)
040 RAM and Diagnostic Data Displayed
050 EEPROM Addresses Displayed (Data out of MFD)
060 EEPROM Addresses Displayed (Data into MFD)
254 Not used
255 MFD Software REV Number
11-4 REV Number
3-0 Not used

Note 1: All words use upper 8 bits of MPR except these, which use all 12 bits.
Note 2: These words are valid only if the MFD is placed in self-test.
Note 3: The test mode counter is incremented by holding the top select button for longer than 5 seconds.

Revised 12 May 1999 5-125

maintenance 523-0773952

5.6 SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGR AMS

Refer to Figure 5-3 through Figure 5-8 for system block diagrams.

Figure 5-3. RAM Map

Figure 5-4. Control Interface

Revised 12 May 1999 5-126

maintenance 523-0773952

Figure 5-5. DPU to EFD (EADI and EHSI) Interface

Figure 5-6. MPU to DPU Interface

Revised 12 May 1999 5-127

maintenance 523-0773952

Figure 5-7. MPU to MFD Interface

Figure 5-8. Radar Interface

Revised 12 May 1999 5-128

523-0773953-003118
3rd Edition, 12 May 1999

EFIS-85B(3/13) and EFIS-86B(3/13)

Electronic Flight Instrument Systems

Service Bulletins and Service Information Letters

(Refer to latest edition/addendum of the General
Aviation Equipment Service Bulletin/Information
Letter Index 523-0766944 for up-to-date listing.)

SB/SIL
Number Unit Title Date
1-83R2 EFIS-85/86 Forced Air Cooling System Installation Jun 30/87
2-83 EFIS-85 Cross-Side Data Noise Problem Oct 15/83
3-83 EFIS-85 EFIS Interchangeability Oct 16/83
1-84 EFIS-86 Nameplate Correction Sep 11/84
1-87R1 EFIS-85/86 EFIS CRT maintenance Schedule and Brightness Measurements Dec 16/96
1-88 EFIS-86 Certification Applicability of the EFIS-86E( ) Aug 19/88
2-89R2 EFIS-85/86 Identification of EFIS System, Associated Installation Manual, May 31/90
and Pilot’s Guide.
1-90 EFIS-85/86 LAC-80 Lateral Accelerometer Installations June 22/90
1-93 EFIS-85/86 ARINC 429 LRN Input Port Speed Selection Feb 21/94
1-96 EFIS-85/86 Add GPS Approach Capability June 5/96
1-99 EFIS-85 Replacing EFD-85 Electronic Flight Display (CPN 622-6020-00X) Feb 19/99
with an EFD-85 Electronic Flight Display (CPN 622-6020-01X)
2-99 EFIS-85/86 Pro Line II EFIS and EGPWS Integration Mar 16/99

NOTICE: This title page replaces first revision title page dated 29 September 1993.